>!■  ••  •  - 


'-"i:.  •-  ■  .  r.  >.  >. 


■’!’v>’L>  '1  • 


I.  i.”L  '  »  k. 


‘Is 


•  /.'L'j,';- 

'  ■•  i.'i- 


'vN'-KS 


‘>>i’  - 

I  '  ?  i  i  )  !  *"'-')  i 


s-;- ' 


r' 


Division..  PJ.  5"  Q  O  Z 
Section.,  .C1i6 


No, 


«•»*»(*- 


GEAMMAE 


OF  THE  DIALECTS  OF 


VEENACUEAE  SYEIAC. 


ilonHon :  C.  J.  CLAY  and  SONS, 
CAMBBIDGE  UNIVEKSITY  PEESS  WAEEHOUSE, 
AVE  MAKIA  LANE. 

GLASGOW  :  203,  ARGYLL  STREET. 


LEIPZIG :  F.  A.  BROCKHAUS. 
NEW  YORK:  MACMILLAN  AND  CO. 


aEAMMAB 


OF  THE  DIALECTS  OF 

VERNACULAR  SYRIAC 


AS  SPOKEN  BY  THE  EASTERN  SYRIANS  OF 
KURDISTAN,  NORTH-WEST  PERSIA,  AND 
THE  PLAIN  OF  MOSUL 


WITH  NOTICES  OF  THE  VERNACULAR  OF  THE  JEWS  OF 
AZERBAIJAN  AND  OF  ZAKHU  NEAR  MOSUL 


BY 

y 

ARTHUR  JOHN  MACLEAN,  M.A,  F.R.G.S., 


DEAN  OF  ARGYLL  AND  THE  ISLES, 

SOMETIME  HEAD  OP  THE  ARCHBISHOP  OF  CANTERBURY’S  MISSION  TO  THE  EASTERN  SYRIANS. 


CAMBRIDGE : 

AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS. 

1895 


CamlJt’ilrgf 


FEINTED  BY  J.  AND  C.  F.  CLAY, 
AT  THE  UNIVEK8ITY  PEESS. 


CONTENTS. 


SECTION 

page 

— 

Introduction  ...... 

ix 

1. 

The  Letters.  Consonants 

2 

2. 

Final  letters 

4 

3. 

Aspirated  letters 

4 

4. 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  letters 

5 

5. 

Vowels  .... 

7 

6. 

Modification  of  vowel  sounds 

10 

7. 

Diphthongs 

11 

8. 

Accent  ....... 

13 

9. 

Signs  ....... 

15 

10. 

Pronouns.  Personal  .... 

16 

11. 

Affix  forms  .... 

18 

12. 

Demonstrative 

20 

13. 

Interrogative  .... 

22 

14. 

Relative  .... 

23 

15. 

Indefinite  .... 

24 

16. 

Substantives.  States  .... 

26 

17. 

Gender  .... 

34 

18. 

Number  .... 

39 

19. 

Irregular  and  double  plurals 

49 

20. 

With  pronominal  affixes  . 

54 

21. 

Adjectives.  Gender  .... 

57 

22. 

Number  .... 

59 

23. 

Position  .... 

59 

24. 

Comparison  .... 

61 

25. 

Miscellaneous  notes 

61 

26. 

Cardinal  Numerals 

64 

27. 

Ordinal  Numerals 

67 

28. 

Various  notes  on  Numerals  . 

69 

S.  GR. 


6 


VI 


CONTENTS. 


SECTION 

PAGE 

29.  Verbs. 

Substantive  Verb  ....... 

74 

30. 

Conjugations  ....... 

79 

31. 

First  Conjugation  ...... 

80 

32. 

Formation  of  tenses  ...... 

84 

33. 

Verb  used  negatively  ...... 

88 

34. 

Passive  ........ 

89 

35. 

Second  Conjugation,  first  division 

90 

36. 

,,  second  division  . 

92 

37. 

,,  third  division 

94 

38. 

Regular  Variations.  Verbs  with  initial  letter 

weak  ........ 

95 

39. 

Verbs  with  middle  letter  weak 

97 

40. 

,,  ... 

98 

41. 

,,  ... 

99 

42. 

Verbs  with  final  letter  weak 

99 

43 

,,  ... 

103 

44 

,,  ... 

103 

45 

Causative  Verbs  ....... 

106 

46. 

Irregular  Verbs,  1  Conj.  ..... 

117 

47. 

,,  2  Conj . 

131 

48. 

Verbal  noun  and  past  partici^ile  with  affixes 

134 

49. 

Present  participle  and  imperative  ,, 

134 

50. 

Preterite  ,, 

135 

51. 

Use  of  the  tenses.  Tenses  derived  from  present  part. 

140 

52. 

Second  present  ...... 

143 

53. 

Imperfect  ....... 

143 

54. 

Preterite  ....... 

143 

55. 

Perfect  ....... 

144 

56. 

Pluperfect  ....... 

145 

57. 

Verbal  noun  ....  .  . 

145 

58. 

Participles  ....... 

146 

59. 

Imperative  ....... 

147 

60. 

Conditional  Sentences  ...... 

148 

61. 

Temporal  clauses  ....... 

148 

62. 

Absolute  hypothetical  clauses  .... 

150 

63. 

Imjiersonal  verbs  ...... 

150 

64. 

Direct  object  of  the  verb  ..... 

153 

65. 

Agreement  ........ 

154 

66. 

Oratio  obliqua  ....... 

155 

67.  Adverbs 

156 

CONTENTS. 

Vll 

SECTION 

PAGE 

68. 

Prepositions.  Simple  .... 

169 

69. 

Compound  .... 

175 

70. 

With  affixes 

179 

71. 

After  verbs,  etc. 

• 

182 

72. 

Conjunctions  ...... 

185 

73. 

Interjections  ...... 

189 

74. 

Position  of  Words.  Emphasis.  Questions 

192 

75. 

Idiomatic  Phrases  ..... 

195 

76. 

Derivation.  Nouns  of  action  . 

215 

77. 

Agents  .... 

223 

78. 

Abstracts  .... 

236 

79. 

Diminutives  .... 

239 

80. 

Negatives  .... 

241 

81. 

Adjectives  .... 

241 

82. 

Foreign  terminations 

247 

83. 

Verbs  ..... 

251 

84. 

Pules  for  Aspiration  .... 

278 

85. 

Vowels  and  Consonants.  Relation  of  N.S.  to 

O.S.  and  of 

the  dialects  to  one  another.  Vowel  subtracted 

280 

86. 

Vowel  added 

281 

87. 

Pthaklia  and  Zqapa 

283 

88. 

Zlama  for  Pthakha  or  Zqapa 

286 

89. 

Pwasa  .... 

290 

90. 

Sound  of  Pwasa  . 

292 

91. 

Sound  of  Pthakha  and  Zqapa 

292 

92. 

Metathesis  .... 

292 

93. 

Pepetition  .... 

298 

94. 

Aspirate  added 

298 

95. 

Aspirate  removed 

300 

96. 

Alap  prosthetic 

308 

97. 

Beith  and  Pe  .  .  . 

309 

98. 

Carnal  silent 

310 

99. 

Carnal  and  Jamal 

311 

100. 

Jamal  ..... 

311 

101. 

Sound  of  aspirated  Carnal  . 

313 

102. 

Carnal  and  Zain  . 

313 

103. 

Dalath  silent 

313 

104. 

Dalath  and  Tau  . 

314 

105. 

Dalath  and  Teith 

• 

315 

106. 

Dalath  and  Beith  or  Zain  . 

316 

h  2 


Vlll 


CONTENTS. 


SECTION 

107. 

108. 
109. 

no. 

111. 

112. 

113. 

114. 

115. 

116. 

117. 

118. 

119. 

120. 
121. 
122. 

123. 

124. 

125. 

126. 


PAGE 


He  and  Klieith  .  .  .  .  .  .316 

He  silent  .......  317 

Wan  inserted;  Wan  and  Yudli  .  .  .  319 

Zain  and  Simkath  or  Sadhe,  etc.  .  .  321 

Kheith . 322 

Yudli  and  Alap;  Yudh  inserted  or  omitted.  323 

Chap  ........  324 

Liquids  interchanged ;  Lamadh  silent  .  .  327 

Mim  silent  .  .  .  .  .  .  .331 

Nun  silent  .  .  .  .  .  .  .331 

Sound  of  Nun  (a)  final,  (6)  before  Beith  and  Pe  332 

‘E . 332 

Qop  and  Kap  or  Chap  .  .  .  .  333 

Qop  and  Gamal  or  Kleith  ....  334 

Resh  silent,  and  Resh  pronounced  as  Dalath  334 

Shin  silent  .  .  .  .  .  .  .335 

Tau  and  Teith  .  .  .  .  .  .335 

Tau  and  Shin  or  Simkath;  Dalath  and  Zain  338 

Sound  of  Tau  ......  338 

Tau  silent  .......  339 


APPENDIX. 

I.  Vernacular  of  the  Azerbaijan  Jews  ....  340 

II.  Proverbs  ..........  345 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  object  of  the  present  grammar  is  to  make  known  the  various 
dialects  of  the  Eastern  Syrians  (Nestorians  or  Chaldeans)  who 
inhabit  the  mountains  of  Kurdistan,  and  the  plains  of  Azerbaijan  in 
North-west  Persia,  and  of  Mosul  in  Eastern  Turkey.  Their  country 
is  approximately  comprised  between  36°  and  38°  30',  N.  latitude, 
and  42°  and  46°,  E.  longitude,  and  lies  between  Mosul  and  the  Sea  of 
Van,  and  between  the  Sea  of  Urmi  (Urmia,  Urumi,  Urumia)  and  the 
Bohtan  Su  or  Eastern  Tigris.  They  live  partly  in  Turkey  and  partly 
in  Persia ;  but  they  are  more  definitely  divided  by  religion  than  by 
political  areas,  into  two  portions,  the  larger  of  which  consists  of  the 
adherents  of  the  Patriarch  Mar  Shimun,  the  Catholicos  of  the  East, 
who  usually  call  themselves  Syrians,  but  are  better  known  in  Europe 
by  their  nickname  of  Nestorians;  and  the  smaller  of  which  consists 
of  the  Roman  Catholick  Uniats  who  are  usually  known  as  Chaldeans. 
The  former  portion  live  chiefiy  in  the  mountains  of  Kurdistan  in 
Turkey,  and  the  high  plains  of  Azerbaijan  in  Persia,  the  latter  chiefly 
in  the  plain  of  Mosul  in  Turkey,  though  several  of  them  are  also 
found  in  Persia. 

The  region  defined  above  was  not  the  original  home  of  the 
Eastern  Syrians.  They  are  all  that  remains  of  the  Christian  Church 
of  the  Persian  Empire  which,  claiming  to  be  founded  in  the  first 
century,  had  its  head-quarters  on  the  Tigris  at  Seleucia-Ctesiphon, 
the  twin  capital  of  Persia,  and  thence  sent  out  its  missions  over  the 
whole  of  Central  Asia.  They  were  driven  northwards  by  successive 
persecutions,  of  which  the  most  terrible  was  that  which  they  suffered 
at  the  hands  of  Tamerlane ;  and  they  are  now  reduced  to  a  mere 
shadow,  numbering  probably  not  more  than  a  hundred  thousand 


X 


INTRODUCTION. 


souls,  whereas  at  one  time  they  were  computed  to  be  more  numerous 
than  all  the  other  Christian  bodies  put  together. 

Their  vernacular  has,  as  far  as  is  known,  been  until  late  years  an 
unwritten  language.  They  have  long  used,  and  still  most  commonly 
use,  the  classical  Syriac  (which  they  call  The  Old  Language)  in  writing 
as  well  as  for  their  religious  services ;  indeed  only  those  who  have 
studied  in  the  European  missionary  schools  are  able  to  write  the 
vernacular,  which  they  call  The  Neiv  Language  or  The  Language  of 
Speaking.  In  this  grammar  the  terms  ‘  Old  ’  and  ‘  New  ’  Syriac  are 
retained  for  convenience  although  they  are  somewhat  of  a  misnomer, 
since,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  sequel,  the  vernacular  is  not  probably 
derived  from  the  classical  Syriac,  and  many  forms  in  the  latter  are 
more  developed  than  those  which  correspond  to  them  in  the  former.  In 
writing  the  classical  Syriac  the  Eastern  Syrians  naturally  employ  their 
own  character,  which  is  that  used  in  this  book,  and  which  resembles 
the  old  Estrangdla  more  than  the  Western  Syrian  or  Jacobite 
character.  There  are  also  a  few  differences  in  pronunciation  be¬ 
tween  the  Eastern  and  Western  Syrians  in  reading  the  classical 
language,  the  former  for  example  saying  d  where  the  latter  say  6  ; 
and  there  are  several  differences  in  the  grammatical  forms.  All  the 
quotations  from  classical  Syriac  in  this  book  are  written  in  the 
Eastern  Syrian  manner. 

The  first  attempt  known  to  the  present  writer  to  reduce  the 
vernacular  to  writing  was  made  in  the  plain  of  Mosul  in  the  seven¬ 
teenth  century,  when  some  vernacular  poems  were  written  down  on 
the  baldest  phonetic  principles  ;  but  the  writer  shews  many  incon¬ 
sistencies,  and  spells  the  same  word  in  many  different  wa}s.  In  the 
last  century  the  liturgical  Gospels  were  written  in  the  vernacular,  also 
phonetically,  and  without  much  consistencyk 

But  the  first  serious  and  scientific  attempt  to  reduce  any  of  these 
dialects  to  writing  was  made  in  the  year  1886  by  an  American 
Presbyterian  missionary  at  Urmi,  the  Bev.  Dr  Perkins,  who  trans¬ 
lated  the  Bible  into  the  Urmi  vernacular ;  and  this  translation  was 
published  in  1852  by  the  American  Bible  Society  in  two  large  quarto 
volumes  in  parallel  columns  with  the  Pshittal  The  spelling  of  the 

1  The  present  writer  is  indebted  for  the  loan  of  both  these  manuscripts  to  the 
American  Presbyterian  Missionaries  at  Urmi. 

2  A  new  edition  of  the  Bible  in  the  Urmi  vernacular  in  one  handsome  volume  has 


INTRODUCTION. 


XI 


classical  Syriac,  which  the  people  were  accustomed  to  see  written, 
was  necessarily  taken  for  all  words  and  forms  common  to  it  and  the 
vernacular,  and  other  forms  and  words  were  spelt  analogously,  or 
else  according  to  the  sound.  It  is  a  matter  for  some  regret,  however, 
that  this  work  was  published  at  a  time  when  the  genesis  of  the 
vernacular  had  been  very  little  investigated,  and  consequently  many 
misleading  spellings  were  adopted,  as  for  instance  the  final  Alap  in 
the  third  person  singular  of  the  preterite,  where  the  final  He  gives 
exactly  the  same  sound,  and  makes  the  tense  intelligible  etymolo¬ 
gically.  In  1856  Mr  Stoddard,  a  colleague  of  Dr  Perkins,  published 
in  the  fifth  volume  of  the  American  Oriental  Society’s  journal  a 
grammar  of  the  Urmi  dialect^  which  is  chiefly  useful  for  its  list  of 
the  verbs  used  in  that  plain  ;  and  since  then  various  educational  and 
theological  works  both  in  classical  and  vernacular  Syriac  have  issued 
from  the  printing  presses  of  the  three  missions  working  among  the 
Eastern  Syrians, — all  of  which  have  their  head-quarters  at  Urmi, 
the  only  large  town  in  the  country  of  the  non-Uniat  Syrians — the 
American  Presbyterian,  the  French  Roman  Catholick  (Lazarist),  and 
the  Archbishop  of  Canterbury’s  Mission.  The  vernacular  works  of 
the  first  of  these  follow  the  lead  of  Dr  Perkins,  though  his  spelling 
has  been  very  slightly  modified ;  those  of  the  second  are  largely 
influenced  by  the  dialect  of  the  plain  of  Salamas,  where  many 
Uniats  are  found;  while  those  of  the  third  mission,  which  is  of  more 
recent  origin,  adopt  a  somewhat  more  etymological  spelling  than  the 
others,  and  aim,  while  written  in  the  Urmi  dialect,  at  being  in¬ 
telligible  to  the  neighbouring  mountaineers  of  Kurdistan  as  well  as 
the  people  of  the  Azerbaijan  plains.  This  spelling  is  adopted  in  this 
grammar,  and  reasons  for  its  use  are  given  below. 

The  writer  must  express  his  particular  obligations  to  the  very 
useful  Grammatik  dev  Neusyrischen  Sprache  of  Professor  Ndldeke. 
This  book,  which  was  published  in  1868,  analyses  the  dialect  of 
Urmi  very  fully  ;  but  being  based  on  the  Mission  publications  which 
had  appeared  before  that  date,  it  is  necessarily  almost  entirely  con¬ 
fined  to  that  dialect.  It  has  been  particularly  valuable  in  suggesting 

been  published  by  the  same  Society  in  1893.  A  smaller  type  is  used,  and  the  PshiUa 
is  omitted;  while  references  and  maps  are  added. 

^  The  present  writer  has  verified  orally  most  of  Mr  Stoddard’s  variant  grammatical 
forms.  A  few  are  given  here  on  Mr  Stoddard’s  authority,  which  the  writer  has  not 
been  able  to  find  in  use.  These  are  marked  ‘St.’  or  ‘  Stod.' 


Xll 


INTRODUCTION. 


etymologies ;  and  while  a  search  among  other  dialects  has  disproved 
a  few  of  these,  by  far  the  greater  number  have  been  fully  confirmed. 

It  will  be  seen  by  what  has  been  said  that  while  the  Urmi 
dialect  is  well  known,  the  others  have  not  been  brought  to  light. 
The  Gospels  have  indeed  been  printed  by  the  American  Presbyterian 
Mission  at  Urmi  in  the  Alqosh  dialect,  that  of  the  plain  of  Mosul, 
but  a  very  limited  number  of  copies  was  issued,  and  it  is  now  quite 
unobtainable;  indeed  it  may  be  doubted  if  any  were  ever  seen  in 
Europe.  Dr  Socin  also,  in  his  N eiiaramdischen  Dialekte  von  Urmi  bis 
Mosul,  has  given  us  a  few  specimens  (chiefly  in  Poman  character)  of 
the  Jilu,  Salamas,  Alqosh^  and  Zakhu^  dialects,  besides  several  of 
that  of  Urmi.  But  no  grammar  has  been  written  of  these  other 
dialects ;  and  those  of  the  great  Ashiret,  or  semi-independent  tribes 
of  Kurdistan,  and  several  others,  have  been  entirely  untouched.  The 
present  writer  has  therefore  set  himself  during  a  five  years’  sojourn 
among  the  Eastern  Syrians,  when  engaged  on  the  Archbishop  of 
Canterbury’s  mission  to  them,  to  collect  the  materials  for  the  present 
grammar^  The  number  of  variations  both  in  the  vocabulary  and  in 
the  grammatical  forms  used  is  extraordinarily  great,  and  almost 
every  village  has  its  own  way  of  speaking.  It  will  be  found  that  in 
this  book  a  large  number  of  variant  forms  have  been  added  even  in 
the  Urmi  dialect ;  but  it  is  perhaps  necessary  to  remind  European 
readers  that  this  is  the  speech  of  only  a  small  proportion  of  the 
people.  It  has  been  chosen  by  the  different  Missions  as  their  basis 
for  writing  the  vernacular,  but  this  choice  has  given  it  an  exaggerated 
importance.  It  is  therefore  the  object  of  this  work  to  compare  the 
other  dialects,  that  is,  those  of  nine-tenths  of  the  Eastern  Syrian 
people,  with  that  of  Urmi,  which  is  already  known.  It  is  clear  that  a 
comparison  of  dialects  will  throw  much  light  on  etymology,  and  that 
one  dialect  will  often  supply  a  missing  link  which  will  remove  a 
difficulty  in  the  speech  of  another. 

Classes  of  dialects.  The  variation  of  the  dialects  is  geographical ; 

^  Professor  Sachau’s  sketch  of  this  dialect,  mentioned  below,  came  to  hand  as  the 
last  sheets  of  this  book  were  passing  through  the  press ;  a  few  forms  are  taken  from  it. 

2  This  is  the  vernacular  of  the  Jews  of  that  place.  The  writer,  though  he  has 
visited  Zakhu,  has  had  no  opportunities  of  taking  notes  of  the  Jews’  language,  and  is 
therefore  entirely  indebted  to  Dr  Socin  for  the  examples  of  it  in  this  volume. 

3  The  Aramaic  dialect  of  the  Western  Syrians  (Jacobites)  of  Jebel  Tur  is  not  given 
in  this  book. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Xlll 


there  are  practically  no  differences  of  class  among  the  people,  and  all 
in  the  same  place  have  more  or  less  the  same  tongue.  An  examina¬ 
tion  of  the  peculiarities  of  speech  in  different  districts  would  lead  us 
to  divide  the  language  into  four  main  divisions,  the  two  first  of  which 
may  be  called  the  non-aspirating,  and  the  two  last  the  aspirating 
dialects,  the  difference  being  in  the  hardening  or  softening  of  the 
letters  Tau  and  Dalath.  It  is  possible  that  these  four  classes 
represent  four  separate  migrations  from  the  plains  of  Mesopotamia 
and  Assyria.  The  first  two  groups  of  dialects,  which  are  spoken  at 
the  North-eastern  and  Northern  extremities  of  the  country,  would 
thus  represent  the  earlier  migrations. 

We  thus  have  : — 

I.  The  Urmi  group  (U.);  the  dialect  of  the  great  plain  of  Urmi, 
in  Azerbaijan,  to  the  west  of  the  sea  of  that  name  ;  the  dialect  of  the 
smaller  plain  of  Solduz  to  the  south  of  the  sea,  which  is  almost  the 
same,  though  in  a  few  of  its  Syrian  villages  Syriac  has  given  place  to 
Azerbaijani  Turkish;  the  dialect  of  the  north  part  of  the  plain  of 
Urmi,  noted  here  as  ‘  Sp.,’  i.e.  Sipurghan,  which  is  somewhat  affected 
by  the  Salamas  dialect  (Group  II.),  as  is  also  that  of  the  small 
plain  of  Gavilan  between  the  two, 

II.  The  Northern  group.  This  group  is  especially  noticeable  for 
dropping  Tau. 

a.  (Sal.)  Plain  of  Salamas,  in  Persia,  to  the  north-west  of  the 
Sea  of  Urmi. 

h.  (Q.)  Qudshanis,  in  Turkey,  the  village  of  the  Patriarch  Mar 
Shimun,  gives  its  name  to  the  dialect  of  the  neighbouring  district, 
which  is  a  little  south  of  the  Sea  of  Van. 

c.  (Gaw.)  The  plain  of  Gawar,  in  Turkey,  a  high  table-land  to 
the  west  of  the  Perso-Turkish  frontier.  This  plain  and  the  district 
round  Qudshanis  are  called  ‘  Ray  at  ’  or  Subject ,  being  entirely  under 
the  direct  government  of  the  Turks. 

d.  (J.)  The  dialect  of  Jilu  is  practically  the  same.  This  very 
mountainous  district  lies  a  little  to  the  west  of  Gawar,  and  geogra¬ 
phically  belongs  to  Group  III.,  being  Ashiret ;  but  philologically  it 
belongs  to  Group  11.  Its  people  are  very  different  in  appearance 
and  character  from  most  of  the  other  Syrians,  being  of  a  more  Jewish 
cast. 


XIV 


INTRODUCTION. 


in.  The  Ashiret  growp.  K.  in  the  following  pages  denotes  the 
dialects  of  the  Ashiret  or  Tribal  (semi-independent)  districts  of  Central 
Kurdistan,  which  consist  of  inaccessible  mountains  and  valleys  lying 
between  Van  and  Mosul.  Over  these  districts  the  Turks  exercise 
little  more  than  a  nominal  sway,  and  the  soldiers  seldom  penetrate  it. 
Of  these  districts  we  have  : — 

a.  (Ti.)  Upper  Tiari,  to  the  north-west  of  the  group;  this  is  by 
far  the  largest  Ashiret  district. 

h.  (Tkh.)  Tkhuma,  a  large  valley  east  of  Ti^-ri,  south-west  of 
Jilu. 

c.  Tal,  Baz,  Diz,  Waltu,  smaller  Ashiret  districts,  north  and  east 
of  Tkhuma. 

d.  (Ash.)  Ashitha,  in  Lower  Tiari,  to  the  south-west  of  the 
group.  This  is  the  principal  village  in  the  Ashiret  districts,  and  its 
dialect  differs  very  greatly  from  that  of  Upper  Tiari,  and  approaches 
rather  those  of  the  fourth  group. 

e.  (MB.)  Mar  Bishu  ;  (Sh.)  Shamsdin.  These  are  districts  in 
Turkey  close  to  the  Persian  frontier,  south-west  of  Gawar,  and  are 
inhabited  by  colonies  from  Tiari.  Their  dialects  are  closely  related 
to  that  of  Tiari,  but  are  somewhat  influenced  by  the  first,  or  Urmi, 
group.  This  is  still  more  the  case  with  the  dialects  of  Tergawar, 
Mergawar,  and  Bradust,  three  neighbouring  upland  plains  on  the 
Persian  side  of  the  frontier.  The  village  of  Anhar  in  the  plain  of 
Urmi,  near  Tergawar,  is  also  a  colony  from  Tiari,  and  retains  several 
Tiari  peculiarities  of  language,  grafted  on  the  Urmi  speech.  These 
districts  are  separated  from  the  rest  of  this  group  by  Gawar  and  Jilu. 

IV.  The  Southern  group,  a.  (Al.)  The  Alqosh  dialect,  .spoken 
in  the  villages  of  the  plain  of  Mosul.  In  the  town  of  Mosul  itself 
vernacular  Syriac  almost  entirely  gives  place  to  Arabic.  This  dialect 
receives  its  name  from  the  village  of  Alqosh,  about  thirty  miles  north 
of  Mosul,  where  is  the  famous  monastery  of  Raban  Hurmizd.  The 
language  of  the  other  villages,  Telkief,  Teleskof,  and  the  rest,  differ 
in  small  particulars  from  that  of  Alqosh  itself. 

h.  (Bo.)  The  Bohtan  dialect,  spoken  in  Boh  tan,  in  Western 
Kurdistan,  a  district  lying  on  the  Eastern  branch  of  the  Upper 
Tigris, 


INTRODUCTION. 


XV 


c.  (Z.)  The  Zakhu  dialect,  spoken  by  the  Jews  of  that  place, 
which  is  about  sixty  miles  north  of  Mosul.  It  greatly  resembles  that 
of  Alqosh. 

With  regard  to  foreign  words,  Groups  I.  and  II.  are  chiefly  affected 
by  Persian  and  Azerbaijani  Turkish  ;  Group  III.  by  Kurdish  and 
Arabic  ;  Group  IV.  by  Arabic. 

Origin  of  the  Vernacular.  It  would  appear  that  the  dialects, 
though  sufficiently  different  to  make  it  difficult  for  a  man  to  under¬ 
stand  one  of  a  distant  district,  are  yet  sufficiently  alike  to  argue  a 
common  origin.  This  origin,  however,  we  can  hardly  seek  in  the 
written  or  classical  language.  It  would  be  a  mistake  to  look  on  the 
spoken  Syriac  as  a  new  creation,  springing  from  the  ruins  of  the 
written  tongue  ;  the  former  may  indeed  in  a  sense  be  called  The 
Neiu  Language,  as  it  has  greatly  developed  its  grammatical  structure 
in  an  analytical  manner,  and  has  dropped  many  of  the  old  synthetic 
forms,  but  much  or  most  of  it  was  doubtless  in  use  side  by  side  with 
the  written  classical  Syriac  for  centuries.  It  retains  in  many  cases 
forms  less  developed  than  corresponding  forms  in  the  written  lan¬ 
guage  ;  thus  in  §  32  we  see  that  in  the  formation  of  the  first  person 
plural  of  the  first  present  tense,  the  spoken  Syriac  retains  the  Kheith 
which  is  dropped  in  the  classical.  The  contractions  in  the  tenses  of 
the  vernacular  shew  independence  of  the  written  language  (§§  31,  32). 
Many  words  are  found  in  the  former  which  are  not  used  in  the  latter, 
but  which  are  found  in  the  Chaldee  and  other  older  Aramaic  dialects. 
So  too,  some  of  the  compounds  which  are  survivals  of  the  construct 
state  (§  16,  ii.  g)  and  some  of  the  few  remaining  agents  of  the  old 
form  (I  77,  2)  are  formed  from  verbs  not  found  even  in  the  latest 
classical  Syriac,  though  used  now  ;  this  would  shew  that  these  verbs 
were  in  use  in  speaking,  though  not  in  writing,  before  those  now 
almost  obsolete  constructions  and  formations  were  given  up.  The 
form  of  the  past  participle  of  the  second  conjugation,  mpu'la,  and  of 
the  verbal  noun  of  the  same,  mpa'uli  or  mpa\de,  can  hardly  have 
been  derived  from  the  very  different  forms  which  correspond  to 
them  in  the  classical  language ;  and  the  same  may  be  said  of  the 
method  in  which  the  prepositions  take  pronominal  affixes. 

The  style  of  spelling  adopted.  European  Orientalists  have  some¬ 
times  expressed  surprise  that  the  missionaries  who  reduced  the 
language  to  writing  did  not  adopt  the  Roman  alphabet,  Had  their 


XVI 


INTRODUCTION. 


only  object  been  to  make  the  language  known  in  Europe,  they  might 
have  done  so;  but  as  their  aim  was  to  enable  the  Eastern  Syrians 
themselves  to  read  and  write  their  own  language,  they  had  no  option 
but  to  use  the  character  to  which  the  people  themselves  were 
accustomed.  They  already  wrote  classical  Syriac,  which  contained  a 
very  large  number  of  the  words  used  in  the  spoken  tongue,  and  there¬ 
fore  it  was  absolutely  necessary  to  employ  the  alphabet  which  was 
in  common  use.  Many  difficulties  however  present  themselves. 
Are  words  to  be  spelt  on  exact  phonetic  principles  ?  And  if  so,  what 
dialect  is  to  be  chosen  ?  How  is  a  man  of  one  district  to  understand 
a  book  printed  in  the  dialect  of  another  ?  It  is  impossible  to  print 
the  books  in  every  dialect,  and  one  must  aim  at  spelling  so  as  to  make 
the  books  intelligible  to  the  greatest  number  of  readers  possible.  The 
Archbishop  of  Canterbury’s  Mission  Press  at  Urmi  has  therefore  laid 
before  itself  the  following  principles:  (1)  The  Vernacular  must  be 
treated  as  a  historical  language,  not  as  one  invented  in  the  present 
generation  ;  in  other  words  etymology  must  be  considered.  (2)  The 
spelling  of  classical  Syriac  is  taken  as  a  basis.  Thus  when  Old  Syriac 
spelling  gives  the  vernacular  sound,  it  is  adopted,  although  some 
other  perhaps  simpler  spelling  also  gives  the  sound.  (3)  When  some 
districts  follow  Old  Syriac  and  some  depart  from  it,  the  words  are 
spelt  in  preference  according  to  the  former  (see  e.g.  §  87,  c  to  m). 
(4)  But  when  all,  or  nearly  all,  the  dialects  differ  from  Old  Syriac, 
the  vernacular  sound  is  followed.  (5)  Words  not  generally  understood 
except  in  one  dialect — and  especially  foreign  words,  which  are  often 
used  in  one  district  only, — are  used  as  sparingly  as  possible.  (6)  The 
mark  talqana  (lit.  the  destroyer),  which  denotes  a  silent  or  fallen 
letter,  is  retained  to  a  considerable  extent^  both  because  a  letter 
thus  marked  may  be  sounded  in  some  dialects  though  it  has  fallen  in 
others,  and  also  because  a  Syriac  word  thus  marked  may  often  be 
made  intelligible  to  those  who  do  not  use  it  by  the  fact  of  its  re¬ 
semblance  (to  the  eye)  to  the  corresponding  word  in  the  classical 

^  On  the  other  hand  it  is  not  used  with  an  initial  vowelless  Alap  or  Yudh.  In  the 
later,  but  not  the  earlier  East  Syrian  manuscripts,  it  is  found  with  the  very  few  words 
which  begin  with  a  vowelless  Alap.  In  the  vernacular,  however,  similar  words  are 
very  numerous,  and  it  is  a  great  gain  to  be  able  to  dispense  with  the  mark.  As  Alap 
and  Yudh  without  a  vowel  have  no  sound  it  seems  needless  to  write  a  sign  which 
denotes  that  the  sound  is  taken  away.  In  some  cases  (§  29,  Note  2)  it  would  be  a 
distinct  error  to  write  it,  as  the  Yudh  contributes  to  the  diphthongal  sound. 


INTRODUCTION. 


XVll 


language,  which  all  who  can  read  and  write  understand  to  some 
extent.  (7)  The  same  remark  applies  to  etymological  spelling.  A 
word  thus  spelt  is  easily  recognized,  even  if  not  used  in  speaking; 
and  moreover  it  is  found  that  a  word  spelt  etymologically  is  fre¬ 
quently  capable  of  more  than  one  pronunciation,  and  therefore  suits 
the  speech  of  several  dialects. 

There  is  of  course  no  royal  road  to  the  end  desired,  of  making  the 
books  intelligible  to  all  the  Eastern  Syrians,  and  the  method  here 
advocated  will  not  give  the  exact  colloquial  language  of  any  one 
dialect ;  but  it  aims  rather  at  producing  a  literary  style  which  will 
make  communication  between  the  various  districts  easier. 

Arrangement  of  this  hook.  This  grammar  is  primarily  intended 
for  the  use  of  those  who  wish  to  learn  vernacular  Syriac  practically, 
and  therefore,  while  the  classical  language  is  constantly  referred  to 
for  illustration,  a  knowledge  of  it  is  not  assumed.  Those  who  wish 
to  learn  only  one  dialect  may  do  so  by  omitting  all  variant  forms 
marked  with  letters  denoting  other  dialects.  The  discussion  of 
derived  nouns  and  verbs,  and  of  alphabetical  peculiarities  of  the 
vernacular  as  compared  with  classical  Syriac,  is  postponed  to  the  end 
of  the  book,  in  order  that  the  reader  may  have  some  knowledge  of  the 
language  before  he  reaches  them ;  and  the  accidence  and  syntax  are 
placed  together  instead  of  being  separated,  as  this  has  been  found  in 
several  grammars  of  modern  languages  to  be  of  practical  advantage  in 
rendering  their  acquisition  easier.  A  large  number  of  idiomatic 
phrases  arranged  in  alphabetical  order  will  be  found  in  the  book;  and 
over  one  hundred  proverbs,  which  may  be  of  general  interest,  have 
been  added  in  the  Appendix. 

The  author  is  indebted  to  Miss  Payne  Smith  and  to  Mr  Norman 
McLean,  Fellow  of  Christ’s  College,  Cambridge,  for  reading  the 
proofs  of  this  work,  and  for  making  various  suggestions. 


Note.  No  dictionary  of  the  vernacular  has  been  published,  but  a 
vocabulary  of  verbs  used  in  several  districts,  with  meanings  in  English,  has 
been  compiled  by  the  present  writer  and  may  be  had  from  the  English 
Mission  Press  at  Urmi,  or  from  the  Secretary  of  the  Archbishop  of 
Canterbury’s  Mission  (7,  Dean’s  Yard,  Westminster),  price  5s. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


‘New  Syriac,’  the  vernacular. 

‘  Old  Syriac,’  the  classical  language. 
Azerbaijani  Turkish. 


N.S. 

o.s. 

Turk. 

Osm.  Turk.  Osmanli  Turkish. 

Kurd.  Kurdish. 

Gk.  Greek. 

Pers.  Persian. 

Chald.  Chaldee. 

Arab.  Arabic. 

Heb.  Hebrew. 

pron.  pronounced. 

Nold.  Noldeke’s  Gravk'matik  dei'  Neusyrisclien  Sprache 

(Leipzig,  Weigel,  1868). 

Nbld.  O.S.G.  Noldeke’s  Syrische  Grammatik  [the  Classical  lan¬ 
guage]  (Leipzig,  Weigel,  1880). 

St.  or  Stod.  Stoddard’s  Modern  Syriac  Grammar  (American 

Oriental  Society,  Volume  v.  1856). 

Socin  Socin’s  Neuaramdischen  Dialekte  von  Urmi  his 

Mosid  (Tubingen,  1882). 

Sachau  Sachau’s  Skizze  des  Fellichi-Dialekts  von  Mosid 

(Berlin,  1895). 


The  usual  grammatical  abbreviations  are  used. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


XIX 


Abbreviations  for  dialecta. 


Al. 

Alqosh. 

Q. 

Qudshanis. 

Ash. 

Ashitha. 

Sal. 

Salamas. 

Az, 

Azerbaijan  Jews. 

Sh. 

Shamsdin. 

Bo. 

Bohtan. 

Sp. 

Sipurghan. 

Gaw. 

Gawar. 

Tkh. 

Tkhuma. 

J. 

Jilu. 

Ti. 

Tiari. 

K. 

Kurdistan  (Ashiret  dis¬ 

U. 

Urmi. 

tricts  only). 

z. 

Zakhu  Jews. 

MB. 

Mar  Bishu. 

One  of  these  abbreviations  after  a  grammatical  form  indicates 
that  the  form  is  used  in  the  district  for  which  the  abbreviation 
stands ;  but  not  necessarily  that  it  is  confined  to  that  district. 

When  no  abbreviation  follows  any  particular  form,  it  is  to  be 
read  as  being  used  in  a  large  number  of  dialects. 

The  letters  O.S.  after  a  Syriac  word  denote  that  the  word  is  used 
both  in  O.S.  and  N.S.,  though  in  the  case  of  verbs  ending  in  a 
guttural  it  is  to  be  understood  that  the  vocalization  of  the  last 
syllable  is  different,  see  p.  286 ;  but  the  letters  O.S.  before  a  Syriac 
word  denote  that  it  is  used  in  O.S.  and  not  in  N.S. 

Transliteration  of  Syriac  ivords.  When  to  indicate  the  pronuncia¬ 
tion  or  for  any  other  reason,  Syriac  words  are  transliterated  into 
Roman  letters,  we  read  : — 

d,  a  as  in  far  ;  a  as  in  pat. 

e,  ei  as  a  in  fate;  ei  as  in  height;  e  as  in  pet. 

i  as  in  French  Ue;  v  as  in  pit. 

0  as  in  pole ;  oi,  oy  as  in  hoiden,  boy. 

4,  u  as  in  flute ;  4  as  in  but. 

The  Syriac  Qop  is  represented  by  q,  Tdith  by  t,  and  Sadhe  by  s, 
except  in  abbreviations. 


I 


i 


I' 


1^. 


r }  •* 


T  f*. 


»  h*  *j 


OEAMMAK  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


S.  GR. 


1 


GKAMMAK  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


9 


m 

Ph 

C£] 

H 

H 

W 

W 

W 

H 


A 

':0 

<'A' 


OD 

SO 

cO 

«?«• 

cO 

o 

Co 

g 

o 


o 


C/75 


t>0 

a 


c/n 

CD 

m 


Ph 

c3 

x'oj 

9 


O  O) 

•+3 

_ _  -u 

tS  ai 

.2 

a-s 

O  o 

2 

Ph 


G 

»>•- 


»>< 


c3 

G 

CC 


»>! 


n  #1.  E  0  ♦  I 


n  ^  ^  o 


I 


1] 


CONSONANTS. 


3 


<uni 


'-Q 

<A 

<X) 

> 


u 

o 


o3 

S-i 


^3 

bX) 

iin 

CO 

aS 


M 


03 


C.C75 

<D 

0) 

U} 


CO 

(V5^ 

(V75 

P- 

CO 

c3 


Ph 


P- 

c3 

I— I 

»-i 

0) 

p: 

cd 

CO 

<v 

a 

•  rH 

(D 

a 

o 

CO 


C.C75 


rP 

$-1 

<D 

> 


p: 

CO 


•<>> 

■iO 


■+0 

CO 

p^ 

CO 

o3 


-♦J 

o 

Cl 


(D 

o 


• 

02  - 
:zi  - 

•rl  fl 

>73 

CD  «c 

d  -S 

'3  S 

s 

S  S 

Co 

r«d 

^  S 

Ch  W 

03  ^ 

I3  ^ 

d  ^ 

CO 

03  ftj 
Si  Si 

o3  O 

CO  ^ 

1  i 

p  I 

^  02 


Teith 

Yudh 

Pi 

o3 

M 

Lamadh 

Mim 

P 

P 

Simkatl 

w 

Oh 

Ch 

o 

'P 

Oh 

ND 

p: 

c3 

O}- 

Ph 

o 

p 

CO 

p 

Shin 

Tau 

2-  "■ 

1: 

R 

■«/ 

§= 

f 

.A- 

4 

n- 

"  1/1 
n. 

•>«'- 

3 

<1 

•n-- 

»1 

1; 

<!/ 


^  O-  8  c)  d) 


H  >6 


-=^ 

Jt 


o3 

P 

p: 


di 


c3 

P 

cp 

R 


c3 

P 

cp 


Q  ^  ^  1/1  H  .#1 


w\ 

Jt 


c3 

P 

cp 


c3 

P 


c3 

P 


cp  q- 


n 


R 


^  Q  A  ^  1/1  H 


02  03 

d 


e3 
Si 

.b!  ft 

03  03 

P  CO 

-M 

^  a 

U  <1 

•  pH 

fe  O) 

^ 

•s  c3 
M 

CU  O) 

a  s 

cS  ^ 

d 


02 


CO 

Si 

03 

u 


^  03 

03  '~' 
P  CO 

c3 

CO 

So 

I 

03  d 

o 

« 

o  W) 
d 

tl  ‘S 

a 

a 

c3 

Si 

U) 

Sh 

O 

pc 


4 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


These  letters  should  be  written  by  beginning  at  the  right  hand 
bottom  corner,  and  most  of  them  in  several  separate  strokes. 

The  Estrangela  letters  are  now  as  a  rule  only  used  for  headings 
of  chapters,  titles  of  books,  and  the  like.  There  are  no  capitals,  and 
the  Estrangela  letters  are  not  used  for  this  purpose,  but  rather  cor¬ 
respond  to  our  black  letter. 

Of  these  consonants  all  may  be  affixed  to  the  preceding  letter  ; 
and  all  also  to  the  following  letter  except  2,  a,  o),  O  (usually), 

^7  S’  fiS  (^)*  manuscripts  A  followed  by  is  not  joined  on; 
but  this  rule  is  not  now  generally  observed.  In  some  of  the  older 
manuscripts  is  not  joined  on  to  o,  u’  and  other  letters.  Es¬ 
trangela  letters  follow  the  same  rule  in  joining  on  as  the  others, 
but  jQ>  is  never  joined  to  the  letter  following. 

Alap  is  written  2  except  (1)  after  when  it  is  written  %  whether 
final  or  not ;  (2)  when  final,  when  it  is  written  J.  But  after  a  and 
a  it  is  written  2  even  though  final. 

§  2.  Final  letters.  For  J  see  above.  Final  Kap,  Mim,  and  Nun 

take  the  forms  5^  or  5^,  ^  or  or  These  letters  when 

standing  alone  are  usually  written  double,  as  ^  ;  though 

the  final  disjoined  forms  may  stand  alone;  the  others  never. 

When  3,  V,,  ,  u.,  JO,  ,  X  are  final, 

whether  joined  to  the  preceding  letter  or  not,  a  small  stroke  is 
added :  thus  ^ .  Yudh  final  after  c]  is  generally  written  >  in 

manuscripts.  followed  by  J  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  generally 

written  if  the  fis  attached  to  the  preceding  letter ;  if  not 

attached,  it  is  written  JflS  or 

§  3.  Aspirated  lettei^s.  The  letters  have  a  dot  below 

them  when  aspirated,  and  a  dot  above  them  when  not  aspirated. 


CONSONANTS. 


5 


§§  3,  4] 

But  these  dots  are  not  written  when  they  would  interfere  with  vowel 
signs  \ 

^  aspirated  is  written  ^ ;  a  dot  is  never  placed  above  this 

letter.  It  is  only  aspirated  in  Syriac  words  (in  most  districts)  when 
forming  a  diphthong  (see  §  7),  whether  in  the  vernacular  or  in  the 
classical  language  in  its  Eastern  form,  which  thus  differs  from  Western 
or  Jacobite  Syriac.  In  words  from  Persian,  Arabic,  etc.,  there  are  a 

few  exceptions  in  the  speech  of  the  better  educated,  and  ^  then  is 

pli ;  but  in  general  /  of  a  foreign  language  becomes  p  in  Syriac.  In 
Al.  and  Z.  it  is  often'  aspirated  even  in  Syriac  words,  especially  at  the 

beginning.  Thus  to  abound  has  ^ . 

The  letters  which  are  capable  of  aspiration  are  called  by  the  East 
Syrians  ,  hagh-dakh-path.  An  aspirated  letter  is  called 

(see  §  95  d)  and  aspiration  ,  or  softening ;  an  unaspi¬ 
rated  letter  is  and  non-aspiration  iHoJd  or  hardening. 

In  U.  Sp.  Q.  Sal.  J.  Gaw.  etc.  p  and  are  never  aspirated.  The 

vernacular  is  more  simple  than  the  classical  language  in  the  matter 
of  aspiration ;  if  a  letter  is  aspirated  in  the  normal  form  of  the  word, 
it  is  aspirated  throughout  all  its  grammatical  changes  in  the  verna¬ 
cular.  See  §  84  for  Bar  ZuTi’s  rules ;  §|  94,  95,  for  differences 
between  O.S.  and  N.S.  in  this  respect. 

§  4.  Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  the  letters. 

(1)  2  is  not  pronounced.  It  is  used  chiefly  as  a  peg  to  hang 
a  vowel  on,  or  as  a  quiescent  final  letter. 

(2)  ^  in  many  words  modifies  the  vowel  sound  which  is  con¬ 
nected  with  it.  See  §  6.  But  a  vowelless  at  the  beginning  of 

1  In  fully  vocalized  writing  if  one  of  these  letters  in  the  middle  of  a  word  has  not  a 
dot  below  it  when  there  is  a  vacant  space  beneath,  we  understand  it  to  be  hard ;  and  so 
if  there  is  no  dot  above  and  the  space  above  is  vacant,  we  understand  it  to  be  soft. 

Thus  has  SL  ;  has  3,  .  When  in  this  book  {{v  and  3  are  written 

with  a  dot  beneath,  it  is  of  course  only  meant  that  they  are  aspirated  in  K.  Al.  etc. 


6  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  4 


a  word  ordinarily  adds  nothing  to  the  sound.  One  or  two  words 
like  cloud  gave  a  half  vowel  to  X .  So  Eden]  some¬ 
times  u\S  he  tvas  baptized,  baptism.  In  Al.  Z.  initial 

vowelless  ^  usually  has  a  half  vowel.  Thus  act,  JSt 

/  ran  have  half  vowels,  though  elsewhere  they  are  pronounced  wadha 
(wada),  riq  li.  ^  and  2  are  not  passed  over  in  the  middle  of  a  word 
after  a  vowel  less  consonant ;  a  break  in  the  breath  must  be  made. 
Thus  ;La2  ea7'th  is  pronounced  dr- a  not  dra. 


(3)  ^  and  Jb  are  pronounced  low  down  in  the  mouth  and 
throat  respectively ;  they  have  a  very  hard  sound  and  necessarily 
modify  the  accompanying  vowel  (see  §  6).  ^  is  pronounced  by 

putting  the  middle,  not  the  tip,  of  the  tongue  against  the  roof  of  the 
mouth. 


(4)  ^  and  aspirated  have  the  same  sound ^ ;  it  is  some¬ 
what  harsher  than  the  Scottish  and  North  German  eh;  in  some 
districts  it  is  a  very  harsh  aspirate  indeed.  The  ^  is  a  soft  aspirate, 

pronounced  lower  down  the  throat,  something  like  the  German  g 
in  tag. 

(5)  before  a  is  pronounced  as  adlii  store  room 

(umbar). 

(6)  A  mark  ~  under  or  above  or  ^  make  them  =j  (in  jay) 
and  ch  (in  chmxh)  respectively.  These  letters  are  then  called  Jamel 
and  Chap.  The  same  mark  with  f  or  x  makes  them  =j  in  French 

jamais.  The  name  of  this  mark  is  U.  majliydna  or  wearing 

away  (<,  K.). 

(7)  A  letter  repeated  must  be  pronounced  twice,  not  as  in 

English  as  a  single  letter.  This  is  a  matter  of  considerable  import¬ 
ance.  Thus  we  have  K.  I  complete  (§  36),  pronounced 

mtd-uimin,  not  mtdmin. 


^  But  see  §  107. 


VOWELS. 


7 


(8)  In  other  words  all  letters  must  be  pronounced  in  full, 
and  none  left  half  pronounced  as  is  so  often  done  in  English. 

Thus  in  fireiuood,  the  wb  must  be  finished  before  the  p 

is  begun. 

(9)  Care  must  be  taken  to  pronounce  letters  not  marked 

with  talqana  (§  9),  especially  a],  which  though  feeble  when  with¬ 
out  a  vowel,  is  still  sounded ;  thus  trouble  is  not  zamdt 

but  zdh’mdt.  §  6  (1). 

(10)  Initial  u  if  it  has  no  vowel  has  no  sound. 

(11)  In  most  words  ^  and  have  the  same  sound.  If 

any  difference  is  made,  g  is  somewhat  more  sibilant.  It  is 
not  ts. 

(12)  o)  final  is  silent.  See  §  108. 

§  5.  Vowels 

The  vowels  are  marked  by  dots  placed  above  or  below  the 
consonants,  as  shown  by  the  following  table. 

—  Pthakha,  =  a  in  fat ;  sometimes  e  in  pet. 

Zqapa,  =  a-  in  psalm. 

—  Zlami  zogi, 

•  •  O' 

in  fit. 

—  Zlami  pshuqi,  or  Zlami  yarikhi 

(also  Zlama  pshuqa,  yarikha)  (1)  as  ee  in  feet,  i  in  French  si, 
(2)  as  a  in  fate  or  often  somewhat  shorter. 

^  Khwasa,  =  ee  in  feet,  i  in  French  si. 

O  Rwasa,  =  u  in  rule',  in  a  few  words  like  oo  in  wool, 

e.g.  l^pp  world  (Turk.)  [so  all ;  see  below].  In  Sh.  and  M.B. 
more  like  a  French  u  in  all  words. 

O  Rwakha,  iLohi  =  u  in  rule,  slightly  inclining  to  o,  espe¬ 
cially  in  Al.  Z. 


or  Zlama  zoga  2^0^  i 


I 


8 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Half  vowels. 

—  Half  Pthakha,  a  very  short  vowel :  very  rarely  written  in  N.S. 

—  Half  Zlama,  a  very  short  Zlama. 

These  are  usually  written  between  consonants  in  manuscripts, 
but  in  printing  they  are  necessarily  put  under  one  of  them ;  e.g. 

west  O.S.  and  N.S.  O.S.,  K.  Baptist  (= 

U.).  Half  Pthakha  is  also  called  mar-Jitana  or  making  to 

run ;  half  Zlama  is  niliagyana  or  spelling.  The  former 

must  not  be  confused  with  talqana  (§  9).  An  O.S.  half  vowel  is  fre¬ 
quently  replaced  by  a  whole  vowel  in  N.S.  See  §  86. 

Of  these  vowels  Khwasa  can  onlv  be  used  with  ^ ,  Rwasa  and 
Rwakha  with  o-  The  others  can  be  used  with  any  letter,  provided 
it  be  not  final. 

Notes.  (1)  The  form  Z(|apa  is  preferred  by  the  Eastern,  Zqopho 
by  the  Western  Syrians. 

(2)  There  is  much  variation  in  different  districts  in  the  pronun¬ 
ciation  of  long  Zlama.  In  Urmi  the  first  pronunciation  is  usual, 

except  in  a  few  words  such  as  ^  not  (if  indeed  this  is  the  proper 
method  of  spelling  this  word  ;  see  §  67) :  other  (rarel}'  with 

the  first  pronunciation) :  yes  (sometimes  :  but  yes  always  has 

'  I* 

the  first  pronunciation) ;  uiX  two  (O.S.  ^SX) ;  and  in  the  names  of 
the  letters  ,  but  the  sound  is  rather  a  short  one  ; 

and  2^  where  the  sound  is  long.  On  the  other  hand  both  in  K.  and 

ry-  o 

U.  the  letters  usually  (but  not  always)  have  the 

first  sound.  In  K.  Al.  the  second  pronunciation  is  more  common 

except  in  plurals  in  J _ and  in  the  pronominal  affix  cj)  _ ;  but  in 

•  • 

Tiari  these  plurals  also  often  have  the  second  sound,  as  ,  and 

in  Al.  both  these  plurals  and  cj  _  often  have  the  second  sound. 


§5] 


VOWELS. 


9 


In  many  cases  the  variation  of  pronunciation  shows  that  long 
Zlama  should  be  written,  as  etymology  also  would  suggest.  Thus  the 

3rd  pi.  present  of  ^  verbs,  as  they  reveal  (O.S. 

nounced  gale  in  K.  Ah,  gali  in  U. ;  in  the  K.  form  of  the  3rd  pers.  pi. 

possessive  pronoun  with  nouns,  as  their  hook,  the  first  sound 

»•  *  * 

prevails  in  Tkh.,  the  second  in  Ti.  The  K.  imperfect  obo)  uOO) 

I* 

they  were  (O.S.  obb?  is  we-wa,  §  29.  smell,  has  the  first 

sound  in  U.,  the  second  in  K.  go,  is  pronounced  ze,  zi,  se  or  si. 


lord  o/(§  16)  is  mari  in  U.,  viare  in  K.  The  K.  forms  Ji3u*2  m., 
f,  are  khrena  and  khreta  (=  other). 


(3)  No  vowel  can  be  placed  on  the  final  letter  of  a  word,  except 
u  9  ©9  b  ;  hence  the  use  of  the  Alap  in  which  nearly  all  purely 
Syriac  nouns  now  end. 


(4)  u  final  must  be  distinguished  from  J  __  and  C7)  _ .  It  is 

marked,  in  U.,  by  the  breath  being  made  to  pass  sharply  over  the 
tongue  as  the  vowel  i  is  being  pronounced.  The  distinction  is  hardly 

marked  in  K.  Ah  Z.  etc.  u.  has  the  sound  of  short  i  in  there  is ; 

/  #  I 

in  the  fern,  past  part,  of  1st  conj.  as  finished',  and  usually  in 

the  preterite  1st  conj.  as  I  finished  ;  but  not  when  the 

object  is  expressed  by  affixes.  See  §  50.  Also  in  husband’s 

brother,  but  not  in  ^ioDu.2  Imsband’s  sister. 

»■  / 

(5)  u  often  does  duty  both  as  a  vowel  and  as  a  consonant.  Thus 

di-yan,  of  us.  This  is  not  the  case  with  o  ;  if  Rwasa  or  Rwakha 
or  a  diphthongal  Wau  is  followed  by  the  sound  of  Wau  consonantal, 
O  must  be  repeated.  Thus  in  us,  is  gci-wan,  not  go-wan.  ^ 

initial  is  pronounced  i  not  yi. 

(6)  A  few  words  are  always  written  without  vowels ;  as 
(mm)  from  ;  ^  (man)  who ;  (kid)  all ;  obi  (d  or  ow  as  in  cow) 

S.  GR.  2 


10 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


he  or  that ;  (d  as  in  fate  or  ei)  she  or  that ;  and  so  their  deriva¬ 
tives,  as  universal,  ^01  then,  all  of  it.  But 

with  affixes  receives  Zlama  zoga,  as  in  O.S.,  as  from  him. 

I* 

(7)  The  letters  D  of  o  aiid,  3  in,  with,  ^  to,  and  combinations 

of  them,  are  prefixed  to  words  without  vowels,  except  in  Al.  where 
they  have  Zlama  zoga  before  a  vowelless  letter.  But  they  do  not 
quite  coalesce  with  the  word  following.  Thus  there  is  a  distinction 

between  late  {drang)  and  of  colour  {dirang),  though 

the  former  word  is  sometimes  pronounced,  especially  by  children,  like 
the  latter.  Between  a  preposition  and  a  demonstrative  pronoun  an 

inserted  3  coalesces  with  the  latter  as  Joyla  on  this,  §  70  (12)  ; 
and  so  often  3,  ^  before  demonstrative  pronouns,  and  sometimes  p 
when  =0/!  In  O.S.  these  particles  receive  Pthakha  before  a  vowel¬ 
less  letter,  o  is  pronounced  u  when  =  and.  1  with  a  vowel,  pre¬ 
ceded  by  these  particles,  does  not  in  N.S.  usually  throw  back  the 
vowel  to  the  particle,  as  always  in  the  Western  and  sometimes  in  the 
Eastern  form  of  O.S. 

(8)  Before  2  Zlama  is  always  the  long  one. 

§  6.  Modification  of  vowel  sounds  hy  certain  consonants. 

(1)  Before  a  silent  letter  a  short  vowel  is  lengthened  ;  this 

applies  to  a  letter  with  talqana  (§  9)  as  well  as  to  a  vowelless  iy  or  2? 
as  first  {qd-maya) ;  ^  one  (khd),  usually  ;  face  {jmtha), 

23:^3  doing  (bi-tuadha).  For  exceptions  see  §  37  h.  So  also 
Pthakha  before  ci  as  in  trouble  {zdlimdt). 

(2)  The  vowel  sounds  are  slightly  modified  when  in  the  same 

syllable  with  iy,  ,b,  and  sometimes  with  Pthakha, 

Zlama  zoga,  and  often  Zqapa  are  then  sounded  nearly  like  u  in  but,  as 

five  (khumsha),  wheat  (khtiti),  but  not  in  to  sin 

{hhdU) ;  locust  (qumsa).  There  are  however  many  exceptions. 


VOWELS. 


11 


§§  6,  7] 

especially  with  Almost  always  in  Al.,  and  often  in  K.,  iy  does 
not  modify  the  vowel,  but  is  pronounced  like  1 .  In  other  districts 
this  modification  is  the  only  way  of  distinguishing  ^  and  2. 

country,  is  pronounced  'uthra  (U.  ‘utra),  as  if  written  with  ;  and  so 
sto7'e  rooni  (umbar). 


The  long  vowels  u,  after  Jti  ^  are  necessarily  some¬ 

what  modified.  If  these  letters  are  properly  pronounced,  far  back  in 
the  mouth  and  throat,  the  proper  vowel  sound  follows  naturally. 

Thus  fig  and  niud  have  quite  distinct  vowel  sounds ;  and 

so  also  2^2  Jiwnd  and  232^  feast,  even  if  the  Zlama  of  the  latter 
have  the  first  sound.  (In  Tkh.  it  has  the  second  sound.) 


Note  that  the  preterite  (§  32.  4)  of  the  first  conjugation  is  always 
pronounced  with  the  ^  sound  even  with  these  letters  in  it.  This 
is  an  additional  reason  for  spelling  it  with  u  (though  the  sound 

is  usually  short)  and  not  with  Zlama.  Thus  is  qimli ;  if 

we  wrote  it  it  would  be  quinli. 


The  word 
the  h). 


♦^OuOl^  Sion  is  usually  pronounced  Seihyun  (sound 


7.  Diphthongs 


uJk.  as  a  in  fate,  as  one  ivho  rises ;  or  ei  in  height  as 

in  Syriaii,  where  the  u.  does  duty  first  in  the  diphthong  and 

then  as  a  consonant.  If  the  u  has  no  vowel  the  first  sound  is  more 
common.  Some  words  are  pronounced  both  ways,  as  23^*^  gam, 
interest.  The  following  are  irregular :  good  (U.  spoi-i,  K.  spei, 

rather  drawn  out),  23*!ap  U.  hitter  (moira),  lyjb  U.  cold  (qoira), 
but  not  the  kindred  words  U.  hot  (kheima),  thinned 


12 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


out,  as  trees  (deila).  In  K.  Al.  and  O.S.  these  are 

’  /  /  '  ^  tm 

The  diphthong  has  the  same  sound.  But  in  IT. 

wishing,  knowing,  fearing,  have  the  sound  of  oi  ; 

in  K.  Sal.  etc.  of  ei. 

^  But  OOC71  is  pronounced  tvd‘, 

^  ■5' 

and  in  the  names  of  the  letters  ob ,  the  diphthong  has  the 
sound  of  ow  ill  cow. 


,  generally  as  o  in  pole,  rarely  as  the  following  diph- 

•  • 

thong.  [In  the  name  Japhet,  ^  has  a  feeble  sound,  Yopht.] 

OA_  (rare),  somewhat  like  ow  in  cow,  as  pronounced  by  the 

uneducated  in  London,  as  oJb  tinder. 

/ 

la  •  and  ,  generally  as  a  in  fate,  sometimes  as  ei  in  height^ 

•  • 

iLi.  eye,  fountain,  has  the  first  sound  in  K.  the  second  in  U.  Dis- 

tinguish  heaven  (first  sound)  and  hearing  (second). 

0  0  ^  ^ 

Exceptions :  as  (akh),  cis  {mdkh,  but  in  Al.  mekh)  : 

there  is  not  {lU)  and  its  variant  (litm).  [In  K.  Al.  we  have 

w  hich  in  Ti.  is  lath,  in  Tkh.  lUh,  in  Al.  leth.']  temple 

{hekla). 

ai _ O _ .  ^ ^ .  either  as  u  in  tune  or  u  in  7'ule.  At 

•  •  •  •  •  • 

the  end  of  a  word  these  are  not  properly  diphthougs,  but  the 
consonant  has  a  feeble,  half-whistlino’  sound.  Thus  to  sit  is  not 

O  m 

ydtiv  nor  yet  ydtu  {u  as  in  French),  but  between  the  two,  and  ends 
with  a  soft  whistle. 


In  ^o,  po  (followed  by  a  consonant)  the  ^  and  p  give  no  addi¬ 
tional  force  to  the  Bwasa.  In  u, _  Yudh  gives  no  additional  force  to 

the  Zlama,  except  at  the  end  of  a  word  iu  U. 


ACCENT. 


13 


§§  8] 

uO  at  the  end  of  a  word  gives  Yudh  a  very  short  sound  ;  but  uCTlO 
is  only. 

Note.  The  combination  has  always  been  distasteful  to  the 

Eastern  Syrians.  Hence  when  the  Western  Syrians  used  this  diph- 
thong,  the  Easterns  put  Zqapa  for  Pthakha.  Hence  we  have  JbODji 

day,  O.S.,  Ti.  Al.  not  jial  (pron.  in  U.  Q.  Tkh.  etc.,  So  in 

quadriliterals  1^0!s0  to  confess,  not  2po^. 

This  applies  also  to  a  great  extent  when  the  Wau  has  a  vowel,  not 
only  in  O.S.  but  also  (especially  in  K.)  in  N.S. ;  thus,  where  in  U. 

they  say  to  join,  in  K.  they  say  ^V^pfbO . 

§  8.  A  ccent 

In  speaking  the  accent  is  almost  invariably  placed  on  the  penul¬ 
timate,  even  in  foreign  words. 

Exceptions.  (1)  teacher,  my  brother,  and  the 

like,  when  used  vocatively,  are  accented  on  the  first. 

(2)  Words  with  the  3rd  pi.  pronominal  affix  are  often 

accented  on  the  last  especially  in  U.  There  was  originally  another 
syllable  here,  which  is  still  used  in  K.  See  §  11.  Cf 

(=  which  is  oxytone. 

(3)  Adverbs  in  are  also  usually  oxytone.  But  they  are 

rare  (§  67). 

(4)  especially  (pers.),  jii  0^20  in  the  morning, 

(Om  Sal.)  in  shoi't,  and  deacon,  are  accented  on  the  first.  But 

the  plural  is  accented  regularly,  and  in  K.  often  the  singular. 

immediately,  is  accented  on  both  first  and  last,  jiicT/  U. 
always,  on  the  first.  Also  the  following  are  accented  on  the  first  and 
pronounced  as  one  word :  lost  year,  Ax  3^  Ti.  Al. 


14 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


upiuards,  Ti.  Al.  downwards,  U.  in  the  evening, 

^  one  qran  (7d.),  one  tnmdn  (6s.),  wiibO 

Mar  Shimun  (but  not  the  names  of  the  other  bishops), 

•  * 

this  side,  ooA  that  side ;  and  so  suddenly. 

(5)  When  the  2nd  pi.  pronominal  affix  ♦^oaou^,  or  the  plural 

imperative  affix  are  added,  the  accent  is  often  on  the  ante¬ 

penultimate. 

(6)  Generally  when  any  affix  is  added  to  a  word,  whether  written 
as  part  of  the  word  or  not,  it  counts  as  part  of  the  word  in  deter¬ 
mining  the  accent.  Thus  ^xpdlbO  he  will  heal,  is  accented  on  a, 
but  op  ajOabO  he  will  heal  him,  on  jqj. 

n  **  *, 

(7)  The  verb  Jool ,  OOO)  was,  similarly  counts  as  part  of  the 

word.  Thus  in  ;o^  tsa  he  would  finish,  the  accent  is  on 

the  b. 

M 

(8)  In  first  (adv.),  the  accent  is  often  on  the  first,  and 

the  first  Zqapa  is  very  feeble,  especially  in  U.  Thus  qdm'ta.  So  in 
abstracts  in  J^ouA_  the  o  often  falls  or  is  feeble,  and  the  Zqapa 
before  ui  is  accented,  especially  in  U. 

(9)  l3o\  iblby  Easter  U.,  ibibw  Christmas  U.,  are  each 

,  ^  ,  y  m  , 

pronounced  as  one  word,  with  the  accent  on  b. 

(10)  All  plurals  in  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.,  which  correspond  to  U. 
plurals  in  and  K.  plurals  in  are  oxytone,  the  last  syllable 

having  fallen.  Thus  we  only  distinguish  sides  (dipnd)  from 

side  (dipna)  by  the  accent.  See  §  18.  Note  3. 

(11)  The  numerals  in  §  28  (1)  are  accented  on  the  first,  as 
uOy^Kiob^  both  of  them,  also  the  days  of  the  week,  §  28  (5). 


9] 


SIGNS. 


15 


§  9.  Signs.  N.S.  ,  or  Al. 

Talqana.  A  line  above  a  letter  —  denotes  that  it  is  silent. 
This  mark  is  called  talqana,  (or  i.e.  the  destroyer: 

and  a  letter  thus  marked  is  called  tliqta, 


Sign  of  the  plural.  Two  large  dots  above  a  word  denote  the 
plural  in  nouns,  adjectives,  and  participles  used  adjectivally.  They 

are  called  Sianii,  ,  or  ‘  positions.’  By  preference  they  are  put 

over  a  and  D  if  these  letters  occur  in  the  word,  whether  they  already 

have  a  vowel  or  not.  But  they  may  be  put  over  any  letter.  They 

are  not  written  slanting  over  as  by  the  Western  Syrians.  When 

written  over  a  one  of  them  counts  as  the  dot  of  the  letter  itself,  as 

a .  They  are  not  now  used  with  verbs. 


Various.  A  large  dot  is  put  over  o)  in  the  3rd  fern,  pronominal 
affix  (§11);  and  in  ob) ,  (§  10);  over  ^  who  and  under  ^ 

from.  See  §  5  (6).  is  written  without  a  dot. 

The  large  dots  which  marked  the  tenses  and  persons  of  the  old 
verb  have  disappeared  with  those  tenses. 

The  stops  usually  used  are — :  :  comma ;  .  semi-colon  or  full  stop ; 

full  stop,  especially  at  the  end  of  a  paragraph.  This,  or  a  star,  often 

divides  verses  of  psalms  and  anthems.  The  Syrians  use  their  stops 
very  loosely.  The  first  of  the  above  stops  is  more  used  than  the 

comma  in  English.  It  is  often  called  drawing  of 

breath.  In  manuscripts  a  distinction  is  often  made  between  the  two 
ways  of  writing  these  two  dots,  according  as  they  slant  to  the  right 
or  to  the  left. 

For  a  fuller  discussion  of  vowels  and  consonants  in  particular 
words  see  §§  85 — 126  inch 


16 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  10 


PRONOUNS. 

^  10.  Personal  Pronouns  JIdouiA 

The  forms  most  commonly  used  are  those  written  first. 

Sing.  3  m.  oo7  he,  or  ^ob)  U.  (ow-vmn),  or  ^obl  U.,  or 
U,  or  JboCTJ  2.,  or  oo^^  K.  Al.  In  all  but  the  last  aj  is 

silent. 

f.  uCTj  she,  or  ^crj  U.  {ey-in),  or  Al.  Tkh.,  or  Z-,  or 
Ti.  In  the  first  two  and  last  o]  is  silent. 

2  m.  kii  thou,  or  Tkh.,  or  iSil  U-  K-  (^S  iu  Tal),  or 
isoil  Al.  Ti.  Z.,  or  ba72  Z.,  or  Z.,  or  ^sojl  Ti.  Tkh.,  or  Aii 

•<#  #  I#  $  ^ 

Gaw. 


f.  uisii  or  Tkh., 

/  •  / 

u4s^2  Al.  Ti.,  or  Ti.  Tkh., 


or  .  isii  U.  K.  (^s  in  Tal), 

\  II  /  -  •  ^ 

or  Gaw. 

0  0 


or 


1  m.  and  f.  Ji2  I. 

Plur.  3  m.  and  f.  \^i  they  U.  K.  Al.  Z.,  or  ^  K.  Sal.  AL,  or  uj»2 

*  ^1* 

Al.  (dne),  or  u,o)42  Al.  (anhe). 

»• 


or 


2  m.  and  f.  you  U.  K.,  or  o^Sk*1  K-  Al., 

Al.,  or  Sal,  or  U. 


§  *  *  I  ^ 

1  m.  and  f.  wi^2  loe  U.,  or  ul**2  U.  K.  AL,  or  uAi>i^2  U. 

0  »  '000 


0(7}  and  ub?  as  personal  pronouns  are  pronounced  ow  (as  in  cow) 
and  ei  (as  in  height)  respectively.  In  reading  O.S.  the  Eastern 
Syrians  read  them  ho'iv,  liei  unless  the  o)  has  talqana. 


10] 


PRONOUNS. 


17 


All  these  pronouns  are  abbreviated  when  used  with  verbs.  See 
§§29  sqq. 

Of  these  ocT),  Ssii,  are  O.S.  forms.  In  O.S.  the 

short  gives  place  to  a  long  vowel  (§§  87,  88)  and  we  get  jLiI.  The 

form  ^2  should  perhaps  be  written  ua2  giving  in  U.  K.  the  first 

sound  to  Zlama,  in  Al.  the  second.  All  the  forms  for  they  seem  to  be 

derived  from  the  feminine  (whence  u^2  by  metathesis),  which 

has  ousted  the  masculine.  The  reverse  usually  happens,  as  we  see  in 
the  verb  forms,  but  other  instances  of  the  feminine  surviving  and  not 

the  masculine  will  be  seen  in  the  following  sections.  For  O.S. 

0  *  * 

we  have  with  2  prosthetic. 


Most  of  the  variants  are  due  (a)  to  a  love  of  aspiration  in  Tkhuma, 

(h)  to  a  desire  to  emphasize  by  adding  ^ .  [Qu.  =  O.S.  ^<,  3  ?].  (c)  from 

0  0  ^  0  0,0 

11,  as  uJyiM2,  «^o^oiSM2, 

0  0  0y  ^  \  -  / 

(which  has  a  double  confusion  with  ^fM2).  Perhaps  is  itself 

formed  by  confusion  with  the  affix  of  the  2  pers.,  in  which  case 
we  should  write  Possibly  also  4^X4^^  may  be  a  remini¬ 
scence  of  the  termination  of  ye  are  or  become  = 

(d)  <^oXm2  is  in  accordance  with  the  usual  Salamas  usage  of  putting 

0  g  0  0 

for  ^  final,  (e)  oXm2  and  perhaps  uXm2  are  formed  by  a  common 
dropping  of  ^  final,  §  116. 

The  personal  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  are  not 
used  objectively  ;  affix  forms  are  substituted,  §§  48 — 50.  But  rarely 
in  Al.  we  have  such  instances  as  the  following:  St  John  xv.  24, 

53(7^  Ji2  ysai  they  hated  both  me  and  my  Father. 

The  3  pers.  pronoun  is  used  objectively  after  prepositions  in  U.,  and 

also  in  K.  Al.  directly  after  verbs,  as  oat  ^  K.  AL,  I  saw  him. 

When  used  after  prepositions  o  must  be  inserted  except  sometimes 

after  Thus  oaj3  }.b  for  him  =  yOtOuO  or  o}.?  ;ti. 


S.  GR. 


3 


18 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


The  2  pers.  plural  is  only  used  of  more  persons  than  one, 

§  11.  Affix  forms. 

Sing.  3  m.  u070  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J.,  or  erj.  K.  Al.  Z.  (and  else- 
where  more  rarely  with  nouns,  but  always  in  the  preterite  of  verbs). 

3  f.  b]0  or  6^^  (as  above). 

2  m.  The  ^  is  frequently  silent  in  J.,  especially  with 

verbs. 

2  f.  uA-A  or  Ti.  MB. 


1  m.  and  f.  u. 

Plur.  3.  yiC^A  TJ.  Sal.  Q.  Ash.  Al.  (and  K.  J.  after  preps.)  m.  f., 
or  uO^-A  K.  J.  Al.  Tal.  (nouns),  or  oo%m  MB.  Sh.  (and  Z.  after 
m.  f ,  or  m.  f.  U.  (after  ^),  or  (rare)  4^07-  Al.  m.,  Al.  f. 

(also  for  masc.),  or  ♦^c^A_  Bo.  m. ;  Bo.  f. 

2  m.  f.  or  •  Ti.  or  •  Ti.  or  Al.  Z. 


Also  rarely  in  Ti,  oa.  (§  70). 

1  m.  f  or  or  ^A.  K.  U.  Z.  (nouns  only  except  in  Ti.). 

Notes.  (1)  Origin  of  the  affixes.  We  may  compare  the  O.S. 
forms. 


a.  With  masc.  sing,  nouns  and  all  feminines,  sing,  and  pi.  in 
[‘  Singular  affixes’]. 

S.  3  m.  cr^,  f.  6p_  ^  2  m.  A  •.  J  f.  yA__ ,  1  m.  and  f.  yi  (no 
vowel). 

PI.  3  m.  4^01 ,  f.  ^<7/ ,  2  m.  ,  f.  ^  ,  1  m.  and  f.  . 

b.  With  masc.  pi.  nouns  [‘  Plural  affixes’]. 

S.  3  m.  uC7]aA_  (Western  mOlO^),  f.  2  m.  ^U-A,  f.  yAAL, 


PRONOUNS. 


19 


§11] 

PI.  3  m.  ♦^00)1^,  f.  ^cr^—y  2  m.  f.  1 

and  f.  wA  ' 

r— • 

From  the  ‘  Singular  affixes’  we  have  the  N.S.  forms  O^, 

y  ,  007  y  O^  y  , 

From  the  ‘Plural  affixes’  we  have  u0)0  (=  O.S.  u07O^'^,  C770- 

(=  O.S.  CU— ,  O  for  u,  cf.  §  109),  j&o  (=  O.S.  5U_1_,  O  for  w.,  and  the 

5^  softened,  cf.  §  94),  yt>_L  and  ui^_L  (=  O.S.  uO^_L  m  dropped, 

^  softened),  ^sOCr^i— ,  .  Hence  also  and  uO?aJ_ 

(for  which  reason  the  accent  in  words  containing  the  latter  is  irregu¬ 
lar,  §  8).  •  a.nd  ^o> ->_!_(=  O.S.  Hence  also 

are  O.S.  wa  •  . 

It  is  doubtful  if  N.S.  m  is  from  the  O.S.  Singular  affix  u,  or  the 

Plural  •  .  If  the  former  it  is  one  of  the  many  instances  in  which 
N.S.  agrees  with  Chaldee  rather  than  with  O.S. 

The  old  form  -  is  found  in  Ti.  in  one  or  two  prepositions : 

as  of  you  (pi.),  §  70. 

(2)  These  affix  forms  are  used  with  nouns  (to  denote  possessive 
pronouns),  prepositions,  in  the  preterite  of  verbs,  and  for  objective 
pronouns  to  verbs. 

(3)  When  they  are  emphatic  after  nouns  and  prepositions  these 
forms  are  separated  therefrom  and  a  {of)  is  inserted.  Thus 

my  hook.  For  the  additional  u  see  §  70.  But  in  Al.  this 

method  of  expression  is  common  when  no  emphasis  is  intended.  In 
the  same  way  in  O.S.  the  Apocalypse  differs  from  the  Pshitta 
by  having  the  detached  forms  when  there  is  no  emphasis. 

For  greater  emphasis  another  a  is  often  added :  \.^ba  Ja^a  my 

hook. 


ith  o  for  ui,  and  ^  softened. 


20 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


(4)  No  distinction  is  made  in  N.S.  between  the  forms  used  with 
singular  and  those  with  plural  nouns. 

(5)  In  the  form  the  first  Zlama  sound  is  used  in  Tkhuma, 

• 

the  second  (but  very  short)  in  Tiari.  This  and  the  similar  form 
are  instances  of  the  feminine  surviving  to  the  exclusion  of 
the  masculine.  Cf.  §§  10,  32.  For  the  accent  see  §  8  (2). 

(6)  For  two  other  forms  for  3  pers.  pi.  see  §  20  (12). 

(7)  For  in  Salamas  is  often  substituted. 

(8)  The  objective  pronouns  me,  thee,  etc.  are  expressed  by  vAl, 

etc.,  or  in  U.  also  by  \^ish ,  etc. ;  or  by  attaching  the 

affixes  to  verbs  as  in  §§  48  sqq.  Cf.  also  §  10  above. 

(9)  Mine,  thine,  etc.  are  expressed  by 

(5) ;  as  obi  that  hook  is  mine.  These  may  be  used 

absolutely,  as 
loved  his  own. 

My  own  etc.  is  usually  expressed  by  'A?  (A?  Ti.) 

I  12.  Demonstrative  Pronoims. 

(1)  Sing.  m.  this,  or  Jbl  U.  K.,  or  jbl  Al.  Z.,  or  o]l  Sal.  U. 
Sp.,  or  2pai  MB.,  or  lallhu]  MB.,  or  2p2  Sh.,  or  JicypI  Sh.,  or 
2p2  Al.  (d),  or  udI  Ah,  or  uis2  Gaw.  (the  last  three  also  =  that), 
or  a2  Al.  (cf.  U.  to-night  =  K.  5  67),  or  J. 

■  ,t  ,  m  t!  /  l'  {  •> 

(both  Zlamas  second  sound),  or  Jof  oui  Z. 


f.  Jdyl  this,  or  K.  U.  {4-ya),  or  jll  Al.  {eiya),  or  C772  Sal.  U., 
or  2^2  etc.,  as  above,  or  Jo/  uibt  Z. 


Blur.  m.  and  f.  U.  Ti.,  or  Jl2  Tkh.  Ash.,  or  JA2  Al  K.  (not 
Ash.),  or  s^2  Al,  or  MB.,  or  MB.  [Stoddard  gives 

)c^2  U.  Jo^2,  and  ^  but  these  are  at  any  rate  very  rare.] 


12] 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


21 


The  singular  2?or  is  also  used  in  fisos  about  this  =  there- 

/ore  (see  §  67).  Sometimes  Jotl  =  he,  she,  it :  =  they,  and  so  the 

others. 


(2)  Sing.  m.  oaf  that,  i.e.  ille,  [pronounced  d  when  a  dem.  pronoun, 
and  so  all  its  derivatives,  as  5^  oojS  on  that  side,  OCJJ^  in 
the  morning'],  or  ^oiri  TJ.  (ow-wun),  or  lalloool  U.  (o-waha),  or 


^  ^  ^ 

loloi  Ash.,  or  J0oboo7  (o-woha)  U.  Ti.,  or  lolobi  Tkh.  (o-ha),  or 
0)007  Sal.,  or  oao)  MB.,  or  laioho)  MB.,  or  ohl  Sh.,  or  Ixoiohl 

»•  ^  im  it  ^  *  (■  it 

Sh.,  or  Joroo)  U.  (the  longer  the  distance  pointed  out,  the  longer  the 
penultimate  is  drawn  out). 

f.  ub)  that  [pron.  d  as  in  fate:  sometimes  in  Ash.  etc.  ei  as  in 
height],  or  ^h\  U.  (eiyin),  or  U.  ei-yeha,  or  o?Io)  Sal.,  or  ou2 

Tkh.  MB.,  ;<7roI:  Tkh.  mb. 


Blur.  m.  and  f.  those,  or  uil  Al.  {a-ni),  or  K.  Al.  Sal., 
or  jbroii  U.^  Bo.,  or  0)042  Tkh.,  or  Tkh.,  or  jb)oi2  U.h  or 


07042  U.^ 

(3)  Sing.  m.  00)2,  f.  uO)2  that,  i.e.  iste  K.  (not  Ash.).  Elsewhere 
the  above  forms  are  used  in  this  sense. 


All  these  pronouns  precede  their  nouns  in  N.S.,  as  J442  Jo)2  this 
man  —  O.S.  (usually). 

When  used  with  prepositions  these  pronouns  cannot  be  omitted  as 
sometimes  in  O.S.  Thus  ot^  O.S.  =  o^  u42!S 

'  ^  \i  •  /  rii  f  •  t 

N. S.  to  those  who  deny  him. 

Of  the  pronouns  in  the  first  series  some  seem  to  be  derived  from 

O. S.  iiai  :  we  thus  have  (by  metathesis)  and  singular  for 


plural ;  then  by  dropping  ^ ,  jb)2  or  a)2 ,  whence  J62 ,  }62 ,  }*2 , 


1  Village  of  Anhar. 


22 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


(o  and  y,  for  oi,  §  109.)  The  forms  with  m.  and  f,,  seem 
to  come  from  the  O.S.  feminine  Ipof  or  .  Stoddard  conjec¬ 


tures  that 


’I  / 


is  from 


The  pronouns  in  the  second  series  are  the  same  as  the  personal 
pronouns,  with  extra  syllables  added  for  emphasis,  and  behold 
attached  as  often  in  other  cases,  §  73. 


§  13.  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

uli  who?,  or  yAio  Sal.  Gaw.,  or  yjdo  Al.  (not  Ash.)  =  O.S. 

/  't'  '  \  > 

•  •  •  •  u 

(usually  written  ^i).  ^  is  also  used  in  N.S.  [Qu.  =  yO)  ^ 

fern,  for  masc.  ?] 

Whose?  is  expressed  by  etc.;  and  so  the  other  cases. 

ybobO  what  ?  U.  Ash.  (perhaps  =  O.S.  ji ,  or  for  uD2  fcb), 

or  bobO  (before  a  noun),  or  obo  U.  Ti.,  or  K.  Al.,  rare  in  Ash. 

U.  (so  O.S.),  or  Sh.  Ti.  (not  Ash.),  or  Al.,  or  Jopb  K. 

Al.,  or  o^sobb  Ti.  (for  obi  poiao  ?). 


0  #  •r  •  •  0^0 

y&jtl  which  ?  U.  Ash.,  with  or  without  a  noun  (O.S.  Jjyl),  or  uXi.2 
•  •  ^  ’  •'  /»•  / 

^  0  0 
K.  Sh.  (the  O.S.  fern.  2^2,  now  used  for  both  genders),  or  U., 

or  p2,  or  Al.  Z.  (Mim  for  Nun),  or  ^2  Q.  U.— (all  sing,  and 

pL).  Qu.  ^2 ,  m3u2  for  u07  }L2  ;  yOl  2bu2  ?  cf.  yii. 


0  ^ 

JiOia  how  much,  or  JbaaJ  Al. ;  also  an  adverb,  see  §  67,  and  equi¬ 
valent  to  many  in  Ji*  j!aySk  }&2  these  many  years  (roaavra  ery,  St 
Luke  XV.  29). 

Notes.  (1)  is  not  used  with  a  noun  following. 

(2)  It  is  frequently  used  in  U.  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  as  an 
interjection  ;  as  :  ?  o60  :  oji^  I  have  a  stomach  ache. 


§§  13,  14]  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  23 

what  {shall  I  do  And  often  in  expostulation,  thus :  ^ 

•'  ''  •' 

j  OisO  is  not  dear.  What  {do  you  say  ?)  Cf.  the  use  of 

9  why  ?  in  expostulation,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence. 


(3)  y^2  wMcA  o/  them  ?  is  contracted  in  U.  to 
(accented  on  the  first),  in  Bo.  to  uC^jibOuZ. 

(4)  is  used  elliptically  thus:  oUki.  ubobo  what 

<  ■  X  ./  r  ,  ,  ,,  ,  ^  , 

{relation)  of  Simon  is  he  t 

(5)  is  thus  used :  ?  thou  to  do  with 

us  ?  St  Luke  iv.  34.  J^Ofbocf^baS  thou  to  do 

speaking  ?  }ocj  2bo  of  what  use  is  this  to  me  ?  (for 

Zooi  see  under  loal  in  5  46).  Zi  what  wilt  thou  ^  or  what  is 

the  matter  with  thee?  Judg.  i.  14.  So  for  other  persons.  In  Al. 
JiJ)  =  a  ^b^^  '^hich ;  thus  o6c)  ubcj-bOD  to  what  they 

said.  more  than  that  which  is  commanded, 

St  Luke  iii.  13 ;  also  b^S3  after  he  kills,  St  Luke 

xii.  5.  In  U.  =  what  is  it  ?  as  a  reply  when  a  person  is 

called,  is  rather  more  polite  than  ubobo,  rather  less  polite  than 

%  (§  73). 

§  14.  Relative  Pronouns. 

p  who,  which,  p  (chiefly  in  Al.)  he  {she,  they) 

who,  that  which.  Thus  St  Luke  ii.  44.  }o^  ^bbp 

Al.  =  ^^2  J^p  U.  with  any  one  who  knew 

them.  So  p  that  tvhich  in  AL  (§  13,  note  5,  above)  =  p  v^piM  U. ; 
p  ;^z  he  who,  Z. 


24 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§§  14,  15 


a  or  3  or  Jjali  Al.  everything  that,  see 

§  67. 

Whom,  luhich,  as  the  direct  object  of  a  verb  can  be  expressed  by 
the  simple  relative,  or  by  the  relative  and  by  an  objective  pro¬ 
nominal  affix  added  to  the  verb  (§  48),  as  the 

(I  "  ■ 

man  whom  you  will  see.  For  the  other  cases  we  use  the  simple 
relative  with  the  pronominal  affixes  of  §  11  added  to  the  noun  or  pre¬ 
position,  though  the  preposition  and  affix  are  sometimes  omitted. 

Thus  the  man  whose  hook  it  is.  So 

uOjoXb  the  man  to  whom  I  gave  the  hook,  obj 

^oS  the  day  on  which  you  came  (sc.  uOlOja).  So  also 

place  where  I  saw  him. 

When  a  relative  is  implied  in  English  it  is  usually  expressed 
in  Syriac,  though  the  substantive  verb  is  often  omitted.  Thus : 

the  churches  in  the  villages  {which  are  in  the 

I  •  ■  •  * 

•  • 

villages).  But  ucnoi^  J.U2  ^  a  malicious  man  {whose 

heart  is  black),  because  the  relative  clause  is  treated  as  an  adjective. 
So  uiboSoI  2^  a  city  named  Urmi.  But  we  might 

say  So  ^2p  your  love  to  us.  The  O.S.  usage  is 

similar.  But  note  that  ^  O.S.  =  ^2  y.^ 

they  of  the  peoples  will  see,  Bev.  xi.  9.  So 

O.S.  =  51^x36233  N.S.  to  those  who  are  in  Jerusalem. 

'  4$  #1  »  # 


§  15.  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

The  indefinite  ever  is  expressed  by  the  adjective  all,  every 
{kul).  Thus  D  ^  whoever,  or  3  (so  O.S.),  or  p  ; 

p  ^3  whatever  (so  O.S.),  or  p  (O.S.  p  ^  or 

p  ^3^) ;  3  whenever,  as  soon  as,  and  so  on.  Jooya 


§15]  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  25 

=  any  you  please.  is  often  shortened  to  ^  in  Al.  K.  and  some¬ 

times  becomes  Doa 

or  alone  =  each  one : 
give  each  one  a  book. 

The  indefinite  one  (French  on),  any  one,  some  one,  may  often 
be  rendered  by  Jail  Xm  ci  man.  No  one  is  U.  or 

K.  Nothing  is  ?iO)  U.,  or  uMbO  K.,  or  OQ  Ti. 

f  m  It  /  II  t  m  II  ,  i\)  'll*  II  I  <s» 

But  if  a  verb  follows,  ^  or  ^  not  must  be  prefixed,  as  jiil  ^ 
no  one  came.  The  and  oa  are  often  omitted  when 

i'  .*  /  II  1 

a  verb  follows.  None  of  them  is  usually  ^2  followed  by  ^ 


or 


Some  is  (which  preserves  the  Pthakha  sound) ;  but  see 

§  28  (4,  9).  Some  of  them  is  uO?4t9  or  u.cr?4^P 

Some  may  also  be  rendered  by  :  as  eat  some  of 

this ;  also  by  ,  §  28  (9).  Some  may  also  be  omitted  in  N.S. : 

S  I  saw  some  men.  Or  it  may  be  expressed  by  ^^2, 
thus :  lo^  ^2  some  fell ;  Jodju  ^2 

some  one  had  blundered. 

One  another  is  expressed  thus :  }la^2  obip  ^  U.  =  ^ 
jl^2  0013  ^  K  or  one  another,  one  to  another  ;  or 

with  for  Jtl  (O.S.  — jl^2  Ocr)D  ^  U.  (}1^2 , 

iisiai  K.  Al.)  one  after  the  other  =  O.S.  ^  iisa  — So  J^Ai52 

OOja  one  another's  feet:  —  06^  ^ 

)1xm2  U.  (Ja^2  ,  K.  Al.)  they  looked  at  one  another.  These 

may  also  be  expressed  as  frequently  by  U.,  or  K.,  or 

4 


S.  GR. 


26 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


iih^S  K.,  or  K.,  or  A1.  Thus 

2^30^3  U.  (iDa^lD  ;^'aa  K.)  =  2*^04  oi-V^o  O.S.  awe? 

hear  ye  one  another  s  burdens,  Gal.  vi.  2.  Or  as  the  direct  object, 


2’i3uA  uO]uS^.b  K.  (2^30^  U.)  they  killed  one 

another.  So  O.S.  233^^^. 

,««  !■  0 


SUBSTANTIVES. 

§  16.  There  are  no  cases,  but  there  are  a  few  traces  of  the  old 
^  states’.  It  is  customary  in  grammars  of  Classical  Syriac  to  treat  the 
absolute  state  as  the  normal  form,  representing  the  simple  state  of  the 
noun,  as  king,  and  to  derive  thence  the  construct  state  as  representing 
king  of,  and  the  definite  state  as  representing  the  king,  though  in  O.S. 
the  last  is  by  far  the  most  common  and  is  often  used  for  the  first, 

and,  with  the  help  of  a  of,  for  the  second.  But  the  East  SjTians  look 

on  the  definite  state  as  the  normal  one  and  call  it  the  noun, 

while  the  other  states  are  called  abbreviations.  The  absolute 

state  is  j  the  construct  state 

In  the  vernacular  the  definite  state  alone  is  used  normally,  the 
other  two  being  confined  to  certain  words  and  phrases. 

(i)  The  Absolute  state  remains  in  a  few  words. 

•  •  m  ^  w  ^ 

a.  In  the  present  participles,  as  ni.  f. ;  PI.  O.S. 

becomes  in  the  past  participles,  as  ni.  f- 

/  f  f  t  f 

pi.  (see  §§  31,  50)  used  in  the  preterite.  For  2^bO,  etc.  see  §  46. 

b.  The  numerals  twenty  (=  and  the  like,  §  26. 

c.  23o2  manger  f.  =  O.S.  )3o2  which  has  no  abs.  or  const, 
state  (Bar  Hebraeus);  U.  mill  f.  (i  K.)  O.S.  Ui,  JLS;  ;ao9 


16] 


STATES. 


27 


place  f.  of  which  the  definite  state  is  also  used ;  2a^  K. 

serpent  (also  Joou*  U.  K.)  m.  =  O.S.  all  (the  O.S.  alter- 

,•  <  4t  ' 

native  is  not  now  used) ;  ^ou,  daily  (in  Z.  ^ou  is  used  by 
Itself) ;  or  f.  a  hundred ;  again  (in  U.  js  is  silent) 

=  O.S.  jsia  ;  2jQ30jQ9  horse  m.  =  O.S.  J*A>ojQ9 ;  knife  f. 

(O.S.  oi)  of  which  the  definite  is  also  used ;  IciAi  U. 

*  *  0 

O.S.  f.  a  barren  woman,  and  a  few  other  feminines.  In  Al.  we  have 

0 

also  faithful. 

d.  Some  in  o  or  as  deep,  or  95^  f.  affliction, 

O.S.  a^ol ;  otibajL  deep,  lit.  depth,  O.S.  Jlilboaiy ;  oJa^  or 

uOtSU^  f.  affliction,  O.S.  '^'^derstanding  (rare),  see 

§  83  (6)  ;  by  chance,  §  67  (Arabic  root) ;  oiVit* 

pain  f.  (foreign).  These  seem  to  be  the  absolute  state  of  nouns 

whose  definite  state  would  end  in  2^o.  Diminutives  in  o  as 

little  father,  are  not  of  this  class,  §  79  :  nor  are  the  Turkish  words  in 
§  82  (8). 

e.  The  phrase  for  ever  and  ever,  and  its 

imitation  ^adi2  ^2  Soil  id. 

(ii)  The  Construct  state  remains  in  several  phrases. 

a.  Phrases  with  ^^^13  ^  or  In  O.S.  is  the  constr.  st.  of 

•  i’  i’  *  • 

iiLai  house  m.  We  have  the  household  of  Mar 

Shimun  (so  any  name) ;  also  with  is*? . 

233^  threshing  floor  f.  from  23 d2  O.S. 

^  Ti.  (house  of  setting)  the  west. 

^4?*?  ^  '^'^k  f.  =  O.S.  ;4ou?. 


^  In  some  of  these  the  prefix  maybe  a  form  of  the  preposition  betioeen.  Nold.  O.S.G. 
156,  252. 


28 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Ti.  (house  of  the  rising)  the  east 
u£j  K.  (In  U.  Sh.  as  O.S.)  the  palate.  See 

below. 

U.  Tkh.  (house  of  the  Aprils)  the  spring  m.  In  Ti. 
(Tkh.  and  m.  K.). 

ilyj^  or  }*3kX^  O.S.  ^^7^ow.  Now  almost  always  in  the  forms 
U.  K.  (not  Ti.)  by  metathesis,  or  laAo  or  Sal.  (a 

as  S).  Of.  ioiaua  below, 
laoua  uA  II.  See  below  e. 


Ji‘4-  u£J  or  or  -V  f*.  (house  of  the  eyes)  eyebrows. 

\v.  uij  K.  upper  room.  In  Al. 

(in  U.  a  as  ^)  or  in  the  middle.  Also  with 

^  XJ.  m.,  JxxiS  yia  ^  K.  m.  (house  of  the  evenings)  evening. 

}  '  %  t  '  X 


Ti.  f. ;  rarely  Jai  ua  (house  of  the  head)  m.  pillow. 

ua  K.  f.  a  hem  at  the  top  of  trowsers  in  which  a  string 

*  *  •* 

runs.  This  when  gathered  up  supports  them. 

»'  ** 

=  O.S.  and  N.S.  §  92,  eyebrow  or  brow  of  a  hill. 

refuge  O.S.  (not  colloquial). 

O.S.  or  ua  or  O.S.  (house  of  the  shining 

forth)  Epiphany  ^se  U.) 

2^  :s.a  O.S.  or  ya  (house  of  the  Nativity)  Christmas  (2p2^ 
U.).  The  former  also  is  used  for  any  birthday. 


^  Zlama  has  the  second  sound  ;  in  the  prefix  of  the  other  phrases,  the  first. 


16] 


STATES. 


29 


O.S.  or  ^  (house  of  the  rivers)  Mesopotamia. 
iioaJb  m.  or  or  l^ojb  graveyard. 

h.  Phrases  with  son  of{^  Al.  Z.).  This  word  is  used,  but 
not  very  colloquially,  with  any  name,  as  son  of  James. 

So  ^  Bartholomew,  and  other  Biblical  names ;  and  collo- 

*  t 

quially  to  denote  age,  as  Jix  M  three  years  old  (for  the  fern, 

see  below,  d).  We  must  distinguish  M  one  year  old  and 

I* 

^  contemporary.  So  also  : 


ysi  Ti.  (son  of  a  roof)  a  lunatic  =  2^  2  ^  O.S.  a  devil. 


it  i 


D  2S^2  fellow  countryman  of. 

ai  (son  of  a  pair)  companion,  rare. 

(son  of  seed)  seed.  is  used  =  descendant. 

(rare)  or  wife’s  brother  (=  O.S.  JoiLiOM  Si 

son  of  parents  in  law).  So  wife’s  sister  (Pthakha  like  Zqapa)\ 

9  Si  (son  of  the  nature  of)  =  ofioovcno^;  (not  colloquial). 

So  O.S. 

jiiSi  (son  of  man)  man\  so  O.S.  Al.  }xi29  Sa,  Ash. 

ial  aa. 

2a9^  Si  (son  of  chest)  a  shirt  front. 

ii  K.  (son  of  neck)  a  collar.  In  U.  simply 
Jxui  si  cin  ally  (rare). 

^  These  do  not  mean  brother’s  wife  or  sister’s  husband  which  are  expressed  by 

(lit.  bride)  and  (lit.  bridegroom)  respectively.  These  do  not  only  mean 

a  man’s  own  wife,  or  a  woman’s  own  husband,  but  the  wife  or  husband  of  almost  any 
near  relation. 


30 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


D  JSOX  ai  (soa  of  the  name  of)  namesake  of.  In  K.  a  man  speaks 

of  or  to  his  namesake  as  ia  and  does  not  use  his  name. 

/  • 

c.  The  plural  of  Sa.  wia.  is  thus  used  :  ct  citizen  or 

citizens  \  y^aol  an  Urmian  or  Urmians.  In  the  singular  we 

should  perhaps  understand  ^  ^  one  of  the  sons  of  In  K. 
adjectives  are  used  in  this  sense.  See  §  81  (1). 

d.  is  used  of  age  :  J^aJ,  ^  one  month  old  f.  (O.S. 

*>33). 


e.  ifM  is  used  for  ^3^13  in  the  following  feminines  : 

2a^2  Ssaa  (daughter  of  the  hand)  glove. 

2aai  isia  (or  2a'i!3)  (hail)  quartz  =  Ash.  oaia  2a'3i. 

2ak3D  ^aa  (wooden  bolt)  a  holt-socket.  Also  2^333  in  K. 

*  ^1* 

halo  round  the  sun.  (J^o*  day  often  is  used  for  the 
sun).  In  Ash.  23.tU  33  or 

2ao^  ^33  Tkh.  halo  round  the  moon ;  also  a  child’s  disease,  sup¬ 
posed  to  come  at  new  moon.  In  U.  the  latter  is  23C?ji  uA .  In  Ash. 

2^3^. 

4S33  (finger)  thimble. 

(voice)  echo. 

halo  round  the  sun. 


f  2^,  the  irregular  const,  st.  of  2'i«  lord  (not,  according  to 
East  Syrian  grammarians,  of  jiadb  which  is  only  applied  to  Jehovah 

and  said  by  them  to  contain  the  sacred  name  2*  Jah,  being  a  com¬ 
pound  word)  is  prefixed  to  almost  any  noun  to  form  an  adjective,  as 


16] 


STATES. 


31 


ly!aO  lord  of  price  =  dear.  lord  of  water  =  watery. 

2^  lord  of  debt  =  creditor.  ladb  lord  of  fear  =  dan¬ 
gerous  (as  a  road).  But  libis  may  be  left  out,  as  Imi 

this  is  dear ;  and  especially  in  phrases  like  it  is  in  the 

sitn,  JiOkM  it  is  hot  (lit.  heat),  ojJL  it  is  cold  (lit.  cold¬ 
ness),  2^0ua  it  is  dark  (lit.  darkness),  ojSkA  it  is  windy 

(lit.  wind).  2Sib  is  also  used  in  O.S.  (but  rarely  in  this  sense)  with 
a  feminine  .  This  is  not  used  in  N.S.,  the  masculine  serving 

both  genders.  In  O.S.  is  used  in  the  same  way.  (So  Heb. 

g.  So  the  following ;  but  those  marked  with  an  asterisk  are 
ecclesiastical  or  literary  and  not  commonly  used. 

Aal  m.  (K.  v^)  late  snow  in  the  spring,  lit.  eater  of  its 
companion. 

m.  the  Devil  (eater  of  accusation)  O.S.  Cf.  Gk.  Std/SoXo?. 
Not  used  in  pi.,  but  we  have  =  devils. 

m.  f.  supper  (evening  meal). 

m.  Ti.  a  cormorant  (fish  snatcher).  See  below  ^  . 

2^2  ui!Sk!ia^  a  beetle,  perh.  =  ^2  ^  =  wallowers  in  dung. 

A  4  U.  my  very  self  (soul  of  my  soul). 

m.  Tkh.  sunset,  the  west. 

m.  ivory  (elephant’s  bone)  O.S.  In  Ash. 

(so  pronounced),  also  m. 

f.  piety  (fear  of  God)  O.S. 


32 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


^  malignant  fairy  supposed  to  haunt 

pregnant  women. 

(web  spinner). 

;io:  Tkh.  sunrise,  the  east. 

bduA  in.  an  old  man  (white  beard),  a  term  of  respect.  In 

Ash. 

JXdOA  aduA  f.  ci7i  old  woman  (white  locks),  a  term  of  respect. 

}^2S  som  innocent  (white  faced),  not  common, 
m.  Sal.  a  baker. 

m.  f.  guilty  (black  faced),  not  common. 

O.S.  shewhread.  Also 

Uo32  a  kerb  (bishop’s  bread),  pron.  lakhmi.  See  yifiSXti 

.  'iiao  below. 

^  _  ^ 

Ti.  lizard  (goat  sucker).  In  U.  f.  (with 

g  like  ^),  or  f.,  or  f. 

(for  AA^)  clout  (dish  washer).  In  Ash. 

t  >!  t  0 

frA^P*  participle  f.  (verb  of  noun)  O.S. 

CJLjbiy  hypocrisy  (taking  in  face)  O.S. 

U.  the  larynx  (that  which  makes  bread  descend).  In 

K.  jilAf  m. 

v^DOA  m.  bishops  successor  (keeper  of  the  seat).  In  Ash. 

2-^.  Also,  esp.  in  K.  2au.fi,  lit.  a  Nazarite. 

hypocrite  (taker  in  face)  O.S. 

^  Village  of  Ardishai,  in  the  plain  of  Urmi. 


§16] 


STATES. 


33 


1^1  iTi.  f.  ordination,  confirmation,  consecration  (of  bishops 

and  churches),  blessing  (lit.  laying  on  of  hands)  O.S. 

*  made  with  hands  O.S. 

f.  spider  (web  spinner). 

f.  Sal.  surface  of  water. 

m.  abbreviation  (in  grammar)  O.S. 

^  UMerfly,  moth  (night  flier).  Also  a  bat,  in  which 

case  {of  skin)  may  be  added.  In  K.  l^^yh  }3Jl. 

Ti.  a  small  basket  (spoon  holder  ?). 

JxyoJd  3iOyJb  m.  holy  of  holies  (the  sanctuary  of  a  church)  O.S. 

a  churl  (nail  biter). 

;jtd*  stiff-necked  (hard  of  neck)  O.S. 

I* 

rainbow  (bows  of  our  Lord),  pron.  qishti ;  or  perhaps 

we  should  write  C77^SXti ,  y  being  omitted.  The  full  form 

•*  «* 

1x^9  is  also  used  as  in  O.S. 

jKa  upon  (head  of).  Especially  in  K. 


4V>.Vi  jti  on  my  eyes  be  it  (sign  of  obedience),  or  welcome ! 

•  '  •• 

/  ^  ^ 

1^0\;  lit.  a  wagtail  :  term  of  contempt  for  a  Mussulman. 

U.  cormorant  (flsh  snatcher). 

(or  a  herb  (pot  breaker). 

U.  m.,  or  .{iMObOX  Tkh.  f.,  or  Ti.  Ash.  Sh.,  or 

Q.  (which  in  Ti.  =  the  gums)  =  O.S.  palate ;  lit. 

heavens  of  the  palate,  Ps.  xxii.  15.  Cf.  O.S.  .jLa  \JyoX  a  ceiling, 
and  the  palate. 


S.  GR. 


0 


34 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


U.  crown  of  the  head,  perhaps  heavens  of 

the  brain  (Nokl.  §  61).  In  K.  .iLbai  with  plural  irregular;  see  §  19. 

moonlight,  pron.  shimshi.  (In  Tkh.  Spy  See 

mf 

m.  K.  hypocrite  (taker  of  face). 

(or  ^ix)  Ti.  (a  bird). 

*  ni.  sanctuary  door  O.S. 


h.  In  K.  all  present  participles  may  be  used  in  construction, 
thus : — 

a  man  killer ;  fern.  ;  2^-:  a  striker 

of  hoys)  fern.  2^* 


i.  Several  proper  names  in  O.S.  and  N.S.  like 
JbwibuksLKd,  retain  the  construct 

/•/J  ,  m  m  1  ,  m  .  ,  1  ,  7 

state,  though  in  the  second  and  fourth  the  vowel  has  been  thrown 
back;  they  literally  mean,  Mercy,  Hope,  Uncle,  Servant,  of  Jesus; 
and  Day  of  our  Lord. 


§  17.  Gender 

There  are  two  genders,  masculine  and  feminine.  It  is  difficult  to 
give  rules  for  determining  the  gender  of  a  particular  noun,  but 
generally  : — 

a.  Nouns  ending  in  ik  are  feminine ;  the  converse  however  is 
by  no  means  the  case. 

Exception :  if  fis  be  part  of  the  root.  The  following  are  mas- 
online  :  ^  gelding  (Tau  radical  ?)  ;  gl  house,  so  O.S. ; 

a  fist  (Tau  radical  ?) ;  lisoiao  death,  so  O.S.  (^s  K.).  Bar  Hebraeus 
adds  to  masculines  U  olive  tree,  XisOis  mulberry,  hole  in  the 

f  "  t 

ground,  cassock ;  but  the  first  two  are  usually  feminine  in 


GENDEE. 


35 


# 

N.S.,  and  the  last  two  are  obsolete.  how,  sweat,  and 

K.  conversation,  are  feminine  in  N.S.  although  the  ^  is  radical. 
h.  The  names  of  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  feminine. 

c.  Most  birds  are  feminine ;  we  even  have  jjLo^  U.  a 

beautiful  drake. 

d.  Nouns  denoting  sex  follow  the  gender  appropriate  thereto. 

e.  Nouns  in  are  feminine,  as  is 3^  custom. 


f.  Several  foreign  feminines  end  in  [cf.  §  21  (5)]  as 

•  / 

lady,  (a  woman’s  name),  coquetry,  JibbbX  (name  of  a  village 

•'  t*  •'  * 

near  Urmi),  1^0^  world  (Sal.  ba). 

Genders  often  differ  according  to  district,  especially  in  the  case  of 
foreign  words,  to  which  genders  seem  to  be  given  quite  arbitrarily ; 
as  e.g.  words  from  Turkish,  a  language  which  has  no  genders.  The 
gender  of  Syriac  words  is  usually,  but  not  always,  the  same  as  in  O.S. 


Examples  : — 

2bo2  manger,  fern.  N.S.  In  O.S.  lihol  masc. 

supper,  is  common  in  N.S.  (f  in  U.),  by  etymology 
should  be  masculine. 

2ba  or  2b2a  well,  masc.  N.S.  fern.  O.S. 

pocket,  masc.  K.  (second  Zlama  sound)  fern.  U.  (first  Zlama). 

ditch,  masc.  O.S.  fern.  N.S. 

olive,  see  above. 

/ 

love,  fern,  in  Sal.  Elsewhere  masc.  as  O.S. 
bird,  maso.  (rarely  fem.)  N.S.  fern.  O.S. 
sea,  fem.  N.S.  =  2^  O.S.  masc. 

^  t 

stone,  common  N.S.  fem.  O.S. 


36 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


laia  harp,  masc.  O.S.  fern.  N.S. 

night,  fern.  N.S.  O.S,  masc. 

»*  * 

hundred,  fern.  O.S.  and  N.S.  but  Jlsil  masc.  in  Al.  See  §  26. 

east,  common  U.  fern.  K.  In  O.S.  usually  masc.,  some- 
times  fern. 

rain,  masc.  O.S.  fern.  N.S. 
jles  fish,  masc.  O.S.  fern.  N.S. 
fire,  masc.  N.S.  fern.  O.S. 

laubalo  or  ordination,  masc.  O.S.,  U.;  fern,  (usually) 

K.^  and  (sometimes)  O.S. 

time,  fern.  N.S.  O.S.  masc. 

cloud,  masc.  O.S.  fern.  N.S.  (not  used  in  O.S.  by  Western 
Syrians  ?). 

iSaiti  grave,  masc.  O.S.  fern.  N.S. 
qran  (7d),  masc.  K.  fern.  U. 

heaven,  fern.  sing,  in  N.S. ;  in  O.S.  masc.  and  fern.  sing,  and 
masc.  plur. 

sun,  masc.  in  O.S.  and  N.S.  usually,  but  sometimes  fern,  in 
N.S.  and  rarely  in  O.S. 

or  lamp,  fern.  N.S.  =  O.S.  masc. 

ikoifs  or  mulberry,  see  above. 

Some  are  common  as  air,  a  beast. 

The  rule  for  forming  a  feminine  from  a  masculine  is  to  change 

^  ^  ^  0 
the  termination  into  Jx.  as  2iQ>oiQ>  horse,  UssaoSQ  mare\  2aDQA> 


2  By  attraction,  because  the  second  noun  is  feminine.  So  colloquially  a  gram¬ 
matical  error  is  often  made  with  the  substantive  verb :  as  OOJ 

(CJ^)  ,  that  day  is  Saturday. 


17] 


GENDER. 


87 


Syrian,  a  Syrian  woman.  If  necessary  a  vowel  is  added  for 

euphony,  as  dog,  hitch,  or  king, 

or  queen]  2ao^  hull,  J^do^s  cow  (ta-wirta,  not  td-irta). 

Some  feminines  end  in  ^  as  those  formed  from  masculines  in 

m  t  y 

jl  preceded  by  a  consonant ;  thus  }Isjq>  f.  .jLiiCa  both  a  hush  ; 

*  y  m  t  »»v  y 

roast  meat,  cutlet ;  they  then  usually  lose  their  euphonic  vowel. 

But  the  O.S.  IIomi  .  in  N.S.  Iom  or  Iooua  serpent,  makes  fern. 

(or  'oou^)  in  N.S..  So  also  the  following ;  but  the  forms  marked 
with  an  asterisk  are  themselves  feminine. 


opi  god 
jlii  lion 

huttock  (O.S.  side) 

cave 

wolf 

la  hear 

^  II* 

230133  gadfly 

fornicator 

t 

angel 

i'^ger 

Sidtan,  captain 
Satan,  devil 
goat* 
heel* 

JiabJiw  sheep 


fern. 


or 


^32 

mi  I 

a  small  cave 

>2^323  or  ^323 

tT*  «  ■  <■ 

m  t  It* 

>iLi30fl3  or  ;^3o53 

•  »  I  II*  »  II* 

L!SoiQ>  (also  used  for  the  raisin). 

▼ 

or 

7  /  ^11 

'Z'CZ. 

«  /  II 

74i:j3^  (In  K.  both  have  a) 

m  /  II 

>S^o  a?ic?  /S^o,  fern.  iUib  (O.S.  '3) 


y 


38 


GRAMMAR  OF  .VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


workman  fern. 
lamb  Ti.) 

.■ 

2)orch 

Inapd  adulterer 

goose  or  gander  . . . 
shepherd 

Ixayx  s  un 

it 

1^0^  worm 

n  a 

iixis  fox 


m  0 

u.  or  ;4a4  K. 

Ti.  id. 

HiJiap  also  as  masc. 


•  t 

'f'Giy  of  the  smi  or 
Tkh.  or  Tkh.  U.). 

0  /  •;  <<  II 

(«s  Tkh.) 

■  /  «  II 


So  also  .JiLjiauM  2^2^  Al.  sycomore  (=  }a2^  Tkh.  or 

*  /  II  ^  4  ^ 

U.).  And  so  the  words  with  double  plurals  in  §  19. 

The  following  do  not  take  an  euphonic  vowel : — heathen,  f. 
martyr,  f. 


t  1^  ^ 

2S:3U  U.,  O.S.  companion  (Al.  K.  makes  K.,  O.S.  J:s3^ 

U.  or  J^dooLm  U.  (Pthakha  like  Zqapa)  or  Al.;  soti 

(Al.  often  a)  makes  (Al.  ;  j5^2  landlord  ^^4.2;  Jiia^2 

(pron.  'i)  husband's  brother  i^lsO'^1  (i)  ;  l66iO>^  U.  K.)  paternal 


uncle,  4^4-  «-s- ;  ioil;  u.  K.,  O.S)  maternal  uncle, 

father  in  law  or  widower 

Liboa  K.,  O.S.  or  U.  mWe,  U.  or  ^boa 

K.,  O.S.;  2^03  height,  ^i^ob  hill',  allegory  maxim. 

*  #  *  #1 


When  the  noun  does  not  admit  the  idea  of  sex  the  femi¬ 
nine  usually  denotes  the  diminutive  of  the  masculine ;  but  in  Tiari, 
where  feminine  forms  are  much  used,  there  is  often  no  difference  in 
meaning. 


17,  18] 


NUMBER. 


89 


Feminines  are  often  expressed  by  a  different  word,  as  man, 
woman  or  wife  (laoL^  in  U  =  husband,  in  K.  as  O.S.  =  man). 
In  K.  the  form  for  woman  is  also  used  (§  19). 

The  proper  names  ^3<xtiD  Holy  Ohost,  (or 

the  Word  are  usually  masc.  in  N.S. 


§  18.  Number 

There  are  two  numbers  in  N.S. ;  singular  and  plural.  As  in  O.S., 
there  is  no  dual,  the  only  relics  being  two  for  O.S. 

(or  ^^)  two,  f.  IC.  for  O.S.  and  Egypt. 


The  Plural  is  formed  in  the  following  ways.  or  J _  of  the 

singular  is  changed  into  : 


1-  ^  king,  m. 

•  I 

2.  Or  51^0.:^,  heart,  m. 

2^  Or  ;^o,  ;iou.i  brother,  m. 

3.  Or  ;Sv^,  side,  f. 

4.  Or  noble,  m. 


5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 
9. 


Or  j  the  last  consonant  being  doubled  and  taking  Zqapa, 

frog,  la^  f. 

of  sing,  becomes  ih^  as  kerchief,  f- 

t  *  •' 

Or  2^0,  lip,  2^0^^  f- 

Or  I'is'is,  woman,  f. 

i'  ‘  '  »* 

Or  courtyard,  f., 

becomes  l^sO:  l^oSs  request,  ^isoSS  f. 


or 


40 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Notes,  (i)  If  the  noun  has  not  the  termination  or 
these  endings  are  added  on. 

(ii)  The  mark  Siami  must  always  be  placed  over  a  plural  sub¬ 
stantive  or  adjective. 

(iii)  The  above  endings  apply  to  U.  Sh.  MB.,  but  in  U.  ^  is 

hard,  in  Sh.  MB.  soft.  For  K.  Al.  in  all  the  forms  with  ;is  we 
must  substitute  Zqapa  for  Zlama  and  write  ,  In  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  J. 
the  ^  is  silent,  or  becomes  a  feeble  0  ,  We  thus  have  K. 

Al.  Q-  Graw.  J.  (oxytone). 


(iv)  In  these  forms  also  in  U.  the  ^  is  often  silent  in  speaking. 


but  the  vowel  is  preserved :  thus  listMOJBa  is  often  pronounced 
susawa-i  (horses).  [This  word  must  be  distinguished  from 

mares.]  The  word  villages,  is  often  pronounced  mawa-i. 

See  §  26. 


(v)  Of  these  plurals  the  first  and  sixth  are  by  far  the  most 
common.  Generally  speaking  all  regularly  formed  derivatives  (§§  76 
— 82)  take  these  forms.  But  the  plural  cannot  be  determined  by  the 

gender.  Many  masculines  take  the  ^  in  the  plural,  many  feminines 

make  the  plural  without  it. 

(vi)  Dissyllables  in  2^  either  drop  the  dot  of  Khwasa  and  take 

a  euphonic  vowel  under  the  first  consonant,  as  creation  or  a 

creature,  creatures  (or  ^  ^) ;  or  retain  Khwasa,  and  make 

the  plural  ^  as  prophetess,  pi.  (or  Polysyl¬ 
lables  in  (which  in  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J.  are  of  the  form  in 

the  plural  usually  retain  the  dot  of  y,  in  U.  MB.  Sh.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  J.  and 


drop  it  in  K.  Al. ;  as  hat :  pi.  or 

(oxytone).  The  O.S.  usage  is  as  K.  Al. 


§18] 


REGULAR  PLURALS. 


41 


(vii)  Nouns  in  take  the  first  plural,  but  drop  the  dot  under 
the  second  yi,  as  f.  plan,  advice,  pi.  ^  67  (3). 

/  J.  tJ  \  / 

(viii)  Nouns  in  yO  or  o  (§  16)  make  their  plural  in  Joo, 
rarely  ^o,  but  ;^oo-  in  Sal.  Q.  Gaw. 

(ix)  Nouns  in  follow  this  model :  prophecy,  pi. 

i^o;^  (ft.).  The  corresponding  forms  in  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J.  are 

;OOU34  sing. 


(x)  Other  nouns  in  Joo  (the  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  form  of  2^0-)  make 

0  m  * 

their  plural  in  as  ^^6^3  requests. 


(xi)  In  Al.  we  find  a  few  plurals  in  ’.  in  Arabic  words,  as 
people,  pi. 

(xii)  Many  nouns  have  more  than  one  plural.  See  the  following 
lists. 


(xiii)  Many  foreign  nouns  ending  in  a  closed  syllable  with  short 
Zlama  lengthen  the  vowel  in  the  plural ;  as  head  man  of 

a  village,  pi.  Jjpu'a  or  JjpuO .  Sometimes  a  final  letter  in  foreign 

words  is  hardened  in  the  plural,  as  yyiobb  K.  lodging  place  on  a 

journey,  pi. 


Lists  of  the  Regular  Plurals. 

1.  The  usual  form.  Note  (u)  ai  companion,  seed, 

wife’s  brother ;  (6)  23^2  glove  (also  3),  2333  ^33 

holt  socket,  ^33  echo’,  (c)  jibs  SOjm  old  man,  ;jC3a3  3^ 

old  woman,  yj5>303  bishop’s  successor,  U.  palate,  all  of 

S.  GR.  6 


42 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  18 

which  take  the  first  plural  irregularly^;  also  (d)  some  in  ;  viz. 
gelding,  olive,  ]^oisO  fist,  death,  a  hafta  (=  8  lbs. 

t  f  * 

avoirdupois),  resin,  sweat^  (in  Tkh.  with  8d  ph), 

■4  4 

how  (but  it  usually  takes  8th  pi.  as  O.S.),  mulberry  or 

(also  6).  See  §  17.  {e)  Jsil  man,  makes  for  O.S.  Jxil  (in  Al.  2). 

2.  In  Ti.  this  is  very  common,  especially  for  proper  names, 
as  men  named  DinJcha.  In  K.  MB.  all  the  letters  take 

this  plural  as  lisooo  (4N  MB.,  soft  Waus,  elsewhere  1st  pi. 

i 

m.  master,  in  K.  Sal.  See  §  19. 

2^2  m.  roof,  O.S.  2^2. 

2bo2  f  manger,  O.S.  . 

^  $ 

2Mkb2  f.  mill^  also  the  game  ‘  sacks  on  the  mill  ’,  O.S.  K.  2. 

•'  I* 

m.  lion  O.S.  Also  1. 
liisl  m.  country  O.S. 

m.  father,  foreign. 

2adi  f.  ditch.  Also  1. 

2i^  m.  path,  foreign. 

f.  spear,  foreign.  Also  3. 
pool  f.,  also  1,  foreign. 

(Eastern  O.S.  m.  bridge  Ti.  In  U.  1. 

23^  m.  companion  O.S.  In  Al.  1  (^). 

2^  or  29 9^  serpent  Barely  3.  O.S. 
m.  K.  servant,  §  1 15  b. 

1  The  second  noun  only  being  altered.  Most  of  the  compounds  in  §  16  have  no 
plural  or  have  plural  like  the  singular.  See  also  §  19. 

2  For  the  latter  3  is  pronounced 


18] 


REGULAR  PLURALS. 


43 


m.  strength,  host  O.S. 

m.  G  khan,  nobleman,  foreign. 

m.  hack,  girdle,  belt  (with  first  pi.  =  loins),  O.S.  . 

in.  (O.S.  ^«m)  bridegroom,  sister’s  {daughters)  husband. 
Also  1.  See  page  29,  note. 

;oa  f.  recess  in  wall.  Also  3.  (O.S.  ,  pi.  Jm.) 

JaS  m.  heart  O.S. 

’  ## 

f.  night,  O.S. 
m.  barn.  Also  1  and  3. 

m.  K.  paternal  uncle.  (In  U.  lo&syL  and  1.) 

2bao  m.  lord,  possessor  O.S. 
m.  river  O.S. 

Jaojsq  in.  horse,  O.S.  lloofo. 

•'  *  • 

Ihl^  m.  festival ;  rarely  4.  O.S. 

f.  island,  in  Sal.  See  5  19.  Turk. 

m  '  €? 

m.  K.  paternal  uncle,  not  O.S.  ? 
f.  army,  foreign. 

iSaib  grave,  f.  N.S.  m.  O.S.  Also  1. 
m.  U.  servant,  foreign. 

m.  (or  O.S.  October  or  November.  With 

*  f  0  \7  M  ' 

first  plural,  Lasfis  ^’ia,  =  autumn. 


2^  Days  of  the  week,  from  Sun.  to  Thurs.  incl.,  in  Ti.  Also 
1  and  4. 


m.  K.  eveyiing.  See  4  and  §  19. 

i  ^  • 

youth  (abstract),  foreign.  In  pi.  youthful  follies. 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


K.  in.  mateimal  uncle  O.S. 
f.  sister  (O.S.,  but  pi.  in  O.S. 

m 

f.  village  (rare  in  O.S.  See  note  iv  above,  and  |  26,  note 
5).  In  Q.  JJ». 

f.  fet^ce  (O.S.,  but  rare  in  sing. ;  O.S.  pi.  Js2). 
f.  grace,  Arab. 


3.  ^0072  b  state,  condition, 

*  i 

foreign. 

f.  road  O.S.  (=  K.) 

2^2  f-  hand,  also  1.  (In  O.S.  first 
»■  0 

pl.,  also  )I^2;  and  j4^^2 
handles.) 

f.  heel,  Turk. ;  or 
f.  plough  handle,  foreign, 
f.  crescent  (rare)  O.S. 
aldi  f.  foot.  Also  1. 
f.  earth  O.S. 
f.  testicle  O.S. 

233^  f-  threshing  floor,  O.S.  2Sd2. 

f.  earthen  howl.  Also  1. 

2ltjb  m.  flock,  O.S.  3 . 

2^^2  Csaa  f.  glove.  Also  1.  See 
page  42,  note  1,  and  §  19. 

JaA  f.  U.,  m.  K.  pocket. 

<v>  ■ 

2^  See  2. 


f.  time,  in  Al.  Elsewhere  1. 

f.  garment  Also  1. 

pit.  Also  1  (f  N.S.  m. 
O.S.). 

f-  long  cloak. 
f.  cannon  hall. 
rn.  camel.  Also  1  (O.S. 

f.  tail  coat.  Also  1. 

m.  grass.  Also  1  and  5.  In 
O.S.  stuhhle. 

^,1.  Ti.,  f.  soul,  self,  Pers. 
See  §  20  (5). 

233  f.  hear.  Also  1.  O.S. 

^  «»• 

2Lb  m.  hawk.  Also  1. 

s 

2‘Lb  m.  moiiastery  O.S. 

f.  side,  O.S.  b  . 

<!■  !• 

23  bb  f.  wound. 

:ow  m.  f  air.  Also  1. 


18] 


REGULAR  PLURALS. 


45 


/V  0 

^  #  V  < 


m.  temple.  Also  1.  O.S. 

[Used  also  for  any  one  of  the 
divisions  of  a  church,  esp.  for 
the  nave.] 

in.  chanter  (as  of  bagpipes). 
See  2. 

f.  large  cog.  Also  1. 
m.  U.  maternal  uncle. 
f.  needle.  Also  1.  (O.S. 
Ti.  ;^1.) 

2'^  m.  wine.  Also  1  and  4  (as 

O.S.). 

f  field,  column  (of  a  book). 
Also  4.  O.S. 

2sXm  f.  K.  small  spear. 

f  nail,  claw.  See  §  19.  O.S. 

Ti.  Al.  Z.  (or  '<5u  u.  Tkh.) 

m.  day  (in  K. ;  also  1.  K.  Al. 
Z.  ;  in  U.  Al.  Z.  4).  O.S. 

jio*  m.  dove.  Also  1.  O.S. 

^  f-  mother  (O.S.  ^392 :  pi.  in 
O.S.  I'isapOl  and 
sea  N.S.  f.,  O.S.  Jsau  m. 

See  2. 

f.  a  in  a  vineyard. 
U09  f.  inkstand,  foreign. 

0^ 

2boA  f  bellows,  kiln  O.S. 

f 

Jaa  See  §  19. 


2 


}j6aa  (a  Ti.,  a  Al.  Z.)  f  belly, 
womb ;  O.S. 

f.  6oa^.  Also  1. 

D0)0!i  f  Also  1.  See  §  19. 
See  2. 

f  a  wood.  Also  1. 

;ixap  f.  grindstone  O.S. 

;aoi  in.  (=  vices). 

m.  bayonet. 

Jai  f  Also  5. 

jAtt  m.  /zo(y\ 

0 

Ihoas,  m.  ford.  Also  1. 

2a^  f.  island,  in  K.  See  2  and 
§  19.  Turk, 
f.  time,  O.S.  ^  , 

;»oL  f.  skirt,  petticoat,  pron. 
nearly  oyma  in  U. 

thigh,  O.S.  ^ . 

in.  cloud,  sponge.  Also  1 ; 
m.  O.S.,  f  N.S.  See  §  17. 
jLii  f  fountain  O.S.  (with  1  = 
eyes). 

lofxbyL  m.  U.  paternal  uncle. 

f  bier.  Also  1.  In  O.S. 
a  bed. 

m.  sole  of  foot  or  boot.  Also  1 . 
f  (a  as  ^)  finger,  O.S.  jia^. 


46 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


IssOm  f-  shirt. 

lyh  f-  calamity,  in  K.  (In  U.  1.) 
f.  horn.  Also  4.  O.S.  a . 
f.  castle,  foreign, 
f.  spirit  O.S.  Also  1,  K. 
2^03  f.  spear  O.S.  Also  1. 

ni.  shoulder.  Also  4.  O.S. 
=  N.S.  shovel. 

’  S-/  /  \J  0 

fMX,  see  §  19. 

0  ^ 


2^:x  f  wax. 

0 

;»ios  m.  sun.  Also  1.  O.S. 
m.  leg.  Also  1,  4. 

f.  lamp,  O.S.  m. 

f.  wheel.  Also  5. 

f.  metal  basin,  or  O.S. 
Also  1. 

jMeois  f.  strap. 


4.  Days  of  the  week,  esp.  in 
U.  See  2\ 

f  garden,  Turk. 

oi*  ni.  melon  field. 

Also  1.  (In  Al.  a  garden.) 

Jxjsoy^is  ni.  U.  evening.  See  also 
**  *  •* 

2^  and  §  19. 

m.  side,  O.S.  Ti.^. 

m.  husband',  in  K.  as  O.S. 
a  man.  Also  1.  See  §  19. 
V  Ash. 
m.  wall. 

m.  fin,  wing.  See  §  19. 
(O.S.  p*- 

m.  sheepfold. 

m.  nobleman  (vfiih  1,  great). 
2^03  f  ^dace  O.S. 


2303  m.  K.  the  gums  (of  the 
mouth)  pi.  same  meaYiing. 

(In  U.  laiM-) 

V  vT".  ^ 

m.  devil  O.S. 


^4?  m.  shop,  foreign. 

m.JJ.  arm,  K.  (which 

in  U.  is  a  yard),  O.S.  jLSp. 
m.  word,  Arab.  Also  1. 

0 

26«m  ir-  vision  O.S. 

"  ^77 


f  field.  See  3.  O.S. 
230V  m.  mountain  O.S. 

or  See  3. 

2abka  m.  tent,  Turk.  Also  1. 

m  i(v 

or  Jaaa  m*.  lane,  quarter 

of  a  city,  foreign. 

3ca  m.  keyhole.  Also  1. 


18] 


REGULAR  PLURALS. 


47 


m.  vineyard  O.S. 
oifx  f.  morning  U.  §  8  (4). 
obO  f.  landed  property. 
lisOiaO  m.  death.  Also  1.  O.S. 
in.  mile.  Also  1. 
in.  thing,  in  U.  See  §  19. 
m.  side,  foreign. 

^OJCQ  f.  dunghill. 

J^uiQ>  m.  seashore. 

1^1^  See  2. 

m.  street. 
m.  stable,  foreign. 

ni.  mouth,  edge  of  a  sword. 
Also  1.  O.S. 


16^  U-,  K.  m.  branch. 

m.  cheeh.  See  §  19. 

;iib  See  3. 

See  3. 

m.  chief  (with  1,  head)  O.S. 
;^oi  m. footprint,  stead.  Also  1,  5. 
liox  m.  wall  (of  a  town). 

in.  thong  of  a  whip.  Also  1. 

m.  name.  O.S.  (pi.  in 

O.S.  JoitSafli).  See  §  19. 
iJO^  See  3. 

Al.  border,  frontier.  O.S. 
m.  morsel.  Also  1. 

m.  door.  Also  1.  O.S. 


5.  m.  breast  O.S. 
f.  knee,  O.S.  'o3 . 

^  it  « 

See  3. 

m.  huttock.  Also  1.  O.S. 
K.  vegetables,  pi.  only. 

;:3Db  See  3. 

^  <■ 

^Of  iR-  stripe. 

m.  eyelash,  O.S. 

0 

m.  dot. 
m.  crack. 

'  Mrv 

See  3. 

^  <# 


(fi)  Al.  m.  hole.  [In  U.K. 
eye  of  a  needle  (1st.  pL), 
O.S.  hole.  =  female.] 

iScj  Ri-  box  on  the  ear.  Also  1. 

^  a 

m.  snovt.  Also  1. 

m.  nostril  (with  1,  holes  in 
a  beehive). 

m.  half,  O.S.  d .  Also  1. 
See  §  27. 
f.  frog. 

m.  crumb. 

l^oJb  m.  thumb. 


48 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


neighbourhood,  pi.  only. 

«  ' 

f.  handle. 

ihoi  See  4. 


m.  skirt,  border,  lower 

'  I  it 

flag  of  coat,  O.S.  Also  1. 
;hk  K.  m.  a  slap.  Also  1. 

See  3. 


6.  The  usual  plural  of  nouns  in  Note 

§  29  (9). 

7.  f.  lip  O.S.,  also  9  rarely.  village,  see  2^ 

n  ■ 

8.  .{ici  f.  bottom. 
iOkli  f-  woman.  See  ?  19. 

^  m  t 

f  company,  band.  Also  1. 

Tkh.  f.  sweat,  see  1. 


f-  (rare). 

^03^  f-  Friday  O.S. 

■  0 

f  bow  O.S.  Also  1,  6.  (The 
is  radical.)  See  §  17. 


9.  Almost  all  words  in  iko  may  take  both  this  and  the  sixth 
plural,  but  J^oxl  letter,  and  llisoS^h  request,  take  the  ninth  only. 
For  prayer,  see  §  19.  l^^OuJsO  plague  makes 

f-  the  Holy  Loaf  O.S.  c/mrc/i  (the  society)  O.S. 

In  O.S.  also  the  building, 
f.  a  rival  wife, 
ikisoi^  f.  apron. 

f.  lamb  K.,  O.S. 
f.  K.  conversation,  O.S.  m. 

jf  f.  cold  (In  pi.  Pthakha  has 

the  sound  of  Zqapa)  O.S.  The 
pi.  =  cold  weather. 

f  week,  Saturday  O.S.  (i»»^  is 

radical). 


^'^303  f  blessing  O.S. 
f  evil  O.S. 

f.  virgin  O.S.  Also  6. 
f.  ball. 

;^33  f  courtyard  O.S. 

.i’bo-:  f.  maiden,  young  woman. 

f-  benefit,  good  O.S. 
lisyst  h  burden. 

^oi;  f.  curse  O.S. 

See  7. 


19] 


IRREGULAR  PLURALS. 


49 


§  19.  (i)  Irregular  Plurals. 

»*  t*  • 

Singular.  Plural. 

m.  master,  landlo7'd.  Turk. 


U.  (Turk.  pL);  K.  Sal.,  2. 


SkjS^ol  U.  or  iisSOOa)  K.  MB.  U.,  or  iS^oI  U.,  or 

•  /  •  <  i"  '  "  i*  ' 


m.  master  workman.  Cf.  Al. 
ui3^A>2  (or  iiL)  Sir  (also  used 

t  *  ▼ 

with  other  pronom.  affixes). 

m.  brother. 
m.  hole  O.S. 


iSisJ^aoo]  MB.,  or 

•  »  I  I  *  / 

'  i' 

MB.,  or  }:sbS^JQ>o2  XJ.,  or 

2^ob^A>ooi  K. 

}X<Xm2  Al.  Elsewhere  2^ 

?  ■* 


Also  1. 

m.  Ti.  upper  room.  §16.  ?4.AKv;^ . 

*  •* 

Also  4. 


2a;ba3;^  m.  U.  eveninq. 

&3  K.  U.,  O.S.  or  ia  Q.  Sal.  or  ltoi>3  U  .(rarely  bdwd-i), 


Gaw.  J.,  m.  house. 


or  2ii3  Sal.  etc.,  or 


[In  the  singular  it  usuall}"  means  a  room  with  an  oven 
in  the  floor  for  baking  bread.  In  this  sense  2oNifd3  of  winter  is 

sometimes  added.  2S^3  (which  is  also  the  O.S.  plural)  is  a  collectiun 

of  buildings  in  a  courtyard,  the  English  house,  but  also  houses.  The 
^  is  radical.] 


iis^  (also  2^2  K.),  f.  woman. 


2ii  K.  Al.,  or  2ai'2  K.,  or 

Ti.  Al.  But  in  U.  K.  Sal.  Q. 
Gaw.,  8. 

•  « 


(Also  natives  as  O.S.) 

0  *  * 


f.  egg  O.S. 

ai  m.  son  (const,  st.)  O.S. 

2^X2  fva  in.  fellcyw  countryman. 

;^ya  m.  man,  human  being 
(§16  ii.6)  O.S. 

[But  the  other  compounds  of  is  ^  §  16  ii.  b,  usually  take  the 
first  plural,  the  second  noun  only  being  altered.] 


S.  GR. 


50 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Singular.  Plural. 

m.  (Al.  5>)  son.  Vioa-,  rarely  1  (Al.  a,  not  Z.). 

f.  u.'  K.,  or  Q.,  or  jisia  U,  iUa  K.  O.S.,  Q. 

lisyiii  Al.  (O.S.  d)  daughter,  Sal.  Gaw.,  or  U. 

•  '  .» 

girl. 

m.  husband,  man,  p.  46. 
ni.  fin,  wing. 


Ash.  Elsewhere  1,  3. 


Usually  1. 
See  also  4. 


f.  xsland  (rare  in  U.^  O.S.  (^N  O.S.^.  A.1so  6. 

f.  fieece. 

-5^.?  tear  (not  Ash.).  O.S. 

Al.  K.  banquet. 

oSf  h  leech. 

0 

f.  sin  O.S. 


Al. 

Al.  (as  O.S.).  Also  6  as 
elsewhere  always. 

(not  colloquial). 


23.%  f.  O.S.,  or  or  U.  (f  K.),  or  J^'3% 


claw. 


U.  {^s  Sal.),  or  2'^. 


(The  first  form  usually  used  for  a  human  nail.) 
ujoioaf  5ea^,cAafr(O.S.}jtaDaa).  2^^0j6!ioa  K.asO.S.  Elsewhere  1. 

U.  (^  K.),  or  3  in  Tkh.  Sal. 

4' 

K.  as  O.S.  (U.  is)>  or 
'a  Ti.  (Zqapa  sound  in  all.) 

U.  (Zqapa  sound),  or  Ti. 

U.  f  (50  Sal.),  or  Makes  plural  from  the  latter 
U.  bladder. 

^  Used  of  any  unmarried  woman. 


Jaa  f  daughter,  girl  {old  maid^.). 
O.S.  (or  a  Ti.)  bride,  or 
Gaw.,  or  Gaw.,  or  cSa 

•  t  '  0 


19] 


IRREGULAR  PLURALS. 


51 


Singular. 
f-  city  O.S. 

9010^  f.  seal. 


f.  U.,  O.S.,  or  l^oiao  K. 

/  m 

O.S.  oath  Ash.). 


f.  U.  K.  like  ^),  or 
Al.  hair. 
f.  verb  O.S. 

^  ## 


5^ 


m.  participle  O.S. 


U.  Tkh.  Ash.  AL,  or 
(p)  Ti.  (O.S.  ni.  thing. 

L  concubine. 

ti 

m.  hypocrite  O.S. 
f.  ear,  or  2^ai  Q-  Sal.  Gaw. 

'  m  0 

(Also  handle  in  K.) 


oioi  L  XJ.  platfo7'm  or 
f.  peg  O.S. 

•-  ti  J.  1/ 

L  island  (rare  in  K.)  Turk. 

■ 

m.  Tkh.  Al.  people  O.S. 

Al.  f.  barren  woman. 
f.  prayer  O.S.,  or 
Q.  Sal.  Gaw. 


^55  m.  cheek. 

m.  a  fraction  O.S. 


Plural. 

U.  (^  K.  ^  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.). 
laoc^odo.  Also  1,  3. 

u.  (Is  K.,  O.S.). 


2^  K.  Al.  as  O.S.  In  U.  6. 

t  •• 


or  (not  colloquial), 

(not  colloquial). 

K.  Al.;  in  U.  4; 

Ti. ;  ii'yM  Ash. 
loois^,  rarely 

V  *  ^  g  g  ^ 

(not  colloquial). 

K.  Al.  (^  U.),  or  J^slcu  Q. 
-  •  ' 

Sal.  Gaw.,  or  Ash.,  or 

^  g  •  I# 

2^*^^  Al. 

or  ;^:ofviQ>. 

'  %  *  '  \  * 
r  i* 

2a^^  U.  (Turk.  pi.).  In  K.  3, 

in  Sal.  2. 

Ibftiii*.  as  O.S. 

.•  '  ’ 

U.  (is  K.  Al.  O.S.).  Also 


';‘“s 

6  U.,  or  lisOoS^  Sal.  Q.  Gaw., 


or 


^5 

Sal.  J. 


Also  4. 


52 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  19 


Singular.  Plural. 

^  f.  kernel,  also  a  quarter  of  as  O.S.,  or 

a  walnut,  or  K. 

m.  tortoise. 

ado  yiisxti  rainbow  516  ii.  q. 

0  n  tJ  ty 

2£sSa  a  throb  of  the  heart. 

m  n 

iiix  m.  noun  O.S. 


UyJd. 


<  ••  • 


yado  ^iSXb  (rare). 

%  0  ** 

Icfim  (not  colloquial). 


(The  corresponding  N.S.  name,  takes  the  fourth  plural.) 
iMX  f.  heaven  O.S.  (now  sing.).  yoOk,  Also  1;  and  in  Ash.  Al.  3. 


I  n 

‘S'  ^ 


>  ^  0 


f  K.  crown  of  the  head,  Tkh.,  Ti. ;  ^^syOLS 


§  16  ii.  g. 

Ux  f.  year  (i  Al.  as  O.S.). 
lis^o'is  f-  cow  (O.S.  J^ad^s). 


Ash. 

JiJi 

qrr?* 

Ti.  Elsewhere  6. 


The  abbreviated  diminutives  of  §  79  as  a  rule  have  no  plural  (but 
see  above) ;  and  so  many  words  whose  sense 

excludes  a  plural.  >^oa  place,  has  no  plural  in  U.  (in  K.  6)  but 

borrows  that  of  ;ao?  (4). 

Note  that  Jai  is  a  pair  of  tongs  (m.),  is  several  pairs  \  and 
that  luorld,  is  often  used  in  a  plural  or  collective  sense  (men, 

people)]  as  the  people  of  the  house.  Some  have  no  sin¬ 

gular,  as  water  (Al.  as  0  S.)  il:  life  O.S.,  iaxSS  mercy  O.S., 
Jc^i  parents  O.S.  (from  O.S.  sing.  Jai  father),  (^  O.S.) 

spiritual  parents,  IxoiyZt  environs,  =  money  O.S.  (but  ^Of 

m.  a  rare  word  =  a  piece  of  money),  yd'dad  neighbourhood. 

«*  * 

(ii)  Double  Plurals. 

Many  nouns  denoting  collections  of  units  (e.g.  corn)  have  two 


§19] 


DOUBLE  PLURALS. 


53 


plurals,  one  to  denote  the  whole  species,  the  other  individual  units. 
Thus  =  barley,  =  barley  corns.  So  we  have  : — 

I*  k'  * 


Singular, 
white  cherry, 
stocking,  or  K. 

dried  pea. 
grain. 

yellow-beard, 
wheat,  O.S. 
bead,  O.S. 

I 

pea. 

top  boot,  or  jikicfc  K. 
precious  stone, 
a  shot  (of  a  gun). 
raisin. 
jLbftaca  eyeglass. 

roasted  pea. 


Plural. 

JjSuiA  rarely  6. 

and  6  {odd  stockings). 
and  6. 

(in  numbering  ;  e.g.  }i‘a 
a  hundred  things)  and  6. 
and  6. 

as  O.S.  and  6. 

2'Sba^  (O.S.  rarely  6. 

rarely  6. 

also  6  {odd  boots). 

Jixjja  O.S.,  also  6. 

V  " 

XihyA  also  6. 

?*4b^**  ^  also  6, 

•  0  / 

also  6. 

2oodiX!3^  also  6. 
also  6. 

JX^^XJSO  also  6. 

’  ,t  •  •• 

liooJO  also  6. 


bean. 

m  / 

y  apricot. 

i!^'s(y\xy  a  shot  (of  a  gun). 

m  0  ^  #’  ■ 

barleycorn,  or  ?^>vm  .  O.S.  :aAJ0»  also  6. 

Ash.,  or  AfsSxffi  Ash. ;  O.S. 

.^4^-^a.y  U.  (^  K.)  grape  (O.S.  U.  (^  K.,  O.S.),  also  6. 

In  Ash. 


54 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§§  19,  20 


Singular. 

Plural. 

lock  of  hair. 

{'Oi  complete  set),  also  6 
{odd  locks). 

chestnut  (b). 

also  6. 

1^0^  shoe  (sa-wilta). 

{a  pair), also  6  (odd  shoes),  or 

J. 

(or  so  ?)  half  a  mou- 

K.,  or  11. 

stache. 

the  whole  moustache  (also  6  ?). 

lily  O.S. 

as  O.S.  (also  6  ?). 

tumiip. 

(also  6  ?). 

trowser  leg. 

or  of 

ti'owsers,  also  in  K. 
in  this  sense,  (also  6  ?). 

.jLatis  head. 

m  0  '  » 

also  6. 

§  20.  Substantives  with  pronominal  affixes. 

For  a  table  of  the  affixes  see  §  11. 

If  the  noun  ends  in  \  or  J, this  ending  is  dropped  and 

replaced  by  the  affix,  thus,  king,  my  king,  JaouQ>  horse, 

thy  horse,  Uoa  S071S,  their  sons.  The  same  affixes 

are  added  to  singular  as  to  plural  nouns.  Thus  my  king  and 

my  kings  are  only  distinguished  by  Siami.  If  the  noun  has 
not  the  above  endings,  the  affixes  are  added  on,  as  enemy, 

our  enemy.  Those  compounds  in  §  16  which  take  the  first 
plural  (§§  18,  19,  pp.  42,  49)  add  the  affix  to  the  second  noun.  Cf.  O.S. 

thy  phila^ithropy. 

Notes.  (1)  Words  in  drop  the  dot  of  Khwasa.  Thus 

owr  meaning,  from  (another  form  of 


§20] 


NOUNS  WITH  AFFIXES. 


55 


(2)  Words  in  or  o  dron  the  ^  and  take  o  ;  as  v^aiOOOM^ 

//*■  /  <  %  < 


his  affliction,  from  , 


(3)  Words  in  have  both  as  a  vowel  and  as  a  consonant :  as 

your  (pi.)  thing,  mindiydkhon ;  and  so  in  words  like 

u(770^0^  from  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  J.  (=  K.  U.)  bed  (shwi-yu). 

(4)  ^  =  «  friend  of  mine,  ^  a  garden  of 

mine. 


(5)  Self\?>  expressed  by  Thus  myself,  thyself 

etc.  In  Ti.  etc.,  oi  my  oivn  self,  cf.  §  lb- 

For  ourselves  we  may  have  either  A  or  •xV^.  but  the  latter 
may  also  mean  our  souls.  My  own  is  expressed  by  ^  and  so  for 

the  other  persons  ;  as  V^ur  own  book.  The  preposi¬ 
tion  a  is  often  prefixed  ;  as  myself  came.  Note 

that  is  feminine,  and  we  therefore  have  cr^ 

=  he  emptied  himself  Phil.  ii.  7,  where  the  participle  is  feminine : 
lit.  his  self  was  emptied  by  him. 


(6)  The  O.S.  soul  is  thus  used :  .  alone,  lit.  by  myself 

[contrast  =  myself].  So  for  the  other  persons.  Thus  .^djiv  lisl 
they  came  alone.  In  Al.  and  often  in  K.  we  have 
or  s^poAa  (0  •S.  u)  for  alone.  The  O.S.  y*  or  =  N.S. 

'A- 


(7)  enough,  takes  affixes  like  a  noun;  as  ;^OiQ>a  enough  for 

you.  So  necessary,  esp.  in  K.,  as  necessary  for  me ;  then 

n  '• 

Zlarna  is  lengthened,  but  not  in  necessary  for  you  (pi.). 

(8)  ;a}^  here  takes  affixes ;  up  to  this  point  on  my 

body  (pointing). 


56 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


(9)  The  affixes  are  often  redundant,  especially  in  Al.  though  not 

so  often  as  in  O.S.,  as  (T^oys  the  Son  of  him,  of  God. 

(10)  When  there  is  an  epithet,  the  affix  is  attached  to  the  sub¬ 
stantive,  as  uOloddi  his  wicked  father. 


(11)  Lord  (of  God  only)  and  Ai  master,  landlord,  are  not 

used  with  affixes.  For  the  latter  is  used.  For  the  former 

is  not  now  used  (though  it  is  used  wffien  =  owner),  but  the  O.S. 
lit.  my  Lord,  lit.  my  Lady,  are  retained  as  titles  of  bishops 

and  saints,  as  Mar  Shimun,  alxbo  St  Mary. 

For  see  (14)  below. 

(12)  In  Lower  Tiari  they  say  for  their  king  j  in  Bas 

97^s\bb .  So  for  all  nouns. 

•'  ' 

(13)  From  UQJuS  head  man  we  have  as  in  §  18,  note  xiii, 

and  so  similar  words;  and  the  same  hardening  of  final  letters  takes 
place. 


(14)  The  words  lit.  my  great  one  (now  usually  pronounced 
with  Zqapa),  ^5  our  great  one  (with  Pthakha  sound)  are  now  treated 
as  any  other  substantives,  and  mean  master  and  monk  respectively. 
They  take  the  first  plural,  and  affixes  are  added  on,  but  the  second 
Pthakha  of  ^5  is  then  strengthened  to  Zqapa.  Thus  ^5  our 

master.  But  in  Al.  this  is  so  A\.  your  ffi.)  master. 

yiifS  is  also  used  before  (the  usual  vernacular  for  S  81,  h) 

both  in  speaking  to  a  priest  and  in  speaking  of  him.  For  JafJ  see 
§  25  (7). 

our  Lord,  is  even  more  used  as  a  name  for  Christ  than 
with  us :  e.g.  it  is  constantly  used  vocatively  ;  but  it  has  not  quite 
come  to  be  an  independent  substantive,  and  does  not  take  affixes. 


§§  20,  21] 


ADJECTIVES. 


57 


(15)  Demonstrative  pronouns  and  these  affixes  may  be  used 
with  the  same  substantive.  Thus  Jofl  this  thy  worlds  O.S. 

)3.0. 


ADJECTIVES. 

§  21.  Adjectives  are  very  much  more  frequent  in  O.S.  than 
in  Hebrew,  and  more  so  in  N.S.  than  O.S. ;  see  §  81  for  their  forma¬ 
tion.  The  periphrasis  Holy  Spirit,  though  used  as  a 

proper  name,  is  not  in  accordance  with  common  N.S.  usage,  which 
would  say  when  not  speaking  of  the  Holy  Ghost.  So 

bread  of  our  need  {our  necessary  bread),  though 

used  in  the  Lord’s  prayer  as  a  well  known  expression,  is  not  what 
would  naturally  now  be  said. 

Feminine  of  Adjectives  and  Participles. 

General  Rule.  Change  of  the  masculine  to  ^  as  m., 
f.  good. 

Notes.  (1)  Words  of  the  form  Jlcxti  hard,  make 
revealed  heard  .JbnAbaX. 

(2)  A  few  other  adjectives  make  feminines  in  as 

stony,  second  (not  colloquial),  small,  Al., 

blessed  (as  a  title).  We  have  also  . 

•• 

(3)  U.  makes  other ;  K.,  O.S. 

(second  Zlama  U.  K.) ;  Al.  Tkh.  Z.  ;  the  a  is  often 

silent  (so  also  Sal.),  and  the  Zlama  sometimes  long,  with  the  first 
sound.  [In  Al.  there  is  a  fern.  pi.  as  well  as  the  usual  masc.  pi.,  viz. 
See  §22.] 


S.  OR. 


8 


58 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


(4)  The  present  participle,  being  in  the  absolute  state,  makes  its 
feminine  in  not  ;  as  iJbih  finishing,  §  31.  So  the 

absolute  state  of  the  past  participle,  as  wfiLaiX, 

u.,  or  K. ;  A^obo, 

U.,  or  ;iik^^cbO  K.  For  verbs  see  §  44. 


(5)  The  feminine  of  a  few  foreign  adjectives  is  formed  by 
changing  to  as  Ti.  heautiful  (in  U.  a  subst.  =  a 

young  man))  energetic,  hold,  laiy  yellow,  laoa  blind, 

deaf,  )SS  dumb,  bold,  generous ;  so  2^,olB  hunchbacked.  Thus 

we  have  etc.  So  male  slave  (coolie), 


female  slave,  §  17/.  [We  must  distinguish  in  the  sense  of 

boldness,  a  foreign  word,  from  the  same  in  the  sense  of  education,  an 
O.S.  word,  root  233.1 


(6)  Foreign  adjectives  are  generally  not  inflected.  We  say 
^3  CL  dear  woman,  not  we  may 

say  by  itself  for  a  dear  one  (f.). 


(7)  Some  others  also  are  not  inflected;  as  (properly 

a  subst.  Cf.  N.S.  JLtiobei-,  O.S.  ^3^  near  (so  O.S.),  JAm3 

far  or  absent  (O.S.  So  usually  }^03£s  K.  true  (in  U. 

isft>3ji)  §  128;  in  Al.  it  is  inflected.  For  Jaa  see  §  25  (7).  Foreign 

adjectives  may  often  be  known  by  not  ending  in  J ;  but  some  do  so 

end,  as  new,  Turk.,  bad,  Arab.,  Ug,  2iL»  blue,  which 

are  not  inflected  to  make  feminines.  See  5  22. 


(8)  If  necessary  a  euphonic  vowel  is  added  in  the  feminine ;  as 
^3o£k^b0  saved,  >^3cdd0  U.  Ti.  (5  Tkh.) ;  compound, 

;  iisxJisIso  absolute,  >Jsbo^isbo. 

‘  •  t  4  • 


21,  22,  23]  PLURALS  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  PARTICIPLES. 


59 


(9)  new  (khdtha)  makes  fern.  K.,  U.  (Pthakha 

sound).  The  O.S.  fern.  is  now  used  as  a  substantive  =  the 

New  Testament  (p.  48).  In  Q.  the  masculine  is 


(10)  The  U.  forms  of  adjectives  from  verbs,  like  2x6  cold, 
drop  y,;  thus  So  small ;  hot, 

2xi6,  A  b  thinned  out  (as  trees), 

So  also  coo^.  In  K.  Al.  we  have  iSuiti  ,  }^buS6 , 

and  so  on,  as  O.S. ;  and  .  See  §  81  (5). 


(11)  ;:oV  Al.  [elsewhere  drops  yi :  . 

§  22.  Plurals  of  Adjectives  and  Pa7'ticiples. 

Both  masculines  and  feminines  are  alike  in  the  plural,  which  is  of 

the  first  form ;  thus  (k  K.)  good  women.  But  the 

adjectives  mentioned  in  §  22  (7)  are  not  inflected  ;  foreign  adjectives 
are  usually  not  inflected,  though  we  may  say  oj6  dear,  from 

.  Those  however  which  end  in  L-  as  new,  do  often 

take  the  first  plural,  though  they  do  not  take  in  the  fern.  sing. 
Siami  is  written  on  plural  adjectives,  not  on  participles  unless  used 
as  epithets. 

The  present  participle  of  both  conjugations  follows  the  following 
models :  ^3^  (O.S.  (O.S. 

The  past  participle,  absolute  state,  is  similar  in  K. : 

(O.S.  4\  (O.S.  For  the  U.  anomalous  plural 

see  5  50. 


§  23.  Position  of  Adjectives.  The  Syriac  adjective  when  used 

as  an  epithet  comes  after  its  substantive,  as  2-ioA  3^  a  large 
house. 


60 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Exceptions.  (1)  good  usually ;  and  rarely  other  monosyl¬ 

lables. 

(2)  Numerals  :  Jsil  ^  one  man.  (In  O.S.  often  after  the 
noun.) 

(3)  Titles,  as  lijO  the  Reverend  Priest  Moses  ; 

Blessed  Paul.  [But  the  Apostle 

John.  A  few  names  are  seldom  used  except  with  a  title  added:  as  . 

Eli  the  priest,  3^0  a  David  the  King, 

John  the  Baptist.'] 

(4)  The  words  J313  many'^,  §  25  (7);  a  certain  (when  an 

adjective  this  is  both  m.  and  f.,  is  a  substantive  only  =  So 

and  So,  f  §  17) ;  all ;  a  few,  U.  =  oa  K.  no,  any^ 

230«  more^  (usually :  also  a  substantive) ;  some,  and  com- 

pounds  of  ^  §  28  (9);  Japci  or  or  J^o2  such,  when  thus 
used: — JSiZ  ^  such  a  man  (also  without  \^). 

(5)  Occasionally  when  the  adjective  is  emphatic. 

(6)  All  adjective  pronouns.  Thus  O.S.  jlo/  2a3^=N.S.  Jcyl 
;u2  this  man. 


(7)  The  words  U.,  O.S.  =  K.  =  K.  the  late  (some¬ 
times)  ;  as  iZxso  the  late  Deacon  Audishu.  So 

Solomon  of  blessed  memory,  lit.  remembered 

for  good. 

When  the  adjective  is  a  predicate  it  comes  between  the  subject 
and  the  substantive  verb  if  affirmative ;  but  it  follows  a  negative 

verb  :  as  JaDOO  obl  that  man  is  a  Syrian ;  but  ^ 

;lioso  he  is  not  a  Syrian. 

1  These  rarely  follow  the  noun. 


^  Pthakha  sound. 


24,  25] 


COMPARISON. 


61 


§  24.  Comparison.  Comparatives  are  thus  formed :  <3503 

K.  Al.)  letter :  uA»  ,  or  more  rarely, 
better  than  me,  jlio  2^^  JSOts  more  watery.  A  comparative  with  a 
verb  is  expressed  by  3  Thus  isou  oot 

he  is  letter  than  you  think, 

I  would  rather  go  than  stay  here. 

More  as  a  substantive  is  expressed  by  iho'^  or  23o|  3503  (this 
also  means  especially)  or,  especially  in  K.,  by  jsaa  or  alone. 

A  Syriac  adjective  has  not  only  a  positive,  but  also  a  comparative 
and  a  superlative  sense,  as  seen  in  the  examples  given  above  and  below ; 

and  it  also  expresses  the  idea  of  too.  Thus  may  mean  good, 

letter,  lest,  or  too  good,  accordiug  to  the  context.  The  last  sense  may 

be  expressed,  though  not  commonly,  by 

than  is  right. 

Superlatives  may  be  expressed  thus:  ^  J3l2, 

or  ,  or  3B03  etc,,  the  lest  man,  lit.,  a  man  letter  than 

all  of  them ;  or  by  the  simple  adjective,  as  u1a2  which  is 

*  *  * 

lest?  ;  or  by  prefixing  pgta  very,  or  a  similar  particle  to  the  adjective. 


§  25.  Miscellaneous  notes  on  Adjectives. 

(1)  Adjectives  are  frequently  used  as  substantives,  as  obi 
that  evil  one ;  and  occasionally  participles,  as  U.  a  writing. 


(2)  standing  alone  means  every,  Xa  whenever,  lit. 

every  time,  JsaI  each  man',  see  §  15.  With  pronominal  affixes 
it  denotes  the  whole  or  all,  as  the  whole  house,  all  the 

house,  all  the  houses.  So  we  all,  all  of  us,  o{^ 


;<7t2  (or  Jorl?)  all  this  house,  2^3  -ojAa 


all  the 


62 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


broken-hearted  =  O.S.  always'  takes  the 

affixes  o? ,  0  •>  for  3  pers.  sing.,  and  almost  always  for 

3  pers.  pL]  We  have  also  all  of  us  (kuluntan),  by  a  false 

analogy;  cf.  in  §  28.  So  for  the  other  persons,  ika 

is  never  used  without  affixes,  as  sometimes  in  O.S.,  before  a  plural  or 
collective  noun,  e.g.  Aa  O.S.  all  the  creatures)  in  N.S.  we  must 

put  We  may  put  the  personal  pronouns  absolutely,  thus: 

all  of  them.  For  in  Al.  Z.  K.,  see  §  15. 

(3)  Articles.  As  a  rule  the  definite  article  is  not  expressed 
in  Syriac.  But  if  necessary  for  distinctness,  the  demonstrative  pro¬ 
nouns  obi,  uibl ,  '^1  Q^re  used.  So  in  O.S. 

Word  of  God,  Bev.  xix.  13.  For  the  indefinite  article  the  Syrians  use 
m.,  f.  one  (U.  f.  often  2^ ;  in  Ti.  and  J.  is  often  silent), 

see  §  26 ;  but  they  often  omit  it.  In  O.S.  it  is  omitted  unless 
emphatic  and  =  a  certain,  as  2'^^  ^  ct  certain  man,  St  John  iii.  1 ; 

2^  a  certain  widow,  St  Luke  xxi.  2.  In  N.S.  ^  renders 

a  certain  in  this  sense ;  but  when  it  means  a  particular  person  we 
must  say  ^  (O.S. 

Very  rarely  after  a  noun  is  an  indef.  article,  as 

a  hook  (some  sort  of  a  book)  §  93.  In  O.S.  Js'aI  =  n  few  men, 

Nold.  §  125. 

(4)  Adjectives  are  often  formed,  as  in  O.S.,  by  repeating  nouns ; 

as  5  particoloured,  lit.  colours  colours ;  zigzag, 

lit.  twists  twists;  2'b^^  2’i^^  various,  lit.  kinds  kinds,  O.S. 

f  ••  VT^ 

,  This  last  may  also  be  expressed  by  XJ.,  or 

K.,  (O.S.  St  Mark  i.  34.  We  may  also  repeat 

adjectives,  as  J^Lp  small  pieces.  Cf  §  28  (4)  for  distributive 


25] 


ADJECTIVES. 


63 


numerals ;  and  §  67  (7)  for  adverbs  thus  repeated.  So  also 
highy  low  =  uneven,  up  and  down. 

(5)  Blessed  is  =  if  followed  by  a  noun.  If  pronouns 

follow  we  have  the  forms  wyV  or  U.  blessed  is  he.  So 

for  the  other  affixes  ;  the  3  pi.  is  K-  Al. ;  or 

U.  In  O.S.  uoioiao^  blessed  is  the  man,  5^0^  blessed 

art  thou.  We  have  also  in  N.S.  etc. 

(6)  Compound  adjectives  are  frequently  formed  by  a  noun  and 

participle,  as  Ihi  liil  a  bow-legged  man\  these  are  inde- 

clinable.  See  §  14. 

(7)  m  many,  in  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  and  sometimes  K.  is  indeclina¬ 
ble  and  precedes  the  noun.  In  K.  Al.  it  is  usually  Jaa  (in  Al.  also, 
as  O.S.  =  great),  which  may  follow  the  noun,  and  takes  the  first  plural. 
As  a  subst.  =  much  it  is  used  with  Zqapa  almost  everywhere.  We  have 

^  Al.  =  u.  =  Jip  O.S.  In  U.  K. 

=  wa/iy  of  them.  is  also  colloquially  used  in  U. 

Jai  in  Q.  (first  Zlama).  In  Al.  23ulii  =  many,  but  = 

U.  K.  great.  For  the  adverb  see  §  67. 

(8)  The  same  is  expressed  if  not  emphatic  by  a  simple  demon¬ 
strative  pronoun,  but  if  emphatic  by  ool  ni.,  uO?  f,  lit.  just 

that',  pi.  ^2  301.  O.S.  oo)  00?  or  ool  oo).  So  Jics  3C^ 

at  the  same  place,  J^2  30l  cit  the  same  place  where,  3Cp  at 

the  same  time  that  etc.  So  also  ool  jaDt  DOl  U.  the  very  same. 


64 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


26.  Numerals. 


No. 

In 

letters. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

1 

2 

^  / 

•  / 

ih^  (usually  2xi  in  U.). 

In  Ti.  J.  M  often  silent. 

2 

>3 

1* 

K.,  rarely  uisDiS  K., 

Al. 

3 

\ 

K.  Al.,  iSsSts'U., 

isis'ft.  K.,  SvS'ft.  u.,  SA'js  Q. 

■  M 

z. 

4 

m 

A3->i  u.  (3).  A332  K.  Al. 

(arhe  or  arbi). 

5 

OJ 

K. 

0 

6 

o 

i 

K. 

40  »0 

7 

1^33  (showa  U.K.,  but  shd‘a 

33X1  Ti.  Ash.  Sh.,  33X1 
0  »•  00  00 

Ti.  Z.). 

Tkh.  (both  a). 

8 

K.,  }^;s  Sh. 

•  I* 

9 

;Lx^^  Ti.  sh., 

.iiisjTi.,  ;3:{si.Tkh.,  .iJtfts: 

0  '•  f  II  00  II 

(5a.^)U.  Sal.  Tkh.,J^:s 
AL,  ISxisl  Ash. 

Sh.,  ^^A1. 

#  II 

10 

yi 

H 

K. 

0  II 

[In  IT.  Z.  the  masculines  and  feminines  are  alike  unless  otherwise 
marked :  also  in  the  following  numbers  there  is  only  one  form  for 
both.  In  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  J.  the  feminine  forms  are  used,  but  in  Sal. 
often  with  masculine  nouns.] 

1  The  pronunciation  of  these  differs  in  the  modification  or  non-modification  of  the 
Zlama  sound,  §  6. 


26] 


NUMERALS. 


Go 


No. 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 
17 


18 

19 

20 
21 

30 

40 

50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

100 


In 
letters. 


Ai. 

‘V 

■ 

Ou. 


V 


s 


3kj66y3u^  (khddessar) :  Q.  Sal. 

Q.  Sal. 

f  9t  '  *99  *  it  99 

In  these  numbers  to  19  incl.  Pthakha  is 

»  >  n  ' 

like  Zqapa  in  U.,  not  K. 

(f>). 

'  9  * 


U.  Tkh.  {sho-wdsar)  ;  ispSMl  (a)  Ti.  Tkh, 
Sh.  Ash. 


Ti.  Ash. 

*  99  *9999 

ijosxksl  Ti.  Sh.  Ash.  U.  Tkh.  Al. 

t  f  ■  It  r  t  II  f  I  II 


I  II 


K.  MB.  ^  U.  ^yjs^e  ^ 

m  ^  f  99  *  *  0  99  0  99  •  0 

Al.  [f.  2x«]. 

K.  MB.  Sh.  (tlayi)  U.  J.  Q. 

II  *  * 

u^aai;  Sal. 


11  II 


W*Xib0UM  . 

*  0 

.  (usually  sho-wi,  but  sh&i  Ti.  Z.). 

Mis  U.  Tkh.  Ash.  yi»«\  Ti.  Ash.  (second  Zlama 
/  •' 

sound). 

Ti.  Ash.  Sal.  TT*  Tkh.  Sh. 

;2i2,  rarely  J2iO. 


s.  GR 


9 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRTAC. 


[§  26 


66 


No. 

In 

letters. 

101 

va 

200 

m 

300 

JE 

400 

500 

• 

600 

^ib 

700 

800 

900 

• 

1000 

2 

10,000 

2 

(vmokhd,  accent  on  first  and  last)  ; 

J2i2o  Al.  f.). 

J2S<)  uiis  (trmia) ;  ihol  Al.  Ash. 

»'  i'  "  i' 

iAsN  u.  Q.  k. 

}2^2  Al.  [J2sJ>2  made  masculine.  So  for  the 
rest  in  AL,  but  the  K.  forms  are  also  used  there]. 

;2^:3b2  (3  Pthakha  sound)  U.  Q.  ^2io2  ^^332  K. : 

J.2^2  Ash. 

^  it  i  i 

?2i03Lto^  U.  Q.  ;2^2  K. 

^  »*  /  ^  1$  , 

;i»isxl  u.  Q-  JiasJ  isx2  K.  Sh. 

11^!^  U.  (sJio-wdma).  Q-  Sh. 

J2»2  Ti.  Al.  ;2ib2  ^^:iX2  Tkh. 

u.  ;2i«  Q.  ;2i«2  k. 

U-  ;2^2sisv  ''J'kh. 

Sh.  ;2!i2si^2  Ti.  ;2»^i^  Al.  [i  Pthakha 
sound]. 

;^2;  J^2  Sal. 

or  j4o=>?  (both  rare). 

(1)  In  and  its  compounds  the  first  ^  is  usually 

pronounced  See  §  123. 

(2)  ^  is  pronounced  khe  in  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  J.,  §  91 ;  and  we  even 

hear  xi  it  is  one,  pronounced  kheli  for  khd-ili,  S  29. 

(3)  For  numbers  higher  than  110  J2ij  comes  first  in  Al.  as 
elsewhere.  The  Zqapa  everywhere  makes  a  diphthong  with  the 

following  o;  so  in  jA^2  which  is  a  masculine  substantive  takino-  the 
first  plural. 


i§  26.  27] 


NUMERALS. 


67 


(4)  J2isb2  is  a  fern,  substantive  (but  apparently  masc.  in  Al. ;  see 

above)  making  plural  JlioZ  when  not  used,  as  in  the  table,  for  200, 

300  etc.  The  form  J,2i  is  used  in  forming  the  numbers  200  etc., 

and  in  the  phrase  peace,  a  hundred  peaces,  sc.  you 

have  come  {you  are  very  welcome). 

(5)  The  O.S.  definite  state  ,  whose  plural  is  (or  bo)^ 

appears  in  village  (rare  in  O.S.  but  so  spelt),  i.e.  a  hundred 

houses.  This  accounts  for  the  colloquial  pronunciation  in  U.  of  the 
plural,  where  both  Taus  drop,  md-wdi.  (The  usual  O.S.  word  is 
not  used  in  N.S.) 

m  0  ^ 

(6)  The  other  numbers  form  plurals  regularly,  as  Ji,3UC  sevens, 

nineties.  Thus  three  times  five  can  be  expressed  by 

Ixso^  or  by  }3ba.i  ttUss.  [Distinguish  JsSoJ.  and  of 

,1  /  /  ,'  ■  / 

which  the  pronunciation  is  different,  §  5  (4).] 

(7)  For  10,000  is  commonly  used.  If  ofii  is  used 

the  plural  is  ^ or  .  But  this  is  not  colloquial.  After 

afiD  etc.  a  a  is  placed  before  a  noun  :  not  after  ihol .  or  their 

I  It  •  ~  4i  '  ~  f 

plurals  when  a  plural  noun  follows,  as  Jxil  Jlil  a  hundred  men; 
but  we  may  say  two  thousand  of  the  people. 

(8)  In  putting  letters  for  numbers  the  dots  and  strokes  for  500 

etc.  are  often  omitted.  1889  is  written  and  the  year  is 

/  0 

called  appat.  So  for  other  years. 

§  27.  Ordinals  are  expressed  by  prefixing  a  to  the  cardinals,  as 
fifth.  This  was  also  common  in  O.S.  They  may  stand  with¬ 
out  a  substantive,  thus :  uSiss  OOJ  (^jiD^b  OCT)  O.S.)  the  second  one. 
The  O.S.  ordinals  are  used  for  fractions  up  to  tenths.  Thus : 


68 


GKAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


ninth. 

tenth. 


2 

3 


(fern.  half  {ox  ;i^).  jlLaX  seventh. 

eighth. 

fourth, 
fifth. 

These  are  not  common  in  the  colloquial  speech. 

Higher  fractions  are  expressed  by  ?,  as  also  are  the  above.  Thus  : 

=  or  (4  ^•)* 

I*  * '  •*  *  ** 

The  O.S.  becomes  (rarely  in  N.S. 

Fractions  may  also  be  expressed  by  ^  (so  O.S.),  as  uSiN  ^  ^ 

one-half  The  other  O.S.  fractional  forms  such  as  a  third, 

are  now  almost  if  not  quite  obsolete.  But  is  used  for 

decimals.  tithes  (so  O.S.)  is  used  colloquially. 

(O.S.  is  a  substantive  taking  the  first  and  fifth  plurals. 

Before  substantives  it  takes  affixes,  and  also  usually  when  standing 
by  itself.  In  U.  no  difference  is  made  between  the  genders,  and 
is  used  for  both  ;  while  in  K.  a  difference  is  made.  Thus : — 

half  the  bread ;  is^®? 

K.  half  an  hour  ;  U.  =  uD^*  K.  masc.  =  2| ; 

H.  =  ujS^o  isijQ  K.  an  hour  and  a  half  \ 

OJ^  u.  =  ijlx  :sS:s  gea?'s  ;  and  so  on.  After  nouns 

ending  in  ,  o  is  inserted  in  U.  as  well  as  K. :  and  makes 

a  diphtlioug.  Thus  lavptopelgi  (in  K.  =  a  hafta 

and  a  half  [1  hafta  =  4  lbs.  avoirdupois  approximately].  =  by 

halves,  §  67  ;  u07q1^^>^  =  half  dead]  =  u  ipiarter. 


§  28]  NUMERALS.  GO 

§  28.  Various  notes  on  Numerals. 

(1)  Both  of  them,  all  three  of  them,  etc.,  are  expressed  thus  : — 

2.  U.  Tkh.  Al.  U.  (both  of  K.). 

K.  Al.  uo^pb^  Ash.  Al.  Ti.  Al.  uo^&ob^ 

Sal.  Sp.  Al.  uCf^i^Spb^  Ash.  (fem.).  MB. 

3.  U.  Q.  Sa1.  uO^o^^Sal.  ^^a^isicS^sV.  uO)Lki^^ 

K.  {a\  Al.  Ash.).  oo^^^oSis  mb.  [^  =  ^,  see  §  123.] 

4.  U.  u.p^iisS3bi  K.  (Al.  07).  ooiisii^abi  MB. 

Ash. 

5.  U-  K.  (Al.  c?).  MB. 

'*  /  I*'**/  / 

Ash. 

6.  u,a7*is4oisx2  U.  y^ujAisisxl  K.  (Al.  oj).  6a7isieisac2  MB. 
y.^iSXx2  Ash. 

7.  uiOI^isao^ai  (sho-wunte)  U.,  or  uOT^iis^^i  K.  (cjj  Al.) 

MB.  Ash. 

8.  wnOjjiisAaAa^fiS  U.  uOT-iisisb^  K.  (Al.  07).  MB. 

1  I®  ^ 

Ash. 

9.  uCjAioxis^  U.  uo^ii^asis^  Tkh.  (2  Ti.).  OG^isiosiis^ 

MB.  uC?j.is4aaon:s  Al.  Al.  u.^i^xfis2  Ash. 

\jiUU'^^oyfy^  U.  K.  (07  Ah), 


10. 


Ash. 


We  also  have,  though  rarely,  for  all  eleven  of  them,  in  U. 

in  Ti. 

and  so  for  the  other  numbers  to  19  inclusive. 


70 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  28 


For  see  §  25  (2). 

* 

The  other  plural  affixes  may  be  used  with  any  of  the  above  ;  thus  : 
all  ten  of  us,  all  six  of  you. 

With  nouns  we  have  hoth  days,  (but  with  a 

before  or  as  both  of  those  days). 


(2)  Once,  twice,  thrice  etc.  are  expressed  by  the  substantive 
time.  In  the  singular  oj  is  often  silent ;  in  the  plural 
it  sometimes  has  a  ^  sound,  but  often  is  like  2  {gd-yi  or  gd-i). 

Plural  in  Al. 

U.  K.)  huice.  Jo?Jk  2'^  K.  (U. 

o?ice  every  tivo  years. 

The  following  may  be  used  instead  of  iAof.  U.  journey, 

K.  load,  I  foot,  ;ia  f.  K.  breath,  m.  K.,  O.S.  span. 

All  take  the  first  plural  in  this  sense.  But  is  only  used  when 

motion  is  implied  :  as  uDN  CO  2^2  he  came  twice. 

Not  so  ,  which  is  constantly  used  thus:  a]i  this  time, 

uOl  that  time,  then,  §  67. 


(3)  Twofold,  threefold  Qic.,  aiQ  pJi*,  ^  etc.  Also 

ft  » 

without  3  ^  and  with  Ai.  j  as  .  .  ^  fi'vefold  more  than. 


(4)  Distributives  are  expressed  by  repeating  the  numeral,  as 
five  each :  aA  one  each,  or  one  at  a  time,  which 

we  may  also  render  Notice  ciS  Ixxlo  a  man 

went  from  each  house  (not  2xa2  2^^  Stoddard.  St.  also  gives 

is*l  2^^^  2^2  for  each  boy  has  a  pen,  but  it  means  the  boy 
has  a  pen)- 


28] 


NUMERALS. 


71 


Sometimes  may  be  rendered  by  2^  2^,  or  by 

or  by 

(5)  Days  of  the  week.  The  words  p  (jio*)  day  of,  are 

often  prefixed  to  the  following,  but  they  are  as  frequently  used 
alone. 

Sunday  khdsJnha,  U.  Tkh.  (Ti.  i  with  Zqapa  sound,  and 

kheslidba  in  Upper  Tiari).  Jaipa..  Al.  Sh.  MB.  Sal.  (khMshdba). 
O.S.  (In  K.  is  a  common  name  for  a  man, 

»  I"  /  ^  '  I  -  •  /  ’ 

especially  given  to  one  born  on  a  Sunday.) 

Monday  U.  trilshiha,  Tkh.  Ash.  (Ti.  MB.  Al. 

i  as  above),  Upper  Ti.  O.S.  Jaia 

Tuesday  (tlSshiha  or  tldshiba)  U.  Tkh. 

I*  i' 

Ash.  (Ti.  Al.  i).  MB.  Sh.  O.S.  Jais 

Wednesday  U.  Tkh.  Ash.  (Ti.  Al.  i)  MB. 

Sh.  O.S.  Jib  jiiiai. 

Thursday  laXliasJ*  U.  Tkh.  Ash.  (Ti.  Al.  i)  MB.  Sh. 

O.S.  Jiia  Jbou:. 

0  0 

Friday  So  O.S. 

Saturday  so  O.S. ;  or  Sal. 

In  part  of  U.  Thursday  is  called  J,boX  i.e.  market  day,  though  it 
is  not  now  the  usual  day  for  going  to  market. 


(6)  Per  cent.  Example :  20  per  cent.  i'^'^  i-®- 

100  produces  120);  but  17  per  cent.  J2bb^  ajibi.  Note  2auQ>^ 
xi  one  part  in  every  ten. 

*  M 


72 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  28 


(7)  The  numeral  ^  prefixed  to  another  makes  the  second  a 

owa^^-substantive,  as  Ixil  ISxdJw  ^  ten  men.  The  verb  of  which 

,*  »»  ■  / 

this  is  the  subject  is  plural.  In  Al.  is  used  to  intensify  as 

^  (or  3^)  how  much  more  pi'ecious  =  JiJxa 

2^  U. 

(8)  Notice  the  following  constructions : 

.A  not  .^n  nrp.nf.  nr,.<?  T  thnunht  5^.:  2'3c\  ^ 

(or  better  not  half  as  great  as  I  thought. 

(9)  Gompomids  of  mostly  accented  on  that  syllable. 

^  Z.  for  a  while  =  jia  2^  K.  =  lioS^  K. 

2^4  Xm  a  5^?i^M...This  and  all  the  following  take  a  noun  with- 
out  s. 

3Xb  a  certain  amount  of. 

II*  •  / 

jASb  ^  U.  several,  a  good  deal  of=  Jaib  ^  K. 

JaSkM  U.  K.  few,  a  little,  Pthakha  sound  (dim.  .iUoaa««>)  = 
JaJN  ^  Ti.  (dim.  Ti.)  =  Ja*,  xi  U.  =  jbmo  xl  Ti.  = 

^  K.  (in  Jilu  khenawa)  =  Az.  Al.  =  Ash.,  see  ?  67. 

some  (khdkma)  =  Ti. 

The  above  precede  the  noun,  but  JaSo/  such  and  such 
(almost  khacha)  follows  it  (=  ippol  ^  ?).  It  usually  refers  to 
numbers  and  is  the  complement  of  so  and  so,  a  certain.  It  is 
often  doubled,  as  J^p6l  ^  such  and  such  a  verse. 

So  2Sc7f  one  such  as  this,  Ipfjj  twice  as  much,  etc.,  or  with 
Jaboy  or  ;^o2  for  2bay;  a  subst.  or  adj.  often  follows  immediately. 


§28] 


NUMERALS. 


IS 


(10)  For  reckoning  sums  of  money,  weights,  etc.,  which  are  just 

under  a  round  number,  subtraction  is  very  commonly  employed. 
Thus  1  qran  19  sliahis  is  usually  two 

qrans,  one  shahi  less.  In  compound  sums  the  noun  following  the 
numeral  is  usually  made  singular. 

(11)  For  the  tiuelve  Apostles  the  noun  is  sometimes 

used  as  in  O.S.  In  O.S.  we  also  have  a  tenth,  not  in  N.S. 

0 

(12)  Months,  in  the  Syrian  order  : 

October  (a)  (O.S.  March  ibl  O.S. 

See  page  43.  April  O.S. 

November  (O.S.  May  U.  ill  K.,  O.S. 


June  O.S. 


December  (O.S.  s). 


January  (O.S.  ^). 

=  Dec.  and  Jan.] 
Febrim'y  (t>-S-  A^). 


one  0 


July  O.S. 

August  Kurd.  (O.S.  ^2). 

September  rarely 

as  O.S.  (Nun  from  Kurdish.) 

(13)  The  clock.  ?  what  o’clock  is  it?,  isijsa 

’clock,  seven  o’clock,  twelve  hours, 

il^oyi  Ti.  Al.)  noon,  ^•)  ^^Jdnight, 

Jsija  u.  (6jJ^  K.)  half  past  seven,  J±L^b 

;L  five  minutes  to  seven  (lit.  five  minutes 

remain  for  seven  o’clock),  jL 

five  minutes  past  seven  (\ii.  five  minutes  are  past  from  seven  o’clock). 

(14)  Measures  are  often  rendered  thus  :  2^302  2Xm 

Ol<^ypt0  a  road  two  farsakhs  (7  miles)  long  (lit.  its  length)  ;  or  we 
might  say  long,  here. 


s.  GR. 


10 


74 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§29 


VERBS. 


Km)  or 

'  I  II  '  /  #• 

§  29.  The  Substantive  Verb. 

The  forms  without  distinctive  letters  are  used  almost  universally. 
Present  tense.  He  is,  etc. 

Sing.  3  m.  ojVf- 

f.  6^:  ^cHL  U. 

0  0  0 

2  m.  fisou  (X  Tkh.)  :  .  fis*Ou  U.  Tkh.)  :  ;LCSaO«  (X)  Tkh. 
f.  Jis^  Tkh.) :  U.  Tkh.) :  (ft.)  Tkh. 

1  m.  :  lila.  K. ;  Jiloo)  K. :  I'il  lo^  K. 
f.  :  lilOf  K. :  I'iloin  Ash. 

Plur.  3  m.  f.  ILk  U.  Q.  Sal.  Sp. :  Tkh. :  Tkh.  Ti.  J.  Al. 

Ash.:  4.ooi!Smi  Al.  :  uOUJk*  J* 

^  0  0  *00 

2  m.  f.  »  cis^  U.  K.  (:s  Tkh.):  ois^  Ti. :  .  ofiSAOOJ  Bo.: 

'  *  '  N 

^isOOO]  Al. ;  or  with  pronoun,  ois^l  6is**l  Ti. 

1  m.  f.  yyiO*  (iwukh) :  (i-wdkhn)  U. :  uJmaOu  Tkh.  (U)  : 

Ti.  Al.  Ash. :  w*«iOu  Ti. 

Imperfect.  He  was,  etc. 

Sing.  3  m.  Joc^Ia  U.  Q.  Sal.^ :  Jbo)  Jo07  K.  Al.  Sh.  MB. 
f.  XJ.  Q.  Sal.^:  J,boi  Jlb^  K.  Al.  Sh.  MB. 

^  Usually  spelt  by  error  in  the  printed  books  Jooi.  Thus  ;0<71  ;BsSl3: 

loo)  JfiLaS.  It  is  never  thus  pronounced,  and  should  be  ;ooj.  Va-^ 

hiprdqe  wd,  and  look  p?n5e  wd.  See  Note  2  below. 


29] 


SUBSTANTIVE  VERB. 


75 


2  m.  Joaj  iso*  (X  Tkh.)  :  Joo)  fiS-*007  Ash. 
f.  Jooj  (X  Tkh.) :  }66i  uisooj  Ash. 

1  m.  Jooj  ♦^Ou:  }6ai  ^*00)  Ash. 
f.  Jooi  :  Jooi  ^O]  Ash. 


Plur.  3  m.  f.  oodil*  (i-wd  nearly)  U.  Q.  Sal. :  OOO)  mOO)  (Zlama 
second  sound)  K. :  0007  o6oi  Al. 

2  m.  f.  loO]  (^S  Tkh.) :  oisf  K.  (^s  Tkh.)  : 

lorn  ois*o^  Ash. 


1  m.  f.  Joc)  W»«6* :  J6o7  wiMiOu  Ti.  Ash.  Al. 

I* 

Notes.  (1)  For  the  terminations  of  these  forms  see  on  the 
regular  verb,  §  32  (1).  The  o  is  clearly  part  of  Joo/  to  he,  as  seen 

I* 

by  the  variations  (see  under  ^  verbs,  §  42,  also  §  46) ;  the  ^  has 
been  thought  to  be  a  corruption  of  ^^2  there  is  (whose  4s  often  falls, 
see  below) ;  and  sometimes  the  verb  is  written  etc.,  but  this 

somewhat  interferes  with  the  yi  becoming  diphthongal  as  in  Note  2. 
The  third  person  seems  to  be  for  ^Si*2 , 

The  forms  )L ,  are  perhaps  for  4^2 :  4s*2 .  Cf. 

Az.  4sSk*  thou  art :  he  is  :  ojiL  she  is :  they  are,  see 


Appendix  1. 

(2)  The  point  under  the  Yudh  is  omitted  if  a  vowel  sound  precedes, 
with  or  without  2 ,  but  not  after  o ,  The  y,  is  not  then  silent,  but 

forms  a  diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel.  Thus  ^SX!>Od  I 

am  a  friend  {dost  iwin), hut  Jiil  T  am  {dnewin).  But  the  accent 

remains  as  if  the  two  words  did  not  coalesce.  After  Jioa  the  point  is 

♦^4S*  (but  not  in  K.)  as  pydshitiXn, 


retained  ;  also,  in  U.  in 


76 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


ye  are  remaining,  U.  (pydshetun  K.).  In  Al.  Z.  Bo.  Sal.  the  point  is 
frequently  omitted  even  after  a  consonant. 

(3)  If  the  preceding  word  ends  in  a  silent  consonant,  the  point 
is  usually  retained,  as  wmOu  we  are  one  :  but  see  §  26  (2). 

(4)  Note  that  in  Ashitha  the  Yudh  appears  in  the  present,  but 
not,  except  in  I  pi.,  in  the  imperfect. 

(5)  In  poetry,  or  for  emphasis,  we  may  have  4,^^  (and  twin)  ; 
and  conversely  we  may  omit  the  Khwasa  after  a  consonant  in  similar 
cases.  But  this  is  uncommon  except  in  Al.  Z.  Bo.  Sal. 

(6)  As  the  terminations  of  etc.  contain  the  personal  pro¬ 
nouns,  it  is  unnecessary,  except  for  emphasis  or  distinction,  to 
repeat  these. 

(7)  The  following  examples  explain  the  usage  : — 4^^  ^2  I  am, 

(f.)  art,  ^2  we  are,  ob\  he  is,  uOj 

she  is,  obi  he  was,  I6ap>  mOj  she  ivas,  ooc^  ui2  they  were. 

The  yi  of  the  3rd  pers.  imperfect  is  never  omitted  except  in  the  K. 
and  Al.  forms. 

(8)  The  first  and  second  persons  singular,  with  the  pronouns 
added,  are  often  contracted  to  dninwd,  dndnwd,  dtitwd,  dtatwd. 

(9)  The  lob]  is  almost  the  only  relic  of  the  old  past  tense. 
[Stoddard  also  gives  aiip2bk3  .  See  §  68,  under  Jsaa.] 

(10)  The  other  tenses  of  the  substantive  verb  are  formed  regu¬ 
larly  from  lobi  to  he,  see  §§  42,  46,  but  the  imperative  is  not  very 

f 

much  used  in  the  sense  to  he  (use  rather  the  first  present)  and  the 
second  present  never.  This  verb  also  means  to  become,  to  he  made,  to 
he  horn,  and  in  the  last  sense  is  also  used  in  the  passive  jlooi 

see  §  34.  The  preterite  cjS  %ob]  is  much  used  for  he  was  as  an  alter- 


§29] 


SUBSTANTIVE  VERB. 


77 


native  to  Jboju.  3  Xo^  —  to  belong  to,  as  Jofl  To  whom 

does  this  belong  ?  Joc/  also  means  to  be  possible,  §  63  (5)  :  Joof 

it  will  do,  or  it  is  possible.  Xool  ^  or  it  is  impossible. 

»*  •'  •' 

Cf.  the  use  of  this  verb  with  verbal  nouns,  to  denote  possibility,  §  34. 
So  more  rarely  it  is  impossible. 

(11)  Thei'e  is,  there  are  =  ^2  [is  U.  etc.,  often  ^  Q.  Also  in  Al. 

(^)]  pronounced  with  short  7.  When  ^  follows,  ^  becomes 
hard.  The  negative  is  fis^^  (^S  K.  Al. ;  for  pronunciation  see  page 
12).  In  reading  O.S.  this  is  usually  pronounced  let  (Js)-  Variants 
are  ^ is^I .  itin,  litm.  The  imperfect  is  jbo)  the  future 

Jow  is3  and  so  on. 

These  forms  do  not  take  the  pronominal  affixes,  as  in  O.S.,  and 
cannot  express  he  is,  thon  art,  etc. ;  but  see  Note  1  above. 

(12)  He  has,  when  expressing  possession,  is  aS  ii.fl  (O.S.  6.). 

Past  cjS  Jbbi  Future  Joof  fiS3.  Sometimes,  especially 

in  AL,  we  have  C7jiu2  etc.  If  the  pronoun  is  emphatic  it  is  put 
absolutely :  as  ^a2  ^2  f  have.  So  yon  have  me  is  jil 

(13)  But  when  mere  holding  is  intended  we  cannot  use  this 

form,  and  must  say  be  with  or  at.  Thus  I  have  your 

book  must  be  . 

(14)  :^2,  may  also  be  used  thus: — ?  jib2^  C]iSkA  X^tl 

Where  is  Thomas  ?  He  is  not  here.  But  iajS  oj^  A 
is  equally  good. 

(15)  On  the  other  hand  the  substantive  verb  is  used  where  we 
might  expect  :  as  X^o^  {there  is  wind),  it  is  windy,  §  16  ii./. 


78 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


^OCT,)  ^  OuOO]  :  :  u' 

-  t  t  '  ^<1/  \/ 


(16)  Here  he  is  and  the  like  are  expressed  differently  in  different 
districts. 

U.  :  6^09  :  ^0*03  :  uiN<^03  :  0u03  :  * 

'V  *  •  ’  t  ■  n  t  •  It*  's  "  '  •  's  ' 

jLoS  :  ^is^op  :  ^^op  (u  usually  silent). 

Tkb.  c)^o6l  :  aj^oal  :  is^OOl  :  :  ^(^o6l : 

:  uCtAaO^  (or  y^O(^) :  :  smOuO^  (ui  silent). 

Ash.  of^OO)  :  aj^OOl :  isOuOC?  (or  <,0^00))  :  uisouOOJ  (or 

au^om  :  ♦s^Op^Apoi  (^^o) :  ^OuOOl 

(u  silent). 

Ti.  :  yj.^0^  :  ^CtAo^  : 

,•  </i  •/  <1 

OOu^O^  I  teSoc^ , 

•  0  \  ^ 

Al.  07^097 :  ajlSoa]  :  <*0^097 :  s^SiSoO)  :  J^OO] :  u9^097 : 

,1/  /  t  /  t  t  •  t  t  t  t  t  t 

^^oSpOl :  ^pGl  . 

Q.  9?So^  :  6^^097 :  (m.  f.)  :  }ao^  :  ^O^OOl  (or  u409y 

with  second  Zlama  sound)  :  ♦^Xa097  :  . 

(17)  There  he  is  and  the  like  are  expressed  thus  (3  pers.  only)  : — 

u.  OJV®  ■  ®A*0  :  5J-0  . 

Ti.  •  97ta!^0  •  vdi97J^O  . 

Ash.  91^097  :  Qf^OO}  :  y.9lA*097 . 

Al.  9lSo  :  qi^'o  :  \^a^6 . 

/  0  ^00 

The  Ash.  forms  are  distinguished  from  those  of  (16)  by  lengthen¬ 
ing  the  first  syllable ;  and  in  the  other  districts  also  the  accent  is 
a  strong  one. 

In  Al.  oSp  is  also  an  interjection  =  }af  behold! 

(18)  9^  ^2  or  9]B  ^2  in  K.  Al.  =  he  can  [sometimes  also 


CONJUGATIONS. 


79 


§§  29,  30] 

rarely  above  (12)]  or  he  has,  as  up 

God  can,  ufl  or  u3  I  cannot,  wi  lou  could  not. 

0  *  0  •  * 

So  <t03  2oal  thou  wilt  not  he  able.  The  verbal  noun  with 
usually  follows,  as  I  cannot  go. 


(19)  For  it  is  I,  we  have  2^2;  and  so  the  other  persons. 

For  is  it  you?  (pl-)>  have  commonly  S  2^2  dnitun  U., 

dnitun  K. 

(20)  I  may  (i.e.  I  am  allowed),  is  expressed  by  2  uS  is*2  U. 

(or  boisAb  U.  K.  or  i^i6iMOb,  is^ob)  I  have  permission,  e.g. 

*0^00 

CSaS  ?  2^i2  JJ,  no  one  may  enter ;  or  sometimes 
by  the  verb  2eSJ)  to  he  able. 

(21)  The  substantive  verb  is  used  for  emphasis:  as  2^ 

2^1^ 3  not  that  thou  art  ivorthy ;  u^  2^2  2^3  lou^  2^ 

it  was  not  that  he  did  not  come. 

(22)  It  is  frequently  omitted  in  relative  clauses,  §  14. 

_  4^ 

(23)  For  used  for  the  substantive  verb,  see  §  34. 

§  80.  Conjugations. 

The  method  of  denoting  conjugations  by  names  derived  from 
to  work,  and  of  denoting  classes  of  verbs  by  the  same  rooth  is 
not  used  in  East  Syrian  grammars ;  instead  they  use  the  terms 

P‘al  and  \^is2  Ethp‘el)  simple  ;  (= 

^  For  convenience  this  simple  method  is  used  in  this  Grammar.  Thus  ^ 
denotes  the  first  radical,  ^  the  second,  ^  the  third  ;  verbs  whose  first  radical  is 
2  are  ,  those  whose  second  is  O  are  ,  and  so  on.  Verbs  whose  second  and 
third  radicals  are  the  same  are  , 


80 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Pa‘el,  and  Ethpa'al)  compound ;  J  (= 

Apb'el,  and  more  compound  \  ^ 

(=  ShapL'el,  and  S^isxz  Eshtaph'al).  They  distinguish 

the  active  and  passive  in  each  division  by  adding  respectively  the 


names  lk?<aL, 


In  the  vernacular  there  are  two  conjugations :  the  first  chiefly 
taken  from  the  Pshitta  active  (P‘al),  the  second  from  the  other  active 
conjugations.  We  seldom  have  all  four  active  conjugations  surviving 

in  any  one  word,  but  we  find  to  he  changed,  P‘al:  K.  to 

change  tr.,  Pa‘el :  to  interchange,  Aph'el:  to  change 

tr.,  Shaph'el.  The  distinguishing  mark  of  the  first  conjugation  is  the 
softening  of  the  second  radical,  of  the  second  conjugation  the  prefor- 
mative  Mim,  and,  in  triliterals,  the  hardening  of  the  second  radical. 
But  there  are  many  exceptions,  see  §§  94,  95. 

The  passive  conjugations  have  disappeared,  with  one  or  two  ex¬ 
ceptions.  Thus  we  have  in  Al.  to  he  fulfilled,  root 

Eshtaph'al ;  in  U.  ,  in  Ti.  to  he  proud  —  O.S. 

Eshtaph‘al.  Perhaps  also  some  verbs  are  con¬ 
tracted  from  passive  conjugations  as  to  wake  intr. 

O.S.,  for  which  see  §  88  D.  c. 


The  Regidar  Verb. 

§  31.  First  Conjugation.  to  finish,  intr. 

The  old  past  and  future  tenses  and  the  infinitive  have  disap¬ 
peared.  In  O.S.  we  find  participles  frequently  taking  the  place  of 
the  old  past  and  future,  and  now  they  have  done  so  entirely.  The 
following  parts  of  the  old  verb  alone  remain  and  are  the  foundation 
of  the  whole  conjugation. 

Present  participle.  Sing.  JdiS  m.,  f  Plur.  u-dbkS  m.  f. 

(O.S.  ^  m.) 


§31] 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


81 


Past  'participle  {absolute  state).  Sing.  m.,  iJOui^  f.  Plur. 

m.  f.  K.  Al.  J.  Sal.  (O.S.  ^  m.),  see  §  50. 

(Definite  state).  Sing,  m.,  f.  (i).  Plur.  m.  f. 

I'mperative.  Sing,  bbo^  m.,  f.  Plur.  ^OLtibk^ 

(usually  <xUb^  O.S.). 

Verbal  noun. 

[The  letters  when  final  do  not  in  N.S.  cause  the  preceding 

letter  to  take  Pthakha  in  the  present  participle  as  in  O.S.] 


The  Tenses.  Jibf 

First  present  (he  finishes).  The  forms  without  distinctive  letters 
are  used  almost  universally.  For  use  of  the  tenses  see  §§  51 — 59. 

Sing.  3  m.  IT.  J. 


I# 

^ 


f.  :  -lUsiA  U.  J. 

2  m.  Tkh.) :  U.‘ :  U.  Tkh.  (is) : 

jL^aal  (ft.)  Tkh. :  MB.  Q. 

f.  uisba^  (^Tkh.):  Tkh.  (^):  (^) 

Tkh. :  MB.  Q. 

1  m.  U-  Ti.®  (not  Ash.):  J.’: 

f.  :  Ji2  yaih  U.  Ti.^  (not  Ash.). 

Plur.  3  m.  f.  uJO>^  :  ■  U.  J. 

2  m.  f.  (j^o  Sal.  Sp.) :  ois^yh  Ti.^  J.  Z.^ 

Tkh.):  ^isoJOyh  AI.2  or  oisoJbih  Al.* 

1  Village  of  Digalah,  in  the  plain  of  Urmi.  ^  Paradigm  form. 

^  This  variation  is  common  in  many  districts  in  verbs  ,  as 

S.  GR.  11 


82 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


1  m.  f.  (pdrqukh):  (pcirqdkhi)V.: 

(u)  Tkh.,  and  esp.  U. ;  Ti.  Al.  Sh.  Ash. ;  ^3^ 

Ti.  Sh. :  Al. :  Q. 

Future.  {S3  he  will  finish  :  33  Al.  K. :  ^0^3  Al.  Z. 

Sal.  (even  in  JS  and  ud  verbs)  and  sometimes  XJ.  K.  [In  Ash.  there 
is  no  prefix  except  3  before  2  or  u,,  as  Ji^ls  {d!  dthi)  he  will  come. 

So  often  in  Ti.  Z.  Az.  In  Ti.  Ash.  ^2jb  he  arises,  he  descends, 
prefixed  to  the  verb  as  above  makes  the  future,  the  proper  personal 
affix  being  employed,  is  a  verb  not  used  in  those  districts. 

For  the  Tal  future  see  §  46  under  J^.]  Conjugate  like  the  First 
present. 

Conditional.  ;oa,  X3  he  would  finish,  etc.,  3rd  plur. 

OOO]  Nb  (see  Future).  Or  thus,  contracted,  in  MB.  Sal.  Q. 

iS3 :  Jooi  {S3  :  {S3  :  ikhih  ftv3  :  ft«.3 


:  liJbhih  is^  (pdr  -qdnd,  but  accented  on  the  short  a). 

Habitual  and  historic  present,  he  finishes,  U.  MB.  Sp. 

and  rarely  Sal. :  bb^  u2  Tkh.  Q.  Sal. :  wbsA^  Al.  Z.  (and  often 

Sal.  with  ^  and  verbs)  :  wb^  Ti.  Ash.  For  Ja  see  §  119. 

Habitual  imperfect.  Jbo?  ^  he  used  to  finish,  as  above. 

Also  contracted  in  MB.  Sal.  Q.  like  the  Conditional. 


Preterite  (rarely  used  except  in  Al.).  wb^  U.  Z.  (rarely 

Sal.)  he  finished  (Pthakha  sound)  =  ^Oib  Sal.,  and  Al.  rarely 

=  ;ata  Al.  =  O.S.  ^^,3>b  he  was  before,  often  used  adverbially].  Not 
used  in  Ti.  Ash. 

Second  present.  he  is  finishing,  or 

See  the  substantive  verb,  §  29.  The  is  much  omitted  in  K., 
and  before  labials  in  TJ.  It  is  almost  always  omitted  in  Ash.  except 


§31] 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


83 


before  2  or  m  and  often  even  then.  Note  U.  but 

K.  §  29,  note  2. 


Imperfect.  Put  or  Va’^  before  the  imperfect  of  §  29 

{he  was  finishmg).  The  second  and  first  persons  are  often  contracted 

to :  2.  m.  f. ;  1.  jLilSAs  m.  f. ;  PL  1.  m.  f. 

In  Q.  these  have  the  force  of  the  Second  present  tense.  Or  they  are 
half  contracted  :  2.  loG\  m.  f. :  1.  m.  f. :  Plur. 

1.  loo]  m.  f.  The  2.  plur.  is  not  contracted. 


Preterite  {he  finished) : 

Sing.  3  m.  or  wt3U^ 

K.^  (rarely). 

L  wtlLa>^ . 


Plur.  3  m.  f.  U.,  or 

with  MB.,  or  with 


2  m.  wtL&^  . 

f  or  with 

•  0  0 

Ti.  MB. 

•  0 

1  m.  f.  U.S  . 


2  m.  f.  .  daoS  or 

\  ■  ' 

with  Ti.,  or  oa©S 

•  0  ■ 

Al.  Z. 

1  m.  f.  ^  wtsLd^  or  with 
uiA  Ti. 


[The  pronunciation  of  the  Khwasa  is  like  short  i,  except  in  K. 
Al.  with  ai^  verbs,  and  sometimes  with  others ;  see  page  86.] 

Second  preterite.  lo^  wt3L^5  he  finished,  or  he  was  on 

the  point  of  finishing  (rare  in  U.,  common  in  K.  Al.  Z.f 

Perfect.  he  has  finished :  ©^^  L  Plur. 

;L  etc.,  as  §  29. 

Pluperfect.  The  above  with  the  imperfect  of  §  29  {he 

had  finished).  Or  contracted  in  the  first  and  second  persons :  2. 


^  Paradigm  form. 


84 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§§  31,  82 


m.,  :  1-  jLjtU^  m., 


f.  Plur.  1. 


[the  Zlama  has  nearly  the  second  sound].  In  Q.  these 
have  the  force  of  the  perfect.  Or  they  may  be  half  contracted, 
as  Jboi  isJOu^ .  The  2nd  plur.  is  not  contracted. 

I  /  ^ 

I 

Imperative.  Sing.  2  m.  wboivd  fiyiisli ;  f.  Plur.  2  m.  f. 

^<Xbb^  (so  O.S.,  but  usually  or  oJboi^  K.  J.  Al.  Z.  : 

Sal. 


Infinitive. 


to  finish. 


§  82.  Formation  of  the  tenses. 

(1)  First  present.  This  is  formed  by  joining  the  present  par¬ 
ticiple  in  its  various  inflections  to  the  personal  pronouns,  and  by 
abbreviating  them.  [A  present  was  formed  in  O.S,  in  the  same  way, 
and  both  the  simple  and  the  contracted  forms  were  used.  It  was  as 
follows  (cf.  the  N.S.  forms  on  page  81)  : 


Sg.  3  m.  wb5k^  or  oa]  Jb'yh 
f  or  y,oi  iJbikh 

2  m.  isii  or 


f.  iJbih  or 

1  m.  }i2  dbi^  or 
f  iJbbA  or 


PI.  8  m.  or 

f.  ^ikyh  or  ^^2 
2  m.  ^iU'l  or 


N' 


oisJba.^ 


f  ^^2  or 

Im.  ^  or 

f.  ^  01- 


The  N.S.  contractions  are  not  all  the  same  as  in  O.S.  Thus  we 
have  N.S.  iSbbS  =  O.S.  ^bbkS ,  Zlama  for  Pthakha  as  very  fre¬ 


quently,  §  88  d.  The  contractions  of  1  pi.  are  noteworthy,  as  pre¬ 
serving  the  WM  of  which  the  O.S.  does  not  do.  Probably 


and 


are  from  the  feminine  [So  in  Digalah,  in 


§32] 


FORMATION  OF  TENSES. 


85 


the  Urmi  plain,  we  have  one,  perhaps  two,  fem.  forms  for  masculine 
in  the  singular ;  see  also  §  50.]  The  other  feminine  plurals  drop  out. 

The  syllable  (or  Ji)  is  added  for  emphasis  and  is  an  O.S.  particle 

*  { 

=  indeed,  §  67.  The  Q.  forms  like  are  contractions  =  {Sflba 

;oir  the  past  for  the  present,  as  we  see  also  in  the  imperfect  con¬ 
tracted  forms,  and  in  the  pluperfect  which  has  the  force  of  a  perfect. 
The  O.S.  abbreviations  like  thou  art  beautiful,  are  not  found 

in  N.S. 

(2)  Second  present.  The  substantive  verb  is  added  to  the  verbal 

noun  with  ^3  which  takes  Zlama,  not  Pthakha  as  it  would  in  O.S., 
§  88  ^.  The  y,  of  the  substantive  verb  makes  a  diphthong  with  the 
preceding  vowel  sound.  Thus  =  he  is  in  the  act  of 

finishing,  (hiprdqeli  accented  on  d). 

(3)  The  imperfect  similarly  follows  from  the  past  of  the  sub¬ 
stantive  verb. 

(4)  The  preterite  is  formed  from  the  past  participle,  absolute 

state,  by  the  addition  of  yS  and  the  pronominal  affixes.  The  past 
participle,  as  in  O.S.,  has  both  an  active  and  a  passive  sense  ;  in  the 
N.S.  preterite  the  latter  appears.  Thus  it  is  finished  by 

me  =  I  finished,  OOl  that  man  was  left  by  me  =  I 

left  that  man.  When  the  object,  as  it  would  be  in  English,  (which  is 
really  the  subject),  is  feminine,  we  should  expect  the  participle  to 
agree  with  it,  and  so  when  it  is  plural ;  and  this  is  usually  or  very 

often  the  case,  see  §  50 :  as  yfisSs  ojS  vkM  he  left  my  daughter 
{my  daughter  was  left  by  him) :  but  the  inverted  sense  has  become  so 
much  attached  to  this  form  that  this  is  not  necessary.  When  the 
verb  ends  in  vS ,  ,  or  i  the  preposition  is  omitted,  as 

he  took,  thou  saidst.  In  J.  it  is  usually  omitted  in  all  verbs ; 

in  O.S.  it  is  not  omitted.  The  pronunciation  is  usually  with  short  i, 
even  in  words  containing  JA,  etc.  (p.  11);  but  in  K.  Al.  verbs 


86 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


are  pronounced  with  Khwasa,  and  in  a  phonetically  spelt  MS.  of  the 
Alqosh  dialect,  200  years  old,  other  verbs  are  written  so  as  to  be  pro¬ 
nounced  with  long  i.  Even  now  in  some  parts  of  K.  there  is  a  ten¬ 
dency  to  do  so,  especially  in  verbs  with  medial  2 .  When  the  object 

is  included  in  the  verb,  as  in  §  50,  Khwasa  is  universally  retained. 

That  this  is  the  origin  of  this  tense  is  seen  also  (a)  from  the  way 
in  which  the  (English)  object  is  expressed  when  a  pronoun,  see  §  50: 
the  personal  pronouns  are  inserted,  not  the  usual  objective  affixes,  as 


he  killed  thee  {thou  wast  killed  hy  him). — (h)  by  the  use 
of  these  forms  in  O.S.  instead  of  the  past  tense.  Thus 


Aiy  ojS  the  good  (God)  who  hath  taken  care  for  our  lives  (Col- 

lect  at  Nocturns).  So 

to  dwell  m  thy  peoj^le  whom  thou  hast  chosen  (Anthems  at  the  end  of 

Baptismal  Service):  let  any 

who  has  not  received  baptism  depart  (Expulsion  of  Catechumens 
in  the  Liturgy).  See  also  St  Luke  xxiii.  15,  41,  2  Cor.  v.  10  Pshitta, 
and  Rev.  xvii.  7  etc. — (c)  by  the  use  of  the  second  preterite,  especially 

in  K  .,  as  cjS  l6u]  (see  above). — (d)  by  the  use  of  the  partici- 


2^2  make  thy  peace 


pie  alone  in  K.  Al.,  in  either  an  active  or  a  passive  sense,  as 

the  man  was  left,  more  rarely  the  man  left :  2a ihx  the  hidl  has 

{ 

got  loose:  that  woman  was  killed  there: 

those 

men  were  taken  there  and  killed.  So  very  frequently  in  O.S.  both 
actively  and  passively,  as  opt  2^  JXtX  peace  dwelt  in  it  (Martyrs 

Anthem,  Tues.  morn.)  ■  ^  ^  the  sea  could  not  (id.):  ^2 

Joo]  quickened  Adam  who  had  perished,  (id.  Tues.  even.) 


above  them  tuas  placed  an  altar 
(id.):  JocT)  a^A^Ia  death  which  held  us  in  our 


sins  (First  Fri.  even..  First  anthem)  [notice  here  the  objective 


§32] 


FORMATION  OF  TENSES. 


87 


in  the  N.S.  manner  when  the  pronominal  affixes  are  not  inserted  in 
the  verb,  §  50] :  ?  Oii  who  can  repay  the 

grace?  (id.):  >au;sVp  as  it  is  ivritten  (the  Nicene  Creed) ; 

^  Sjcii  y^o  and  then 

let  the  priest  take  the  horn  of  oil  from  the  hands  of  him  that  holds  it 
(Baptismal  rubric) :  notice  the  as  above.  So  Rev.  xix.  9,  and 
elsewhere  frequently.  In  O.S.  this  use  of  the  participle  in  an  active 
sense  appears  to  be  confined  to  certain  verbs. 

(5)  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  use  the  definite  state  of  the  past 
participle  with  the  substantive  verb. 

(6)  Imperative.  The  O.S.  forms  are  used,  except  the  fern.  pi. 

The  more  common  O.S.  form  iR-  pl-  gives  way  to  the  variant, 

less  common  in  O.S.,  ^  ,  for  the  termination  of  which  the 

Eastern  copies  of  Bar  Hebraeus’  grammar  (chap.  ix.  §  4)  and  Bar 
Zu‘bi  give  Rwasa,  not  Rwakha.  We  must  notice  that  in  N.S.  all 
except  ^  verbs  (§  42)  and  a  few  verbs  in  Z.  (§  38)  make  the 

imperative  in  o  ;  thus  aobol  N.S.  =  ail  O.S.  say.  This  leads  to 
a  simplification  in  grammar.  [So  to  run,  —  O.S.  irregular  verb 

,  is  in  N.S.  quite  regular.  Imper.  =  O.S.  or 

This  verb  is  not  used  in  Ti.] 

(7)  The  other  persons  of  the  imperative  are  expressed  by  the 
first  present  tense;  see  §  51  (10). 

(8)  Subsidiary  tenses  may  be  formed  by  Jo<7/ ,  as  jiiSAa  ?O0  is3 

he  will  he  finishing  (rare) :  isss  '^'dl  have  finished  (not 

common) :  loot  he  tvoidd  have  finished  (common). 

So  Jo<7f  ♦\2  (common)  if  he  shall  have  finished,  §§  60 — 62. 

(9)  The  personal  pronouns  may  alw^ays  be  prefixed  to  the  tenses, 


88 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


§§  32,  33 


or  may  follow  them  for  emphasis.  So  in  O.S.  }a2  1  ill  I  go  = 

N.S.  taSfl  ^2  (§  46)  Gen.  xv.  2. 

'  #* 

(10)  The  Conditional  is  like  O.S.,  with  the  addition  of  is??. 

Thus  Ps.  cxxiv.  3,  ^  obol  O.S.  =  ^  OOO)  is3 

luould  have  swallotved  us  up. 

§  33.  The  verb  used  iiegatively. 

Not  is  expressed  by  ^  or  (see  §  67).  It  will  be  observed 
that  (almost  always)  and  Ja  (except  Al.)  are  omitted  with  the 

i' 

negative,  but  not  , 

First  present,  2^  he  does  not  finish. 

^  let  him  not  finish,  and  so  in  subjoined  clauses. 

Future,  ^  \  isa  Ti.i  (rarely  U.) :  ybaAa 

Al.  he  will  not  finish. 

Conditional.  lorn  ^  or  A  MB.  Q.,  or  (in  sub¬ 
joined  clause)  Jbbj  ^  ^^0  luoidd  (should)  not  finish  Always 

in  Al.  lorn  btiSAa 

Habitual  present,  2^  •  btiSAa  Al.^  he  does  not  finish. 

Habitual  imperfect.  Jbc)  wb^  ;  loo]  wbaAa  ^ 

Al.^  he  used  not  to  finish. 

Preterite.  :s^  U  he  did  not  finish.  For  variations  of 

the  particle  see  p.  82. 

Second  present.  Al.  h  rare)  he  is  not  finishing. 

Imperfect.  JbaAa  loa^  ^  U.  JLbaAa  Job)  Job)  Tkh. 

Al.^  etc.  (jS  Ti.^)  he  teas  not  finishing. 


^  Paradigm  form. 


§§  33,  34] 


PASSIVE  VERB. 


89 


Preterite.  ojS  ^  he  did  not  finish,  ^  K.  (rare). 

Second  preterite.  loo]  wtsLa^  ^  he  did  not  finish. 

Perfect.  ^  Al.)  Ae  not  finished. 

*  I*  .• 


Pluperfect.  UOu^  Joc^,  U.,  }ooi  }oa]  ^  Tkh. 

Ti.)  he  had  not  finished. 

Imperative,  wbobk^  ^  or  finish  (see  §  59). 

The  above  table  applies  equally  to  the  second  conjugation. 


§  34.  The  passive  of  transitive  verbs  of  both  conjugations  is 
formed  by  the  addition  of  the  past  participle  to  the  various  tenses 
of  to  remain,  for  the  conjugation  of  which  see  §  39. 


Examples :  he  was  taken :  4^^  inL 

she  is  being  left. 

More  rarely  it  is  expressed  by  to  come ;  thus,  JM 

he  came  to  killing  =  he  ivas  killed. 


Often  the  passive  is  expressed  merely  by  the  past  participle, 
alone  in  K.,  or  with  the  substantive  verb  both  in  K.  and  U.  Thus 
=  he  was  killed,  or  he  has  killed.  In  O.S.  also  this  con¬ 
struction  often  replaces  a  passive  verb ;  thus, 

may  our  prayer  he  heard,  xlh  and  Ipal  may  rarely  be  used  in  the 

**  I* 

past  part.,  isyil  ^2  there  is  made  reference  =  refer- 

ence  is  made  :  ^oo)  Jbo)  ^2  a  change  was  made.  The 

verb  is  not  much  used  in  Ti.  for  the  passive,  and  hardly  at  all 

in  Tkh.  Ash.  For  the  past  tense  passive  they  will  say  ^ 

those  men  were  seen  :  2*^  yibl  she  was  seen  (p.  86)  [for  the  verb,  see 

^  ^*7 

§  42].  For  other  tenses  a  periphrasis  is  generally  made  with  the 
active  voice. 


s.  GR. 


12 


90 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


0 

is  also  used  with  past  participles  in  the  sense  of  to  he  or 

remain  or  become,  as  he  avoiding  evil ;  and,  espe¬ 

cially  in  K.  Z.,  for  the  simple  substantive  verb. 

Possibility  is  often  expressed  by  K.  or  ioor  XJ.,  as 

K.  if  it  can  he  subtracted.  So  loot  (or  loo]  §  46) 

U.  it  cannot  he  subtracted,  §  29  (10,  18). 


§  35.  Second  Conjugation.  First  division.  Zqapa  verbs. 

to  save,  or  finish  tr.  (=  O.S.  but  in  another  sense). 

For  the  Mim  see  below. 

Py'esent  participle.  Sing.  m.,  {ilbAbO  f. ;  Ph  ^aAbO  m. 

f.  Al.  Z.  K.  MB.  Sh. ;  or  etc.  U.  Sp.,  or  etc.  Sal.  Q. 

0  ^  0 

Gaw.  J.  (Zlama  either  sound)  =  O.S.  Sing.  ni.,  ;bi$bo  f. ; 

PL  m.,  f. 

Fast  participle  (ahs.  state).  Sing.  ubSo^bO  m.,  }.bb^bO  f- ;  PL 

0 

(K.  etc.)  [In  U.  etc.  Mim  silent.]  =  O.S.  Sing.  bbS^aa  m., 

;(a^f. ;  PI.  m.,  f.  See  §  50. 

(Def.  state.)  Sing.  ni.,  Ti.  U.,  or  .^So^kbO 

Sp.  Tkh.  Sal.  f.;  PL  Jbbo^bb  Ri-  f.  =  O.S.  Sing.  JbbdbO  Ri., 
f. ;  PL  Jba^bO  Ri.,  ;4a34M  f.  [In  U.  etc.  Mim  silent.] 

Imperative,  Sing,  wbi^  m.,  f. ;  PI.  .  otjai  or  .  abo^bS^ 

U.  In  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  we  have  Jba^ ,  yb^ ,  ^Qbabi^  (<•  Sal.). 


In  K.  MB.  we  have 

«>  > 


(or 


).  In 


O.S.  jj-4,  atj^  (or  (or  ai'i4). 

Verbal  noun.  Jbob^bO  :  }bOboA^  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.,  or 
Sal.  [In  U.  etc.  Mim  silent.] 


.<  / 


35] 


SECOND  CONJUGATION.  FIRST  DIVISION. 


91 


Notes.  (1)  The  tenses  follow  as  in  the  first  conjugation.  Thus 
the  preterite  is  otS  he  saved.  The  infinitive  is 

,»  **  /  ’  “i  10 

K.,  U.  and  often  Ah,  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  is 

•'  •'  ' 

not  prefixed  to  the  verbal  noun  in  the  second  present  and  imperfect ; 

jf 

but  see  5  37,  note  6.  Future  in  Ah  Z., 

(2)  This  and  the  next  division  correspond  to  the  O.S.  Pa^eh  But 
the  Pthakha  on  the  first  radical  is  strengthened  to  Zqapa,  perhaps  by 
way  of  compensating  for  a  Dagesh,  as  the  East  Syrians  dislike 
doubling  a  letter.  See  also  §  87  c. 

(3)  The  N.S.  past  participle  differs  from  the  O.S.  by  the  insertion 
of  o .  See  §  89. 

(4)  The  verbal  noun  also  is  quite  unlike  O.S. ;  though  it  has  its 
counterpart  in  other  Aramaic  dialects  (Nold.  §  101). 

(5)  The  Mim  prefixed  to  this  conjugation  is  silent  in  U.  Sal. 
Sp.  Q.  Gaw.  and  usually  J.  In  Ah  the  form  wtijJbo  (= 

is  pronounced  as  one  word,  with  one  Mim.  The  Mim  is  never 
prefixed  to  verbs  beginning  with  yina ;  thus  yioyap  to  growl,  not 

;  so  to  smell  (O.S.  y«i).  Causatives,  whether  tri- 

literal  or  quadriliteral,  and  all  verbs  from  Aph'el,  have  Mim  already, 

and  do  not  take  a  second :  as  to  love  (root  cf  love, 

0$  '  * 

O.S.  and  N.S.):  to  cause  to  be  killed.  The  same  is  the  case  with 

AiS  U.  =  K.  =  Adi  K.  =  Adoi  Al.  =  O.S.  AdoM  (root  Aa.) 
to  carry,  where  the  ^  and  ^4  take  the  place  of  §  45.  In  the 
verb  to  honour,  the  pbO  is  always  retained  in  U.  etc.  though  not 

in  the  cognate  to  weight.  Perhaps  we  have  here  the  in¬ 
fluence  of  reverend  (O.S.  IlxtJLbD).  It  is  also  retained  in 

jidoooTbo  faithful  (O.S.  mercifid. 

The  Mim  in  the  imperative  in  K.  is  an  instance  of  false  analogy. 


92  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§§  35,  36 

(6)  If  a  verb  is  conjugated  according  to  both  conjugations,  it 
is  usually  intransitive  in  the  first,  and  transitive  in  the  second,  as 

to  go  out,  to  put  out.  We  may  often  distinguish 

them  by  the  second  radical  being  soft  in  the  first,  hard  in  the 
second  conjugation  :  as  to  buy  (1),  to  sell  (2) ;  but  there 

are  exceptions,  see  §§  94,  95. 

(7)  Frequently  a  verb  follows  the  first  conjugation  in  K.,  the 

second  in  U.,  as  K.  to  command  =  U. 

im  II  *  II  ■ 

(8)  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  are  often  contracted  as  in  the 

first  conjugation,  as  Jboj  =  Jbo)  I  was 

saving. 

(9)  We  may  take  as  an  instance  of  the  difference  between  the 

two  conjugations  blessed,  a  first  conjugation  form  (but  the 

other  parts  of  the  verb  are  not  used)  and  blessed,  from 

2  conj.  to  bless.  The  latter  has  reference  to  an  agent,  the 
former  merely  to  a  state  of  blessedness.  A  man  visiting  another  on 
a  feast  day  says  may  your  feast  be  blessed ;  but 

2^2  I  have  come  {came)  to  bless  your  feast. 

(10)  Many  verbs  express  an  English  copula  and  adjective,  or  a 

passive,  as  U.  to  be  cold  (as  a  person) :  abobw  to  be  baptized 

(cf.  to  baptize) :  Al.  to  be  f  ulfilled. 

§  36.  Second  Conjugation.  Second  division.  Pthakha  verbs. 
to  wash  (so  O.S.). 

n  , 

Present  participle.  Sing.  m.,  f. ;  PI.  >  m.  f. 

K.  MB.  Sh.  Al.  Z.,  (so  O.S.  but  pi.  m.)  or  ^ 

XJ.,  or  Q.  Sal.  daw.  J. 

Past  participle  {abs.  state),  ,  u!SkSouibO  K. 

etc.,  or  >.V\ofvbi?  [for  PI.  see  §  50]  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J. 


36] 


SECOND  CONJUGATION.  SECOND  DIVISION. 


93 


{Def.  state.)  (^Ti.),  ;^ou>bo  K.: 

-*/  '  //  ^  4i  i  ^  f  ~  i  i  f  ' 

(S  Sal.  Sp.),  U.  etc.  =  O.S.  etc. 

Imperative.  Sing.  m.,  uSk^f.;  PL  .  (or  .  oM^ik^?) 

m.  f.  XJ.,  or  (4»  Sal.)  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J.,  or 

♦.  ClSA^  (or  o^A^)  K.  MB.  =  O.S. 

Utak^kM  ,  Oii!Sk^Mk  (or  ^  OLSt^M  )  WAa^k^M  (or  ■Aki). 

II  t  '  11  t  I  II  t  \  t  ^  ft' 

Verbal  noun.  K.  etc.  (Mini  silent  U.),  Sal. 

Q.  Gaw.,  or  Sal. 


.1  I  tt 


The  tenses  follow  as  before :  the  First  present  is  given  in  full. 


K.  MB.  Sli.  Al.  Z. 

U.  Sp. 

Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J. 

S.  3  m. 

6k^^ 

»*  / 

f  t 

f  f 

f. 

/ 

'  f  f 

2  m. 

11  ^  , 

tt  it  / 

\ 

isS,^b9 

tt  tt  $$ 

f 

t  / 

I  f  t 

/  f  11 

1  m. 

\f  f  t 

AAs 

\  f  f  f 

f. 

A^^ 

\  f  f 

PI.  3  m.  f 

t  ft 

u>S>^MhP 

t  f  II 

2  m.  f. 

oisASiM^ 

'  f  t 

\  f  f  II 

1  m.  f. 

/ 

f  t  1 

A^bP 

tt  it 

For  variations  in  the  terminations  see  page  81. 

Thus  are  conjugated  all  triliterals  of  the  second  conjugation  with 

Pthakha,  among  which  are  many  causatives,  as  'pJffsO  to  raise,  from 

(but  pii  to  lift,  from  ^2fi  is  of  the  first  division).  In  the 

K.  forms  the  half  vowel  often  drops  altogether,  as  I  love  = 

« 

Jinjii  LJ.  The  first  Zlarna  in  the  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J.  forms  is  often 

v*  7i  ' 


94 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


36,  37 


lengthened  to  long  Zlama.  It  is  usual  to  write  the  verbal  noun  of 
this  division  with  Rwasa,  of  the  first  division  with  Rwakha. 


37.  Second  Conjugation.  Third  division.  Quadriliterals. 


>  >  #■ 


0^2 


to  cause  to  he  killed  (so  O.S.). 


U.  Sp.  MB.  Sh. 

Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  J. 

Pres.  part.  S.  m. 

f. 

Ay^p 

PL  m.  f. 

Past  part.  (ahs. 
state)  S.  m. 

>lyjoio 

f. 

Ayio* 

Ayiobo 

PI.  m.  f. 

see  §  50. 

ViA^^ifctOiSO 

/  #<v  < 

{-Def.  state)  S.  m. 

Ay»Mo 

f. 

i^lysoto' 

PI.  m.  f. 

Pup.  S.  m. 

f. 

»»v  »» 

PL  m.  f. 

Verbal  noun 

A  av 

The  tenses  follow  as  before. 


K.  Al.  Z. 


•*  • 


IOb9 


Notes.  (1)  Quadriliterals,  not  causatives  or  beginning  with  i, 
are  of  the  form  to  reco7icile,  but  follow  the  above. 

(2)  All  quadriliterals  have  Pthakha  on  the  first  radical  unless 

/ 

1  ^  Sp.  Sal.,  ^  Ti.  2  ^  Sal.  ^  Or  Sal. 


VEKBS  WITH  WEAK  INITIAL  LETTER. 


95 


the  second  radical  be  o,  when  Zqapa  is  substituted,  as  1:lo^sO  to 
beseech^  §  7,  but  this  makes  no  difference  in  the  conjugation.  In 
these  verbs  in  the  past  participle  etc.  one  Wau  may  be  omitted  :  as 


op  Uouo. 


(3)  For  first  conjugation  quadriliterals  see  §  46. 

(4)  Some  verbs  have  more  than  four  letters ;  these  follow  the 
above  conjugation. 


(5)  In  K.  Al.  when  the  second  letter  is  OJ  or  a  weak  consonant, 
the  euphonic  vowel  which  it  would  take  is  dropped,  as 

Al.  prepare  ye.  So  with  to  believe,  to  cause  to  enter, 

in  K.  and  to  discipline,  in  all  districts;  e.g. 

{mo-rin)  I  cause  to  enter,  liSSiOis'SO  punished.  This  is  the  case 
especially  with  causatives  of  3,  ^  verbs,  as  to  feed, 

to  have  baked.  Yet  we  have  J^^oiaO  Al.  she  informs,  from 
(=  K.  U.,  causative  of  to  know). 

k  iia  /  !!■ 


(6)  In  the  tenses  ^  is  sometimes  added  to  the  verbal  noun  in 
Al.  as  he  was  causing  to  be  killed. 

I  38.  Regular  Variations  from  the  above  verbs. 

The  variations  are  due  as  in  O.S.  to  certain  weak  letters  being  in 
the  root ;  but  ^  verbs  now  present  no  irregularities,  nor  yet  those 
which  in  N.S.  have  the  second  and  third  radicals  the  same. 

Verbs  Si^^l  jikio 

Verbs  3.  JsS 

These  verbs  may  be  taken  together.  The  variations  are  due  to  2 
becoming  yi,  and  in  some  cases  to  a  metathesis  taking  place.  We 

must  notice  that  in  N.S.  2  and  y  can,  but  in  O.S.  (except  in  a  few 


96 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERN AGUILAR  SYRIAC. 


Avords  like  JxaI)  caimot,  stand  at  the  beginning  of  a’  word  without  a 
vowel.  When  vowelless  they  have  no  sound. 


isoi  or  to  bind. 

it 

Verbal  noun  luith 

U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  Ti.  MB. 

Sh.  Al.  Ash. 

Pret.  a73k-jb-A>2  U.  i  K.) 

CJXMI  Al.  and  sometimes  Tkh. 
Imp.  Al.  (PI. 


to  be  long. 

U.  Ash.  (also  2^0  Ash.) 

MB.  Sh. :  Al. 

•  / 

C7^  Al.  Tkh. 

j^OX:  ^^6x  Al. 


;xx:  ;xx  Al.  Tkh. 
•  /  •  /  / 


in  Al.  :  ^oyJSaZ  or  OXQ>2).  Tlie 
Sing,  in  Z.  in  some  verbs  has  no 
Wau,  as  :  say. 

Past  part.  2xxz>2 :  2xjQ72 

1  t  t  *t 

Al.  Tkh. 

But  a  few  verbs  only  have  one  form  of  verbal  noun.  ySf2  (but 
see  §  46)  to  go,  Aal  to  eat,  X02  to  say  (in  Al.  and  sometimes  in  K. 
to  speak  or  tell),  2^2  to  come  (see  §  46),  Xx  to  know  (see  §  46),  2*.* 

i  *'  ,• 

to  curdle  Sp.,  only  make  2^f2a,  2*^3^  etc. 

In  some  there  is  a  metathesis  in  the  First  present  tense,  as 
or  I  learn  (§  46).  In  Sp.  this  arrangement  even  extends  to 

verbs  as  ^xA«M  {mMi)  =  they  are  baptized. 

Many  of  these  verbs  have  2  in  one  district,  m  in  another :  as 
23^1  (or  2^)  U.  =  2^2  MB.  as  O.S.  to  bake,  U.  K.,  O.S.  = 

^^2  Al.  to  sit  (is  N.S.,  ^  O.S.). 

The  only  second  conjugation  verbs  2lS  or  are  to  be 


97 


|§  38,  39]  VERBS  WITH  WEAK  MIDDLE  LETTER. 


peaceful  or  tame  K.,  entrust  Al. :  to  reverence  (retaining  jzabO 

always),  and  a  few  quadriliterals,  as  U.  (jt'  K.)  to  he  numb, 

to  he  cheap,  to  he  a  widoio  or  luidower, 

X»*  '  J-  '  It  f  ’  II  I 

to  tumble  over,  Sp.  (=  ^hopo  K.)  to  he  muddy  or  broken, 

m  ^  t 

to  he  shy,  »^bijLbO  to  he  heavy.  These  are  regular. 


Verbs  ^  and  of  the  first  conjugation  may  in  the  Future 
colloquially  drop  Zqapa  in  U.  (not  K.),  as  we  will  not  come, 

he  luill  not  dwell,  they  %uill  not  go ;  but  not 

etc.,  where  too  many  consonants  intervene  between  the 
vowels.  So  bbOlA  Al.  Z.  =  Sal.  =  bbol  2^  he  says. 

a  j  t0  A*  ^ 


§  39.  Verbs  ISi  or  ^  , 

The  O.S.  verbs  oSt  (o  non-consonantal)  and  correspond  to 
this  class,  as  the  present  participles  are  of  the  form  from  ^aLb 

(Ok^)  to  rise  up,  from  (w^)  to  hotu.  These  classes  are 

called  by  the  Eastern  Syrians  respectively  Jih  and 

We  must  however  notice  that  O.S. 

N.S.  2^u9k  bowed. 

t 

Example.  to  remain  (so  O.S. ;  3^  is  the  past  tense). 

Pres.  part.  Sing,  (in  U.  Zlama  usually  feeble)  or 

K.  m. ;  f.  ;  PI.  y&n^  m.  f. 

Past  part.  (abs.  state).  Sing,  m.,  f. ;  PI.  (K.)  m.  f. 

{Def.  state.)  Sing.  m.,  f. ;  PI.  m.  f. 

Imperative.  JEOk^  (Rwasa  in  O.S.  Ok^  verbs:  but  Rwakha  in  O.S. 
verbs  as 


s.  GR. 


13 


98 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


The  First  present  thus  is  :  ('*^)  •  • 

y&J^:  :  yJlA, 


In  the  second  present  ^  is  commonly  omitted  in  this  verb, 
which  is  used  to  form  the  passive  voice  of  other  verbs,  §  34. 

In  Z.  in  some  verbs  the  Alap  remains  in  the  preterite,  as  ^^23 
{d^iri)  I  returned,  from  b2p. 

Several  verbs  whose  second  radical  is  silent  are  conjugated  simi¬ 
larly.  Such  are :  to  look  intently  (so  O.S.  ,  Barbahlul) : 

A1.  to  hire  (O.S.  So  Al.  a  hired  servant) :  ojJ^ 

K.  to  dawn,  see  §  46  (O.S.  (as  O.S.),  or  30^  K.  to  hear 

witness :  pop  (also  pc^)  Al.  Bo.  to  understand  —  pL^a  K.,  O.S.  (= 

2^3^^  U.  p.  102)  :  awake,  find  out  about,  feel  pain  (O.S. 

(  « 

to  feel)  :  3^^  to  light  a  fire  (O.S.  3^) :  3(2^  to  shake  (O.S.  <3^.  In 

N. S.  to  disturb,  is  also  used).  See  also  §  40. 

Second  conjugation  verbs  2^ ,  or  ,  as  Al.  to  borrow 

(=  U.  So  jLs  debt,  Pers.) :  3a<^  to  help,  Pers.,  (so  uiloy 
help)  are  regular.  So  also  K.  to  pour  in  grease  (=  ♦^0013 

U.  §  46  =  O.S.) ;  ?30i»b8  K.  (=  U.)  =  DHT  Chald.  to 

defile  (pxitting  milk  in  lenten  food  gives  the  idea)  [hence  ixiojo^ 
a  summer  pasturage  for  making  butter  etc.]. 

We  may  notice  Ti.  to  bathe  (=  U.  Tkh.)  which 

retains  both  Pe’s.  This  is  an  verb,  while  the  corresponding 

O. S.  is  03*,  but  =  washing  and  rubbing  down  in  the 

bath  O.S.  [In  U.  this  verb  is  used  of  women  only,  JaaXO  being  used 

I* 

of  men.]  So  some  others,  §'81  (5). 


§  40.  Yerbs  with  middle  3*. 

These  are  like  the  preceding,  or  else  are  regular.  But  in  the 


40 — 42]  VERBS  WITH  WEAK  MIDDLE  LETTER. 


99 


preterite  is  nearly  always  silent.  Thus  U.  =  AI.  K. 

they  hear,  from  to  hear ;  Pret.  I  hore.  The  noun  de- 

notinD-  thp.  a.opnt  [§  77]  is  TT  K.  one  who  carries  or 

hears.  The  action  is  U.  K.  hearing.  So  U., 

or  more  commonly  U.  K.  hearing. 

The  verb  JCu  and  perhaps  others  in  §  39  may  also  be  conju¬ 
gated  thus. 


5  41.  Verbs  and 

In  the  First  present  tense,  o  and  «a,  if  they  have  no  vowel,  form 
a  diphthong  with  Zqapa,  as  I  leave  (shd-qin). 

In  the  first  conjugation  imperative,  the  o  is  usually,  ^  some¬ 
times,  dropped.  Thus  from  to  leap,  Sal  U.  K.,  but  Sooi 

sometimes  in  U. ;  wtioai  leave,  is  shuq  usually  in  K.,  shwuq  usually 

in  U. :  oaSx  to  pass  or  to  enter,  does  not  drop  ^ :  aaSx  to  do,  never 
except  in  Al. 

Verbs  a^  of  the  second  conjugation  have  Pthakha  in  U.  Q.  etc. 

Zqapa  in  K.,  as  U.,  ^otSbO  K.  to  happen,  §  87  c.  (For 

K.,  U.,  see  §  63.)  These  verbs  are  like 

but  in  K.  do  not  take  even  a  half-vowel ;  thus  4,0^  thou  joinest 
{mzogit)  K. 

For  to  he  drunk,  and  }aibo  to  spread  (always  Zqapa),  see 

I*  •' 

verbs,  §  42 ;  for  SiaS  to  huhhle  up,  to  he  satisfied,  to  dye 

(all  ^),  see  verbs,  §  44. 

I  42.  Verbs  A. 

First  Conjugation.  to  reveal. 


100 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  42 


Present  particijyle.  Sing.  m.,  f. ;  PL 

In  U.  Sp.  Sal.  with  first,  in  J.  K.  Al.  Z.  MB.  Sh.  with 
second  Zlama  sound.  (So  below  wherever  Lamadh  has  long  Zlama.) 

Past  participle  (abs.  state).  Sing.  m.,  f. ;  PI.  (K.) 
m.  f.  (see  §  50).  =  O.S.  Sing.  3^m.,  f.;  PI.  f- 

{Pef.  state.)  Sing.  1^4.  U.K.,  orjL^Ti.  MB.,  or  Tkh.  m., 
^  f. ;  PL  or  ^.  =  O.S.  Sbg.  m.. 

f. ;  PL  m.,  f. 

Imperative.  Sing.  m.,  f. ;  PI.  m.  f.,  K.  MB.  Sh. 
as  O.S.  (but  O.S.  f.  wanting).  In  U.  Q.  Sal.,  Sing, 

m.  f. ;  PL  m.  f.  (j^  Sal.). 

Verbal  noun.  ;Si^,  or  U.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw. 

From  these  the  tenses  follow  as  before.  We  may  notice  : 

The  first  present. 

S.3m.  or  ^  U.  J. 

f.  or  U.  J. 

2  m.  Tkh.),  'Tkh. 

(the  long  Zlama  of  Tau  has  the  first  sound)  or 

Q.  MB. 

f.  (*.  Tkh.),  U.  Tkh.  (^).  Tkh., 

Q.  MB.  or  Al. 

1  m.  or  ;i2  U.  Ti.  Sh.  (common). 

f.  or  ;i2  U.  Ti.  (common),  or  Al. 

PI.  3  ra.  f.  U.  j. 


§42] 


VERBS  WITH  WEAK  FINAL  LETTER. 


101 


2  m.  f.  (1^  Sal.),  or  Ti.  (*>  Tkh.),  or 

Al. 

lm.f.  ^  U.:  Ti.  Al.  Sh.  Ash. : 

3h.  *  ‘ r*riA\^  U.  Tkh. :  JAAA*  Q-  ■ 

[The  O.S.  contracted  forms  are  given  for  comparison  :  Sing. 

isAA,:  PI.  44^  44  = 

^oiAS. :  4U.  :  :  ,0^.] 

Second  present,  revealing  etc. ;  or  in  Sal. 

4*  44??  •  ■ 

«jso;%  :  ;  PI.  (or  : 

Infinitive.  ;  or  often  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw. 


/  *  4''  i ' 


Second  Conjugation.  First  division, 
to  hide. 

Present  participle.  Sing.  m.,  f. ;  PI.  uXi^bO  K. 

MB.  Sh.  Al.  Z.  In  U.  Mim  is  silent.  In  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J.  etc. 

4  t* 

[For  the  Zlama  under  Shin  see  above  §  42.]  0.  S. 

Past  part.  {abs.  state).  Sing,  m.,  f.  (Mim 

silent  as  above) ;  PI.  U.  see  §  50).  =  O.S.  : 

{Def.  state.)  Sing.  ^Alo^bO  m.,  U.  Ti.,  or  Sp. 


102 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  42 


Tkh.  Sal. ;  PI.  (Mim  silent  in  U.  etc.).  Also  in  Al.  as  O.S. 


Imperative.  Sing.  m.  f.,  PI.  or 

Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  Sal.);  or  Sing.  m.,  f.^  PI.  K.  Sh. 

MB.  In  O.S. 

Vei'hal  noun.  )aO-X  K.  MB.  llOuXJ^^JiO  sometimes  Ti. : 

loaSi^'SO  U.,  loMe^tO  Sal.  Gaw.  Q.,  or  Sal. 

The  tenses  follow  as  before. 


Second  Conjugation.  Second  division.  The  only  verbs  conjugated 
thus  are  U.  to  divide  (for  which  see  below),  and  the  causa¬ 
tives  like  §  46.  They  are  like  but  take  an  euphonic 

vowel  whenever  does  so.  For  throw,  see  5  46. 


Second  Conjugation.  Third  division. 

to  understand  (not  common  in  K.).  For  the  Zlama  of 
Mim,  see  Several  are  paradigm  forms  only. 

Present  participle.  Sing.  m.,  }»boaAiaO  f.,  PL  m.  f. 

K.  AL;  or  U.  MB.  Sh.  (but  Mim  silent 

U.);  or  :  ^boa^bo  :  uyaAbo  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  J. 

Past  pai'ticiple  (abs.  state).  Sing.  m.,  J*boao^kbO  f.,  PL 

yi^a^bO  m.  f.  K. ;  or  Sing.  m.,  j.^a^bO  f.  U.  Sal.  Q. 

Gaw.  (for  pi.  see  §  50),  so  MB.  Sh.  with  Mim  sounded. 

{Def.  state.)  Sing.  ^^a^bO  m.,  .^jLi^a^bO  (i^aoflda  Ti.)  f.. 


VERBS  WITH  WEAK  FINAL  LETTER. 


103 


FI.  m.  f.  K;  or  Sp. 

Sal.)  i^aoAbo  U.  etc. 

,*■  I 

Imjyerative.  Sing,  iR-  f-,  PI-  ♦s^oboI^A^  m.  f.  U.;  or  ' 

Sal.)  Q.  Gaw.  Sal. ;  or  Sing.  M^oai^da  m.,  £, 

PI.  OMsAbO  m.  f.  K.  MB.  Sh. 

t 


»  0 

Verbal  noun.  K.  MB.,  or  IlQboa^ddO  Ti.  sometimes, 

or  Joaboa^bS  U.,  or  Jooboaol^ba  (or  )  Sal.,  or  Joo^aAbS  Gaw. 

The  tenses  follow  as  before :  for  the  euphonic  vowel  see  §  37  (5). 

Some  verbs  with  a  silent  final  letter  are  conjugated  like  ^ 
verbs  (but  see  §  46  ad  init.).  Such  are  :  Cjbaa  to  be  extinguished 

(O.S.  Ojiia) :  ^03  to  mix  (also  A.  as  O.S.)  :  U.  to  knock, 

attack,  butt  (in  Al.  Tkh.  as  O.S.  In  K.  also  Jb^)  :  or 

to  make  a  fence,  see  §  46  :  (=#  U.,  hard  Kap) 

to  lose  savour  (O.S.  :  K.  U.,  also  Al  .,  as  O.S.  to 

divide,  §§  46,  98  (cf  midlent  =  O.S.  the  division,  and 

lS^half=O.B.lp&-.  Tkh.  a  wave  =  'TreKa<yo<;  ?)  :  OJ-M 

K.  to  be  like,  Arab. 


So  in  the  second  conjugation  U.  =  4^A4bo  Al.  =  .^^bo 

K.  to  divide  :  CJ^aibO  K.  to  call  to  'prayer,  Arab.  :  Al.  to  liken 

(O.S.  K-  (Arab.)  :  U.  to  pant. 


§  43.  Verbs  0^  (ixScX  6^66  ii^)  of  the  first  conjugation 
are  usually  written  with  only  one  o  in  the  imperative,  as  from 
OiA  to  snatch. 

##  rs»^ 

§  44.  Verbs 


104 


GKAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§44 

These  verbs  are  in  most  places,  in  many  of  their  forms,  conjugated 
as  if  was  absent,  and  like  ^  verbs.  In  others,  as  in  O.S.,  they 
are  conjugated  as  if  ^  was  a  strong  consonant. 

First  Conjugation,  to  hear  (=  O.S.  In  U.  etc.,  pro¬ 
nounced  ,  see  5  46. 

Present  participate.  Sing.  m-,  5^  f.  U.  Sh.  as  O.S.,  or 

f.  K.,  PI.  m.  f  (in  Tkh.  pron.  shame,  as  if  JsOSij  a 

^  verb);  O.S. 

Past  pmrticiple  (abs.  state).  Sing,  ^bait  m.,  liStiOtX  f.  U.,  or 
f.  Ti.  Ash.,  Al.  Z.  as  O.S. ;  PI.  ui^bax  Ti.  (as  if  ^),  see  §  50. 

(Def.  state.)  Sing.  Jib^baS  m.  U.  Tkh.,  or  Ah,  or  jLbaa:  Ti. 

Z.  Al.  as  O.S. :  f.  as  O.S.  [pron.  shmi‘ta  Ti.]  ;  PI.  l^SiaoXj 

LSiXiX,  or  }by>baac  as  O.S. 

Imperative.  Sing,  s^bab^  m.  f.,  PI.  ♦^obab^bM!  m.  f.  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw. 
(as  if  [in  Sal.  ;  or  Sing.  y^baX  m.,  f.,  PI.  m.  f. 

K.  MB. ;  or  Sing.  A^o^abi  m.,  f.,  PI.  ^bai  m.  f.  Al.  Ash. 

In  O.S.  Abas  :  yAbaX  :  oAbOA  :  JbbQbt . 

<  /  /  V7 “ 


Venial  noun.  i  lxaa :  Al.  Ash.  :  also  U.  Q.  Sal. 

Gaw. 

From  these  come  the  tenses  ;  we  notice  especially : 

The  first  present.  In  U.  Sh.  AbabS :  ^bab  :  b^bybai  :  uisbibabi : 

;  ♦^bsAbbai  :  ywAbaS.  In  K.  the  feminines  are 

J*bibas  :  y^Ibbai:  ^AbaS.  In  Al.  the  2  pi.  is  *^Kabba:x,  and  in 

Tkh.  is  pronounced  shdmdtun,  as  if  a  ^  verb.  For  variations  in  the 
terminations  see  ?  ol. 


§  44]  VERBS  WITH  WEAK  FINAL  LETTER.  105 

The  second  present,  :  but  in  Sal.  uiiboia  ;  in 

Gaw.  and  also  Sal.  oiV^ioxa  etc.,  as  in  ^  verbs,  p.  101. 


Second  Conjugation.  or  to  assemble. 

Pres,  participle.  Sing.  m.,  or  f.,  PI. 

s^SftiS^  U.  MB.  Sh.  (but  in  U.  Mim  is  silent) ;  so  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  J. 
but  with  ^  ;  or  Sincr  m  f..  PI.  m.  f.  K. 

(in  Tkh.  pron.  mjdme,  as  if  and  so  Ash.  but  with 

Past  participle  (abs.  state).  Sing.  m. :  J*MOO^b9  U.,  or 


K.  f. ;  PI.  K.  (for  U., 


Imperative.  Sing.  m.  f. ;  PI.  m.  f.  U.  So 

Q.  Gaw.  Sal.  with  {fj  Sal.).  In  K.  m.,  y^boj^bo  f. ;  PI. 

m.  f.  So  Ash.  MB.  Sh.  with  , 


Verbal  noun.  }*bw^bA-^Lb9  K. :  ?^Cub»»!^-bO  MB.  Sh.  Ash. : 

,1  ,•  * 

la^pbo!^  U.:  ipbMObOp^  Q.  Sal.  (or  Sal.):  Gaw. 

The  tenses  follow  as  before. 

The  verbs  to  bubble  up,  to  be  satisfied,  to  dye 

(which  in  U.  have  a  Pthakha  sound,  see  §  46),  are  pronounced  differ- 

ently  in  U.  and  K.  in  the  First  present.  Thus  I  am  satisfied, 

^0  •  •  • 

is  sd-win  K.,  so'in  U.  But  U.  she  is  satisfied,  is  s6‘a,  and 

also  K.  is  50 ‘2/a.  Past  part.  su'ya,  etc. 

For  verbs  with  more  than  one  weak  letter,  see  5  46. 


S.  GR. 


14 


106 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


§  45.  Causative  verbs. 

(a)  These  verbs  are  derived  from  Aph‘el,  and  are  formed  by  pre¬ 
fixing  ^  to  the  root  (Gaw.  Q.  Sal.  J.  ^  or  bo),  as  to  hill, 

to  have  hilled.  Almost  all  first  conjugation  verbs  form 
causatives  in  N.S. ;  and  they  are  frequently  used  where  in  English 
the  original  verb  would  be  used,  when  the  sense  is  that  a  person  does 
a  thing  by  the  hand  of  another,  as,  8t  Paul  wrote  an  epistle  by  the 

hand  of  a  scribe,  ^  JOeSoh 

(or  jcaeSoh  yiO^). 


The  meaning  must  be  noted :  thus,  f  ^  to  dry  up  intr.,  f  33.^ 

to  cause  to  dry  up ;  but  to  grind  tr.,  V«  to  have  ground. 
In  the  first  case  the  object  of  the  causative  is  the  subject  of  the  ori¬ 
ginal  ;  in  the  second  case  the  object  of  both  verbs  is  the  same.  But 
there  are  some  exceptions,  as  333  to  remember,  to  cause  to 

remember,  remind,  see  below,  h. 

Some  causatives  are  triliteral  owing  to  a  weak  letter  having 
dropped.  These  are  noted  below.  But  notice  that  verbs  ^ ,  which 
in  O.S.  drop  ^  in  Aph'el,  retain  it  in  the  N.S.  causative. 


(b)  Causatives  of  and  uA  verbs.  These  are  very  irregular. 

In  O.S.  these  verbs  usually  insert  o  in  the  Aph‘el,  and  a  few  of  them 
are  now  so  formed  in  AL,  as  noted  in  the  following  list. 

to  go,  O.S. — U.  to  carry,  (S  J.)  or  K.  or 

K.  Z.  (i  J.)  or  Al. ;  no  preformative  Mim  (O.S.  ,  root 

cf.  O.S.  a  caravan,  herd),  §  46. 

Aai  to  eat,  O.S. — (O.S.  ^^ol)  to  feed. 

7*32  or  ^23  to  shut — 46,  1 1 3. 

V 

^p2  to  say,  O.S. — none,  §  46, 


CAUSATIVES. 


107 


§  4.5] 

wfiLcai  to  go  up — btUdbO,  or  Al.  (O.S.  P‘al  wt3i!iiQ9 ,  Aph. 

bfilQji),  §  46. 

ysoi  to  hind,  O.S. — auX2>bb,  or  Al.  ^  46. 

3.til  to  he  cold — jUSbb  46,  92. 

99  99  i  Co  ' 

bbal  or  btilS  to  spit — JOuyio  ^  46. 

II  99  J.  f0^O 

l^s'i  to  come,  O.S. — i^s)  K.  or  U.  or  J:SM  (also 
Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  or  J^S2»  Al.  (^s),  (O.S.  JisA)  to  hring. 
ill  to  hazard,  he  hold — none. 

TT  ’ 

to  heget,  lay  (eggs) — §  92.  See  p.  114. 

to  knoiu,  O.S. — AtSkbO  (a  Ash.)  or  Al.  5  46  (O.S. 

Iia  !!■  /  !■  ^  ||«  O  \ 

JSyDOl)  to  inform. 

\3<7k  to  give — none,  §  46. 

Ti.  to  borrow,  O.S. —  Ti.  to  lend  (O.S.  4^fol). 

It  "  '  It 

to  mourn — lAt’ao  U.  or  >L^kbo  ^  46. 

to  hasten  intr. —  «Am  to  hasten  tr.  and  intr.  Kurd. 

'll  'll  ' 

to  learn,  O.S. —  'oM  Al.  (O.S.  >^i)  to  teach,  §  46. 

K.  to  afflict  (O.S.  U.  K.  to  afflict. 

(as  O.S.)  or  ^apl  or  to  siuear — K.  or  Sh. 

(bO  Sal.  Q.)  or  jbftbp  U.  or  ^spoiao  Al.  U.  O.S.  to  sivear  tr.,  §  46. 

}A»,  or  as  O.S.  to  hake —  U.  or  U.  or  K.  or 

J^OISO  Al.  or  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  §  46. 

Dbd*  to  him  intr.  O.S. — a>,tbO  or  'obO  Al.  O.S.  to  hum  tr. 

!■  II  !•  •• 

xd*  K.  Al.  to  weight,  afflrm,  O.S. — (O.S.  :vdo2). 


108 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  he  long  (O.S.  ^^SZ)— or  Al  Z.  (O.S.  ^ioZ). 

bbx  or  Jdli  to  he  green  (cf.  wtiSZ) — JOuylSo  (O.S.  wtiaoZ  to  make 
pale  or  green),  §  46. 

to  inherit  O.S. — (O.S.  ^saoZ). 

(is,  O.S.  :s)  or  ^^2  (is)  to  sit — U.  K.  to  place,  or 

Al.  O.S.  (both  is),  or  rarely  to  cause  to  sit,  §  46. 

[In  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  J.  the  causatives  all  have  Zlaraa  on  the  first,  and 
so  in  the  lists  which  follow.] 


(c)  Causatives  of  ^  or  verbs.  As  a  rule  these  are  regular, 

except  that  2  is  changed  into  But  the  following  are  exceptions. 

♦^2S  to  judge,  O.S.  — (none).  (^^'^  is  another  verb,  see 
below  g). 

yly  to  turn  intr. — iski  or  iZbi  Al.  5  46. 

4fm  It*  ^  44  m  *  O 

to  increase  intr. —  (rare)  or  foreign. 

to  he  warm,  O.S.  or  jau — or  pU-Mbp. 

^  to  live,  O.S. — 

or  to  he  worth —  46 

to  come  to  an  end  (as  a  fight),  to  press  down — , 

■  ^ 

to  hazard — (none),  §  46. 

'p^  to  he  hlack,  O.S. 

1^2^  to  how  intr.,  O.S.  U.  (i  K.). 

44  ^  t  44  f  ^  ' 

^ly  U.  to  pay,  O.S.  jsa  (=  to  collect!) — 

to  knead,  O.S.  or  Ju!^bb. 

It  '  •  li  *  4!  f 

to  melt  intr.  (by  rubbing) —  or  (Heb.  and 

Chald.  root  ^^D). 


CAUSATIVES. 


109 


§  45] 


to  suck,  0.  S.  to  suckle,  suck  up. 

to  die,  O.S.  or 

to  rest  intr.,  die,  O.S.  — waA&bO  or  yMiib  to  rest  tr.  and 

'  it  *  t$ 

intr. 

to  ordam,  O.S.  y^fr> — 

^  ^  0  0' 

to  cool  intr.,  O.S.  .^A  to  blow — or 

**  it  0  tt  ^  * 

U.  to  lose  savour  (=  K.  p.  103),  O.S.  OJ^— U. 

s2^  to  remain,  O.S.  or  JU^bO. 

32g  to  hunt,  fish,  O.S.  Sg— ^a^gjo. 

to  rise,  O.S.  ^aLb — U.  Tkh.  (i  Ti.). 

to  wink,  U.  to  bruise,  cut — Root 

^7p  to  dig  (so  Heb.) — i-ttop. 

or  5ub  to  be  cold,  O.S.  yh — kbbo. 

<<  10  0  00  0 

to  hit,  knock — or  isJ^. 
dIS  to  da7'n — 93^.  Root  DSD? 

!■  it  tm  it  0  •  ■ 

ply  to  be  high — to  Ufk  or  Al.  In  O.S.  Apli.  p^yl, 

JAli  to  be  in  love — JbXas.  Heb.  and  Arab.  root. 

00  00  0 

(d)  The  causatives-  of  verbs  with  middle  ^  have  sometimes  Ai 
silent,  the  vowel  being  thrown  back  to  the  preceding  letter ;  as 
to  have  carried,  or  to  load,  from  to  carry.  Or  we  may  say 

but  this  is  less  common. 


(e)  Also  verbs  which  have  a  silent  letter  for  their  second  radical, 
throw  -back  their  vowel  in  the  causatives ;  as  to  wake  intr., 

A^  to  wake  tr. 

(/)  Those  hrst  conjugation  quadriliterals  which  insert  ^  after 


no 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§ 


Jk*  or  o)  (§  46)  drop  it  in  the  causative.  In  the  case  of  (7)  that  letter 
is  sometimes  sounded  in  the  causative,  sometimes  not ;  thus : 

to  desire,  to  cause  to  he  deswed. 

)aC71^  to  thirst,  Tkh.  or  Ti.  to  make  thirsty. 


(g)  Several  causatives  have  no  originals  in  N.S. 

to  hear  a  bastard,  cf.  N.S.  a  bastard. 

•  /  if 

to  appear.  O.S.  ^*3^2  to  perceive. 
hjXbo  U.  or  K.  or  to  blossom,  see  ^  115.  Cf.  O.S. 

'  <»(V  /  \/»  •  ■'  eJ 

green. 

or  K.  to  search.  O.S.  4.  and  4  id. 
to  fiyie,  Arab.  Cf.  N.S.  a  fine, 

to  bori'ow.  Cf  N.S.  jLd  a  debt,  Pers.  In  Al.  ♦.  ZabO. 

\7»  ■  >  ’  I*  ■' 

to  drive  a  shuttle.  O.S.  2^09  thread,  (from  to  enter  ?). 
330^  Al.  to  prepare,  §  106.  But  we  have  K.,  hf  opo  K. 
and  U.  K.,  all  to  prepare. 


Al.  to  neglect,  O.S. 

I* 

Ti.  Al.  to  vomit.  O.S.  to  turn,  Aph.  to  overturn ; 

O.S.  4is4or  vomit. 


230^  to  confess.  So  O.S. 
U.  to  mew.  Arab. 


In  Sal.  23kbO. 


I* 

to  love,  (O.S.  ^),  see  §  95  e. 

to  make  presents.  Cf  N.S.  a  present,  Arab. 

or  to  blister,  prick  up  the  ears.  Arab.  Cf  § 

(See  also  below.) 


113  i. 


CAUSATIVES. 


Ill 


§  45] 


M  to  be  lazy.  Arab. 

Aoaja  K.  to  give  or  take  interest.  Cf.  O.S.  money. 

to  preach,  say  the  litany.  O.S.  f  and 
Sihffso  to  plaister,  §  113  i. 


to  justify,  §  119. 

to  pant.  Cf.  ojSoj^  to  snuff  about  (as  a  dog);  perh. 
formed  from  O.S.  panting. 

to  mimic. 

K.  or  hc^.'SfXao  U.  to  linger.  In  Al.  ^apo  is  to  seal,  as 
N.S.  39)0^9  a  seal.  In  Chald.  the  Pa ‘el  is  to  hasten. 

yxbftbo  to  smell.  O.S. 

to  make  blue  or  green,  foreign.  Cf.  N.S.  blue  or 

green. 

hopip  to  comment  on;  in  Z.  to  light  a  candle.  Tkh.  to 

light  a  candle.  O.S.  3^2  to  illumine. 

wV|Uip  to  fester.  Cf.  N.S.  matter,  (perhaps  root  to  ooze, 
distil). 

jCaaobO  to  rebuke  =  O.S.  JOOiaO  (utDii),  [Nun  inserted  by  false 
analogy  ?],  but  in  N.S.  the  Kap  is  soft. 

to  leak,  perhaps  O.S.  lo  ooze.  See  above. 

2^S&bp  to  prosper  tr.,  thank,  Arab.  Cf.  N.S.  thanks. 

to  mock.  O.S.  xlo  to  beg.  N.S.  meaning  from  Arabic. 
to  be  or  make  poor,  as  O.S.  Also  cans,  of  ^^3  to  be  hushed. 
iiosp  to  despise,  reject.  So  O.S. 


112  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  45 


U.  or  K.  like  f)  to  prove,  affirm,  Arab.  Cf. 

N.S.  =  proof,  which  retains  the  sound. 

wMOito  to  cry  out  O.S.  wMOib^Z. 

K.  to  ask  for,  Arab. 


to  put  in  order.  Cf.  N.S.  order,  Kurd. 
to  preach  the  Gospel. 

U.  or  K.  to  find,  §  118  j.  (Conjugate  like 

to  give  a  pledge,  fiood,  (see  O.S.  Chald.  to  pledge. 

Also  many  causatives  have  no  original  except  in  one  particular 
district. 

(A)  Many  causatives  differ  from  their  originals  in  meaning,  or 
else  undergo  a  development  of  meaning ;  but  most  of  them  may  also 
be  used  in  a  simple  causative  sense. 

6^  K.  Al.  to  spend  the  night  (O.S.  he  stale,  isjii  to  fast, 
he  stale,  keep  over  till  next  day  U.  Cf  N.S.  stale  U. 

to  create,  O.S.  Z^iibp  to  heget  K.,  hear  K. 

bb^  to  fiash  (lightning)  [so  O.S.],  to  have  a  sudden  pain. 


to  polish,  he  bright,  as  O.S. 
to  weave,  tie,  wrestle  K.,  O.S.  to  freeze  (for 

§  92). 


to  circumcise,  to  cut  down  wood  K. 

!•  ■ 


•  A  ^  ^ 

to  inform  against. 


Cf  O.S.  to  cut,  give  sentence,  a  penalty. 

iA  to  wear  out  intr.  to  write  Majliyana  (~),  p.  G. 

to  draw  (O.S.  to  prolong,  draw  out. 

wfiba  to  hold,  catch  [so  O.S.],  take,  hire,  correspond  to,  etc. 
to  compare,  let  out  on  hire. 


CAUSATIVES. 


113 


Al.  to  subdue.  Al.  to  make,  mend. 

urn  n  m  * 

M3  to  remember  O.S.  M3bo  to  remind  (a  like 
;»?  to  be  like  O.S.  2^'^  lo  compare. 

5^3  to  lie  down,  sleep,  die  O.S.  to  put  to  bed  (children). 

4^  0 

}o<r  to  be,  become  O.S.  loofip  to  beget  K.,  bear  K. 

•'  •'  ' 

K.  to  subdue,  (so  N.  S.  subject).  A^»Sp  or 

Al.  to  subdue,  to  confiscate. 

to  scratch,  also  to  be  squeezed  out  (juice),  to  be  overripe. 
^3f^  to  scratch.  Also  to  glitter,  as  snow  (=  ytiSfilsp). 

to  rise,  as  the  sun  (O.S.  sMSf ;  cf.  O.S.  ].^3f  scattered). 
Lb3fbp  K.  to  glitter  as  snow,  (in  U.  ^3^). 

3^  to  find  out,  Arab.  to  announce,  inform,  ivarn. 

33^  to  revolve,  travel  O.S.  to  overturn,  pass  (at  table), 

ty^anslate. 

Al.  Tkh.  to  keep,  gather  together.  lo^iip  Al.  to  shew,  (O.S. 

uCXm). 

aou^  to  be  white  O.S.  ^Oua^O  to  tin  saucepans,  tuhitewash. 
to  see  O.S.,  in  K.  Al.  to  find.  to  shew. 

K.  to  grow  perfect.  U.  K.  to  afiirm,  make  firm, 

to  be  sweet  O.S.  to  forgive,  cause  to  be  desired. 

I  I 

to  be  patient  as  Arab. ;  stand  Al.,  chat  K.  (O.S.  to  collect, 
keep  in).  to  postpone,  keep  waiting. 

K.  to  be  content  with,  cf.  ^40  §  46.  U.  K.  to  miss  a  person. 

to  sit,  as  a  hen  (O.S.  to  cover) :  to  fall  in,  as  a  roof,  as  O.S. 
to  overturn,  (=  O.S. 

to  go  bad,  deteriorate  O.S.  to  spoil,  injure. 


s.  GR. 


15 


114 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


K  to  he  under  a  voio,  he  prohihited,  i^epay  for  loss. 
to  excommunicate,  as  O.S.  Aph.,  to  curse  Al.,  to  lay  under  a  vow  K. 

to  ask  for,  (also  in  marriage)  Arab.  to  give  in 

marriage  (a  daughter). 

to  carry  O.S.  to  load  an  animal. 

to  whip  up  a  horse  O.S.,  plough,  row  a  boat.  to 

canter  a  horse,  tr. 

K.  U.  or  Al.  O  S.,  to  hear,  lay  eggs.  heget  U. 

to  learn  O.S.  to  teach,  instigate,  p.  107. 


to  write  (as  a  scribe)  O.S.  to  dictate,  write  (as 

an  author). 

to  put  on  O.S. ;  to  fight  Ti.  Al.  to  clothe,  (both  ^). 

to  fit  O.S.  aAso  to  compose  songs,  books,  etc. 

to  arrive,  also  to  he  ripe  or  grown  up,  to  catch  up,  to  he 

sent,  all  as  O.S. ;  and  to  wrestle  K.  JV"  to  send,  to  cause  a 
thing  to  happen  to  a  person. 

to  he  meek,  O.S.  81  (5).  to  humiliate, 

to  fill  O.S.,  sufiice,  load  a  gun.  to  make  shift  with. 

^adb  to  ruh  (or  aSa).  ^adaab  to  fix. 

**  99  ^  \m  t  $  )«  II  /  V 

to  rest,  die  O.S.;  to  go  oid,  as  a  lamp;  he  ruined,  as  a  church, 
or  to  rest,  tr.  and  intr.  The  causative  is  the  usual  word 

49  '  II 

in  U.  for  to  rest. 

a^^  to  gnaw  K.,  hew,  O.S.  to  rake,  cf.  N.S.  a  rake, 

to  fall  O.S.  to  dethrone,  turn  out  of  office. 


kdi  to  drive  a  nail,  chisel  as  O.S.,  hump  as  Arab.  to 

tattoo,  vaccinate. 

;ad  K.,  O.S.  and  U.,  both  to  forget,  (not  in  causative  sense). 


45] 


CAUSATIVES. 


115 


to  ordain  O.S.  to  present  for  ordination;  (with 

to  attend  to,  §  71. 

3^.X3i  K.  Al.,  O.S.  and  K.,  both  to  testify.  In  U. 

J^oacjjc^. 

to  fall  in  (a  well  or  roof) ;  fit  stones  together  K.,  O.S. 
to  repair  tools. 

to  he  red  O.S.,  hlush.  wd^puQ?^  to  toast  (bread),  shame. 
O.S.  and  to  comb.  The  former  also  to  grow  lean. 

U.  to  do  skilfully  (O.S.  to  labour).  to  bargain, 

barter. 

to  dwell  O.S.  to  build;  and  in  U.  to  jwople 

(a  country). 

to  dig  up,  destroy  O.S.  Tkh.  to  take  root. 

to  flee  O.S.;  to  run  K.  Ai.  Laii,*  to  pursue,  allow  to  escape. 

to  stretch  out  O.^.,  go  a  long  distance.  to  see  off 

on  a  journey,  to  stretch  out  K.,  let  go  Ti.  Al. 

O.S.  (rare  in  U.)  and  to  listen,  obey,  pay  attention 

(not  in  caus.  sense). 

K.  to  receive,  believe,  U.)  as  O.S.  Pa‘el. 

41  '4#  ^  41# 

to  make  acceptable. 

to  7'ead,  call,  name,  crow  O.S.  iktJLii  to  teach.  Of.  also 

{  { 

a  legible  hand,  lit.  pen. 

to  receive  Holy  Communion;  in  K.  Al.  to  approach,  both  as 
O.S.  to  offer,  celebi'ate  the  Eucharist  K.,  h'ing  near  K.  Al. 

to  bite  as  O.S.  Pa‘el  (rare).  with  scissors, 

keep  hack  pai't  of  a  price  or  debt. 

to  win  a  game  U.,  cover  as  O.S.  to  lose  a  game  U. 


GKAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


IIG 


to  he  angry,  squeeze  K.,  sweep  with  a  wooden  rake  (l^oyJO). 
to  quarrel. 

^23  K.  (O.S.  and  to  sprinkle. 

3^  3  to  shiver  with  cold  or  fear,  Arab.  3\  to  shiver  with  fever. 

K.  to  love  O.S.  )2lM3kbp  to  make  friendly,  to  put  an  oiphan 
lamb  to  another  dam  K.  Cf  to  have  pity  (O.S.  >S-m3). 

JbM3  to  go,  (in  First  present,  only  in  Al.  in  the  sense  to  wander) 
[O.S.  to  creep'].  Am3^  to  have  a  miscarriage. 

to  he  slack,  loose.  to  grant  a  divorce  U.  U. 

or  K.  to  throw,  divorce).  In  O.S.  Pa.  Aph.  to  loose. 

to  min  fast  U.,  7'U7i  to  and  fro  K.,  wi'ench  K.,  stray. 
to  dip  a  red  hot  iron  in  water,  or  yarn  in  paste  (O.S.  Aph.  to  water). 

to  take  O.S.,  charge,  force  to  pay,  subtract  to  over¬ 

lay  with  metals,  interweave,  p.  119. 

2kx  to  loose,  lodge  intr.,  he  profaned,  forgive,  dismiss,  break  a 

I* 

command  or  fast,  O.S.  lyvp  to  entertain,  pitch  tents. 

to  suck  the  whole  of  an  egg,  flash;  slip  peel  K. 
to  whistle,  as  O.S.  Aph. 

to  dinnk  O.S.,  he  wrigated,  smoke  tobacco  K.  to  dip 

»'  i' 

a  red  hot  iron,  or  stretch  yarn  after  dipping  on  poles,  or  the  warp,  in 
weaving  (see  JJbXaO  above),  to  iiwigate.  So  =  dipped  yami. 

to  he  delirious  Al. ;  to  he  pleasaiit  Ti.  (=  U.). 

^  '  ,1  '  ^  t'  ' 

Ti.  or  U.  to  do  as  one  likes,  §  46  k 


(f)  Irregular  Causatives ;  and  Causatives  from  Second  Conjuga¬ 
tion  verbs.  See  also  above  h  io  f  inch  and  h. 


1  Many  of  these  O.S.  verbs  are  not  found  in  Aph‘el  in  O.S. ;  and  many  have  not  the 
N.S.  meaning  in  O.S.  Aph‘el. 


45,  46] 


IRREGULAll  VERBS. 


117 


to  cover,  O.S. ;  also  K.  Al.  Cans.  or 

to  cover,  shut  a  door. 

K.,  O.S.  to  believe  =  U.  Cans,  U. 

or  to  play.  Caus.  ,  see  §  47. 

K.  Al.  and  2^bb  K.  to  stvell.  O.S. 

'  '  ' 

to  wonder,  Arab.  to  astonish.  is  used  in 

K.  Al.  as  an  impersonal  verb  =  to  be  p>leased  to  do  a  thing. 

to  'Understand.  Caus.  which  is  also  the  cau- 

sative  of  >3^3  to  cut,  §  83  (6);  also  very  rarely  ,  [In  K. 

TIwA  (739^  Al.  Bo.)  is  substituted  for  pp.  98,  102.] 

LaA  to  bathe,  wash  O.S.  Caus.  or  ^AiOabb. 


{j)  When  a  verb  has  no  causative  the  same  sense  may  some¬ 
times  be  rendered  by  to  make,  to  give,  to  teach  or 

incite ;  as  240^^3^  m^UU  U.  he  caused  him  to  be  loved ; 

he  made  Thomas  love ;  Jorl?  ;oai  6.3 

rjooj]  3-S  U.  K.  he  would  have  caused  him  not  to  die  =  M 

jSs  usl  Jooi  Al.,  St  John  xi.  37  («32  Al.  =  Jojl  U.) ;  30Cl6u 

the  boys  sing  (O.S.  ♦.^ikbOfiS 

§  46.  h'regular  Verbs. 

•'  ' 

First  Conjugation. 

The  following  verbs  have  a  Pthakha  sound  in  U.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  and 
most  of  them  in  Ash. ;  but  a  Zqapa  sound  in  Ti.  Tkh.  etc.  The  fern, 
of  the  pres.  part,  of  those  which  are  ^  or  are  either  with  or 
without  as  or  she  sleeps. 

S,%ji  to  make  a  hole  O.S.  to  fall  doiun,  as  a  new  wall 

to  swallow  O.S.  (not  to  indent). 


118 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  46 


^  to  assemble  intr.,  Arab. 

to  shave,  shear  O.S. 

to  ci'ack,  (in  O.S.  to  draw  out 
water),  meaning  from  Arab. 

to  sow  O.S. 
to  he  leavened  O.S. 

I# 

to  sink  intr.  U.  K.  (not  used 
in  Asb.),  to  print  AI.  [O.S. 

to  impress,  sinki] 
to  sleep.  In  O.S.  to  he  young. 

see  below. 

to  kno'W  O.S.  (see  below). 
to  lap  (Ash.  Zqapa),  §  92. 

I* 

Chald.  rh 


to  mix.  O.S.  and  Al.  A. 

to  he  ill  or  in  pain  (not 
used  in  Ash.)b  O.S.  P‘al,  Pa. 
and  Aph.  to  he  ill. 

to  well  forth  O.S. 

U.  to  butt,  attach  (O.S.,  Al. 

Tkh.  AOi). 

to  he  satisfied  O.S. 
to  he  hlind  O.S.,  go  out  (fire). 


am  to  lose  savour  O.S.  p.  103. 

divide  (U.  rare  in  1  conj.); 

o.s.,  Al. 

to  step,  step  aside  K.,  O.S., 
leave  K.,  leave  off  K. 

to  explode  O.S. 
to  pay  O.S. 

to  he  lukewarm  (not  used  in 
Ash.),  cf.  O.S.  tepid. 

to  dye,  dip  O.S. 

to  he  refined,  as  metals  O.S. 
Also  to  sting  with  Zqapa 
sound. 

(or  ?)  to  he  firm,  hard, 

O.S.  and  uiOb. 

t  0 

to  cut,  decide  O.S. 

^3^30^  to  scorch  (Ash.  Zqapa). 

U.  to  he  tilled.  (Sp.  SfLfi). 
O.S.  to  make  soft.  Pa.  id. 

to  hear,  listen,  obey  O.S. 
JjJLs.  See  p.  116. 

to  adim'e,  he  a  folloiver  of 

Arab. 

0 

to  make  an  opening  O.S. 


Ill  N.s. 


=  in  pain 


,  =  ill. 


46] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


119 


Note.  In  the  following  verbs  only  the  irregular  parts  are  written. 
Some  of  these  verbs  are  really  anomalous,  and  some  have  two  weak 
radicals. 


^f2  to  go,  O.S.,  in  many  districts  uses  for  some  of  its  tenses 
which  in  O.S.  is  to  creep.  First  present :  :  2  :  ^ 

etc.  The  2  pi.  in  Al.  is  «^isa^f2. — In  Al.  etc.  =  to 

move  about  (=3^  U.  K.).  —  Or  2 :  ^'^1:  u^92 : 

m.  f. :  uc^f2:  2 :  2^f2  (Pthakha  sound)  Bo. 

Verbal  noun  with  o  :  U.  Sh.  Ti.  Al. :  Jxifia  U. 

(rare)  Sh. :  }X%»fx3  U.  (rare)  ^f2l3  K.  Sal.  and  sometimes  U.  The 

I* 

infinitive  is  U.  Sh.  K.  U.  Ti.  Preterite : 

ojS  U.  07^f2  K.  J.  Past  participle:  U.  K. 

Second  preterite  in  Al.  ;of2  or  07S  }oa)  y^f2  (for  ;oa| 

CjS).  Imperative :  JEOu*^  :  U.  (common) ;  or  Sy. 

(f^  Sal.)  U.  (common)  J.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  (the  Zlaraa  has  either  sound) ; 
or  :  uSf  :  K.  MB.  Sh.  Al.  Z. ;  often  with  a  pronoun, 

etc.  In  all  these  ^  usually.  The  O.S.  is  y^f  : 

:  oSf  :  The  Agent  is  U.  K.  but  2^*2  Ash.  Al. 

Noun  of  action:  or  Causative :  AjiV  -Vhiy 

AA,*  ,  Aa.!i9  or  A.30A  §  45  h.  [Distinguish  to  carry,  take, 

\ax  to  take  away.  Thus  he  took  the  horses  to  Uryni  = 

not  O^kJS^.] 


513  2  to  shut,  cover.  So  Heb.  and  Chald.  and  Arab.  Pres. 

m\  ^  -  T 

part.  53D2  or 

to  say,  in  K.  also  to  speak,  tell  (so  Al.  always),  O.S.  Impera¬ 
tive  :  ii2  Ti.  Z.  (O.S.  3^2),  elsewhere  3Ob02, 


120 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


wdo2  to  go  up,  O.S.  an  irregular  verb  with  some  forms 

from  bOOi.  In  N.S.  Pres.  part,  wttol  U.  or  wtto*  U.  Ti.  Sal. :  other- 
wise  regular  as  §  38. 

ikSol  to  hind  O.S.  Pres.  part.  yjQD>'i  U.  K.  or  Mu*  U. 

44  44  44 

jUji  to  he  cold  (in  U.  of  things  only,  in  K.  of  persons  also;  the 
latter  in  U.  is  makes  some  parts  from  JKlial  in  Ti.,  retain¬ 
ing  2 :  as  pret.  JU2.b  (q'ishli),  qmst  pai't.  (qisha) ;  not  in 

Ash.  or  elsewhere.  Perhaps  from  O.S.  sh  to  he  old,  or  ti  to 
freeze,  tr. ;  in  N.S.  is  to  he  crisp  (snow),  to  he  white  (eyes). 

2^2  to  come  O.S.  First  present  :  }^2  :  J*£s2  etc.  K.  U. ;  or  L2  : 

etc.  Q. ;  or  }^2  :  J*a2  :  :  mX^2  :  :  ^*^2  :  ^^2  : 

I  w^2s2  Sal.  y  or  ^2  :  2*2  :  :  u^^2  :  2^2  (or  ^^2)  :  u2  : 

:  WM.*!  Gaw.  Second  present :  Jikla  K.  U.  MB.  Sh. : 

oj^  ,  or  Sal.  Q. ;  or  etc.  as 

§  42,  Gaw.  Preterite:  o6  ^^2  K.  U..  oA  Ja:  Q.  Gaw.  Sal.,  aS  ;ajl 

•'  ,«  t'  *'  i' 

id.,  2^2  Ti.  Sal.  (sic)  §  124,  ojS  2^2  Al.  (sometimes  Tkh.).  Past 
•'  »'  •'  »' 

part.  jl^s2  U. :  Tkh.  Ash.  Ti.  jit2  Ti.  or  }^2  Ti.  or  2Lji2  Ti. : 

2^2  or  2f^2  or  2*^2  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  The  fern,  is  >^X2 :  2l^2 : 
%2  or  ^Lo]2 .  Imperative :  2^  U.  J. :  ..^odo2^S  (Zlama  second 
sound)  U. ;  2^2  (m.  f.) :  0^2  MB.  Sh. ;  2*^s2 ;  Tkh. ;  2^2 : 

Oji.^2  Amadia ;  2^2  :  or  or  or  ^^^2 

(also  ♦^O-)  Q.  Sal. ;  ^2 :  Oua2  Al.  or  ^ojl :  olf^l  Al.^  Ash. ; 
2a012  :  ^e^cj2  Gaw. ;  2^ :  OS  Ti.  (common),  Tkh.  (sometimes). 

The  sing.  also  in  Sal.  In  Ti.  we  also  have  if.  with  plural 

# 

1  Used  also  for  let  before  a  first  or  third  person  imperative,  for  JSCXm  §  51  (10). 


§46] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


121 


OS  or  oa^a;  ix  or  os  }S,  the  pronouns  being  taken 

in  (Zlaina  second  sound).  Throughout  the  m.  and  f.  sing,  are  the 
same.  In  O.S.  we  have  or  (is). 

Causative:  me-yi  U.,  J^SiO  or  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  K.  (^s) 

JjLtJxd  Ti.  2^S2-bO  Ah  (^s),  see  ^  47.  In  the  forms  with  CTJ  and 
(not  as  Ndld.)  the  sound  is  often  between  the  two.  It  is  remark¬ 
able  that  the  JS  should  appear  in  Salamas,  which  as  a  rule  shews  no 

affinities  with  Tiari.  For  the  interchange  of  JK  and  ^  see  §  124. 
It  does  not  occur  in  the  present  participle. 

(as  O.S.)  or  to  wish.  The  tenses  are  formed  from 

•  •'  • 

but  the  first  present  has  in  some  districts  the  lengthened  form. 
Thus  First  Present:  etc.  K.  Al. ;  or  : 

U.  Ash.  (in  U. 

hd-yi  etc.  ;  in  Ash.  he-yi  etc.);  or  '^)  Tkh. ; 

or  : 

II  ,  \  ^ 

^  -  -  -  •  • 

Gaw.  In  Ti.  Al.  another  form  of  the  present  is  formed  from 

\  H  t  / 

the  abs.  state  of  the  past  participle  : — JiS3  :  :  u^^!3  : 

^3  :  ^3  :  Ti.  or  ois^  Ti.  (or  Al.  ?) : 

or  Ti  .  or  wm^.3  Al.  (cf  §  50).  Verbal  noun:  2*^  (pron. 

in  U.,  not  K.  Sal.  etc.,  hoy  a,  as  with  to  know  and  to  fear') 

or  2*^^  K.  Al.  Pret.  IStS  (very  rare  in  Ash.  where  }6cj 

•'  •'  •' 

0^2^ 

(f^  Sal.)  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  or  K.  MB.  Sh.  Al. ;  in 

Ash.  Sing,  m.  uis  f.,  PI.  0^3,  rather  inclining  to  bo.  Agent: 
U.  K.  22li3  Ash.  Al.  Noun  of  action:  or  U. 

>&ik3  K.  Causative :  2^AbO,  ^  47. 

S.  GR.  16 


is  used  instead).  Past  jmrt.  2*^3  :  .^^^3.  Imperat. 


122 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


From  this  verb  comes  the  sign  of  the  future :  ^  or  aSJ  or  ^ 
(§  31).  These  =  D  or  s  he  ivishes  to...  or  it  is  desired  that 
=  he  will...  It  is  unchanged  throughout  the  tense.  This  is  the 
exact  counterpart  of  the  English  future  and  the  modern  Greek  6d 
(=  deXw  vd).  A  curious  variation  is  found  in  Tal  [Stoddard,  p.  109]. 
Taking  the  verb  to  sing,  we  have^: 


Sing.  3  m. 

f. 

2  m.  isiSOfS 

1  m.  ^ 

n  ^  a"  ^ 

f.  ^ 


FI.  3  m.  f.  ulp 

2  m. 
f. 

1  ni.  f. 


The  feminine  plural  is  noteworthy. 

In  this  verb  the  first  present  is  much  used  for  the  second  (§  51). 


to  laugh,  O.S.  Vei'hal  noun  tuith  ^  U.  K., 

A1.  =  O.S.  Ij^j^oS^).  This  verb  has  hard  Kap 

throughout. 


(as  O.S.)  or  to  bleat,  cry  out  (in  prayer),  not  common. 

Cf.  Heb.  and  Chald.  Kyil  to  bleat)  in  O.S.  to  cry  out.  All 

from  except  first  present 

etc.  as 


Ti.  as  O.S.)  But  when  has  a 

'  t 

vowel  it  usually  throws  it  back  to  A  though  before  J  final  it  is 
convenient  to  write  it  with  a  vowel,  as  in  the  causative 

to  be  tired.  Conjugate  like  .  In  Al.  laiL 

in  Ti.  in  Heb.  Arab.  Causative:  The 

second  present  of  this  verb  is  very  rarely  used. 


^  This  has  not  been  orally  verified. 


46] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


128 


Sip  to  turn,  return,  he  converted.  Pres.  part.  alS  :  252S  Al.  Sh. 
or  2xS  U.  Verbal  noun:  2Sa3  or  2S2S  U.  Sh.  or  252d  Al.  Agent: 
;ii2?  Sh.  U.  Sh.  2S2b  Al.  iV'oim  of  action:  }^S29  or 

U.  }^329  Al.  Causative:  but  in  Al.  92b^.  [For  this  verb 

is  used  in  Ash.  which  in  U.  =  to  tm^n  aside.!  In  O.S.  Sub 

It  J  ,,m 

is  to  inhabit  but  the  N.S.  meaning  is  from  the  Arabic. 


007D  to  cement  (O.S.  to  become  greasy).  Conjugate  as  if 


O)  was  absent.  In  K.  ^  oiadO- 

\  ■ 


39,  108  c. 


to  lie  down,  sleep  O.S.  Imp.  pi.  in  K.  Al.  (oOdCjp). 

to  be,  become,  be  born  O.S.  Second  present :  jlbojUl 

but  «bojJ  Sal.  or  oA  load's  Gaw.,  see  §  42.  Pret. 

OjS  ;obi.  Past  part.  ikOQ] .  Imp.  \^ou] ,  (wanting).  A'oim 

of  action :  ^boj.  In  Al.  Z.  CTJ  is  pronounced,  and  the  verb  is  regular, 
thus  past  part.  ;  but  %o6i  Ja  is  contracted  to  Joojb.  In  this 

verb  the  forms  ;ooi  ^  :  ioai  ^  etc.  are  very  common ;  cf  p.  97. 

Jao/  to  please  O.S.  Verbal  noun :  U.  Th.  Sp.  Ti. 

Pret.  op  JlOl  or  op  Uc) :  op  }o^i  Ti.  Sh.  Pas^  part,  jlib?  or 
_  ^ 

Ti.  or  ^0^1  Sh.  Another  form  of  the  pres.  part,  is  seen  in  the 

phrase  pleasant  to  you  (to  a  person  about  to 

drink  or  about  to  eat  after  drinking).  In  K.  this  verb  is  used  im¬ 
personally  ;  as  ^  is-?  I  shall  be  pleased,  ^  o^  Jo^  I  was 
pleased.  Otherwise  it  is  rare. 

to  fear  (see  §  83,  D.  c)  has  two  impersonal  forms : 

Ti.  U. :  and  in  Ti.  (pron.  ^  =  jn)  let  it  not 


124 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


-  [§46 

frighten  you:  do  7iot  fear.  The  same  with  lj^  =  you  are  afraid. 

t* 

Cf.  Az.  fear  subst.  (=  N.S.  These  perhaps  point 

to  a  derived  verb  (1st  conj.)  The  fem.  pres.  part,  of 

is  only. 

to  groiv  small  (pron.  f  =  ^o),  O.S.  Cf.  N.S., 

O.S.  small  with  ^  exc.  Al.  Z.  Conjugate  as  if  ^  were  absent. 

to  live  O.S.  First  pi^ese^it :  etc.  Second  pre¬ 
sent  :  U.  Tkh.  Ash.  Ti.  :  Al.  Ut-M^ 

Sal.  crj^lZls  Gaw.  (see  U.  Tkh. 

Ti.  Past  part.  Ash.  l7n]o.  u-j.^  :  U. ;  or 

I  (j^  Sal.)  U.  Sal.  ^  or  u-m!  Om  1^*  ?  or  OMk  Sing, 

ni.  u-M  f.  Om  pi.  m.  f.  Ash.  (In  O.S.  I  Ui-A^AA  :  I 

Agent:  U.  K.  Ash.  Al.  Noim  of  action :  U.  Tkh.  or 

U.  Ti.  Causative :  . 

••  ' 

to  he  'iuo7'th  (O.S.  to  he  well  tulth  (impers.),  to  he  glad,  cf.  O.S., 
N.S.  good).  Fwst  prese7it:  ^3  or  (pron.  in  Sal.  td- 

itlvh  see  §  90) :  etc.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  Tkh.  Sh, ; 

or  etc.  U.  Ti.  Al.  Ve7^hal  noirn  with  K.  Sh. 

or  Al.  P7'et.  (pron.  in  Sal.  tiugh-li)  or 

Ash.  Past  pa7't.  (pron.  in  Sal.  Uuhhta).  Imp. 

{tukh  Sal.).  Causative :  (77idtukh  Sal.).  This  verb  is  not  much 

used  in  U. ;  abS  to  touch  or  to  bring  is  substituted. 

K.  to  seek,  in  Al.  to  err  as  O.S.  The  vowel  is  sometimes 
thrown  back  from  the  as  or  or  In 

U.  see  §  47. 


46] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


125 


t(iste  O.S.  Sometimes  in  U.  by  metathesis  ^ 

causative  (the  former  with  Pthakha  sound),  p.  118. 

ill  to  hazard,  he  hold  (origin  ?).  Pres.  part.  :  lill.  Verbal 
noun  with  <i3  :  Pi'et.  ojil^  or  o]i.A  U.  Past  part, 

Imp.  30*.  Af/eiit:  (this  in  K.  =  a  friend,  cf.  a  joke 

K.  Sh.)  or  jiSl*  Q.  Sal.  Causative  (none).  For  this  verb  in  Ti.  Ash. 

^  I* 

bducb  is  substituted. 

II 

Al.  to  hire.  O.S.  Conjugate  like  yli, 

S^yitohmu  O.S.  First  present :  S^yl  :  iLyl  etc.  [In  U.  Ash. 
the  first  has  a  Pthakha  sound;  in  U.  pron.  D  =  in  Sh.  =  X] 

etc.  Tkh.  Al. ;  or  S^yi,  {yei)\  : 

I  Sal. ;  or  ^^Aa  : 

I  I  (oi'  ^XiSj^a)  I  I 

WM^^A  Gaw.  Second  present:  jli^pkAa  {hi-doi-ya  U.  hi-dei-ya 

Sal.  hi-dhei-ya  K.)  or  Sal.  or  c7^^^a3  Gaw.  (see 

§  44);  or  o^Ia  Ash.  Pret.  ^aX,  U.  Ti.  Ash.  etc. 

Al.  Tkh.  Past  part,  i^^y*:  but  in  Al.  Tkh. 

sometimes.  Pnp.  Tkh.  Sh.  U.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw. 

(conjugate  like  §  44);  or  u^O^a  :  Ti. ;  and 

so  Ash.  but  pi.  oStXk;  or  Al  ;  or  ^03u  Ti.  (O.S.  S^y  cf. 

A  I  ,  im  ,  (■  /  ^  ,m 

from  — y  hard).  Agent:  (d  =  »^  U.)  (? 

Ash.  For  ^03a  K.,  or  U.  (y  =  S^),  see  §  77  (2).  Noun 

of  action:  or  'u  Al.  (O.S.  Causative:  (y  Ash.), 

A»3kb0  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.,  .^30^  AL,  p.  107. 

Iia  •»  !!■ 

In  Sh.  Ti.  (but  not  Ash.),  Auhar  village  (in  U.),  the  First  present 


126 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  46 

is  often  ^ ois^  or 

jKV  /  rsi  /  rJ  tir>j  \f  rv>  \#  rj  ^  r\t  §  rs) 

:  wm-aS^  or  y^-fca.  Perhaps  these  are  for  etc.  abs.  state  of 

/fs>  •*■  /■ 

past  part.,  as  in  and  a  =  ^a.  For  the  interjections 

^a^a*  aoao  and  the  like  see  §  73. 

Aaoj'i  ^0  givey  O.S.  ^a^A,  the  vS  being  an  addition,  appearing 
in  only  some  forms.  First  'present :  :  ^Sao]|A  etc. ;  in 

O.S.  ^cf^a:  }ao;iA  (^)  etc.  Second  present:  dJ.  Sh. 

^crjpi  K.  Z.  Al.  Preterite :  cj^a^A  U.  [with  f. 

object  }a^^  and  so  with  objective  pronouns,  §  50] 

Sal.  (yugh-li),  K.  J.  Z.  OJ.V.30M  Al.  (^).  Pas^  pa7't. 

I*  *  '  i'  " 

U. ;  ^^07.  K.  Sh. ;  Oaw. ; 

J^OU:  ■Js^OJ*  Al. ;  Jao^OA :  i^ao)^  (i/itkhta)  or  (hukhta) 

Sal.;  in  O.S.  J^^CT^a,  ^S^OJa.  Pap.  Jikac^ :  PI.  ♦^o^ac^  U.  or 

♦^OdaV^?  ^P-  Q'  or  cSSai  K.  (O.S.  ^C^).  Agent: 

but  in  Ash.  A^oaa  of  action:  U.  Ti.  or  Tkh. 

or  -A.l»  01  ih.^sc*  vorl^Qjl  nomi.  is  miicli 

used  in  this  verb  by  itself.]  Causative  (none). 

^  _  ‘V 

^0  curdle,  Sp.  etc.  only.  First  present :  }a-a  {yei-yi) :  ^.a  : 

^a>a  etc.  Seco)id pi'esent .  oy^kA  ^aAa.  Piet.  <7^  J?-  Pas^  pa7’^. 

P/ip.  sa.a:  .^obOlA.  Agent:  Jj^a-a.  A'oa/i  0/  action:  {yeta). 

[Origin  ?] 

iV  to  lament y  O.S.  the  West  Syrian  Not  used  in 

K.  MB.  Sh.  Verbal  noun:  .  Pret.  ojS  zA  or  oA  A-.  Past 

1'  >'  •'  «' 

part.  0^:  10.  Impi.  u-A  :  ♦^^bOlA  U. ;  or  'A*= 

Sal.  Agent :  JIa^a  U.  ^Ia-A  Sal.  Noun  of  action :  u.  ^ 

Sal.  Causative:  jA^  U.  or  Abb, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


127 


§  46] 

to  learn  O.S.  Pres.  part.  :  ,  or 

II  J.  II  T  J  II 

Causative :  in  AI.  =  O.S.  ^io. 

I#  I#  #«  / 

to  swear  O.S.  Pres.  jmrt.  jIb»A  U.  K.  or  }^  : 

U.  or  Jalsoi  MB.  Sh.  Second  present:  oiV*  ^““3  U.  or 

U.  K.  Sh.  MB.  Pret.  cS  U.  Ti.  Ash.  cA  Al.  Tkli.  Past 

'  .1  I  vT  ^  i  / 

I  I  «  I 

jmrt.  K.  U.  or  jIboZ :  ^^2  Sh.  or  :  -jLbO  U.  [Al. 

jIbOu?]  Imp.  vjibOu  or  ^bO  U.  Agent:  U.  K.  ^ilbol  MB.  Sh. 

Al.  Ash.  A’o?/n  of  action:  U.  K.  or  Al.  or 

U.  Sh.  Ti.  Causative:  K.  ^bo2^  Sh.  }bo2bO  Sal.  Q.  Jboa.bO 

Al.  (also  U.  sometimes),  U. 

I* 

if  to  hake  (O.S.  West  Syrian  J^2).  Pres.  part. 

U.  K.  or  jLfc^ :  U.  or  :  2*^2  MB.  Sh.  Second  present : 

•*  I* 

MB.  K.  Sh.  Pret. 

or  CTj!^  Al.  Tkh.  Pfl.9«  j)«rL  (;l32):  jISl  Sli.  Tkli. 

obo2^  U. ;  uAa  :  ^0^1^  (<•  Sal.)  TI.  Q.  Sal. ;  :  u^*  : 

oL  K.  U.  Sal.  K.  ;i;32  MB.  Sli.  Asli.  Al.  Nomi 

of  action :  or  U.  Cavsative:  i^ie  U.  or  J^2sp  U.  2^50  K. 

I*  i'  I 

Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  l^oSaO  Al. 

.*  " 

^  ^  f  ■  ^ 

^0  he  green  Al.  Tkh.  (O.S.  2<bSou  =  green).  Pres.  j)eirt.  i-bX 
Al.  wti25i  Tkh.  [For  wti23  to  spit  see  below.]  Cans.  p.  108. 

to  sit  (is,  O.S.  ^s).  Pres.  part.  :  Jais*  U.  K.  or  ^3^2 : 
2l3is2  Ah;  O.S.  (^3).  Second  present: 

or  23^<*3  K-  Pret.  op  (tiughli  Sal.)  or  ciS  ouis*  Al. 

Tkh.  Past  part.  or  J^is*  Tkh.  Al.  Sing. 


128  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  46 

(O.S,  etc.),  in  Sal.  pron.  tukh,  in  U.  til  or  tu-i,  the  last  i 
ver}^  short ;  Plur.  or  ♦^OaSIO^S  U.  or  U.  or 

Sal.  In  Ti.  they  say  for  sing.  plural 

030^ .  Noun  of  action :  K.  U.  Causative : 

T  ^  -  4/  -  , 

^CSbb  U.  K.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  v3^t0ubo  Al.  as  O.S.  (all  is) ;  also 

•  ||/  Mill  V  *11  \  // 

v3LA^^bO,  p.  108.  This  verb  is  constantly  nsed  where  we  should  use 

another  verb :  as,  to  sit  in  a  carriage  (to  drive) :  to  sit  in  a  boat  (to 
go  by  boat) :  to  sit  on  a  horse  (to  ride). 

or  to  he  smooth,  see  •  Tu  Ti.  to  he 

tired.  See  also  §  113  ^. 


or  to  hum  as  a  flame,  [cf.  N.S.  a  flame  (Al. 
perhaps  =  Chald.  and  Heb.  nnS  aflame;  cf.  O.S.  to  hum  or 

O.S.  id.]  First  present :  :  is^^  etc.  Ti.  Tkh.  Al.  or 

:  5*0)1^  :  is^oiLS  etc.  U.  Ash.  Tkh. ;  or  :  jidji! :  isqi! : 

(or  I  yMO][^ 

G^aw.  Second  p'i  esent .  li^k  d>  U.  ^*c^JSk3  K.  Al. 

Sal.  Sp.  C^d^3  Gaw.  (or  ).  Pi'eterite : 

oj^  U.  Sh.  ojS  K.  Al.  Past  part.  jlojS :  U.  Sh.,  or 

jIojS;  K.  Al.  Imp.  U.  uO^  K.  Agent :  U. 

K.  Ash.  Al.  Noun  of  action:  U.  K. 

Causative:  lo{^>!sp  U.  Sh.  lo^JSO  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  JojllSbb  K.  Al. 

or  ^0  churn,  O.S.  See  but  the  verbal 

noun  is  Jlia)  (=;*i»)  or  ;ZiM  u. 


to  he  ahle  O.S. 
^2  ;  etc.  U. ; 


First  present :  etc.  U.  Sh.  Ash. ; 


or 


or 


§46] 


1 RIIEGULA  R  VERRS. 


129 


etc.  Ti.  In  U.  with  Ja:  :  }^bo2a  ;  and 

the  Tkh,  form  (perhaps  also  that  in  Ti.)  seems  to  be  =  ^2 

=  l^tsO  }a ;  the  latter  is  also  in  use  in  U.  etc.  For  see  below. 

i' 

In  Ti.  (not  Ash.)  the  past  part.  abs.  state  gives  another  form  ;  : 

2^  :  2^2  2^^) '  * 

(Zlama  second  sound),  cf.  l-SJa  above  and  §  50.  These 


-3*  I 

forms  are  also  common  elsewhere  when  2^  is  prefixed :  but  in  U. 
etc.  Zlama  has  the  first  sound  in  the  plural ;  and  the  first  pers.  pi.  is 
2^  or  2^ .  Similar  forms  are  common  in  O.S.,  cf.  §  82 

(4).  Verbal  noun :  2*^^  5  2^*^  U.  The  second  present  of  this 

verb  is  not  common,  the  habitual  present  being  used  instead.  Pret. 

:  also  in  U.  which  is  properly  the  pret.  of  ^2^ 

to  suck  the  breast.  But  the  habitual  imperfect  is  generally  substi¬ 
tuted.  For  ;Sa2  =  2^;^  see  §  29  (18). 

0^^^  K.  to  dawn,  a  defective  verb,  O.S.  (=  U.).  The 

following  forms  are  used.  Pres.  'part.  f.  Ti.  Tkh.  Ash. 

Verbal  noun:  Pret.  aiS  Ti.  Noun  of  action  : 

Ti.  Tkh.  Ash. ;  much  used  with  or  as 

'morning  tiviligJit. 

(rare)  or  to  groan,  O.S.  2<^  See 

JO^  Al.  to  go  out  O.S.  (=  U.  K.).  Imp.  wb^  as  O.S. 

to  be  old  (so  O.S.,  pret.  ^^).  Pres.  part.  23tica  :  i»3Ji 
or  2:^. 

or  K.  (O.S.  ;  cf.  Al.  an  avemie,  2.Si^.liQ> 

O.S.  a,  hedge)  =  U.  to  fence,  hedge.  See  2^, 


s.  GR. 


17 


180 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  46 


2^  to  cu7"dle  (with  a  thin  sound,  =  2) ;  to  rain  or  snow,  U.  K. 

f 

(with  broad  sound  of  first  vowel) ;  to  hold,  Ah,  O.S.  or  hold  together 
(cf.  N.S.  2i^  to  patch.  The  fundamental  sense  seems  to  be  to  hold 
together).  Pres.  part.  2^^  U.  K.  Sh.,  or  in  U.  2^3,  but  the  latter 
only  in  the  sense  to  rain,  snoio. 

(is)  K.  to  he  old.  O.S.  (^),  cf  Verbal  rouw: 

It  ^  •  i(  ^  ^  •  11 

ihis^  or 

as  O.S.  or  to  thirst.  See  }cij5k. 

to  rise  up :  stand,  so  O.S.  (in  the  latter  sense  in  U. 
usually  with  \4^).  Imp.  ^oub  :  u.h90ub : 

Sal);  but  in  Al.  p[bO  remains.  are  very 

commonly  added.  Causative:  ;a,tbp  U.  Tkh.  ^abio  Ti.  7ib»  Sal. 

lava  Al.  as  O.S.  or  U.  K.  to  he  set  on  edge :  also  in  K.  to  he 

blunt.  See  2oiS. 

jaii  to  spit  (so  O.S.  bdS).  Pres.  part.  JJ23  :  U.  Tkli.  Ash. 

or  wdb: ;  2£lb:  U.  Ti.  Sh.  Second  present :  05^  Uo'ila  U.  Ti.  Sh. 
or  aj^t  lJBi*a3  K.  Ash.  See  to  be  green,  above. 

lata  Ti.,  O.S.,  J^erja  Tkh.  to  look  (O.S.  to  lie  in  wait  for).  See 

•'  1'  •' 

see  Sf2, 

>•  I. 

to  ride  U.  Z.  (in  K.  in  another  sense);  so  O.S.  but  with 
5^  soft.  First  present :  vbab  :  etc.  or  :  2^3  : 

etc.  U.  In  U.  they  also  say  2^3  (oot  K.).  In  K.  for 
to  ride  they  say  IfpoJtQ  to  sit  on  a  horse. 

as  O.S.  or  2^3  to  pasture,  intr.  See  We  must  dis- 

1  Hence  2^?  Al.  or  Al.  or  2^ifki  K.  a  ship  U.). 


!§  46,  47] 


IRllEGULAtl  VERBS. 


131 


tinguish  the  causative  2^3^  to  pasture  tr.,  from  to  he  ill, 

which  also  in  U.  etc.  has  a  Pthakha  sound. 

as  O.S.  or  to  j)lciister.  See  In  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  the 

First  present  \s>  is^:  uiS^ : 

Sal.): 

Ti.  Al.  or  l^rn'is  U.  to  be  pleasant  {delirious  AL).  See  lai^. 
In  O.S.  Pa‘el  to  delay,  he  late,  repent.  Chald.  to  he  desert. 


§  47.  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 
Verbs  with  five  or  more  radicals  are  like 


Cf.  §  83  c. 

to  cause  to  he  deswed,  caus.  of  or  ¥■  Past  part. 

U.  K.  So  all  causatives  of  this  form. 

JiiSjibO  to  bring  (caus.  of  Jis2)  =  O.S.  2kS*b9.  First  jyresent :  : 

,  ,  ^  V  ,  ,  j.  ,  . 

etc.  Ti.  or  usually  JXni  :  Ti.  or  Tkh.  Ash. 

Sh.  (the  Pthakha  of  fern,  is  short) ;  or  }^2m  :  J*^2^  Al.  or 

f  •' 

{nie-yi,  so  throughout) :  :  isisfjap :  : 

U. ;  or  (also  J^S»)  Sal.  Q.;  or  u2i : 

)*2^  :  is^2» :  JMio  :  ^lao  :  ^l2»  :  y^2» :  :  ^lao  Gaw. 

Verbal  noun :  ]^o6s»!so  K.  Sh.  MB.  }o2m  U.  }o2ab0  Sal.  lolobp 
Gaw.  Preterite:  oiS  2^2obO  Tkh.  Ash.  MB.  Sh.  }Xlo!so  Ti. 
aiS  U.  [with  fern,  object  Ji^AQ-b9,  and  so  with  objective 

pronouns,  §  50]  ^.osso  Sal.  Gaw.  Past  part.  ^*^2ob0,  ^^2ob0 
K.  (Ti.  f  }iJi2obo);  -iL^2obo  {nvu-yita)  U. ;  so  Sal.  with 

fern.  jis^2a^.  Imp.  K.  Ti. ;  but  in  U.  (pi. 

^  O-ij0^.i),  in  Gaw.  (pi.  Agent:  but 


132 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[H7 


usually  Ti.  Tkh.  Ash.  U.  Sal.  Q. 

Gaw.  Noun  of  action  .*  K.  :  (ine-yeta)  U. 

or  Present  part.  U. ;  or 

K.  or  U.,  and  so  sometimes  Ash., 

but  with  Mim  sounded.  Ver^bal  noun :  Aoo^;aoU.  K. 

Al.  Preterite :  Ash.  U.  (Mim  silent  throughout,  U.)  : 

K.  Al.  (also  Ash.).  Past  pai't.  ;L^^bO  m.,  with  varying 
feminine  :  ^i^^OQ^bO  Ash.  U.  Sp.  /^i^o^^bO  Ti.  Imp. 

Agent :  .  Noun  of  action :  U.  (first  conj. 

form  ?)  or  Ash.  U.  Tkh.  Ti.  Causa¬ 
tive  in  U.  as  if  from  a  first  conj.  form.  This  verb  is  probably 

the  O.S.  to  lualk  about  for  relaxation,  also  to  wander.  The 

following  quotation  from  Malpana  Khamis  (cir.  A.D.  1300)  seems  to 

•  •  •  •  •  ^  ^  ^  ^ 
justify  this  derivation M 

.^Aalo  ^fX^bo  ;lSo  : 

In  thy  garden,  0  our  brother,  lo  they  play,  the  gazelles  loith  the 
young  harts,  and  dwell  and  are  quite  at  ease ;  and  though  without 
life  they  eat  and  drink.  [He  is  speaking  of  the  crumbs  which  fall 
on  a  beard,  which  he  compares  to  a  garden.] 

or]  Jo^bo  to  seek  U.  Sal.  Gaw.  [For  K.  Al.,  O.S.  see 

§  46.]  Pres.  part.  Job^^bd  :  J«Q^^b9  {to-ya)  U. ;  : 

(or  Sal. ;  Job^^bS  :  Gaw.  Verbal  noun  : 

Jooo^i  U.  or  lo^io  U.  or  Sal.  or  Sal. 

Fret.  Past  part.  m.  >iN*abyOb^b9  f  U.  or 

4!^^Ob^b9  Sp. ;  or  m.  .iLo.bMOb^b9  Sal.  Gaw.  Imp. 


^  For  this  quotatioii  the  writer  is  indebted  to  Qasha  Oshaua  Saru. 


§47] 


IKRKGULAII  VERBS. 


133 


:  .^^2^  U.  or  :  ,^o_»2^^  Sal.  or  uO^  : 

Gixvv.  Agent :  or  U.  or  Sal. 

or  Gaw.  Ala  tin  of  action  :  or 

to  revile,  O.S.  Some  forms  are  as  if  from 

Pres.  jmrt.  ;  or  Sal. ;  or  yS*^  : 


Gaw.  Vei'hal  noun: 


mi  « 


1^0^^  or  lya^^ 


Gaw.  Pret 


(773a^O^b0  Ash.  U.  K.  in  Amadia.  Past 

part,  ly^o^  K.  U.  U. ;  both  have  fern.  (o). 

Agent :  K.  U.  or  U.  Noun  of  action : 

(first  conj.  form  ?)  U.  lisyi^^O  K.  U.  Ash.  In  U.  &c. 

Mim  silent  throughout. 


U.  or  ^3^30  K.  to  throiu,  divorce.  This  verb  follows  the 

•*  *  I* 

first,  not  the  second  division  of  the  second  conjugation  and  takes  no 
euphonic  vowel.  The  past  part,  is  ^03^*^  rarely  in  K.,  usually  in 

U:  J*^O3kb0  K.  See  p.  116. 

3^jsai»  Ti.  (not  Ash.)  or  U.,  see  §  30,  to  he  proud. 

Conjugate  like  prefixing  Ti.  'jfia  U. 

Al.  to  he  fulfilled,  see  §  30.  Like  prefixing 

/ 


(fis)  to  place  (see  §  46);  like  not  In 

U.  sometimes  o  drops,  as  uais^  th&y  place,  ^a^obo  he  placed. 

to  have  worms.  Conjugate  as  if  ^  were  absent  (cf.  O.S. 
iL'^ok  N.s.  a  luorin). 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§§ 


lU 


Verbs  with  Objective  Affixes. 

§  48.  Verbal  noun  and  past  participle.  These  often  take  the 
affixes  of  §  11  in  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  etc.  But  in  K.  these  forms  are  not 

much  used,  the  object  being  rather  expressed  by  adding  cp  :  ^013 

etc.  after  the  verb  in  Ti. :  etc.  in  Tkh. :  etc.  in  Ash.,  also 

U.  (§  70). 

After  most  of  these  affixes  the  substantive  verb  will  require 
Khwasa,  as  they  end  in  a  consonantal  sound.  Such  combinations  as 

isOA  are  by  their  meaning  excluded.  Thou  hast  saved 

thyself  must  be  expressed  by  In  the  third 

pers.  sing,  the  forms  uOfO  »,  CTfO  -  are  used  in  U. ;  in  the  third  pers. 

pi.  u<7?aV_.  In  K.  C71-_  C7)  are  preferred  for  the  singular. 

•  • 

Examples.  U.  they  are  saving  me. 

I  have  saved  you  (^larej,  ^9]  he  IS  revealing  %t. 

But  the  past  participle  is  not  much  used  with  affixes ;  the  forms 
in  §  50  are  preferred,  the  preterite  being  used  instead  of  the  perfect. 

§  49.  The  present  participle  (and  derived  tenses)  and  imperative 
take  the  same  affixes  with  They  are  then  accented  on  the 

penult  (except  2  pi.  and  Coiidit.),  the  affix  being  counted  as  part  of 
the  word  (§  8).  The  is  omitted  generally  in  Al.  Z.  and  often  in 
Gavilan  and  elsewhere  ;  everywhere  after  the  first  pers.  sing.;  and  in 
verbs  ending  in  (usually),  after  the  3  sing,  first  present  (and 

similar  tenses)  and  2  sing,  imperative.  The  3  sing,  affix  forms  are 

only  ;  the  3  pi.  are  ♦^09)  -  U.  oo^-  MB.  u9^a-1-  K.  Al.  Sp. 

•  • 

We  cannot  usually  write  iSJJ  for  I  will  save  myself  or 

similar  constructions,  but  must  use  as  in  §  48.  Yet  in  Ah,  in 
the  third  person  at  any  rate,  such  a  construction  is  allowable.  Thus 


49,  50] 


VERBS  WITH  OBJECTIVE  AFFIXES. 


135 


St  Matt.  xiv.  15  let  them  buy  themselves  food 

U.  K.).  In  U.  K.  we  may  use  this  construction  in  the 

Imperative  thus :  buy  for  thyself ;  cf.  bach- 

wards,  lit.  behind  himself,  §  67.  The  O.S.  usage  is  the  same  as  Al. 
[Note  that  the  O.S.  affixes  to  the  Imperative  are  not  found  in  N.S. 
The  disappearance  of  the  old  past  and  future  tenses  leads  to  a  great 
simplification  in  affixes.  On  the  other  hand  N.S.  has  affixes  for 
them  where  O.S.  has  to  use  the  separate  pronouns.] 

Examples.  ^3  /  will  save  him  [in  Jilu,  where  tlie 

variant  jil  is  used  (§  31),  this  will  be  0^1  ^3]  i 

A  loai  fiSbiAbO  2a  U.  A  Joo)  Tkh.  thou  savedst  us; 

U.  3/o?i(pl.)  saved  them;  CT?!^!  Ja  U.  he  is 

in  the  habit  of  saying  it ;  'U.  or  K.  sing  them 

(sing,  imp.),  ♦^ODlLbOf  U.  (uC^«*A  K.)  sing  them  (pi.) ; 

uSVobabaiOaa  heal  me  Sal.  =  A  U.  or  A  obdjoa 

(4^^  for  ^  before  ^) ;  cjia<X  Gaw.  I  know  him,  §  46. 

Note.  The  affixes  in  this  section  are  often  added  even  when  the 
object,  a  substantive,  is  also  expressed.  Cf  §  20  (9). 

§  50.  Preterite.  As  the  preterite  is  inverted,  so  that  A 
means  he  was  left  by  me  and  so  /  left  him,  §  32  (4),  we  must  express 
the  English  objective  pronoun  by  the  subjective  forms  : 

U1  etc.,  abbreviating  them  in  exactly  the  same  Avay  as  in  the  forma¬ 
tion  of  the  First  present  tense,  and  placing  them  between  the 
participle  and  the  A.  We  thus  get,  remembering  that  the  fern, 
of  JOuaX  is  JJtLpx,  the  pi.  and  that  the  third  person 

requires  no  subject-pronoun : 

he  left  him,  lit.  he  was  left  by  him. 

he  left  her,  lit.  she  was  left  by  him. 


186 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  ^0 

aS  isJOitaX  for  isii  he  left  thee  (m.). 

*1  tt  0  *  ‘  t  t  /* 

for  uisiki  /ie  left  thee  (f.). 

for  C7?S  he  left  me  (m.). 

(Ptbakha  sound)  for  JJtX^X  he  left  me  (f.). 

uiSLaX  for  cA  wAtl^aX  he  left  them,  K.  Al.  Z.  Sal.  J.  (U. 

below). 

♦^XJdLaa:  (or  ois-  K.)  for  he  left  yo'Kt 

Ti.  Al.  Sb.  Asb.  orl 

\  he  left  us. 

yJ3lA>3L3S  for  ^  ^’^^Uaa:  (f.  for  m.)  U.  Tkb.  J 

So  for  she  left  him  6^  ;  she  left  her  ;  and 

similarly  for  all  persons  and  both  numbers.  But  we  cannot  say 
isJO^*^  for  thou  hast  left  thyself  (§  48),  but  must  say 

lit.  thy  self  has  been  left  by  thee  is  feminine]. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  for  he  left  the  tuoman  we  should  say 
jAiax;  for  he  left  the  men  we  should  say  Jxil 

K.  etc.,  and  this  is  the  usual  construction.  But  aiS  bfiUaX 

(J.^^)  is  also  used,  §  81  (4).  If  the  object  precedes  the  verb,  we 

must  almost  always  use  the  former  construction. 

In  O.S.  also  the  absolute  state  of  the  past  part,  is  used  with  the 
pronouns,  but  the  contractions  are  not  the  same  as  in  N.8. ;  they  are 

those  given  in  §  82  (1).  Thus  wd^l:  ^ifiLaas :  : 

jlfiLaa;  etc. 

In  the  above  forms  (except  2  pi.)  the  accent  is  on  the  syllable 
immediately  preceding  the  whole  being  treated  as  one  word. 

1  In  the  village  of  Digalah  these  are  frequently  used  for  the  masculine,  cf.  §  31 
(First  present  tense). 


WM-AilAnX  for 


VERBS  WITH  OBJECTIVE  AFFIXES. 


137 


There  is  an  important  variation  in  U. :  with  a 

strong  accent  (shiviqeli),  for  This  seems  to  be  due 

to  a  false  analogy,  the  affix  form  of  §  11  being  added  on.  Noldeke 

(§  104)  suggests  that  this  is  the  definite  state  for  the 

absolute,  giving  Zlama  its  second  sound.  But  in  U.  this  second  sound 

is  rare,  and  only  occurs  in  a  few  words  like  two,  21^*2  other 

etc. ;  never  in  the  plurals.  Indeed  this  plural  ending  in  most  dis¬ 
tricts  has  the  first  Zlama  sound.  And  the  strong  accent  would  point 

to  the  affix  form  yiOjn-^  which  itself  has  this  strong  accent,  §  8  (2). 


Except  in  the  third  person,  sing,  and  pi.,  these  forms  are  not 
much  used  in  U.  in  colloquial  conversation. 

In  all  districts  for  he  left  him  we  can  treat  wfiLASk  as  an  active 

verb  and  add  on  pronouns:  thus — esp.  Al,  or 

Op  K. ;  so  OlXkbOl  he  told  him  K.  This,  though  not 

very  grammatical,  is  an  expedient  to  avoid  the  ambiguity  of 
meaning  he  left  as  well  as  he  left  him.  In  U.  this  is 
carried  a  step  further,  and  we  can  add  on  etc. 

to  all  persons  and  both  numbers.  Thus  v^2  you  (pi.) 

left  me.  More  rarely  we  may  express  the  same  thing  with  , 

as  ^  This  method  is  also  much  in  use  in  Al. 

»  •  > 


Second  Conjugation. 

he  healed  him. 
he  healed  her, 

istAfooSlso  he  healed  thee  (m.). 

'  f  ##  I 

he  healed  thee  (f.). 

^  • 

he  healed  me  (m.). 

jlbo  he  healed  me  (f.),  (second  Mini  with  Pthakha  sound). 

r 

S.  GR. 


138 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


J.  K.  Al.  Z.  Sal. 


he  healed  them. 


he  healed  you  (Nun  often  omitted  in  K.). 

wMiOteodbO  U.  Tkh. 


WM-A  !jOJQ>odbO  Ti.  Al.  Sh.  Ash. 


he  healed  us. 


Verbs  ^ :  first  conjugation. 


O.S.,  Al.  Z.  K. 

u. 

he  revealed  him 

<4^ 

OjS 

he  revealed  her 

ojS  Jliv.  (O.S. 

he  revealed  thee  m. 

4 

he  revealed  thee  f. 

he  revealed  me  m. 

(o.s.  0^  J»A\) 

he  revealed  me  f. 

(0-s.  07S 
•  • 

he  revealed  them 

(O.S. 

OJA  «0J*Ji4. 

he  revealed  you 

without  ^i) 

*4  ^^*4^ 

he  revealed  us 

0^  or  07^  ‘-v^V^  (O.S. 

<4 

In  the  second  person  forms  ^  in  Tkh. 


Verbs  :  second  conjugation, 
he  hid  him. 

ojS  K.  Al.  Z.  (isfXo:^ 

U.). 

^  Second  Zlama  sound. 


ySo\,boK.Al.Z.(uap4^a!S^ 

’  a). 

^  A VA-*r Sft  K.  Al.  Z.,  or 
without  ^  U.). 

“  Pthakha  sound. 


50] 


VERBS  WITH  OBJECTIVE  AFFIXES. 


139 


07S  (or  K. 

■s 

U.). 


Vie. 


«7Jl-XOi^SO  K.  Al.  Z.  (<7)VXO\,iB 

U.). 

Pthakha  sound. 

So  Pthakha  verbs  (§  42),  e.g.  U.  he  quickened 

And  so  quadriliterals,  e.g.  K.  (wM-^DoS^a  U.)  he  un¬ 

derstood  us. 

Verbs  are  similar:  thus  oA  he  heard  him,  cjS 

'  ’  nr  ,, 

U.  ^S!soX  Ti.  Ash.  ojS  Al.  Z.  he  heard  her, 

Tkh.  or  oij  Ash.  or  op  U.  he  heard  thee  m.  etc. 

^  Ji  ##  40  •* 

And  in  the  second  conjugation  :  in  U.  with  u,  as  OjS  yM.PbOO^^ 
he  assembled  us,  o^  yiO^a^o^ao  he  assembled  them.  But  in  K. 

Al.  without  yi,  as  as  : 

fiSXbOO-^aa  :  07A  yXXaoo.^^  :  oyPaOQ^bO  :  o?P.^o^Sso 

(Pthakha  sound) :  o^  uXaOO^^  (or  y^^') :  o^  (or 

without  also  :  07S  or  o^  yMbdO^bO. 


Ao^e.  (1)  The  indirect  object  may  often  be  represented  by  the 
affixes.  Thus  from  ifllibO  to  ask  (a  question)  which  takes  after 

it  (§  71)  we  have  ^  2^0db0  /  asked  her.  So  >.^aodi^p 
/  am  giving  you  (ph). 

(2)  The  second  preterite  takes  affixes  like  the  first.  Thus 

o^  16m  he  nearly  cut  it  (f.)  off. 

(3)  A  very  common  Upper  Tiari  usage  is 

?2>..Vya  or  I  have  killed  him. 

or  vA^  I  have  killed  her. 

\A^  yO)ljiA  V“  or  I  have  killed  them. 

And  so  for  all  persons  and  both  numbers,  of  both  subject  and  object. 


140 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Use  of  the  Tenses. 


§  51.  Tenses  derived  from  the  present  participle. 

(1)  The  first  present  is  rarely  used,  as  it  is  in  O.S.,  as  an  ordinary 
present  in  a  simple  sentence :  and  when  thus  used  in  the  translation 
of  the  Bible  into  the  Urmi  dialect  it  is  an  archaism  ;  as  in  St  Matt. 

iii.  2  saith  Repent.  This  is  not  colloquial 

[see  below  (3)]  except  in  the  verb  to  wish,  which  is  thus  used, 

as  ^  I  wish  to  go  (d  omitted). 


(2)  The  same  with  Jboi,  as  an  ordinary  past,  is  likewise  archaic, 

e.g.  St  Matt.  iii.  1  pbojAp  Jbol  f and  he  preached  in 

the  wilderness  of  Judcea. 


(8)  The  habitual  present,  with  Ja,  ^2,  or  a  (see  p.  82,  also 
§  119)  prefixed,  or  in  Ti.  and  Ash.  without  prefix,  is  very  common. 
Thus  5^  =  he  finishes  (as  a  habit),  but  C7^  he  is  finish¬ 

ing  (now).  But  in  Al.  this  tense  is  constantly  used  for  the  second 
present.  After  a  negative  the  prefix  disappears  except  in  Al.,  §  83. 
This  tense  is  also  frequently  used  as  a  historic  present,  in  narration. 


In  a  few  verbs  it  is  also  used  as  a  simple  present ;  as  ^  he 

wishes,  }a  he  knows,  l^iao  )a  he  can.  Cf  ;oar  ;a  or 

ii»  ,»  ,*  ,1  ,*  ,* 

it  may  he  =  perhaps. 


(4)  With  ;ooi  this  tense  becomes  a  habitual  imperfect :  as 
Ibo)  bSf  2  ^  I  used  to  go, 

(5)  The (with  isp  U.  K.  or  aa  Al.  K.  [esp.  before  2,  *]  or 

vS  Al.  Z.  Sal.  or  p  [before  2,  *]  Ash.  or  without  prefix  in  Ash.  and 
often  Ti.  Z.  and  more  rarely  elsewhere ;  the  negative  without  prefix 
except  in  Al.  where  'a  is  used  as  I  will  not  kill,  and 

except  sometimes  in  U.  and  Ti.  where  we  have  is?  cor- 


141 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


responds  to  a  common  usage  in  later  ecclesiastical  Syriac,  where  the 
present  participle  replaces  the  old  future,  as  ^ 

we  loill  not  deny  Christ  (Martyrs  Anthem,  Tues.  even.)  =  ^ 

liLxayn  N.S.  or  Al.  Cf.  below  (10).  So  Rev.  xvii.  7 

etc.  O.S. 


is  not  prefixed  to  questions  of  the  form  ^f2  shall  I  go? 
i.e.  do  you  luish  me  to  go  ?  shall  I  get  up  ?  Another  future 

may  (more  rarely)  be  formed  by  Joo/  U.  K.  or  JoCTf 

Al.  to  he  about  (lit.  ready),  as  (or  J^s2d)  he  is 

about  to  come. 


(6)  The  same  with  loa\  is  a  conditional,  or  is  the  equivalent  to 
the  future  in  oratio  ohliqua,  as  ...♦.2  Jooi  J^2  fiSb  'would  come 

>  i 

if...  (§  60),  Jboj  }^2  cix^2  he  said  he  woidd  come,  but 

see  §  66. 


(7)  The  form  of  the  preterite  with  as  'PW  he 

finished  (for  variations  see  p.  82)  is  much  used  in  AL,  rarely  else¬ 
where  except  with  objective  affixes  (and  then  not  very  often,  see 
§  50),  and  never  in  Ti.  Ash.  With  a  negative  the  prefix  is  retained. 


[Note.  The  prefixes  }a  :  ^2  :  etc.  are  not  neces- 

sarily  repeated  when  two  verbs  are  joined  by  o  :  as  i^^f2o  u^2 

*  i 

they  will  come  and  go.  But  we  may  say  isbo  here.] 


(8)  The  First  present  is  constantly  used  in  relative  and  sub¬ 
joined  clauses  where  no  time  is  expressed,  after  certain  conjunctions, 
or  after  such  verbs  as  to  wish,  3.0^  (9>a4)  to  command, 

^  II  '!■  I#  /  ^ 

I 

can,  must,  must,  ought’,  a  being  usually 

prefixed,  but  often  omitted  after  ^aJk^ :  :  and  always 

C  ^  ^  A.^ 

after  if.  Thus  }^2a  Ja  he  can  come,  he  must 

®  I? 


142 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


come,  ibdp  :zjOi  id.,  hbbu2  when  I  see  him, 

if  you  please  (sing.),  2^2^  K.)  hid  him  come, 

♦'  ** 

g  ^  •  •  • 

everyone  luho  reads.  Rarely  this  construction  is  used  with 

to  begin,  see  §  57.  This  tense  has  not  a  potential  force ;  for 
/  may  go,  see  §  29  (20). 

In  O.S.  we  have  the  same  usage.  Thus : 

when  thy  justice  judges  us,  fj^^oaS  2i*90kij  in  the  day  when 

thy  Majesty  shines  forth. 


(9)  In  these  cases  if  a  past  precedes,  J.6a^  must  ordinarily  be 
added,  especially  in  U.  where  the  sequence  of  tenses  is  more  closely 
followed  than  elsewhere ;  as  Jooi  I6a]  he  could  come, 

16m  cr^  aLtioAbo  he  hade  him  come.  But  in  Al.  it  is  very 

often  omitted ;  as  uO^  u^2a ....  yiCTU-Ia  2x3uA  uiO^  ^boa 

^  0  $  S  •  n  ^  $  ^0 

I  • 

they  beckoned  to  their  companions  to  come  and  help  them,  St  Luke 

V.  7  com  yiDucpoo  o6m  ^oai^  paS 

0  if  ^  k  •  *  0  •/  X  ' 

r 

U.],  and  so  sometimes  in  K. 


(10)  This  present  is  used  for  an  imperative  of  the  first  and  third 

✓ 

person,  as  let  him  come.  This  is  common  in  O.S.  though  the  old 

i 

future  is  the  usual  substitute  for  these  persons  of  the  imperative,  the 
imperative  itself  having  only  the  second  person.  Thus  in  the  service 
books  we  have  constantly  such  rubrical  directions  as  let  him  say 

(N.S.  yi^i) :  ^4^  let  them  answer  (N.S.  U.  K. 

Ah),  /Oaa  let  him  make  the  sign  of  the  cross  and  so  on.  In  N.S.  a 

(lit.  suffer,  imp.  of  O.S.  xi)  [or  without  a]  or  p  wtiocu  (aoX  Al.), 
which  are  not  changed  even  if  more  than  one  person  is  addressed, 

are  often  prefixed,  as  2^i2a  JEOua  (or  2^2  JEOm)  let  him  come.  So  we 

.*  *  .* 

have  sometimes  0*072  come  in  AL,  see  2^2  ^  46.  This  tense  is  also 

•  .* 


148 


§§  51 — 54]  USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


used  in  the  second  person  to  denote  a  prohibition  (=  O.S.  with 
the  future)  and  also  to  denote  a  positive  command  weakly  or  politely 
expressed,  as  pray  tell  it.  For  the  difference  between 

^  and  see  ^  59. 

(11)  This  tense  is  used  with  a  iikais  U.  would  that  =  a 
U.  K.  or  a  Tkh.  or  Ti.  (hard  Kap)  or  Al.  (O.S. 

or  ^6isJC2) ;  as  (a)  %6q\  woidd  that  he  would 

i 

come ;  (6)  Jooi  Joofa  would  that  he  had  come. 

t  *  A  0 


(12)  For  its  use  in  protasis  and  apodosis  see  §  60;  for  the 
rendering  of  the  English  participle  see  §  58. 


§  52.  Second  p7'esent.  This  denotes  an  act  going  on  at  the 
present  time,  as  }.ba^  I  am  finishing ;  but  it  may  be  a  single 

and  not  a  continuous  act,  as  2ab02!3  I  say.  In  some  verbs  a 

present  act  denotes  also  a  habit,  as  o^jkw»  2a^^a  he  dwells.  Occa- 


-5  ^ 

sionally  this  tense  denotes  a  future,  as  *^04  }*j^2a  I  ami  coming^ 

i.e.  not  only  I  am  on  my  way  but  I  will  come.  This  tense  is  not 
much  used  in  Al.  where  the  habitual  present  replaces  it,  §  51  (3). 

It  is  frequently  used  where  the  English  has  ivill  =  is  willing ;  as 

A  he  will  not  go  (is  not  willing  to  go)  ;  so 

#  #  I  f  I 

m  ^  «  •  •  • 

he  will  not  sell  (lit.  give)  \it\  for  two  qrans. 

A  A 


§  53.  The  imperfect  denotes  (a)  an  act  formerly  in  progress, 
(5)  a  former  wish  or  intention ;  but  not  a  habit.  Thus  Joo)  2d 

I  was  in  the  act  of  going  or  I  was  just  about  to  start :  but  not  I  used 

to  go  (}oai  Sfl  ;a). 

V  0i  •* 

§  54.  The  preterite  properly  denotes  an  action  done  at  a  par¬ 
ticular  past  time.  But  it  is  frequently  used  loosely  for  a  perfect  or 

pluperfect ;  as  you  have  come  in  peace  {are  welcome), 


144  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§§  54,  55 

mS  2^23  after  he  had  come.  So  often  in  dependent  sen¬ 

tences. 

It  is  used  prospectively  for  an  immediate  future.  A  man  seeing 
another  at  a  distance  about  to  arrive  will  say  ;:s2  he  has  come, 
i.e.  he  is  coming,  he  is  in  sight.  So  the  Turkish  preterite  galdi  is  used, 
cf.  Modern  Greek  e<^^ao-e.  A  sick  man,  or  one  in  peril,  says  uiS 
I  am  dying.  [With  this  compare  the  habit  a  servant  has  of  saying 
if  ay  it  is  ready,  when  anything  is  ordered,  meaning  that  he  will 
set  about  getting  it  ready.]  When  a  man  asks  for  information  and 
understands  the  answer,  he  says  ^  ^  knew  =  I  comprehend. 

The  preterite  very  frequently  denotes  pure  hypothesis,  §  62. 


§  55.  The  perfect  is  not  so  much  used  in  U.  as  the  preterite 
which  often  replaces  it  (§  54).  It  is  used  both  actively  and  passively ; 

thus  =  he  has  revealed  or  it  is  revealed.  In  K.  it  is  very 

common  as  rendering  the  passive. 

In  several  cases  the  perfect  denotes  a  present  result.  Thus  : 

he  has  come  to  a  standstill  =  he  is  standing, 

he  has  laid  himself  dotvn  =  he  is  in  bed  —  he  is  getting 

into  hed\  Similarly  we  have  2^^  ke  is  hungry, 

I  '  » 

he  is  thirsty,  OlS..*  he  is  asleep,  ** 

he  is  sorry,  2^x^  he  remains^,  he  is 

tired,  Ti.  he  is  perspiring  [elsewhere  the  second  present], 

'adding  U.  only  (see  §  46),  2*^^^  or  2*^ 

he  is  silent.  We  see  the  same  thing  in  many  cases  where  the  past 
participles  have  become  simple  adjectives:  as  2*^^*^  is  sweet, 

from  to  he  or  become  sweet.  We  may  compare  the  Greek 

perfects  iypyyopa,  olSa,  oXcoXa,  etc. 

1  So  the  remainder  (also  as  O.S.). 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


145 


§§  56,  57] 

§  56.  The  pluperfect  denotes  an  action  finished  at  some  past 
time,  but  it  is  often  replaced  by  the  preterite,  §  54. 

As  the  perfect  often  denotes  a  present  result,  the  pluperfect 

denotes  a  past  result,  as  he  had  laid  himself  down 

=  he  was  in  bed.  The  is  sometimes  omitted  in  a  subjoined 

clause,  as  ^  U.  I  saw  them  standing  [not  very 

common  colloquially]  §  58  (1);  cf.  O.S.  and 

I  saw  heaven  opened,  Rev.  xix.  11. 


§  57.  Verbal  noun. 

(1)  This  does  not  usually  represent  the  English  infinitive  after 
can,  must,  command  and  the  like,  see  §  51  (8) ;  but  occasionally  it 

does  so,  and  after  iSiLbO  to  begin,  23u2  lih  to  begin  (lit.  pour  hand), 
it  is  almost  always  so  used,  usually  with  more  rarely  with  ;  as 

2S^2^  ^  23^b0  I  began  to  say  (or  2adb2a).  But  in  Al.  we  have 
the  other  construction  here :  thus  St  Luke  iii.  23  ot-A  2DOLXbO 
[;boi]  ;o<7rD  he  began  to  be.  So  very  rarely  in  U. 

(2)  With  to  increase,  it  is  employed  as  the  equivalent  of 

the  O.S.  construction  with  wducao2 : — 9uf obo  he  revealed 
yet  again.  But  this  is  not  colloquial. 

(3)  It  is  used  simply  as  a  substantive,  §  76  (1).  In  this  case  it 

may  govern  an  object  directly,  [which  often  precedes  it,  especially  if 
it  is  of  the  first  conjugation] ;  or  more  rarely,  as  any  other  substan¬ 
tive,  with  D;  thus  dinner  time  {time  of  eating 

bread).  It  would  be  possible  to  say  (or 

;»4  p),  especially  in  Al.,  but  in  U.  K.  would  naturally 

be  substituted,  §  76  (3).  So  he  stopped 

having  the  children  killed  (or  2pu^).  Instead  of  the 

*  ^  ^ 

verbal  noun  we  have  a  finite  verb  in  the  following : — >^23  ^ 

instead  of  those  men  going.  In  ^  verbs  the  form 
S.  GR.  19 


146 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


is  preferred  to  when  it  is  used  as  a  simple  substantive  not 

followed  by  3  and  another  noun  (U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.).  Thus 

:id  ;b  /  ca7ne  to  read  {for  reading),  i.e.  to  learn,  at  school ;  but  we 

should  have  reading  hooks:  in  U.  more  often 

here. 

(4)  It  is  used  participially  (in  the  first  conjugation  with  ^),  the 

particles  just,  (esp.  K.)  or  Al.  whilst,  yet  or 

K.  Al.  no70  and  the  like  being  often  prefixed;  or  with  the  conjunction  S, 
the  substantive  verb  being  omitted.  It  is  often  repeated  for  emphasis 
or  intensity.  Thus :  I  saw  her  coining  (or 

whilst  causing  to  he  killed,  ivhile  not 

yet  coining,  he  luent  round  the 

villages  'perpetually  singing.  The  ^  is  sometimes  omitted  from  the 
verbal  noun,  as  jLbSf  Jbbao  dayh  reak. 

(5)  It  is  added  on  to  all  the  tenses,  especially  in  K.,  for  em¬ 
phasis  or  intensity ;  as  IxJf  it  gi^eatly  increased  (not 

as  often  printed)  ;  he  is  hasting  greatly. 

'  t*  •' 

(6)  It  expresses,  with  the  English  infinitive  except  as  noted 
above  (1) ;  it  even  expresses  a  purpose,  though  this  may  also  be 
expressed  by  the  present  with  y  ^  in  order  that,  or  its  variants,  §  72. 

Also  occasionally  with  ^  it  is  an  ordinary  substantive,  as  above  (3) ; 
thus  (or  from  taking,  from 

subduing  :  so  also  from  taking  and  giving.  Cf. 

am  not  worthy  to  hear  his  shoes. 

Matt.  hi.  11. 

§  58.  Rendering  of  the  English  participle,  used  absolutely. 

(1)  Present  participle.  This  is  not  rendered  by  the  Syriac 
present  participle  except  in  the  rare  cases  when  the  latter  is  ‘in 


§§  58,  59] 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


147 


construction’  as  in  §  16.  Even  in  O.S.  the  participial  use  of  the 
present  participle  not  ‘  in  construction  ’  is  not  very  common ;  though 

we  have  that  thou  mayest  he  seeing.  Rev.  iii.  18, 

N.S.  iso^D  }ja ;  so  thus  be  ye  doing, 

1  Cor.  xi.  25  =  ^^s*o6l  JaDOf  N.S.  The  English  present 

participle,  standing  absolutely,  is  rendered  either  (a)  by  a  conjunc- 

^  ^  ^ 

tion  or  relative  and  finite  verb,  as  when  he  sees  him 

coming,  St  John  x.  12  (O.S.  similar);  or  (h)  by  the  verbal  noun  as  in 
§  57  (4).  We  must  however  distinguish  the  English  noun  of  action 
and  participle  which  are  of  the  same  form ;  thus  he  saw  me  coming 

(part.)  coming  (noun)  uCSa4s2  ufS 

But  in  the  case  of  an  intransitive  verb  we  may  use  the  past  parti¬ 
ciple,  though  only  in  the  following  construction : 

I  saw  her  standing  (or 

(2)  Past  participle,  active.  This  is  rendered  by  a  separate  clause, 

as  having  seen  the  affair,  he  told  me  =  oot 

ojS  And  very  rarely  with  a  transitive  verb  past 

part.  I  saw  them  having  taken  {loaded  with) 

burdens. 

(3)  Past  participle,  passive.  This  is  rendered  by  the  past  parti¬ 
ciple  in  Syriac.  The  particles  of  §  57  (4)  may  be  prefixed. 


§  59.  The  Imperative  has  only  the  second  person,  and  the  other 
persons  are  expressed  by  the  first  present ;  the  second  person  is  also 
thus  expressed  when  a  prohibition,  or  a  weak  or  polite  positive  com¬ 
mand  is  intended,  §  51  (10).  A  prohibition,  2  pers.,  may  be  also 

expressed  by  the  imperative  with  unlike  O.S.  This  denotes  the 

prohibition  of  a  single  action,  while  the  first  present  with  ^  denotes 

that  of  a  continued  action.  Thus  a  man  seeing  a  boy  running  would 

shout  to  him  yj\a  do  not  stop ;  but  sending  a  boy  on  a  message 

in  haste  he  would  say  But  this  is  not  a  hard  and  fast 

rule. 


148 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


The  Syriac  imperative  is  much  more  used  than  the  English,  and 
does  not  denote  any  incivility ;  it  is  often  used  by  an  inferior  to 
a  superior.  A  man  speaking  to  a  servant  or  inferior  would  always 
use  the  Imperative  where  in  English  he  might  say  Will  you  ? 

§  60.  Conditional  clauses.  Protasis  and  apodosis. 

(1)  A  probable  hypothesis,  neither  implying  affirmation  nor 
negation.  If  he  comes  I  shall  see  him  = 

is  sometimes  omitted) ;  or  is.3  :  vJJ  >  o*"  ra'i'ely 

S  ;fts2  .,^2  — .,,^0*  ojiL  ;asor  ;w2  .^2  if  this 

is  so,  I  rejoice,  If  he  has  come,  I  shall  see  him  =  :  ^^2  ♦xi 

;  or  ...CjS  }^2  — If  he  came,  James  saw  him  (i.e.  I  do 

not  know  how  the  fact  lies)  =  yiCTI^^M 

(2)  Pure  hypothesis.  If  he  came  (or  If  he  were  to  come)  I  should 

see  him  =  ojA  ;ooi  is.3  :  loo)  .^2 ;  or  : 

as  above.  2  is  sometimes  omitted  :  as  X>3L^  ♦.2 

II  */  *  ■  /  •  x" 

vain  if  you  do  thus,  well ;  if  not... 

The  preterite  is  also  much  used  with  ^2  although;  the  apodosis  is 

then  often  introduced  by  a  redundant  JaaI  but  (cf  dWd  used  simi¬ 
larly  after  idv  and  elirep,  1  Cor.  iv.  15,  viii.  5). 

(3)  Implying  negation.  If  he  had  come  I  should  have  seen  him 

=  ejS  Jooi  4N-3  5  lou]  ;o0  or  for  the  apodosis 

yiCTIOi^fi/M  ^0(7)  xOW  or  more  rarely  for  the  protasis  jl^2 

So,  Jbaj  ♦s^oof  isa  ?oa)  Jobr  ^2  if  he  had 

been  here  I  should  have  gone;  }bbiu  :jlx2  Jbb)  ^^2 

if  he  had  come  it  would  be  well. 

§  61.  Temporal  clauses  are  ordinarily  expressed  as  in  English. 
But  an  English  perfect  after  when,  which  is  in  effect  a  future  perfect, 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


149 


§61] 


may  be  expressed  in  four  ways.  Thus,  when  the  sun  has  set  (=  shall 
have  set)  =  ;o<7r  or  jisas?  ^2  (loosely) 

or  ^2.  A  very  common  method,  however,  of 

rendering  this  is  to  replace  the  temporal  clause  by  another ;  thus, 
N  ^7?  the  sun  set,  then  I  will  go.  After 

there  is  often  an  aposiopesis ;  as  2  ^3  ^bbu2 

yoit  go  ? — /  go  when  he  comes.  With  this  we  may 

compare  the  method  of  expressing  the  day  after  to-moi'vow  and  the 

day  before  yesterday.  The  translation  of  both  is  Jti^2  K.  or 

;ix.2  ;»ou  U.,  lit.  the  other  day.  But  a  Syrian  will  generally  be 

more  exact,  and  say  :  2^  iso^cJb  U.  [:  jS 

Uau«2  Jsbou  K.],  which  stands  both  for  not  to-morrow  hut  the  next 
{ 

day,  and  not  yesterday  hut  the  day  before  (§  67).  So  for  Monday  iveek 
we  generally  have  JaJL»2  ^  U.  [K.  simi- 

»'  ('  I* 

lar]  =  7iot  this,  hut  the  other  Monday. 

In  Al.  a  temporal  clause  is  sometimes  replaced  by  the  verbal 
noun,  thus  Jaoadl»  '^^ithout  blessing 

=  before  they  were  married,  St  Matt.  i.  18.  This  would  not  be  pos¬ 
sible  in  U. ;  they  would  usually  say 

but  they  might  say  2.330.3^  2^  ^2  2-^^^  lih  yet  they  not 
blessed  [all  a]. 


The  preterite  is  used  in  a  temporal  clause  if  there  is  uncertainty, 
as  iS3  ^  after  I  have  come  (if  ever  I  do  come) 

I  shall  see  him.  This  is  equivalent  to  2^^  §  66-  So  also  if 

no  particular  time  is  referred  to  and  a  general  case  or  hypothesis  is 
intended. 

An  English  temporal  clause  is  often  rendered  by  the  noun  of 
action,  as  when  I  returned,  return,  tuas  returning, 

after  I  .have  (had)  7'eturned,  till  I  come  (came).  The 


150 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


noun  of  action  is  thus  more  used  than  the  English  noun.  But  the 
finite  verb  might  readily  be  used  in  Syriac  in  these  cases. 


When  is  replaced  by  a  periphrasis  in  cases  such  as  the  following : 
%6o]  isOA  cis  when  you  ivere  here,  lit.  as  that 

time  that  you  were  here. 


§  62.  Absolute  hypothetical  clauses. 

(1)  The  preterite  is  much  used  to  express  a  possibility  where  no 

protasis  is  attached,  as  ^  perhaps  I  might  die  (or 

without  d).  2^2  2  :  y.ajouS  is3  I  will 

go  and  visit  him  in  case  by  chance  he  has  come. 

(2)  The  conditional  is  used  as  in  English  where  would  =  were 
about  to.  ;boi  N3  .^2?  ^2  as  if  he  were  about  to  go  {woidd  go). 


(3)  The  preterite  is  also  used  to  denote  pure  hypothesis  in  the 
following :  :  2auM  %6a]  iso^  ^9^ 

4i^ftS  ^5^  It  is  better  that  thou  shouldest  not  have  voiced  than 

that  thou  shoiddest  vow  and  not  pay,  cf  Eccles.  v.  5. 


§  63.  Impei'sonal  verbs. 

(1)  These  are  generally  in  the  feminine,  but  sometimes,  espe¬ 
cially  in  AL,  in  the  masculine.  [The  O.S.  rule  is  similar.]  Thus 

express  as  it  is 

written.  So  and  both  express  the  abstract  idea  of  evil 

(subst.),  though  the  latter  is  more  common.  It  is  interesting  to  note 
that  the  East  Syrians  take  the  of  the  Lord’s  prayer  personally 

as  the  Evil  one,  and  paraphrase  it  frequently  in  their  service-books 
the  Evil  one  and  his  hosts  C7^d^MO  2^3 . 

Examples  of  masculines :  the  preterite,  it  is  finished 

by  me  —  I  finished,  btxAfis  (or  it  lost  on  me  =  I  have 


§68] 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


151 


lost  my  head  (also  fern.),  may  it  he  pleasant  to  you,  see  §  75 

and  Jio/  §  46. 

% 

Examples  of  feminines :  ^  OjS  ;aUiQ>a  In  him  I  am  well 
pleased,  lit.  in  him  it  pleased  me,  St  Matt.  iii.  17.  So 
if  you  please,  ;:axia  hy^avo !  §  73. 


(2)  Some  verbs  which  in  English  are  impersonal  may  take  a 

subject  in  Syriac.  Thus  or  simply 

it  rains.  So  we  have  it  snotus ; 

it  hails,  a{^  it  hloivs,  ;L  (K.  -ojA.) 

*  I* 

it  thundei's,  cA*  ;L:bo3  Ihia  it  lightens,  OjV.  Upp  (or 

6)iL)  ^7  rains,  lit.  the  woild  is  raining,  ojX  ;L:i83  is 

stormy. 

(3)  (Turk.)  must,  generally  stands  without 

(Arab.)  must  and  (Arab.)  ought,  generally  with  it.  They  are  thus 

conjugated  : — ^  must  go,  ^♦2?  'pi^  id.  In  Al. 

we  have  Ja.  After  i]\6  we  may  insert  a  pronoun, 

«•  It  I*  ^ 

as  C^Lk  il^O  K.  Al.)  you  ought.  These  words 

may  be  used  with  a  negative,  especially  as  p%i  A 

it  is  not  necessary',  this  must  be  distinguished  from  jLfiUlXa  Jodju  ^ 
he  was  not  obliged,  which  is  a  personal  verb ;  the  latter  implies  that 
nothing  was  lacking.  and  xK.  may  be  used  as  simple 

adjectives  and  may  occasionally  take  the  first  plural.  ^ 

they  are  not  necessary  (or  or  the  singular  of  either).  For 

•* 

the  lengthening  of  the  vowel  in  the  plural  see  §  18  (xiii).  For 
with  affixes  see  §  20  (7).  implies  moral  obligation;  and  if 

this  is  not  the  idea  of  ought  we  must  render  by  or 


152 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Thus  oboj  uiOOfa  ought  to  he  here,  i.e.  I  should 

have  expected  it.  Also  in  referring  to  a  past  event  they  often  are 
used  for  %  b>  as  Jbb)  isoo/D  ^9^  you  ought  to  have  gone. 

is  used  both  in  U.  and  K. :  in  U.  only. 

(4)  For  it  is  I  and  the  like  see  §  29  (19);  for  «s4, 
§  29  (11). 

(5)  We  may  notice  ^  it  may  he  =  perhaps  [or  it  is 

■5 

possible  which  is  also  rendered  by  Joot  Ja  §  29  (10)]  and  ^'SOoJOXi 
it  may  happen  =  perhaps ;  the  is  usually  dropped,  even  in  K. 

.  ■S'*' 

If  this  is  used  as  a  verb  in  U.  it  is  ^ol|b9 ;  in  K.  JiOOJOiO,  see 
§§  36,  87  c. 

(6)  In  Al.  and  sometimes  K.  is  used  impersonally  for 

to  wish,  which  in  Al.  usually  =  to  love.  Thus  Jbo)  I  wished. 

Also  to  he  pleased ;  as  cjei^  ajS  Al.  i/  it  pleases  him 

(God)  in  him  (Christ)  =  if  he  will  have  him,  St  Matt,  xxvii.  43 ; 

ojS  Al.  In  thee  I  am  (lit.  was)  well  pleased, 

St  Luke  hi.  22. 

(7)  ^  or  U6Jxi  =  far  he  it  from  me,  usually  followed 

by  p  and  the  first  present.  Thus  UCDum  O.S. 

/  ✓  A*  0 

N.S.  far  he  it  from  us  to  deny.  Also 
standing  by  itself  uqxi  or  =  God  forhid  ! 

(8)  For  it  is  warm  (lit.  warmth)  and  the  like,  see 

§  16/.  would  not  be  impersonal,  but  would  refer  to 

some  particular  thing,  as  e.g.  water,  being  cold. 

(9)  ;oar  before  its  subject  has  a  quasi-impersonal  use  in  the 

** 

following :  ojS  ojJk  ;oai  he  had  the  heart  (or  intention)  to  — 


63,  64] 


DIRECT  OBJECT  OF  VERB. 


153 


:^2;  so  23dUi  ^ocjS  afS  }oai  they  had  word,  }oai 
6jS  what  has  come  over  him  ? 


§  64.  The  direct  object  of  the  verb. 

(1)  This  is  generally  expressed  by  the  simple  substantive,  but  ^ 
may  be  inserted,  especially  if  the  object  precede  the  verb,  §  74;  or  in 
u.  ;h  ;  as  (also  ^jibb  J.b  U.)  who^n  did  he  strike'^ 

If  the  object  is  a  pronoun  the  affixes  with  or  jLb  must  be  used ; 
but  with  a  pronominal  affix  cannot  ordinarily  stand  in  U.  K. 

apart  from  its  verb,  and  in  this  case  ‘4?,  etc.  must  be  used. 

For  exceptions  in  particular  cases  see  §§  10,  50  and  §  70  (3). 


(2)  Many  verbs  take  two  objects  without  prepositions,  as 
to  make,  to  fill  (of  the  thing  filled,  and  that  with  which  it  is 

I 

filled,  but  the  latter  may  also  be  expressed  by  prefixing  ^),  to 

sow  (of  the  place  sown  and  the  seed).  So  some  causatives  whose 
originals  are  transitive,  as  to  clothe  (a  person  with  a  dress), 

to  teach,  iktibO  to  teach,  to  ask,  does  not  take  two 

n  ^  ^  f  I#  V 

direct  objects,  but  is  placed  before  the  person  asked,  §  71. 


as 


(3)  A  second  noun  is  often  placed  in  apposition  to  the  object ; 
jia'b  ^9^  he  gave  a  tuman  as  a  debt  =  he  lent  a 


tuman.  So  iLjp  . . .  to  borrow  {take  as  a  debt), 

to  give  as  a  present  etc. ;  he  led  the 


children  of  Israel  captive,  JlbbiOblb  u^j^bO  print  the  book.  So 

many  of  the  idioms  in  |  75.  For  the  passive  also  we  have: 

bOlObO  i-y  we  were  sealed. 
money  was  lent. 

(4)  For  the  passives  of  causatives  cf.  §  45  a.  Thus 
=  to  be  caused  to  be  killed,  not  to  be  caused  to  kill. 


S.  GR. 


20 


154  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§§  64,  65 

(5)  The  English  direct  object  sometimes  becomes  indirect  in 
Syriac  and  vice  versa,  see  §  71 ;  §  50,  note  1. 

(6)  The  verbs  to  pray,  to  lie,  frequently  take 

cognate  accusatives,  as  he  prayed, 

??  ofL  he  is  lying. 

(7)  A  singular  object  is  sometimes  used  for  a  plural  one  a,s  in 

the  following: —  iii  .^oojS  they  bowed  their  heads  {the  head), 

f  \  "  > 

(but  might  be  used  here) ; 

give  up  my  cause  {cast  hand  from  me,  §  75). 

(8)  The  object  of  a  noun  of  action  in  may  be  often  expressed 

by  ^  as  well  as  D  ;  as  the  worship  of  a  creature, 

where  9  might  cause  confusion  and  give  the  sense  a  creatures  worship. 
So  the  worship)  of  thee ;  or  without  A, 

giving  thee  worship.  But  the  end  of  the 

affair. 

(9)  When  the  object  is  expressed  pleonastically  by  a  pronoun  as 
well  as  by  a  noun,  A  cannot  be  prefixed  to  the  latter  as  in  O.S. 

Thus  ooA  -kosp  teach  the  men  (not  But  we  can 

say  simply  -ioi.  The  first  is  the  commoner  method. 

§  65.  Agreement. 

(1)  In  general  verbs  agree  with  their  subjects  in  person,  gender 

and  number;  but  nouns  of  multitude,  as  a  crowd,  may  take 

either  a  singular  or  plural  verb. 

(2)  Two  or  more  nouns  coupled  by  o  and,  always,  and  by  ^  or, 
generally,  take  a  plural  verb. 

(3)  When  the  genders  differ  the  masculine  verb  is  used. 

(4)  When  the  persons  differ  the  first  is  preferred  to  the  second 
and  the  third,  and  the  second  to  the  third. 


ORATIO  OBLIQUA. 


155 


§§  65,  66] 

(5)  When  the  numbers  differ  the  plural  is  used,  as  you  and  the 
tuomen  have  come  =  oJsa  21^2  22sjS^  u&lo  isil . 

(6)  Agreement  of  pronouns  with  one  another  in  person.  Here 

N. S.  differs  from  O.S.  in  which  the  third  person  often  refers  to  the 

second  ;  in  N.S.  the  same  person  is  used  throughout.  Thus  ^i2 

O.S.  =  Niki  N.S.  thon  helper 

of  thy  saints;  ooj  Nil  or  ois&2  O.S.  =  Nou  isi2  N.S.  (also  in  O.S. 
Nii  isii)  thou  art;  oo)  O.S.  =  ♦^ou  N.S.  I  am ; 

0  %  0  %  f 

O. S.  =  ♦s^Na  N.S.  ye  are. 

(7)  The  verb  agrees  with  the  interrogative  pronoun  in  a  case 

like  1^1  uLiii  which  of  you  came  ?■ 


§  66.  Oratio  obliqua. 

(1)  This  may  be  used  in  N.S.,  and  if  so  the  sequence  of  tenses 
must  usually  be  observed,  especially  in  U.,  §  51  (9) :  ^N23  0^  2'^2:3 

ojVt  he  says  he  has  come,  ^6^^  ai^b92  he  said  he  had 

come. 

(2)  More  frequently  oratio  recta  is  substituted.  Thus  :  oiyMl 

he  said,  I  will  come.  So  in  O.S.  In  indirect  questions 
oratio  obliqua  is  more  common,  obo)  uiN2  N3  he 

asked  if  they  would  come  is  more  usual  than  ^^^^^2  N3  • 

N  I 

he  asked :  Will  you  come 

(3)  The  use  of  jdoN  there,  here  etc.,  is  in  these  cases  often 

very  confusing.  Thus  JiStfN  he  said:  1  will  go 

there  =  he  said  he  would  come  here. 

(I)  Before  the  oratio  recta  D  is  often  inserted  :  as,  I  said  ye  are 
gods  =  uk*bo2  St  John  x.  34.  The  same  thing  is  com¬ 
mon  in  O.S.  ;^2? 


156 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§67 


ADVERBS. 


tt  ^ 

§  67.  [The  following  list  includes  several  adverbial  expressions 
which  cannot  strictly  be  called  adverbs.] 

U.  now,  or  Ti.  MB.  or  upcf  MB.  or  U.  (oxytone), 

or  23  U.  or  JLa3  K.  or  Al.  or  K.  (=  ^6l  y^al,  §  12, 

=  lal  230/)  or  ^3  K.  (=  ^3^  ?  Nbld.)  or  4^03  Al.  or  ^3^  ui23 

Al.  (=  jlis).  So  jlsl  Acn  so  far,  jial  ^  ago,  already. 

)S0u3^  to-day  U.  K.  Z.  or  ^ou3o2  Gaw.  Sal.  or  )n^3j 

(^O*  2?af,  h  for  m.)  or  Tkh.  =  O.S. 

2-V.dA32  U.  to-night  (3  =  is)  or  2^A32  K.  (=  23<7f)  or 

Ojis  or  Jo/la,  In  N.S.  is  fern.,  see  5  17.  In  Z. 

'  ^  ,<  f  '  t} 

being  used  absolutely  for  ^ 

ftAooil  U.  now,  or  K.  or  2^3^  loll  U.  or 

ill  Ti.  or  is’^isl  K.  (=  23<7r  +  §  28.  2). 


l^ol  U.  so,  so  much,  so  many  (considered  rather  colloquial), 
thus,  3  23oV^  great  that.  In  K.  ^0^2  (see  or 

31(71  Kurd,  (not  2^01  as  Stod.  Nbld.  ?). 

•  I#  ^  m  ' 

^  S  • 

ttt902  or  o2  U.  topsy-turvy  (rare) ;  also  endways,  = 

^o2,  also,  even :  or  ^2  K.  as  O.S.,  in  Al.  (see  below) ;  hence 
^  J^o2  K.  or  usually  ^  not  one  [in  U.  ^  2^  iAo2  U. 

A  ^1  K.  not  even. 


67] 


ADVERBS. 


157 


U.  only,  or  Sal.  or  Sal.  Baz  Al.  In  Al. 

0  f  ^  /V  ^  (V  $ 

0  ^ 

UCMO  IS  used,  coming  after  the  word  qualified. 
at  last,  Z. 

/ 

UiL:  u.  K.  S'S  O.S.  OjQOjTjIX^  tJvhS*  In  Z.  {khin) 
and  lisyM^l  =  then.  See  §  21  (3). 

^aS/^2  or  or  l6sy^  (as  O.S.)  finally. 

^  0  X 

u.  K.  z.  as  O.S.  where,  or  j3-2  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  and  U.  some- 

i' 

times  (first  Zlama).  When  followed  by  crjULt,^  or 

it  is  often  shortened  to  Ja  as  ?C7?V^  xuhere  is  he  ?  (also  in  a 

/ 

dependent  clause).  Also  with  etc.)  =  whither,  with  ^aao 

=  whence  or  which  way. 

^2  usually,  mostly,  oxi  the  whole. 

when?  or  Ti.  (O.S.  wfciipl),  or  v^,i,  or 

U.  or  Iay.i  K.  or  laiiis  K.  So  Jaitl  Aar  how  long  ? 

’  m  0  ^  •  ^(a  /  \  0  0  0  ^ 

U.  K.  then  =  elra.  In  O.S.  and  so  rarely  K.,  accord¬ 

ing  to  the  rule  by  which  Greek  t=  while  6  —  i(s, 

K.  Q.  here,  or  Sal.  or  ^oal  Tkh.  (in  U.  see 

p.  164)  =  O.S.  }a<7f  or  usually  Jaiof,  So  Chald.  KDil, 

U,  especially,  Arab.  Pers.  (proparoxytone),  or  290f  U. : 

2aof  JEp  K. 

U.  (accented  on  first  and  last)  immediately,  Turk.  Pers. 
(=  hand  over  hand)  =  2^2fi  2Xh2  K.  as  O.S.  or  2^1*232X1.2  K. ;  also 
U.  Pers.  (lit.  in  the  hour)]  or  MB.  or  j>s^ 

0  t*  ^  0  '  00^4 

Tkh.  or  Ti.  or  Al.  Arab. ;  or  jLisXdb. 

0  •  t  t  »  ^  "  '  0  im 


158 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


U.  down,  or  Sal.  or  is^  Al.  (O.S. 

II  it  '  II  II  II  * 

Also  whether  motion  downwards  is  meant  or  not,  and 

^  it  ft  ^ 

So  '^2  ^  /rom  beneath  (all  is). 

U.  only  just,  scarcely,  Turk.  Kurd.  In  K.  or  Dkl^  icH. 
4^32  Joria  hereabouts. 

doubtless,  Pers.  Also  ^3  (hard  Kap). 

4^32  thereabouts. 


JEOI3  U.  or  jua  K.  MB.  Gaw.  Al.  Z.  more,  Pers.;  sis^n  of  the  com- 
parative ;  occasionally  used  to  qualify  verbs :  as  32f  is-?  Jaou*  JS03 
love  will  increase  more.  But  in  this  case  it  would  be  more  usual  to 

use  230f  JCOis,  p.  161. 


Jd^2D  U.  Q.  therefore,  or  or  2pdt  or  b 

Jayla  U,  K.  or  2aay  is<^  U.  or  Joyla  jeS  U.  K.  or  2pay  iJb  Sal.  or 
2?07  ih  Sal.  or  ih  U.  or  2d07  }.b  U.  ;  or  ihopso  K.  or 

Ti.  or  ^30?  K.  See  ,<h3<7f  p.  160,  and  for  the  prepositions  §  68. 

K.  the  year  before  last  (perhaps  for  at  the  seasons, 

i.e.  lit.  at  an  indefinite  time,  §  88  g).  In  U.  }XXi^2  lit.  the  other 

year,  cf.  below.  In  Al.  2^is  (cf.  2^^  three  ?).  These 

also  mean  the  year  after  next. 

U.  K.  last  year,  next  year  (perhaps  for  at  those 

seasons,  i.e.  at  a  definite  time),  in  Sal.  pron.  bazughni.  Also 

(}^;n2d).  In  Al.  in  Ti.  iJdifi-X  =  O.S. 

M!^isx2  or  Chald.  (for 

[In  Ti.  they  say  }ibf)3  l6l  for  thi^ee  years  ago  =  U.  iSis 

I*  II  '  i'  ** 

h?i  ;  and  2ib^  2^  for  four  years  ago.] 

.**<»  .*"j4 


»*  o  r  M 


67] 


ADVERBS. 


159 


in  the  midst  (pron.  ^  U.)  or  §  16  (ii)  a. 

U.  in  the  evening,  or  IXsoy^lS  K.  with  second  Zlama 
sound  in  both  forms  [both  are  also  substantives,  §  16,  with  plural  as 
§§  18,  19],  or  Q. 

U.  perhaps,  Pers.  or  K.  Ah,  Turk.  Kurd,  or  S 

‘i  .  i  ^ 

or  3  [even  in  the  middle  of  a  clause ;  as  u 

yiUkbpa  if  perchance  all  forget  you\  el  =  liaOOJOilsO  p.  152. 

}^-At.,ba3  lit.  hy  Christ,  and  l<p  lit.  yes,  hy  God,  Ti.  are 

little  stronger  than  indeed,  esp.  in  K.  So  the  negative ; —  ojSia  ;iik 
U.  or  Ti.  or  ^  ojJia  ;iS  Tkh. 

U.  Q.  alone  (by  himself),  or  K.  Z.  or 

Ti.  Al.  or  Al.  [so  O.S.  but  with  pi.  affixes].  So  for  the 

other  persons,  §  20  (6). 

UQ>3  U.  then  (causal),  therefore  Pers.  Kurd,  or  Ti.  Sh. 

or  K.  or  Al.  (not  so  emphatic  as  isosj).  For  jQsao 

Al.  see  above.  ^03  is  used  somewhat  redundantly  in  such  a 

/  <v  /  4 

phrase  as  the  following  ob]  JOXi  :  01^  2^2  2 

asofl  If  this  thing  is  necessary,  that  thing  is  much 

/  ^  II  • 


more  so. 

•  •> 


3  U.  together,  eqttally,  or  K.,  Pers.  Turk. 

33  :  ^  sign  of  the  future,  §§  31,  46  s.v. 

by  chance,  a\^o  probably  (^.  St.)  Arab,  (not  common). 

0itl^^3  by  chance,  from  JO&is  to  happen,  to  meet  (Arab.  word). 

U.  hereafter,  or  2pay  3^  U.  ais3  Al.  aisiai 

Al. 

v«t* 


160 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


iSsa  Ti.  Al.  upwards  [or  ia  ?]  proparoxytone,  or  ati  Ti. 

/  ^  •  >  f 

uis^is  aSsa  Ti.  Al.  downwards,  proparoxytone. 

0  0 

or  or  lo^  2^  sometimes, 

occasionally,  §  28  (4). 

within,  see  p.  168,  also  ^  from  within :  with 

to  the  inside. 

or  quickly,  soon,  early.  In  the  first  sense  chiefly 
U.  =  ^OlSJS  or  Ti.  which  bXso  =  certamly.  2a\j^  ^  =  a 
long  time  ago  =  jiaf  ^  Al. 

2  a  2  a  7a.  hither  and  thither  =  JaiV  OllS  U. 

'  c  .  '  •  ^ 

^2a  how  or  when  by  itself  (=  ^2a  ?)  or 
Ti.  See  §  73  or  K.  (=  Jii>  ?)  rare. 

♦s^OJoa  Z.  still,  again. 

jaua  IT.  K.  always,  or  ^iflua,  }^a  K.,  Kurd.  Arab. ;  or  Jaiep  U. 
Pers.  ('so  Az.)  or  Aa  Al.  (O.S.  or  Aa  U.  K. 

JUXOOl  in  vain,  Arab.  Pers.  or  2ba<7y  K.  See  wii.^abu». 

^  0  0 

yiSof  K.  slowly,  gently  (Zlama  second  sound)  Kurd.  =  ImA  XT. 
as  O.S.,  see  p.  166  (whence  very  slowly)’,  or  abOLbOC^  IT. 

Pers.  or  K.  or  Ti. 

j^aol  so,  thus,  or  2aby  or  J^aai .  These  seem  to  be  the  O.S.  2a<7y 
^  ^  ^  _ 

or  2aat ,  the  fern,  of  Uor  thxs.  The  (which  is  soft,  not  hard  as 
in  Nold.  §  85)  is  a  common  Aramaic  addition.  So  Jbac^  thus,  so,  such 
(a  =  is)  IT.  K.  Z.  or  in  Tal  (?  sound)  or  Jorao)  Al.  (=  Jot  2aay  ?) 

or  IT.  So  also  &u\  ^  or  ^?or  ^  SO  much.  See  also  §  23. 


§67] 


ADVERBS. 


161 


-ioipoo?  at  first  (rare).  Qy.  past  part,  of  ^iapc)b9  U.  (= 

K.)  to  believe  ? 

uOt  U.  K.  Q.  then,  or  lcr{i^  uOf  Al.  or  Ti. 

c 

or  or  kAo  u07  or  ucn.  Also  with  ^b9.  So  in 

Ti.  we  have  JoA.  before  that  =  ^iy^  uOIS  U. 

U.  not  at  all,  never  (with  a  negative),  as  ^ 

U.  {=  DC^  K.)  /  will  never  allow  (see  under  t^o2).  So  u. 

=  }oA.  oa  K.  Z.  Q.  never,  (Turk.)  and  OA  (Kurd.)  being  also 
adjectives  =  no  or  any. 

U.  yet,  Arab.  Turk,  or  J-^al  Sal.  (see  jlal)  or 

or  jKCTf  K.  Al.  (also  now :  O.S.  jsof  or  li6i)  or  2aA3  Al.  Arab. 

or  certainly,  of  course,  Arab.  Also  or 


'^6]  in  Al.  also,  Pers.  In  U.  K.  as  conjunction,  repeated,  both... 


and. 


DO/  just,  certainly,  Pers. ;  with  negative  never,  esp.  in  K.,  as 
fisa  ac^  /  will  certainly  go,  }^2  ao?  he  shall  never  come. 
Jaaof  just  thus,  obi  ac^  just  that  =  the  same,  §  25  (8).  Noldeke 
gives  Pers.  Turk,  never. 

U.  or  K.  Z.  or  vXf  Z.  also,  Kurd.  This  follows  the  word 

/  i'  '•/* 

qualified.  Often  used  with  \^ol  or  thus  If  Ul  Aol  I  g^lso. 

Iho'f  more,  or  2aOf  JCoa  (aua)  or  JiaOf  Ti.  (from  N.S. 

a2f  to  increase,  an  Arabic  word),  or  auSa  Al.  These  are  also  used 
as  substantives  =  more. 

JduAf  K.  certainly,  on  that  account. 


S.  GR. 


21 


162 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


2dXna  A1.  together,  or  2d>^2  K.  or  2dx^  A1.  or  233^^^  K  .  or 

,!■  (■  kJ  '  )■  It  ,m  II  )■  II 

233^  K.  or  2XwkO30  Sal.  U. :  or  from  the  Persian  we  have 
U.  (or  or  ^bo),  pron.  in  Sal.  ukhdali  etc.  See  §  15. 

7'ather,  somewhat,  a  little.  See  §  28  (9)  for  variations.  Also 

Al.  K.  7*^  K.  (below),  JLa  K.  Al.  .^^oi  Al.  jio  Ti.  So 

ikth  almost,  lit.  a  little  remains  (e.g.  JtooA  almost 

black) ;  in  K.  Jx*4  Also  expressed  thus : 

^  }^2  I  nearly  did  not  come.  So  iJi'i 

he  is  far  from  thinking. 

U.  in  vain  or  gratis,  Kurd,  or  Al.  K.,  Kurd.  (Ndld. 
St.  give  JcSa  Pers.)  or  U.  {gratis) ;  see  UQ>3<7f. 

U.  in  short,  or  Sal.,  Arab,  (both  proparoxytone). 

or  u'psxde  down  K.  tnstde  out  XJ.  or  5j6dX  U.  Ti. 

(both  senses)  or  ltaO<^  (=  ^9-^  }io5  edge,  edge 

lowermost).  The  form  lower,  is  seen  in  (below)  and 

'  I*  ' 

in  23kbOObw  lit.  lower  church,  the  name  of  a  church  in  Ti.  in 

f 

the  Zab  valley;  it  is  another  form  of  K.,  O.S.;  cf.  the  verb 

» 

x^  to  be  abased,  Al.  and  also  above. 

^  K.  (U.  'ou)  from  day  to  day. 

^  9/  ^ 

Xi^XXkiai.  U.  the  day  before  yesterday  or  the  day  after  to-morrow, 

or  ji^2  Jbbaa  Ti.  or  Jiiaa  Tkh.  §  61.  So  }^-L»2 

the  week  before  last  {after  next). 

K.  entirely,  quite,  very,  or  K,  Kurd.;  or  ;a3  U.  Turk, 

(so  Jas  jaa  extremely)  or  dcH  U.  (very  emphatic)  or  Al. 

Arab,  or  ^Jsois  U.  (also  an  adj.  =  c^ea^z) ;  or  ^bois  (also  an  adj. 


§67] 


ADVERBS. 


163 


=  entire).  For  emphasis  is  often  put  by  itself  at  the  end  of  a 
sentence.  See  p.  167. 

that  is,  Arab. 

K.  certainly,  or  wA*  U.,  Arab. 


2a  U.  MB.  Sp.  Sal.  or  Q.  Tkh.  Sal.  or  'a  Al.  Z.  Sal.  sign  of 
the  habitual  present,  §  31.  Origin,  Chald.  Kp  =  7^,  §  119  ? 

51^  a  little,  somewhat,  Tkh.  or  Ti.  (contrast  5ia  above),  or 

;aa  U.,  Kurd.  See  Jaa#i. 

^Ou\a  daily,  so  O.S. ;  also  Ti.  and  :  9^ 

pou  Al. 


4^  X  ^  ^ 

J^a  how  much,  how,  so  O.S. ;  or  Al.  or  ;oi^  Al.  or 

abiM  Al.  Thus :  how  good  =  O.S.  ;to.  laoV,  iaysk 

how  great  he  is  how  great  a  man  he  is ! 

not,  as  O.S.,  or  (not  Al.)  prefixed  to  certain  parts  of  the  verb 
only,  §  33  [thus  2.3  a^  2^0  ojA»  A  it  is  neither  good  nor  had\ 

^  =  neither. .  .nor  :  a  third  ^  then  is  often  used  with  the 

verb,  pleonastically.  ^  has  the  second  Zlama  sound  and  perhaps 
should  be  =  y^CT)  2^!^  ?  Cf.  O.S.  oS  (West  Syrian  aS)  =  OO)  ? 
Nold.  conjectures  =  ^*1  2.1^.  Or  perhaps  this  is  the  origin  of  it : 

+  the  substantive  verb  (♦^^O-a  %.%  etc.)  takes  the  pronunciation 
le-win;  and  then  by  false  analogy  uS  or  2^  is  placed  before  the 

present  tense.  is  thus  used  with  in  Ti.  ? 

— ^  '^hat  do  you  want  I  Nothing. 

on  this  side,  this  way,  or  2*^  Ti.  (fein.  form  of 


164 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  67 

=  side),  rarely  without  ;  also  with  pL».  See 

I 

23  23  p.  160. 

here,  U.  (see  Jal)  hither,  U.  K.  (the  ^  coalesces)  or  JacT 
K.  or  MB.  or  K.  or  Ti.  So  K. 

towards  this  way  =  ;or2ik  U.  Also  Jalbo  U.  K.  this  way,  hence, 
and  similarly  the  rest  Sal.). 

axxS  U.  Ti.  outside  (S)  Kurd,  or  K.  or  (or 

?)  Al.  or  Al.  (so  J^aa  U.  K.  Al.  outer)  or  aai^  Al. 

ft'  t  •  * 

backwards,  behind  (^  K.),  or  with  the  other  affixes,  also 

f 

K.  or  2^SaS  or  (common).  Sometimes  without 

;  often  with  Also  with  =  towai'ds  the  rear. 

U.  071  that  side,  that  way,  over  there,  rarely  without 

yS ;  also  with  ;  or  ,^3001  Ti.  It  also  means  abroad  {=  J^SOD^iS 
much  used  in  this  sense). 

K.  MB.  (or  with  Dalath,  §  6.9.  2  b)  m  that  direction.  So 
from  that  direction. 

K.  MB.  or  2ao.^  I^a^i  for  a  little  twie,  §  28  (9),  or 
uOT  (rare  with  Lamadh). 

v^^aA^  forwai'ds,  or  jiafilS  or  uOJOb^ai^  or  with  the  other 
affixes. 

Oa^Sia^albO  U.  henceforwai^d  (lit.  from  7ioio  to  after  it) ;  or 

i^piso  U.  (^^  coalesces)  or  oia^taS  cna^:a^Sa2» 

U.  or  2*aM  K.  or  }od)l30  MB.  or  simply  ilplso  (see 

above  jial).  So  also  yi6?»  after  that,  thereafter. 


§67] 


ADVERBS. 


165 


U.  Ti.  indeed,  or  Sal.,  Arab.  Kurd. ;  often  with  ^ 

sound  as  Kurd,  [used  both  in  question  and  answer,  thus :  ,  .  .  ?  b^ 
Q.  Indeed  ?  Ans.  Yes,  really] ;  or  K.  or  U.  or 

Sal.  [these  are  the  imperatives  of  the  verb  , 

to  believe,  §  83  dJ  or  (also  adj.  =  certain). 


rom 


ji^odfso  U.  {moy'isha,  proparoxytone)  in  the  morning,  lit. 

{ 

that  head,  or  ^ba3  or  ^bOOO  liy'sp  Ti. ;  or  K.  or  u. 

(lit.  the  anticipation,  from  pjafibo),  AL,  O.S.,  or  Z.  or 


Z.  or  ^oibO  Z.  These  also  (exc.  the  Ti.  and  Al.  forms)  mean 
to-morrow  (but  not  yesterday),  cf.  Scottish  the  morn,  the  morns  morn, 
German  morgen.  See  below. 


Ti.  in  early  fnornmg,  \it.  from  the  night.  So 
Ti.  very  early  (from  the  little  nights)  or  Ti.  MB.  Tergawar 

or  K.  lit.  fi'om  the  watch  (^aa  K.  to  change,  Arab.).  [Also 


Ti.  U.  or  Jla^c^la  U.] 

secretly. 


ySbbjk^  K.  yet  (not  temporal),  again,  usually  Jtbbk^  (J!  silent  in 
U.)  or  Al.  or  Ti. ;  lit. /rom  the  head; — also 

;kLfl  u.  (;^^2  K.  Al.  or  JftsX,:  Tkh.  A1.  Z.)  or  uDJN?  ;oA.  U. 

(u^bXa  K.)  [also  , . .  ; — also  U.  Ti.  or 

Sal.  or  *^aLbp  or  Ti.  Once  again  is  J^5L»2  2^  U. 

(K.  similar). 


JJ.for  example,  or  K. 

U.  suddenly,  or  Al.  or  -2  K.  [Qy. 


166 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


=  uOj  at  that  time  ?],  or  ; — also  or 

Al.  rarely  U.  or  Sal.  These  =  O.S. 

ul  added  on  to  the  verb  to  strengthen  it,  §  81.  In  O.S.  it  =  m- 
deed  (also  2i). 

O.S.  quietly,  hy  degrees,  often  repeated ;  also 
boa  ^oaSi  probably  (boa  =  trust,  N.S.). 

U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw.  up,  upwards,  or  K.  or  MB. 

(all  these  also  with  a,  A  or  ?1S0),  or  Al.  as  O.S. ;  z. 

upwards  (second  Zlama). 

^  by  halves,  §  27. 

gradually,  §  77  (2). 

well,  not  Ti.,  (pronunciation,  §  7)  [also  an  adj.  =  good^',  in 
Ti.  (elsewhere  adj.  =  beautiful) ;  in  Al.  2^3.  Perhaps  is 

from  to  be  clear :  pure.  For  the  termination  see  p.  168. 

I* 

la  U.  Sh.  why  or  abO  l.h  U.  or  2^^  Tkh. 

Ti.  or  y^^oiso  ^sh.  Q.  or  Xi^  Al.  or  Al.  or 

XsooM  Al.  or  olsDA  Ti.  (=  ?).  For  u3oao  etc.  see  §  13. 


U.  Z.  Sal.  Sal.  Al.  ;aa  Al.  sign  of  the  past,  §  81. 

first,  or  U.  or  Al.  §  27. 

Xsp^<xJb  U.  yestei'day,  to-morrow,  §  61,  from  to  antici¬ 
pate.  Or  K.  Al.  Z. :  rare  in  U.  (O.S.  or 

If  a  distinction  is  necessary  ojaAaiwp  that  is  past,  that  is 

^  f0  0  i 

coming,  must  be  added.  So  }*{s2a  next  iveek, 

last  week.  See  above, 


67] 


ADVERBS. 


167 


;j3Satj  O.S.  near,  nearly,  e.g.  nearly  three 

years. 

Xcxti  K.  at  all,  or  Tkh.  or  K.  or  aJj  Ti.  Al.,  Kurd. 
Usually  with  a  negative,  =  never,  not  at  all.  Often  repeated,  esp.  in 
Ti. :  aJbO  3bb  certainly  not,  nothing  at  all,  or  iStJ, 

JaS  very  [see  §  25  (7)  for  the  adjective],  or  U.  or  ;3?  Q. 

*  } 

Gaw.  (first  Zlama) ;  or  XJ3A  Al.,  Arab. 

often,  see  above.  ;e^  :?o»  aoa  oftener. 

easily,  comfortably,  also  an  adj.  =  comfortable,  and  subst. 
=  ease,  Pers. 

afar,  also  with  ^ ;  Al.  and  O.S.  }Am03. 

Js?  head  downwards,  U.  or  K.  rarely 

'  t'  •'  I*  •' 

K.  (see  above  under  is^a^) ;  or 

Al.  from  O.S.  Al.  to  descend,  which  is  also  N.S. 

endways. 

in  a  shuffling  or  gliding  manner,  §  83  A  (2). 

jiis  Ti.  or  U.  K.  there  (O.S.  Also  oapois 

U.  JoyooitbD^  U.  K.  K.  Tkh.  MB.  oaioo^is 

Al.  Sp.  Sal.  Also  with  =  thither,  with  =  thence  or 

that  way. 


Notes.  (1)  The  old  adverbs  in  are  not  now  used  collo¬ 

quially,  except  only  ^aojQ>  K.  Al.  in  Syriac  (the  language), 

Al.  in  Arabic,  ^aaoub  K.  Al.  in  Kurdish,  ^^ao^  U.  in  Turkish, 

-«!■  f  '•  t 

isJo':4  U.  in  Persian;  which  appear  to  stand  for  ^2aou(2>  etc. 

These  are  used  also  as  substantives.  [When  the  old  adverbs  are 
used,  as  in  theological  discussions,  they  are  oxytone.] 


168 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  67 

(2)  Adjectives,  especially  those  most  commonly  in  use  and 
those  which  do  not  change  in  the  feminine,  are  very  often  used  as 
adverbs;  in  U.  K.  chiefly  in  the  masculine,  in  Al.  in  both  genders. 

Thus  IT.  K.  Verily,  verily,  I  say 

=  4^3^ la  Al. ;  K.  Al.  she  rose 

quickly,  ooo^  they  were  badly  ill,  St  Mark  i.  32 

=  6s^2iji3  O.S. 

(3)  There  are  a  large  number  of  adverbs,  adjectives,  and  substan¬ 
tives  in  some  of  which  Noldeke  suggests  (§  54)  may  come  from 

the  old  6^1^ ,  dropping  They  may  also  be  the  abstract  termi¬ 
nation  Oa  *•  of  which  the  o  falls  in  colloquial  speech  in  U.,  §  78. 
Or  it  may  be  the  Kurdish  ending  though  in  some  cases  added  on  to 
words  which  are  not  Kurdish.  Examples :  U.  or  K. 

easy,  the  latter  Kurdish,  excessive,  abundant,  from  JE0L3 

(above),  Kurd,  meaning,  more  commonly 

bad,  Turk.  Pers.  sure,  certain,  tame,  u..*bODOUQ>  deep 

blue,  advice,  ^^$1  colony,  Kurd.  easy,  \^6a^Jd  coffee- 

coloured,  rude,  wild,  uaSS  silk,  tin,  Turk.  Kurd. ;  and 

/  /  •  / 

see  the  above  list. 

(4)  Too  is  usually  expressed  by  the  simple  adjective,  see  §  24. 

(5)  For  numeral  adverbs  see  §  28  (2). 

(6)  At  least,  at  any  rate,  is  expressed  by  ImO(7\  ^  ^0|  *^2  U.  or 

♦^2  K.  or  U.  K.  Thus 

U1  I,  at  any  rate,  will  go.  Preflxed  to  numerals  at  least 

may  be  rendered  by  ^  than. 

(7)  Adverbs  are  frequently  repeated  for  emphasis :  e.g. 

slowly,  2^'oSjb  K.  id.  So  in 


G7,  68] 


PKEPOSITIONS. 


169 


O.S. :  e.g.  jusi  very  evilly;  and  so  in  Turk.  etc.  From  ^03 

equal,  straight,  we  have  ^03  on  exactly  equal  terms,  used,  e.g. 

of  a  bill  cashed  without  commission.  Cf.  §  69  (1). 

(8)  English  adverbs  may  very  frequently  be  rendered  in  N.S.  by 

a  substantive  with  ^3  as  truly,  (so  O.S.  ; 

hardly,  with  difficulty ;  rarely  without  ,3.  So  the  com¬ 
parative  ('36^)  more  himdedly,  lit.  more  in  haste. 

(9)  ^  is  sometimes  redundant:  thus  Sfl  2-V 

I  prevented  him  from  going ;  Sal  : 

a^^tJSO  do  not  persecute  the  Christians 

until  they  have  been  accused. — ,  oa  when  accompanied  by  verbs 
take  Thus  %S  jiil  (oa)  /  saw  no  man.  But 

they  may  stand  without  ^  if  there  is  no  verb  :  as  ^3030 

What  did  you  do?  Nothing. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

•  f  0  •  ^ 

§  68.  Simple  prepositions. 

0  0 

O.S.  or  {dkh,  mdkh,  rarely  d ;  ekh,  mekh  Al.)  or  ^2^ 

0 

Al.  {nvtkh)  or  'a  Al.  as  Heb. ;  =  according  to,  like,  as  u-^a  like 

0  ^  0  m  0  ^  ^  ^  0  ^  ^ 

me,  5^2  according  to  our  law ;  or  about:  2aM  ^2 

about  one  o’clock. 

3  O.S.  or  U.3  Sal.  (see  aj3);  =at:  2^^  lis  come  at 

five  o’clock:  liyJb  ubis3  C^O^O  he  sold  it  at  two  qrans ;  it  de- 
notes  a  measure,  or  time  when :  ;otJj  ^  one  of  this  measure, 

22 


S.  GR. 


170 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


lolhs  this  year  [we  may  omit  the  preposition ;  as  jisaaCs 

»*  •* 

come  on  Monday']  \  —in:  in  truth,  in  sorrow  (see 

;  or  with :  ivith  difficulty,  JaSa  with  many 

tears  (see  ;  or  of:  the  second  of  January 

(or  u.070^  u.i^S  ♦^Oia);  in  K.  it  is  also  the  sign  of  the  object 

in  a  particular  case,  §  50. 

Ja  without,  Kurd.  Pers. 

,  oS^  see  oS. 

isoa  U.  or  D  ^  Sal.  Az.  for,  concerning,  about,  for  the  sahe  of,  on 

account  of  because  of:  ^03  ♦^ibb  Our  Lord  died  for 

isoa  on  account  of  the  persecution,  ^ubobo  isoa  what 

about?  This  preposition  probably  is  3  OOpJ,  lit.  in  the  matter  of 

Stod.  gives  two  rare  forms  ui3ubo2  isoa  U.  luith  regard  to  what  I  said, 

i.e.  uphold  K.  Cf.  §  72,  a  uO^a,  which  is  also  used 

as  a  preposition  in  the  phrase  ub^-a  or  biL*  ua^a 

/  believe,  in  my  opinion  (pron.  bad-libi  or  bid-libi) ;  also  ub^a 

(bad-di  or  bid-di).  Rarely  also  with  a  substantive  JlUla  ub^a  bad- 

ndsha,  in  man's  opinion,  [cf.  ^a  ubia  is^oi  the  cause 

of  a  man's  falling.'] 

xa  (a  =  fis)  not  common  in  K.  =  O.S.  aJa  =  a  2"aj,23.  Also 

'■  r«i  *  ffl  /  •  la  ^ 

(see  a)  and  It  means  by  (of  the  agent)  : 

a^  }*aa  everything  was  created  by  God.  But  the  full 
form  is  often  used,  especially  when  attention  is  called  to  the  hand  : 

2L23  er^  ;3fa  the  letter  arrived  by  the  hand  of 

Thomas,  i^2a  ^3  evei'ything  is  in  the  hand 

{poiuer)  of  God,  I'ioy^y  I^^Ia  ?Iaa  created  by  the  Son. 


§68] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


171 


(=  yS  :  O.S.  between,  among:  between 

them,  or  among  them;  or  including,  or  notwithstanding,  in  spite  of: 
wmOui  including  myself  we  are  ten  men.  So 

^Ab  in  general,  or  all  included,  or  in  spite  of  all.  When  in 

English  we  have  between... and,  we  may  repeat  ^Ab  or  insert  A 

or  simply  say  O  ;  as  «^ba.^.A..bO  between  us  and  you,  or 

w^Ab;  between  Joshua  and  Simon ; 

betiueen  me  and  myself,  i.e.  alone.  So  O.S. 

between  Romans  and  Persians,  j^O^A 
between  you  and  your  mother  and  your  brother,  cf.  Nold.  O.S.G.  §  251. 
Also  O.S.  with  o  for  ^  id.  But  the  O.S.  ^b  both 

body  and  soul  will  not  stand  in  N.S. 

^*b  (Arab.)  or  uiAb  or  JSWb  all  Al.  for  ^!Swib  (O.S.  uM  or  ^Lb). 

Hence  between  him  and  himself,  i.e.  alone,  as  above. 

Aa  (not  common)  or  (common)  as  O.S.,  or  ^b  %.%  Sal.  ; 
=  without,  cf.  O.S.  4®  ^  id. 

iisb  K.  Sh.  MB.  as  O.S.  or  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw. ;  or  or 

;  =  after :  aisb  after  tiuo  days ;  or  behind :  aj>a 

t'  I*  ' 

2aob^  OOta  behind  that  mountain;  or  in  {after),  a^ 

in  three  hour's. 

O.S.,  U.  Sp.  or  K.  Sal.  Sp.  (sometimes)  or  K.  J. 
or  Al. ;  =  m,  in  the  midst  of  (of  place  only,  U.  K. :  .b  usually 

renders  in,  otherwise,  though  that  is  also  used  of  place) :  ub0bo2 
in  Urmi.  In  Al.  is  by  means  of  (=aub  U.),  and  is  in,  or 

amongst,  or  is  the  sign  of  the  indirect  object  (=  A,  U.  K.),  as : 

didst  thou  do  thus  to  us? 


172 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  C8 


occasion - 


St  Luke  ii.  48  (=  U.  K.). — In  U.  K.  J.  oS^,  are 
ally  used  of  motion  =  into,  though  is  also  thus  used  ; 

he  entered  into  the  city. —  or  or  ok  ^  or 

O^bO  through,  oV  A<n  up  to  the  inside  of,  ok  for  the  inside  of 
{<\  K-),  oi^'  towards  the  inside  of,  etc. 


3  as  O.S.  or  u.5  Sal.  =  of  (also  a  relative  pronoun  and  conjunc¬ 
tion)  ;  sometimes  also  in  Z.  before  nouns,  see  §  70  (5).  This 
preposition  is  frequently  omitted ;  as  hoi  is  ^  a  manner 

of  speech;  2'i^O  ^  load  of  barley ;  2p2^  the  festival 

of  the  Gross  (Sept.  13,  old  style) :  ^  U.  one  of  his  eyes. 

Perhaps  also  in  some  compound  words  in  §  16,  ii.  g,  as 
(or  u.isx.d  ?)  rainbow.  But  3  is  inserted  in  dates,  as  ll^ly  in 

0  **  "  I* 

the  year  100  (O.S.  J2so  ^sixi). 

Sat  U.  K.  Q.  or  Sat  Al.  Q.  Z.  or  Aocti  A1.  Sal.  [perhaps 

»  <»  < 

this  is  the  emphatic  §  73,  with  ^],  also  S<r  U.  K.,  cf. 

below  ;  =  up  to,  until ;  Jifts  so  far  (up  to  there), 
^.^2  how  long?'  (until  ivhen?);  used  of  duration  of  time, 

Sal  for  three  yearns,  which  may  also  be  expressed  without 
any  preposition.  Cf.  §  69  (3). 

K.  Q.  or  )Sts  J.  or  K  Al.  or  lis  Al.  J.  Z.  or  S  in  Bo. 

Ti.  with  affixes,  §  70  (10)=  O.S.  or  of  the  West 

Syrians ;  =  for.  It  has  the  meanings  of  J.h  (below),  except  the  sign 
of  the  object. 

JM,  see  rarely  used  by  itself,  except  in  Ash.  Z. 


68] 


PRiiPosrrioNS. 


173 


O.S.  to,  for :  uS  I  came  to  Van.  [It  is  sometimes 

omitted  in  this  sense :  as  U.  /  will  go  to  market 

*  \  u 

So  Z.]  c^|k3c^  give  it  to  Simon,  all 

ought ;  in  dates,  a  A.D.  50  : 

in  the  year  200  of  the  Greeks  =  B.c.  Ill ;  sign  of  the  object, 

I* 

direct  or  indirect  (more  frequently  than  in  O.S.),  as  ?  l**sO 

whom  did  he  striked  cf.  also  §  49;  =hy  in  the  preterite  ^ 

it  is  finished  by  me  =  I  finished,  §  32  (4),  and  elsewhere  in  Al.  K. ; 

for  its  use  with  see  above. 

I 

I 

towards,  toiuards  the  earth,  often  with  side 

(=  direction)  added  after  the  noun,  as  toivards  the  city, 

or  in  the  direction  of  the  city  (not  necessarily  of  motion).  [Origin  ? 
Perhaps  =  (cf.  Sal)  or  cri^  to  this.  Nold.  §  87.] 

^SoS  O.S.,  Al.  only,  to. 


U.  K.  to,  chiefly  wdth  pronouns  :  come  to  me, 

as  ^  is  not  used  of  motion  with  pronouns,  §  70;  =with,  at,  at  the 
house  q/etc.,  French  chez :  oji.  your  hook  is  with 

me,  I  have  your  hook,  §  29  (13),  iu  our  country,  cjS  2^ 

he  stayed  at  our  house.  Also  compared  with,  as 
^0^3  l^i  afS*  is  this  compared  with  that?  This  pre¬ 
position  is  not  used  in  Al. ;  instead  we  have  or  3  — 

So  towards  (not  common). — Also  or  or 

(common)  from  the  presence  of,  from  near. — Perhaps 
=  3  to  the  side  of,  Ndld.  §  87.  It  exactly  corresponds  to  O.S. 


174 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


U.  except,  Pers. 

O.S.  {mm),  also  esp.  in  K.  J.  Al.  Az.  (even  before  2  and  u) 
as  in  some  words  in  O.S. ;  =  from:  from  you ;  or  hy,  after  pas¬ 
sive  verbs :  we  were  created  hy  God;  or 

luitli :  God  he  luith  you,  goodbye,  ;^2  he  came 

with  Its ;  or  than :  0013  better  than  he ;  or  since :  u.013 

since  that  time ;  or  hy  reason  of  (so  Gk.  diro) :  io?2? 

for  this  reason ;  or  via,  by  ivay  of:  ?  .10^3  Oti  }^2  did  yon 

come  hy  way  of  Qadshanis  ^  that  ivay,  this  ivay, 

jLaX  ^  he  enters  hy  the  door  (see  §  71) :  cf. 

they  tvoimded  him  in  the  thigh ;  or  some  of:  ^  J!Soo2 

eat  some  of  this. — may  occasionally  be  omitted,  as  in 

some  of  their  faults.  It  is  rarely  used  before  verbal  phrases 
equivalent  to  nouns,  as  in  O.S. :  thus  O.S.  Ipols  =  N.S. 

30^3  y.bO  X^, 

O.S.,  U.  K.  Al.  or  Sal.;  =on:  2^4  on  the  sur¬ 
face  of  the  sea,  lal'iy  hereupon;  or  about,  esp.  in  K. : 

about  the  Holy  Trinity ;  or  against,  esp.  in  Al. 
?4S2  they  came  against  us.  Also  with  "30  :  across, 

i 

or  from  over,  as  23C^i  ^^^30  a)(S  ^oy!:0  he  threw  it  across  the  river. 

Also  in  K.  ^^^30. — So  ^300^  \^30  or  ^S30  or 

(O.S.  4SO5  Carnival ;  K-  Saturday  evening  (our 

Friday  evening). 

31^  O.S.  {am),  in  Al.  and  often  K.  {im),  2  =  §  6  (2) ; 

=  with,  i.e.  together  luith,  rather  more  emphatic  than 


68,  69] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


175 


Al.  (Arab.  side)  =  q.  V.  So  =  JQ>SbO  . 

U.  Sal.  =  for :  ih  for  James,  J-ti  ^vhat  for .? 

why'! ;  or  to:  iJO  ^  Ja^Oj*  I  gave  it  (f.)  to  David;  to  express 

duration  of  time:  Ji'bbou  ^  for  two  days;  or  a  stated  time: 

ih  iso<^  %  noon,  see  §  28  (13),  Sfoy  Jo^  is? 

2SiQ>^  it  will  he  ready  in  ten  months. — For  the  direct  object 

see  §  64.  Noldeke  is  in  error  in  saying  it  is  not  so  used  (Nold.  §  87). — 
In  Sal.  pron.  qe. — Origin? 

(O.S.  p^)  or  p%h  ^  (O.S.  pj^  or  ^aJSbO  before, 
in  front  of:  ^olis  P^^  ^  ?^S2  he  came  before  Thomas, 

ojS  Jlifl  he  called  her  before  the  law  courts ;  or  to  ex¬ 
press  ago :  three  years  ago,  (or  '^pO 

J??i)  ;  so  also  iZ,^p  Uxl  'Tspk  six  days  before  the  passover, 

St  Joh.  xii.  1  (not  common);  also  because  of,  from  fear  of:  ^ 

/  cannot  open  my  eyes  because  of  my 

head(ache) :  so  ^  did  not  go  from  fear  of 

the  cold.  So  the  Greek  dvrl  (Clyde’s  Greek  Syntax,  §  83,  2)  and 
possibly  ivavTiov,  Lu.  xx.  26,  are  used  for  because  of.  Also  p^Jo!S 

towards  the  front  of,  p%h  Sal  until  the  fi'ont  of 
j;d  O.S.,  K.  sometimes  U.  or 

.*  f  )  ,  }  , 

U.  or  Sh.  Sal.  Tkh.  or  Sal.  Ti.  or 

0 

Gaw.  =  O.S.  or  ;  =  under,  with  and  or  'bO  of 

motion  to  and  from  under. 


§  69.  Compound  prepositions. 

(1)  Most  of  the  above  prepositions  may  be  repeated  to  express 
intensity.  Thus  ^  0^3  U.  or  u3  0^3  U.  Sal.  along  (but  in  K.  J. 


17G 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


ria^  v^f2  I  ivent  along  the  river),  or  D  yj3  0^1,3  U.  or 

Sh.  [so  .^!^033  6^13  =  {going)  uj)  hiU\  3^  U.  ever  after, 

0^3  ever  hetiueen,  oi^  cno!^  U.  along, 

along,  5aiy  ^3^1  cjSaoyjb  ever  hefoi^e, 

^OMkis  blisbu^is  U.  ever  under.  So  in  O.S.  ^oX*  aiw  otbObiw 

$  *  »  ^ 

Jesus.  But  ill  the  above  N.S.  instances  only  the  feminine  pronoun 
is  used,  though  the  noun  be  masculine ;  see  below  (2)  a. 

(2)  Compound  p)^'6positions  with  3. 

a.  Several  simple  prepositions  take  a  pronominal  affix  and  3 
without  change  of  meaning,  esp.  in  K.  Ah  ;  this  is  common  in  O.S.  e.g. 
H^m3  07-^p4^  with  the  bridegroom  (Martyrs’  Anthem,  Tues.  even.); 

^^6j6i3033  ^O^Aiy  on  the  seats,  Bev.  iv.  4 ;  «JQ30^03^3  \^a]Oiao'^ 

before  the  throne,  Bev.  iv.  5 ;  cf.  c^3  in  the  likeness,  Bev. 

iv.  3.  So  also  in  N.S.  we  have  3  K.  =  »3  ;  3  =  3  OCDOp 

see  b  below ;  3  ^3^  Ti.  =  3^3 ;  3  U.  m.  f.  K.  m.  or 

K.  f.  or  with  a  prefixed,  or  3  Al.  in  the  midst  of, 

§  27;  3  Ol^  K.  m.  3  oi^  K.  f.  U.  ra.  f.  =  clS^  ;  p  sometimes 
pronounced  mlmt  =  ;  ?  sometimes  pronounced  UlU  = 

or  3  Al.  id.  UU  [thus  ^crfS  J^p  what  they 

saw'] ;  3  and  3  U.  =  pi  ;  3  &}a1o^  Tkh.  Sh.  = 

3  below  b;  3  cr^Jsp^h  (qdinit)  =  ;  3  erjxb  m.  or  3  ijib 

f  K.  Al.  =  3S3.  Perhaps  others  of  the  above  have  both  m.  and  f. 
forms  in  some  districts.  For  emphasis  we  have  the  preposition 
repeated,  as  in  (1).  Thus  in  the  mountain, 

073^  0^34^  after  the  army ;  Jsllp  '^^th 

the  men  (the  plural  affixes  are  not  very  common  in  this  connexion). 


PREPOSITIONS, 


177 


§C9] 

6.  ?  or  p  U.  around,  also  with  and 

Perhaps  we  should  write  as  above,  a.  This  seems  to  be  a  cor¬ 
ruption  of  p  the  four  sides  of  cf.  Az. 

around  (Appendix  I.).  As  a  substantive  =  surroundings, 

neighbourhood. 

S  ikhia,  see  Sua,  ^  68. 

?  U.  in  the  middle  of  Turk. 


p  K.  Sh.  or  p  U.  6;^  the  side  of,  or  without  ^ ; 

also  with  or 

p  00)07^3  or  p  A1.  about,  concemiing  (see  a).  Rarely 

with  iS. 


p  Nca  U.  on  account  of 

3  ^03  U.  or  a  ^ifsZl3  for  the  sake  of. 

■  |4  I  *11*^  ^ 

p  (not  Al.)  opposite,  or  S,'3jbiso,  So  p  \pQ±ipp  against, 

also  in  Al.  opposite  [hybrid  words,  the  first  syllable  being  Persian 
0^  in,  and  jj)  the  second  O.S.  against,  which  with  affixes  is 

af^oJtiS  etc.  ?  or  else  =  O.S.  c^^iott^p,  O^^lotjVp], 


9  IjLoiy**  U.  K.  around  (or  Oli-),  or  with  ^  So 

■  ^  ,t  ((•  I*  '  ^  *'■ 

environs.  Cf.  bx:  to  qo  round,  as  O.S. 

II*  ^ 

?  oili  u.  (or  jorlS)  or  p  U.  or  p  2?ojS 

MB.  or  3  OlA  or  9  26^  Ti.  or  3  Ja^  iooa^^  Tkh.  or 

3  or  ;aj  Sh.  or  3  ;ay_  Ti.  or  3  33  «3  IS 

Al.  on  this  side  of 

?  ^  Al.  =  see  §  68. 

s.  GR.  23 


178 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACTJLAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  69 

or  p  OojS  U.  or  p  oo^  or  p  2*^6. 

or  3  ^300)  Ti.  or  3  30133  Al.  or  3  33  OO^  Al.  on  that  side  of. 

3  U.  3  Al.  for  the  sake  of,  instead  of,  Arab. 

P  ^  U.  K.  or  p  or  ijl^  Sh.  or  p  ^  Ti. 

instead  of  lit.  from  the  side  of  We  must  distinguish 

^3o2p  instead  of  Urmi,  from  ^302  from  the  neighbour¬ 

hood  of  Urmi,  or  concerning  Urmi. 

p  or  p  J03»  (or  O^-)  around,  cf.  N.S.  the  edge. 

p  Tkh.  Sh.  in  the  midst  of,  see  a,  above. 

p  or  p  juau^iJ  or  p  by  reason  of,  for  the  sake  of, 

rare  in  U.  [sometimes  without  p],  AM  in  K.  =  cause,  Arab. 

p  J:3SQ.d  (also  U.  or  ^  Jjsiati)  near,  O.S. 

m  t  0  f  9  ''  ' 


(3)  Compoimd  prepositions  with  M  following. 

K.)  before. 

3^  U.  Ti.  or  'to  ?A  Tkh.  except,  besides.  Before  a  phrase, 

Dalath  is  often  added  :  thus  ^^t^p  ^139  except  in  verbs.  Also 
all  these  take  Dalath  before  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  §  70  (12). 

or  \o  l6l  (hdm)  since,  cf.  Serf. 

or  or  ^  Sal.  or  Al.  below. 

(p)  U.  Ti.  or  ^^dside. 

^  ;3i  oojS  the  other  side  of,  see  (2)  above. 

^  U.  or  'oS*  U.  or  wbO  K.  or  wbO  MB. 

above. 


ppt3bO  Al.  before. 


i§  60,  70] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


179 


(>3  usually  silent)  except,  beside.  Also  §  72. 

^  ^’^cept,  beside,  or 

(4)  These  compound  prepositions  are  sometimes  reduplicated  for 
emphasis,  as  p  round. 


§  70.  Prepositions  with  pronouns. 

(1)  Of  the  proper  prepositions,  the  following  take  the  pro¬ 
nominal  affixes  simply  :  Al. :  ^*3  Al.  (u.A*:i  takes  no 

affixes  ?)  :  U.  Q.  Sal.  Gaw. :  and  (but  then  o  becomes 

consonantal  :  thus  is  gd-wan;  the  forms  A  ,  take 

affixes  like  e.g.  oioJ^) :  ^  (see  below): 

«*  ' 

U-  And  so  all  prepositions  which  end  with 

"  •* 

the  above.  Thus  we  have  U.  etc. 

In  Z.  we  have  for  before  him  also  and  C]p^p  Optsoph, 


(2)  sKia  K.  MB.  Sh.  Al.  drops  Pthakha:  as  ^5fis3  after  us. 

So  in  O.S.,  but  O.S.  udisis  =  N.S.  K.  etc.  after  me. 

i  f  m  y  ^ 

(3)  A  in  U.  K.  does  not  take  the  affixes  in  the  sense  to  (of 

motion) ;  we  say  to  Urmi,  but  ^  It  takes 

affixes  simply  in  the  forms  of  §  49,  in  the  formation  of  the  preterite, 
and  after  Xj,2 ;  otherwise  with  affixes  it  takes  the  form  Si  (qSI: 

if'  #»  N  '  ,, 

etc.).  Thus  ;ooi  joqx  isa  he  would  leave  us,  but 

U.  he  left  us,  I  see  you.  But  in 

Al.  Z.  the  forms  o4,  ^  etc.  may  be  used  in  all  cases,  and 
sometimes  in  K. ;  so  also  in  U.  in  the  phrases :  ^  ;«s2 

he  pitied  them,  lit.  their  pity  came  to  him,  Joo)  ui3<M 
ojik  what  has  happened  to  him  — A  does  not  take  the  forms 
V^OJO,  019,  ,  ^91 .  We  thus  have  , 


180 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


universally  for  3  sing. ;  and  S  K.  J.  Al.  Sp.  U. 

Oa^  MB.  Z.  for  3  pi.  The  form  is  only  used  in  Ti.  In  Ti. 

for  the  2  pi.  we  have  oiily*  The  parallel  form  Si  makes 

either  0^2  or  more  often  the  former;  the  3  pi.  is 

or  uOuS:  Al.  K.  In  Ti.  we  have  both  ocSl  and  oOkSl  for  2  pi., 

~  ^  m  ti  m  ,  tt  i-  ’ 

ujAz  for  1  pi. 


(4)  takes  after  it  when  affixes  are  added  :  as 

to  me.  In  J.  =  U.  clS  to  him.  In  Ash.  Z. 

■  44  '  44 

SjSy^  etc.  without  the  first  The  3  pi.  is  uOuS  even  in  U. 

(5)  D  takes  ui,  e.g.  of  iis  =  O.S.  The  3  pi.  is  u.a^9 

U.  or  uiOUa^  K.  j.  In  Ti.  (not  Ash.)  Z.  and  Sh.  we  have  etc. 

i.e.  OI^aZd  Nold.  (2  pi.  Ti.  o^*bu9  or  ;  in  all  these  the  second 

,!■  »•  -I*  I" 

D  is  soft) ;  in  Ash.  or  C)ZaD.  In  Anhar  (village  in  U.)  and 
Sh.  we  have  you  (pi.). — In  Z.  of  as. 


(6)  ^SJ  also  takes  u,  as  in  me,  U. ;  also  in  K.  and  in  Al. 

0^3,  Op  etc.;  in  Ti.  Sh.  MB.  Ash.  Z.  o?.:bZ,  u.^aZ  (?)  or  uO^^aZ  Ti. 

or  ooliiZ  MB.,  ^2  or  uMZ,  ^oaaaZ  MB.  Sh.  or  oa*aZ  Ti.  etc., 

and  sometimes  so  in  other  parts  of  K.  :  where  the  forms  o^  etc.  are 

used  to  denote  the  object,  O^aZ  is  used  in  the  sense  in]  but  see 
^  48. 


(7)  The  following  take  a  with  its  u  before  affixes: 

[^N  and  a  kept  quite  distinct;  that  is  y,^a  0^3, 

cf.  (II)  below]:  xa  :  zSa  (so  6^  Sal): 

(but  in  Ti.  and  Al.  5^2  takes  affixes  thus :  o^^oaZ  like  him,  etc.  as 
in  O.S.)  ;  we  thus  have  ^a  }a  without  us,  and  so  on. 


70] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


181 


(8)  ^0UA^  K.  with  affixes  regains  ^  :  as  Gaw.  from 

we  have  07^0/^^,  etc.  In  Sal.  from  or 

we  have  uOOO^Om^  (or  -fts)  etc. 

(9)  va  takes  affixes  in  various  ways.  For  him  is  U. 

or  0)is,b  U.  or  o^h  MB.  Sh.  Q.  or  iJb  U.  or  ih  U.  or 

,»  I*  I*  ■  ■  !  »  •  ^ 

}-0  Sh.  (rare).  In  for  me,  ^  is  often  silent :  qd-i ;  so 
Sal.ybr  us.  The  which  is  hard,  being  in  the  U.  forms,  is  perhaps 

for  D,  so  that  =  CUD  lib.  The  MB.  form  seems  to  be  lb  + 

(10)  %.%,  ;is  take  A.  Thus 

Al.  Z.  For  2  pi.  we  also  find  Al.  or  : 

also  Ti.  (or  Another  Al.  and  J.  form  is  with  is  , 

OxiSiS  J.  Al.  etc.  which  perhaps  =  O.S.  (Nold. 

^  87).  In  Bohtan  we  have  etc.,  which  is  either  =  ,  or  is 

from  vS,  by  reduplication.  In  Ti.  (not  Ash.)  we  have  the  same  in 
the  forms  of  §  50,  note  3,  and  Aik  =  I  myself  {I  for  my  imrt).  In  J. 
^isSiS  for  me,  often  has  the  second  Tau  silent. 

(11)  Emphasis.  All  prepositions  except  take  D 

with  its  ^  if  the  pronoun  is  emphatic.  Even  D  very  commonly  takes 

a  second  as  of  me.  When  an  emphatic  pronoun  follows 

the  forms  etc.  are  used,  especially  in  U.  In  Al.  Z.  the  use  of 
Dalath  is  common  even  where  there  is  no  emphasis. 

(12)  All  prepositions  take  a  before  the  demonstrative  pronouns 

001 :  uOj;  uil:  ^all:  Ixl  etc.,  and  e.g.  l&llp  about 

this.  But  and  in  Al.  K  usually  (though  not  always)  precede 

them  without  thus  ooi  ai.  =  otn?  k.  (;h  u.) 


182 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[i  70,  71 


for  that  man.  But  in  Al.  to  this  or  would 

be  preferred  to  Also,  especially  in  K.  Al.  ''so  does  not  take 

D,  though  the  full  form  requires  it.  Thus  lihSi  from  that 

time  ;  in  U.  they  woidd  say  by  preference  uOfD  In  O.S. 

this  D  was  not  inserted  :  oo7  ;23L^  O.S.  =  007D  N.S.  In  N.S.  the 
D  coalesces  with  the  demonstrative  pronoun,  and  so  do  usually. 

n  '  y\  /  •  )  /  • 

Thus  OOJD  doiv  or  do^  }6l2S3  bdha,  rarely  h’dJia,  Uni,  rarely  Veni. 

(13)  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person  are  often  used 
after  prepositions  (with  D  as  above)  instead  of  the  affix  forms.  Thus 

OC773  or  from  him,  cf.  §  10. 

§  71.  Prepositions  idiomatically  used  after  verbs,  etc. 

^  is  used  as  follows  : 


^  K.  AL  to  be  able,  §  29  (18). 

(hard  Kap)  to  laugh  at. 
to  touch. 

I#  m 

^  lom  (j!24)  to  tj'ust. 

to  look  at  (this  verb  is  rare 
in  U.). 

O  to  rejoice  at. 

to  sin  against. 

I 

^  to  bear  wit¬ 

ness  to. 

a  to  deny  (a  person),  be  of¬ 

fended  at,  or  with  Xo3. 

self-denia  1. 


a  ^yiabo  to  envy. 

ySS  U.  =  3  3^  above. 

to  lie  against,  to  dis¬ 
appoint. 

CJ  jilsooaps  faithful  to. 

a  to  believe. 

✓ 

^  to  acknowledge  (a  per¬ 

son  or  sin).  So  ogoXoyeo)  ev, 
Lu.  xii.  8. 


some- 


to  exchange  (i 
thing)  for... 

l6soaiixk<^  l^'^^each  the 

faith. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


183 


71] 


^  bkMJObO  to  mock. 

00  * 

^  to  wonder  at. 

nr\ 

to  beseech. 

09  / 

...^  to  translate 

»  00  $0 

into.... 

^  ObVi  to  rebuke. 

Mr\ 

^  AmI  to  be  ashamed  of 
*0  ^ 


^  to  trust. 

M 

^  ,aaL  to  sin  against. 

9  ^ 

^  lyh  to  call  on,  invoke. 

•* 

ufS  content  with  (of  things), 
is  more  usual. 

(or  iiL)  to  banter. 

•*  ^ 

a  (oi^  Al.)  to  meet,  visit. 


to  separ ate...f 7'07n...(aho  \Yith  ^). 


or  DXa  : — 

0 

to  follow. 

to  look  for,  §  47. 


DflSa  to  se7id  for. 

•  I"  ^ 

to  pursue. 


enter  (direct  object  not  admissible),  also  with 


a :_ 

3  tsAwiOS  '^>3^*  to  9't‘ve  leave  of  absence  to. 

3  (or  3  Ni^vsrt'i  at  a  standstill  for  (also  with  {S03). 

3  2^06.  to  take  revenge  for  (with  of  the  person). 


"A  I  was  tired  of  saying. 
l^AXSs  to  divide  mto  two  paits. 

^  JbijUCa  to  need  (must  have  ^), 

^  (U.  only)  to  ride  on. 


184 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  ask  (a  thing) 

of... 

K.)  cautious  of. 

to  fear  (as  O.S. 

and  so  also  (^o^eojaaL  airo, 
Lu.  xii.  4). 

to  thank.  { 

m'i  ,  ! 

^  to  he  angry  witJr 

*  .  1 
^  3^131^  to  ask  (a  question)  of.  \ 

I 

,  I 

to  long  for. 

'  I* 

to  fill . .  .luith  (also  with¬ 
out  ^»). 

^  lisilap  to  thank  (rare),  to  pro- 
sper  tr.  (in  the  latter  sense  j 
usually  without  ^).  \ 


: — 

0 

joa  h  to  cast  up  against. 
bJlp  wt3b3  to  aim  a  gun 


at. 


'i'ebellious  against. 

U.  to  oppress. 

to  look  at  (also  direct 
object). 


[§71 


thanks  to. 

(or  yah  K.)  to  com- 

(•  l»  ^  l»  ' 

mand. 

displeased  with. 

(K.  always,  and 
U.  sometimes,  without  ^). 

uaaf  3^3^  to  trust  in. 

\  ■  '  ■  i»  " 

*  ^  7 

^  to  pass  by,  cross,  trans¬ 

gress,  or  to  enter  by  (a  certain 
way). 

^  l(>  fiidsh  tr.,  have  done 

with. 

^  Ufa  satisfied  with,  content  with, 

assenting  to.  See  above. 

^  1  to  cower  before,  run 

>  away  from,  be  de- 

^3^  j  feated  by. 


to  stand  to,  to  stand  out 

for. 

to  look  upon,  look  at. 
to  strike  (also  direct 

object). 

Aia  to  cause  loss  to. 

•  •  .* 

to  murmur  against. 


S  71,  72] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


185 


to  pay  atte7ition 
to,  set  one’s  face  toiuards. 

^^sbo  to  add  to. 

0  •  II  / 

(popQxi)  K.  Al.  to 
testify  to. 

\L  Jbxsi  to  need. 

*  4f 

to  expect, 
to  transgress. 

0  4$  ty 

:a^  :— 

A*1  to  go  out  to  meet  (a 
person  arriving  on  a  journey). 

to  heat  hack,  parry. 


SL  Sajo  to  complain  against 
or  about  (a  thing  or  person). 

to  suspect  (a  thing). 
to  hear,  in  U.  Also 

0  44 

direct  object. 

to  conquer, 
to  adhere  to,  U.  (K. 
with  ^). 


%i)  susceptible  to. 

*  /  <• 

Z.  to  go  before. 

^3^  io  undertake. 


In  many  cases  where  in  English  a  verb  is  used  with  an  adverb  or 
preposition,  a  single  word  is  used  in  Syriac,  as  to  go  or  come 

down,  to  go  in,  come  in,  pass  by,  to  go  up,  come  up, 

{  ^ 

to  put  away,  to  go  out,  and  so  on. 


§  72.  CONJUNCTIONS. 

iy^l 

i  • 

if,  not  common,  U.  Ti.,  Pers. 

^6l  U.  K.  or  K.  as  O.S.  both,  §  67,  followed  by  o  or  i^o2o 

f  t  ^  / 

^2  (as  O.S.)  or  y  ^2  as,  according  as.  Also  ^ly  {dekh)  Al. 

0 

in  order  that. 


S.  GR. 


24 


186 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§72 


N,??  fe?  V- 

s  ;:aa  =  ?  below.  So  D  XjK  ^  5^?  as  often  as 

/a  ^  ^ 

(cf.  3  as  great  as). 

a  =  O.S.  ufisil,  §  67,  whe7i,  or  Ti. 

hut,  yet,  perh.  =  or  (Nold.  §  24.)  For  its  re¬ 

dundant  use  see  §  60. 

1^2  hict,  O.S.  =  dWd  ?  or  2^  2,  Nold.  O.S.G.  ^  155. 

♦.,2  132  unless. 

O.S.  ^7(see  ^). 
unless  (see  ^). 

^2  U.  K.,  O.S.  although,  =  Often  answered  by 

although... yet,^Q0.  Very  rarely  i^o2. 
nevertheless. 

D  \Jjp  in  that,  because.  O.S.  =  N.S.  ud^3  f?? 

Ae  saw ;  see  §  68,  s.v.  isoo, 

A?  yet  (not  common). 

p  3^  or  p  D^Sa  as  O.S.  (§  68)  a/fer  or  with  ^  prefixed. 

In  Al.  D  Disa  §  13. 

p  that,  also  in  order  that,  O.S.  (In  O.S.  also  because,  when 
standing  alone  ;  but  not  in  N.S.) 

a  ua2a  as,  much  used  in  similes:  as  cu  ua2a 

B  0  •  m  ^  0  it  m  0  m  m 

2f  tJ^2  l^pol  :  As  Joseph  was  sold,  so  was  our  Lord. 

**  '  * 

For  variations  see  §  67.  Also  so  that,  and  in  order  that, 
lest,  U.,  O.S.  or  Al.  (=  ^  ^p  ?) 

a  ^p6l  or  p  ip^  so  that,  §  67. 


72] 


CONJUNCTIONS, 


187 


3  Sm  until,  §  68  ;  also  before,  iss  he  will 

come  before  I  do  it. 

ysai...'p6l  both... and  (without  o),  Pers.,  §  67. 

O  O.S.  and. 


p  ufOAA  Tkh.  or  Ti.  would  that. 

let,  (imp.  of  O.S.  to  suffer),  §  51  (10). 

?  U.  would  that. 

Q.  K.  or  p  K  Al.  in  order  that.  But  p  alone  is  more 

common.  See  D  Va. 

*  _ 

)j6m0u  or  U.,  Turk. 

^  or,  perh.  =  O.S.  which  in  K.  is  used  as  an  alternative. 
(In  some  parts  of  K.  is  not  used.)  Thus 

K.  either  Thomas  or  Moses  (U.  ^...^),  6.3  K.  will 

he  come  or  not  ?  ^  sometimes  means  at  any  rate ;  thus  : 

:ojS  ^^2  ^  perhaps  she  did  not  come;  at  any 
rate  I  did  not  see  her. 

whether... or,  not  common. 
pik  as  O.S.  or  Al.  (in  U.  ?=^)  tuhen,  while. 


Al.  would  that. 

a  lo^ioa  because,  Turk.,  also  without  s. 

•  I  ■ 

p  O.S.  as  much  as,  whenever,  just  as,  in  so  far  as.  So 

2Sof  more  I  saw  her,  the  more...,  or 

without  2?o»  as  O.S. ;  also  answered  by  Ipoi  pji^,  3 

or  ?  ^  =  as  long  as,  p  =  as  quickly  as,  and  so  with 

many  adjectives  and  adverbs. 


188 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  "^2 


D  }oai  ^  lest,  =  p  lo^ 

*  **  *  ** 

because. 

^9^  Turk,  or  ^  U.  hut 

(i^)  U.  Ti.  unless,  Pers.  (also  with  p). 

p  since  (also  pip  ;  or  than,  see  §  24. 

3  SkixSQ  because,  or  'sq  A1.  Also  without  d. 

p  although,  not  common  ;  or  or  p  jijQ)  Nold.  §  93. 

p  U.  Sal,  often  pron.  qat,  in  ordey'  that,  also  in  Sal.  the 
simple  that 

p  or  or  p  before  that 

p  Jlio^  =  ^Om  above  (also  without  p).  In  Al.  Ti.  poX.  Also 
although,  except 

S  ^Siis  U.  would  that. 

•  * 

Notes.  (1)  Conjunctions  are  frequently  omitted.  Thus 

o6^  to  and  fro,  K.  tiuo  or  three  days, 

I  'must  go,  lisl  ^  it  was  not  for 

this  I  came,  when  I  come,  two  and  a  half, 

of:^  is^  U.  an  hour  and  a  half  (in  K.  isi<JO  §  27) : 

the  Scribes  and  Pharisees,  uoii  Norway  and 

Sweden,  and  so  on.  So  we  may  write  either  jixko  or  for 

etcetera  (usually  shortened  to  iaco  or  ix).  This  is  more  used  than 

in  English  and  often  ends  each  paragraph  of  a  letter. 

(2)  o  is  often  inserted  where  it  would  be  out  of  place  in  Eng¬ 
lish.  Thus  007  iHo  lorn  uAoi33  o*  ufD  jsoa  (jua) 

1  These  forms  have  not  been  verified  orally. 


i§  ^2,  73] 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


189 


I  would  rather  my  son  died  than  he.  So  O.S.  Rev.  ix,  20 
OSSis  and  the  rest  of  the  men... did  not  repent.  On  the 

other  hand  a  common  colloquialism  is  milD  Simon  and  they, 

for  uilo 

t  \  •• 

(3)  When  a  conjunction  joins  two  nouns  governed  by  the  same 
preposition,  the  latter  is  usually  repeated.  /JiLs 

the  house  of  Moses  and  Pira. 


73.  INTERJECTIONS. 

\m  m  ti  Ji  / 


why,  pretty  luell,  rare. 

0)2  Oh! 

o2  0  (vocative),  pron.  long  in  K. 

(common),  short  in  U.  (rare) ; 
or  alas  I  (long)  O.S. 

OAls  o2  K.  0  my  father  ! 

1  / 

u*o2,  wkA02  alas ! 

u.m02  hurrah !  rare. 

/ 

wm2  K.  0  my  father ! 

UI.O  wmI  A1.  or  wm2  K. 

,  m  •  t 

0  my  mother ! 
well !  to  he  sure,  Arab. 

## 

iiL.1  Well  I  (begins  a  sentence). 

I* 

0 

0,  vocative,  rare. 

0^2  wonderful !  rare. 


^  0 

hallo  there !  rare. 

uib*2  alas  I  rare. 

/ 

usually)  or 

Sal.  or  'a2  K.  or  ^^2  Ti.  bravo! 
j;2  hush!  not  common. 

tt 

t  X  ^ 

u5dbp  by  the 

habit  of  Mar  Shiniun  [when 
addressed  to  the  Catholicos 

j^0ubA.9OQ>l3  also 

j^aXM],an  asseveration  much 
used  in  K. 

0?a  Pers.  bravo,  rare. 

wdi3  I  believe,  see  ^  68 

,  $0  m  ^ 

S.V.  fiSQ3. 

I 

Aa  U.  As  Ti.,  Pers.  yes. 

0  0  *  ^ 


I 


190 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


here  I  an  (polite  answer 
when  one  is  called). 

U.  lit.  then  how  ^  a 
strong  assertion  in  reply  to  a 
negation.  Or  )^2p  Ti. 

your  pleasure!  §  75. 


Ti.  Sh.)  bravo ! 
Ti.=  French  mon  Dieu  I 

^  *  f  9 

AJk,K.^  Al.  Sh.  alas  I  §  75. 

Ti.  bravo ! 
bravo ! 

ih  almost  = 

or  :?  he  off  I  esp.  K.  In  Sal. 

much  used  before  an  impera¬ 
tive  to  strengthen  it. 

if 

ibo2D  K.  /  mean,  used  to  cor- 
rect  a  statement  previously 
made.  Thus  obi  cnSu, 

i'  * 

?;i.A2.  Ans. 

XiOS  Who  is  that 

man?  Ans.  George — no  I 
mean  David. 

ail  bti033  (d4q-ah)  or  o)2 
catch  hold  I 

;or  behold!  often  used  at  the  end 
of  a  sentence  to  call  attention, 
as  IM  I  have  put 

on  the  eggs  (to  boil);  and  often 


when  the  assertion  is  likely  to 
be  disputed.  Also  before  a 

word  emphasized,  cf.  ^ 

and  ^c^  =  S  §§  68,  69. 

So  also  in  O.S.  (Uhlemann, 

§  86). 

Joy  (Zlama  has  either  sound)  or 

llQl  K.  yes,  (=  lAl  l6l  ?)  or 
{ 

ibal  Z.  (=  l^oal  ?)•  See 

catch  hold!  (=  O.S.  UorJor 
behold  this). 

hidlo ! 

oal  0 ! 


nonsense!  not  common. 

4^ 

;aor  Ti.  hold  on  !  luait ! 

4^ 


push  on ! 

2x101  U.  or  2w*07  U.  Tkh.  what 

’  If  II 

do  you  call  it?  (pronounce both 
Nuns). 

wonderful !  very  common. 


uib  O.S.  (tuei)  woe !  or  ^6  AL,  O.S 
bddi  ^  yib  K.  0  my  father ! 
bub  ub  K.  0  my  mother ! 
0^0  Al.  lo !  §  29  (17). 

^?oor  Ti.  out  of  the  way  ! 
U.  out  of  the  way! 


73] 


INTERJECTIONS. 


191 


true !  (sc. 

is  true)  so  a\ySJ^  ivhat 

N.  says  is  true. 

your  health,  so 

etc.  or  ;3o.-  N.'s  health. 

mOum  tush!  rare. 


jQSiyy,  uJt.bO  Or  0Q3I.m 

t  '  0  >> 

God  forbid!  so  the 
other  affixes,  §  63  (7). 

^  U.  J.  Al.  0  (vocative),  common. 


yes.  This  is  used  to  deny  a 

negative  statement,  or  to  an¬ 
swer  an  objection,  and  always 

means  you  are  wrong : 

i’ 

means  you  are  right, 
ilisao  }*  heyday! 
ap  ^V.alas!  mon  Dieu !  Arab. 
oiUA  Kurd,  bravo !  esp.  K. 

Turk,  as  you  please,  lit. 
your  pleasure.  So  with  other 
affixes,  or  a  name,  . . .  p 
^  no,  O.S. 

Jloor  or  1*^0^  God  forbid  ! 


J*pQbO  or  ^ii  Ti.  or 

0»  Ti.or  ^lyoiC  or^^pobO 

y^abo  what  do  I 

know  ?  hoiu  can  I  tell  ?  So 
the  Hebrew  which  = 

=  Gk.  TL  gaOdv  (Ge- 

senius). 

poor  fellow ! 

T^d/Skbb  Pers.  bravo  ! 

•  #  * 

may  it  be  pleasant  to 
you !  §  46,  s.v. 

Arab.  yes. 


^JSQOSQ  hush  !  Turk.,  rare. 

K.  Sh.  ivell !  =  iu*!. 

'  /I 

oo^  =  ;©,  very  common. 
O^,  pshaw !  pah  ! 
Jio^y  be  off !  §  46  s.v. 

2mi  K.  alas !  Pers. 

4"^ 

wbO^X 

;<7yis  Tkh.  =  JiioT. 


silence ! 


192 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  74 


§  74.  Position  of  words  in  a  sentence.  Emphasis  and 

Questions. 

(1)  In  the  position  of  words  in  the  sentence  N.S.  very  closely 
resembles  English.  The  subject  with  any  qualifying  words  comes 
first,  then  the  verb,  then  the  direct  object  with  qualifying  words, 
then  the  indirect  object.  But  variations  are  commoner  than  in 
English. 

(2)  Adjectives  used  as  epithets  follow  their  substantives.  For 
exceptions  see  §  23. 

(3)  Numerals  precede  substantives. 

(4)  So  also  demonstrative  pronouns,  and  interrogative  pronouns 
when  used  with  substantives. 

(5)  The  substantive  verb  when  positive  generally  follows  the 

predicate,  as  OOl  that  man  is  righteous.  But  not 

after  interrogative  pronouns,  as  ?  what  is  the  use  ^ : 

nor  with  negatives,  as  it  is  not  good,  and  often  not  with 

demonstrative  pronouns,  especially  when  the  predicate  is  definite,  as 

this  is  your  hook  (here  it  would  not  be  so  usual 

for  the  verb  to  follow):  nor  sometimes  in  relative  clauses,  as  jj[_i2  OOi 
that  man  who  is  there.  The  predicate  is  not  necessarily 

an  adjective  or  substantive,  e.g.  Ja  oat  he  is  without  care. 

If  the  predicate  is  long,  the  substantive  verb  may  come  after  the  first 
part  of  it ;  as  ui^  ui970u3  isoS^  ocrj  that 

is  a  man  about  whom  I  spoke. 

(6)  Emphasis.  Very  commonly  the  emphatic  word  is  put  first, 
and  stands  absolutely,  and  redundant  affixes  are  added  in  the  sen¬ 
tence  which  follows.  This  is  especially  the  case  in  the  imperative 
and  in  questions,  and  applies  in  all  cases  when  attention  is  called  to 
a  particular  word,  whether  it  would  be  in  italics  in  English,  or  not. 

Ex.  ring  the  hell,  lit.  the  hell  ring  it.  So 


74] 


EMPHASIS. 


193 


I  whose  is  this  hook?  (shewing  it). 

?  uOlOo!^^  what  is  in  this  book  ?  (shewing  it).  >A  ^4  U2 

I  have  no  book.  We  could  also  say  \^niO — Jofl 

•*  * 

— 1^2^  6^  ^Sfl  uSObO— ^  isA,  but  these  would 

not  be  so  emphatic.  So  I  for  my  part,  as  for  me,  and  the  like  may¬ 
be  rendered  by  the  simple  pronoun  standing  as  above  (cf.  modern 

Greek  eyw  irpeiret  va  Xd/So)  I  7nust  take),  or  by  JibOJQ>  etc. 

if  they  are  very  emphatic. 

We  must  notice  however  that  a  noun  standing  absolutely  before 
6s^l  he  has,  if  it  is  the  subject  in  English,  is  not  emphatic.  Thus 

isfl  jiil  ob)  =  that  man  has  a  hook,  simply.  We  could 

not  say  jUl  oii^  isfl.  If  the  English  object  of  to  have  is 

emphatic  we  must  put  it  first,  as  I  have  a  hook.  Note 

also  that  the  subject  of  a  preterite  stands  absolutely,  §  32  (4),  but  it 

is  not  necessarily  emphatic.  Thus  A  ^2  /  came,  OOJ 

that  man  came. 

The  subject,  pronoun  or  noun,  may  be  placed  last  for  emphasis, 
as  an  alternative  to  the  above  construction,  or  when  it  cannot  stand 

absolutely.  Thus  ?  isii  A  ^^2  jLb  why  did  you  come?  (not 

the  other  man).  So  even  if  there  are  no  italics  in  English,  but 

the  subject  is  pointed  out :  -{iSm  Jodju  there  stood 

a  woman,  JLU2  ob) 

. , .  upobo  or  . . ,  ubcM  ^2  ob)  all  express  see  what  that 
(I  point  out,  or  I  am  speaking  of)  is  doing. 


man 


(7)  The  object  of  a  verbal  noun  used  as  in  §  57  (3)  usually  pre¬ 
cedes  it. 


(8)  Short  adverbs,  as  jaa  very,  quite,  very,  etc.  generally 

precede  adjectives  and  adverbs ;  those  which  qualify  verbs  usually 
follow  them,  but  there  is  no  exact  rule  as  to  this.  We  must  except 

S.  GR.  25 


/ 


194 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


such  a  phrase  as  he  is  a  very  great  man, 

being  treated  as  one  word,  though  we  might  equally  well 

say  23o\  Jaa  cf. 

a  thing  it  is  ! 


(9)  Questions  take  the  same  order  as  affirmative  sentences,  and 
often  can  only  be  distinguished  from  them  by  the  inflection  of  the 
voice.  But  interrogative  pronouns,  with  or  without  a  noun  or 
preposition,  and  interrogative  adverbs  are  placed  first,  unless  an 
emphatic  word  stands  absolutely  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause,  as 
described  above.  This  absolute  construction  is  especially  common 

with  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs :  as 
?  MiOu  whose  sons  are  we  Christians  ? 

0  • 


(10)  After  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs  the  subject  often 
follows  the  verb,  e.g.  ?  ^2  u^obo  what  did  those  men 

say?  But  not,  of  course,  if  the  pronoun  itself  be  the  subject.  In 
the  same  case  the  copula  follows  the  pronoun  or  adverb.  We  can¬ 
not  say  u30b0  tvhat  is  salvation  ?  but 

or  ^  of^ 

I*  »  • 


(11)  Indirect  questions  follow  the  same  lines;  S  often  redund¬ 
antly  introduces  them,  as  ^^0!30  oq^odbO 

ioo]  he  ashed  what  I  was  doing  in  his  affair.  But  the  oratio 

directa  is  often  substituted,  §  66. 

(12)  In  questions  the  Syrians  use  ^  ^  K.)  or  not, 

very  much  more  than  Europeans  do.  will  you  go 

or  not?  is  not  meant  to  be  rude  or  peremptory  though  at  first  sight 
it  often  appears  to  be  so. 


75] 


PHRASES. 


195 


or  as  a 


§  75.  IDIOMATIC  PHRASES  AND  SALUTATIONS. 

[See  also  §§  71,  73.] 

j.3  ;<7rl  (or  this  will  do. 

•'  * 

to  prosper,  intr. 

^3ol3  ^f2  hear  with. 

3  l^OiSaoijoS  Sfi  U.  (or  U.)  ]  , 

'  '  ‘  o  V  -  /  I  to  go  to  meet  (a  person 

3  j  arriving  from  a  journey). 

;aa5  Ajl  U.  to  go  on  horseback. 

23xA  A.2  to  take  a  walk. 

*■  "  *. 

231!^  vSfl  to  go  on  foot. 

U.  TT^7^  have  time  ^  [Only  as  a  question, 
negative  :  jloof  ^ 

feiJS.  oV.  ,^o>*2  U.  may  you  he  friendless !  [Socin]. 

3  2:^  CO  ^2  or  3  0^13^3  ^a2  he  intends  to .. . 

*  '  It  '  jt  /  •  '  t  n  •  » 

}'^6^24  0^  iSA2  K.)  he  is  a  hypocrite. 

»  A  ^  ■ 

U.  (or  ;33C^  K.  or  K.)  i5o  threaten. 

^32  (or  ;ai^  or  isioif)  ifo  take  trouble. 

23^  ^32  ^0  receive  a  pension. 

^0  eai  0/165  words. 

JfOf  ^0  embezzle  money. 

break  a  fast  (by  eating  animal  food). 

Lc^::^  \32  to  be  bastinadoed. 

’  I  /  <# 

** 


196 


GRAMMAR  OF.  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§ 


see  §  16  (so  ^h. 

isixi  Aal  to  take  bribes. 

/II  II 

requiescat  in  j^ace. 

isoouti  God  strengthen  yon!  (said  to  a  man 

working  in  a  field). 

^  }^J^2  God  forbid! 

f^cS  God  mcrease  you !  (said  by  a  guest  to  a  host). 

^Q»»  ;oAi  (or  ^^aoi»)  Goodbye  (said  to  one  departing). 
iSi^^  }iy  isii  it  is  your  affair  (so  all  persons). 

early  morning. 

uj!^  070^2  (also  simply  she  is  2)7'egnant. 

ojlSkA  >ia  he  is  constipated. 

an.  uOlQ^kiji  his  bowels  are  working. 

iiooi  uCno^iJji  may  his  foot  be  blessed  [said  in  U.  of  a 
new-born  child,  in  K.  of  a  stranger  arriving  just  after  a  birth.  In 
K.  they  say  ;^i3  ;ooi  of  a  new-born  male  child]. 

yiCIO^bdi  his  diarrhoea  is  cured. 

*  m  9  t  9 

w*0lo^.bi  he  died. 

uOlolSkibi  an  5*^*  foot  was  blistered. 

ojA  ojA  ;^2  he  pitied  them. 

sA  x^i  I  am  coming  [said  by  a  man  at  a  distance  when  called]. 


^  displeased;  unwell. 

UOQl  ly  ^njbl  in  that  way  it  is  possible. 


§75] 


PHRASES. 


197 


ill  K.  my  house  is  destroyed  [said  by  a  man  on 

receiving  bad  news.  The  stands  absolutely]. 

1  have  come  on  a  visit  of  friendship)  only  (not  busi¬ 
ness).  Also  the  reply  to  oQ>Oo2  and  then  =  nothing. 

^  he  is  tired  out. 

I*  * 

'  ’  (  Welcome  (the  answer  to 

\Lsa  or  1^0^  ;i.i3  (^oaoik)  the  first 


'  two  are  said  by  a  host  to 


his  guests.  The  other  per¬ 
sons  are  also  used). 

K.  will  you  have  time  ? 

\^mo6Sk6si  he  will  not  listen  to  reason. 

OjV*  ^9^  wOIOO^  he  has  bad  diarrhoea. 

ai^  «71x<A,  K.  he  was  pleased  with  himself. 

ill  K.  I  ain  a  black  owl  (said  by  a  woman  on  hear¬ 

ing  bad  news). 

box  one  ivhose  hospitality  none  will  accept. 

2^2  to  cease  to  support. 

to  sign  (a  deed,  etc.). 

to  take  trouble. 

or  SooyJb  U.  (^o,bSti  K.)  to  mount  guard. 

(or  to  step  aside,  keep  out  of. 

a  2^2  ^0  put  up  with. 


198 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  contract  a  disease. 

it  took 

*' 

three  hours]. 

«nM*  to  be  zealous. 

to  draw,  to  take  a  photograph. 

to  smoke  tobacco  (so  all  words  for  pipes).  In  K.  Z. 
is  used  for  all  kinds  of  smoking. 


3  23u2  wtSdd  to  help. 

to  do  line  bu  line. 

i77^  ••  • 

y.36c}  wfiba  to  hire. 

t  n  ••  • 

to  make  excuses,  find  an  excuse  (for  fighting,  etc.). 

0  ^  ^ 

D  to  protect,  side  with. 

wrestle  [in  K.  simply 
wtiba  to  measure. 

It  "  ■ 

to  make  an  excuse, 
to  read  from  the  beginning. 

\  M  Jbah  to  bet. 

to  take  one’s  turn. 

;M3oa  JOifh  to  take  turns. 

*' 

to  pay  attention. 

^  ^  c/ 

wti;33  to  cast  up  against,  §  71. 
to  supplant. 

?  to  restrain. 


75] 


PHRASES. 


199 


D  a]6so^^  (?  K.)  to  he  in  the  way  of. 

f  i 

3  233^  wtiS3  K.  to  do  honour  to. 

a  m  0  99  m 

^oo'ijk  wCsbp  U.  (A^ail  K.)  to  mount  guai'd. 

3  )-Cb3  to  fill  the  place  of. 

Ai  wOS?  ^0  a^??^  a  gun  at,  §  71. 

671^  ^303  there  is  no  room. 

t  0  • 

0]lJk*  yi(770iS303 

•  0  0  • 

07^  ^070X^^030  yi010iS303 

•  0  It  I  !  0  * 

oiSa  ^Cu3b0  u01ois303  he  is  missed. 
op  yM^O3b0  0^3  he  heaved  with  emotion. 

^  9*0  \* 

^  / 

ly^isp  u07p393  OTie  w/io  though  handsome  does  not  please. 
jsbObJM  Goodbye  (rare). 

^  23^2  233  ^0  begin. 

%•  0  f  9  ^ 

233  to  slander. 

2^2  3^  233  to  lay  by  the  heels. 

^  3^ .  233  to  delay,  connive  at. 

u.  K.)  to  imprison. 

233  to  cast  a  net. 

f  ■ 

233  to  subscribe  money  to. 


it  serves  him  right. 


f.  m  A*  .  »  ^ 


233  to  startle. 

n  J  • 


233  to  make  a  moat. 

■  /  f  • 

233  to  see  off,  start  (a  person  on  the  road). 
to  importune. 


200  .  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  75 

to  give  battle, 
to  cry  out. 
lo  '^ock. 

{  Vi*  ,»  • 

}fl  (or  ia>«)  2m  to  salute,  send  greetings. 

to  shoot. 

looi  may  it  he  blessed  (said  by  a  friend  to  another  of  any¬ 
thing  new  belonging  to  the  latter). 

2^  \^cn<^o6l  he  does  not  understand. 

(or  May  I  be  your  sacrifice !  (expres¬ 

sion  of  politeness  to  a  superior  on  presenting  a  petition,  etc.). 
iso^  thank  you  (so  all  persons). 


9 Of  he  is  exaggerating. 

03f  (also  d^Lia  03f  K.)  mind. 

;^2^o  }sodUi  Tkh.  a  cheek  (=  2^^). 

2S03C  to  injure  a  plan,  intrigue. 

oSk^  to  interfere  in  the  matter. 

XJ.  Tkh. :  2^000  Tkh.  twilight,  evening. 

01^  ubkSibO  ^  that  is  a  different  matter. 

'  t  g  m  $t  •  ^  ^ 

XMt  almost  =  I  cannot  exactly  describe  it  or  him. 
a  quarrel  has  arisen. 

K.  blue  on  my  head !  (said  by  a  woman  on  hearing 

bad  news). 

07^  1^JS>  (also  07S  2akA>obo)  his  face  fell. 


75] 


PHRASES. 


201 


2^2  2^  u-aXOm  I  was  home  sich,  discontented. 

•'  ,*  '  ' 

oi^  U.^  May  I  see  you  rolling  in 

blood ! 

ilisl  llb  U.^  Bad  luck  to  you ! 

U.^  May  you  not  get  what  you  ivish  ! 

U.^  May  you  never  see 

the  khena  of  your  wedding  !  [khena,  a  dye\ 

to  please,  tr. 

?  uOOOI  K.)  have  you  any  husmess  for  me  ?  [said  by 

a  visitor  before  taking  leave,  see  j^oXobOUOp]. 

to  strive. 

^JCdubp  2S^  a  trestle. 

2^2  K.  my  hack  is  broken  (said  by  a  man  on  hear  ¬ 

ing  bad  news). 

^aua^M  I  do  not  feel  well. 

(or  or  ^3^)  twilight,  evening. 

to  say  goodbye,  as  an  inferior  to  a  superior. 
«<7)0^,kO  Ai  ^  (or  At^)  to  avow,  take  the  responsibility  of. 

I  was  tired. 


I  understand  (said  on  receiving  information). 
to  sell  for  money. 

^ojl  to  let  out  (on  hire). 

1  These  four  curses  are  from  Socin. 

S.  GR.  26 


202 


(GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACUI-AR  SYRIAC. 


75 


to  co7nfort,  give  heart  to,  encourage. 

(or  u.aD)  to  advise. 

JOLXJi  Sisatk  to  drill. 

/  ##  * 

isos  ;ftvo?oj®  A.30>  (or  a)  U.  «o  iesfe/i/  to,  §  71. 

to  support,  take  the  side  of. 

D  give  leave  of  absence  io,  §  71. 

(or  JJb)  to  salute  (face  to  face). 
to  comfo7± 

^  »•  ^  ^  ^  1 

to  lea^^n  fluentUj. 

he  is  a  slow  coach  (a  man,  horse,  etc.). 
long  life  to  you  ! 

D  to  succeed,  tr. 

:oo«>  Ai.  K.  to 


9  ;2o^  ;o  or  p  loot  ^  pe^diaps,  it  is  possible  that. 

o^iL  you  are  angry  with  me. 

yiC7]0^oii;-3  to  stand  onds  ground ;  or  to  stop  short, 

y.a70k3U  AA.  to  stick  to  Okie’s  word,  esp.  in  bargaining 

[iSairfi,  a  word,  often  =  the  price  asked  for  a  thing]. 

to  split  haws. 

how  much  did  he  charge 
^T?^?  good. 

Cl^  aUbOA  he  died  where  he  stood. 

I  '»  «v» 


75] 


PHRASES. 


203 


unwashed  spoon  (one  who  interrupts  a 

conversation). 

to  copy  (from  a  book,  etc.). 

^oal  ^  U.  or  ^  U.  or  jlia  ^  (rare)  or  ^  Al. 

I*  •*  •'  •' 

it  is  impossible  [contrast  JaOO/  ^  =  God  fo7'hid,  §  73.] 

/  Ml  V  your  own  husmess. 

,1  ^  ci7n  7iot  speaking  to  you. 

?  ;A:aj  A  For  shame ! 

4$  ,t 

^AOuibb  ^  I  cannot  fi7id  it,  or  it  is  7iot  m  sight. 

Soj  l\i!0  ^  I  can7iot  conceive. 

,00  cs  ,* 

yiO)Ou3  M.bb  ^  I  ca7inot  stand  hwi. 

•  *  \St* 

vA  2'^  2^  or  mi.  A  I  cannot  afford  to... 

0  '  *•  I*  ^ 

A  A  Ti.  Al.  /  have  7iot  thne. 

oAj  A  A  I  have  710  chance  against  him. 

the  heaH  is  heating. 

oA.  ;Ii*asc3  uOlof&S  he  has  a  stomach  ache ;  or,  metaphorically, 
he  is  unwilling  to  do  it. 

laObM  unmanly. 

uOIOd^  he  is  sad,  homesick. 

yJtiu  ucnooS  he  pitied. 

o{^  ucnod^  he  will  not  allow  it  to  he  done. 

uOOoS  (hard  Kap)  an  Gnpetuous  ma7i. 
uOiaiS  he  was  m  an  ecstasy. 

^  uCrjOdtS  he  was  7iot  hea7'ty  with,  he  luas  displeased 

with. 


204 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


^ere  in 


this. 


he  was  much  frightened, 
aj^  yiCTjai^  he  was  pleased. 

uoiocw  U.  merciless. 

/  /  ** 

to  doubt. 

V "  " 

he  cannot  interfe 
236u  OlS  isA  he  has  not  heard  (news). 

;<7t2?  ^  jSm  ojS  jsA  it  is  not  his  business.  [So :  ^ofl2 

^  ^  Jo <7/  A  ^  ^^;ro^e 

suspending  the  priest  from  the  parish.'] 

^OaPJ  '^^ek,  or  this  time  to-morrow. 

?  jaWaabO  to  condole  with  (after  a  death),  to  pay  a  visit 
of  condolence  to. 

to  charniy  please. 

^kaalL^O  ^OX*  ;Mia  or  ;is3  etc.)  to  congratulate  on  re¬ 
ceiving  a  present,  buying  a  vineyard,  building  a  new  house,  etc. 

O  232^  ^  day. 

a  house-warming  (see  above). 

»' 

^0  speak  deliberately. 

^0  smile. 

U.  ^0  take  away  (at  table). 

0  J^So2  Aiy  U.  to  expect. 

uOio^Abi  \L  U.  to  be  humble  (cf.  Proverb  23). 

<71^  (or  Ol’^)  U.  or  I 

or  dp  2^  1^330 


§75] 


PHRASES. 


205 


?  Cl^  DObO  0  clock  is  it  ^ 

?  9Ob0  Jinic?  your  own  business. 

3  ^aJjb  buflab  outbid. 

/L^Ltii  to  be  a  traveller,  to  travel. 

I* 

to  gather  (a  dress). 

^0  (the  thing  printed  is  the  direct  object,  §  64). 

*  •* 

to  cast  the  evil  eye  on. 

I* 

to  entangle. 

;asa  ^0  kneel. 

t' 

to  backbite. 

^9\  V"  ^0  hit  out. 

)zioV  to  dive. 

Lm^O  ^0 

T-; 

''  m  '  i 

;ss3:?  ^0  resolve. 

^0  wound  (direct  object). 

3  J:i(7733  ^0  accuse. 

•  t  !■ 

\iy  Ji^bb  ifo  pam^  (a  door,  etc.). 

*"  •' 

to  sign  (a  paper);  to  cheat  in  weighing. 

«* 

^0  t/o-w  a  t7'umpet ;  or,  metaphorically,  to  waste  oiids 
by'eath.  [;-»  is  used  with  all  musical  instruments.] 

A., to  slide  (as  boys  at  play).  .  ' 

•'  •' 

Va  3-4  (or  ^)  to  injure  (of  a  personal  agent). 

A® 


20G 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  make  an  effort. 

to  cause  loss  to. 

»i3  to  take  ref  uge  in. 

to  assemble. 

••  •  ,* 

U.  to  make  an  effort,  strive. 

JlAj  to  slap. 

•* 

to  make  a  fence, 
to  he  angry. 

^3^  Ux  (or  ;s'^)  to  plough. 

(hard  final  Kap)  to  snap  the  fingers. 

;M-i3  to  he  appalled  (by  bad  news).  [Striking  the  knees 

is  a  common  action  on  hearing  bad  news.] 


*  ^  ' 

•  i  # 


to  put  on  a  bridle. 

to  throw  m  one's  face,  recriminate. 

*  '  •* 

to  undermine  (direct  object). 
to  reap  well. 

3070^  ^0  (direct  object). 


to  spur  (direct  object). 

*  •* 

(^bo  =  checkmate)  to  die. 

•* 

^0  make  a  mark  or  note, 
to  shoe  (horses,  etc. ;  direct  object). 

•  »* 

A^i  jAo  to  fall  ill  a  second  time. 

I* 

to  paint  (as  an  artist). 


75] 


PHRASES. 


207 


to  starch, 
to  soap. 

}0uaA>  to  swim. 
pofd  jL^bO  ^0  mint,  coin. 
aobOJO  JLJM  to  play  the  organ. 

?  ;44  ^0  intercede  for. 

•* 

(^)  ^0  engraft  (direct  object). 

I* 

to  inform  against. 

»* 

K.  ^0  fillip,  or  to  snap  the  fingers. 

•* 

K.  to  sign  (a  letter). 

jrii  I* 

to  fell  with  an  axe  (with  direct  object  of  thing  felled). 

i' 

(see  AAi  ^). 

^iia  iJo  to  hit  on  the  top  of  the  head. 

to  besiege  (direct  object). 

■  •’  r 

to  plane  (direct  object)  =  Ji^a 

U^s  (in  K.  .xada)  to  kick  out. 

•* 

^0  imprint,  take  an  impression 

•* 

^0  (direct  object). 

**  •* 

^0  fiatter. 

^0  (a  picture). 

^  m  ^  • 

bC  iMkbO  ^0  vaccinate. 

M  ’  i 


K. 


208 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


0  ^ 

Jm^sO  to  he  ironical. 

to  measure  (a  field). 
[See  also  j4: 


and  §  63  (2).] 


^  \.0^*MtsO  (cf.  forgive  me  =  goodbye. 

to  froivn. 

3  liiX  to  calumniate. 

■  ’  I#  •  tt  * 

?  jM*  to  he  received  hy.  [Also  :  he  laid  hold  of  {the  hook) 

;y8  (;3^).] 

OJ^  JV«  to  he  driven  to  extremities. 

*  mm 

1^1?  }f^  dexterity, 
lisl^y  modesty. 

^2  /^SiAMibo  K.  /  am  struck  blue  (said  by  a  woman  on  hear¬ 

ing  bad  news). 

Cl^OtjUQ)  \iy  K.  sorrow  on  him ! 

.1  •  '  ' 

?  ^0  ^0  shame,  convict. 

SSyy^so  to  pout, 
y  lisl^  ciL  to  insult. 

m  m  ^  •N 

ihS  isyyi^  to  tickle  the  fancy. 

to  load  a  gun. 

9  2:^  to  displease. 

^  K.  from  the  bounty  of  God  and  of 
your  head  (an  expression  of  gratitude).  So,  thanks  to  N., 

#»  ■ 

^3  U.  K. 


75] 


PHRASES. 


209 


(or  oi^S4D)  K.  of  necessity. 

I  am  speaking  to  yon,  I  leant  to  speak  to  you  (used 
to  call  a  person’s  attention). 

2^0^  K.  or  2^0g 

to  rival,  envy. 


]1aX3  K.  to  take  leave  of  one  remaining :  see  jLia  JEO^. 

^0  take  hack  a  promise,  prevaricate. 
yA^  to  open  the  bowels, 
to  acquit. 

laojiA  to  detect,  bring  to  light. 

.^ouoL  Ay^aa  to  juggle. 

io  the  peace. 

^0  suffer. 

''A.  '' 

p  Jl^2S  ^jpflbo  to  disappoint. 

p  }^2S  }OktlM  ^0  importune.  (So  :  importunity  =  ]i^2Sp 

p  )Z3Lt^  ^0  defend. 

to  pout. 

to  be  long  suffering. 

p  fo  rma?zcZ  (as  a  judge). 

(^)  2x2  to  give  up,  give  in,  renounce. 

2x2  JEVtSb  to  beckon. 

I*  t  \7»  ' 

2SdX  ^  to  break  ground,  begin  at  the  beginning. 


s.  GR. 


27 


210 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


...3  to  intend  to..., 

•  ^  I*  •  II  ^ 

to  comiKire  one  thing  with  another. 
s/ie?w  (a  matter). 

9  ^  7?iaA;e  responsible  for  the  matter. 

(see 

ff^OiS’f^oS  laCTIOA  Light  to  your  dead, !  (said  for  on 

Good  Friday  and  Easter  Even). 

(see  Jior  §  46)  said  to  a  person  about  to  drink  or  to 
eat  after  drinking  :  the  answer  to  ^^odfOM  §  73. 

to  start  (on  a  journey). 

?  (or  D  I^^Ia)  to  happen  to.  [So  :  He  laid  hold  of 

He  understood  =  ^aioJC3u!3  Tr  (or 

^  /  I*  ^  ^  ^ 

uon  010^3  or  'O?!^).] 

oik  bedridden. 

m  0  M  0 

}a^23  opui  ^  0)adUQ}  he  is  homesick. 
o^  ojaate  he  is  pleased,  content :  he  feels  at  home. 

)i^.X3  l&OJO  the  horse  is  hardened  (to  heat,  cold,  etc.). 
6^  the  watch  stopped, 

lo^  ifSJi  (sic)  = 

TFAa^  o'clock  is  it  ? 

j!^a>3  JaOO/  your  journey  be  blessed  !  (said  after, 

not  before,  a  journey). 


§75] 


PHRASES. 


211 


loai  3Iaij  your  feast  he  blessed!  (esp.  at  Christmas 

and  Easter). 

2o2  3^^  to  celebrate  the  Eucharist. 

!■  •• 

to  negotiate  a  cheque, 
to  condemn. 

Cl  §  to  sin  against. 

to  law  before  the  heathen  = 

0?^]. 

ySO  ^or  3aL  ^  71,  to  t7'ust  in. 

aaS.  (or  '^OOj)  fo  attack. 

♦«?  to  take  pleasure  in. 

ih  aSf  g^aL  (or  y^)  to  injure  (of  an  impersonal  agent). 

(or  to  benefit,  treat  well. 

yS  to  pity. 


2al^  3ya^  (or  bj3)  to  deceive  (rare  in  U.). 

^  ^1“  *  ^  \  / 

^  ^  •'J  ^ 

Xfi>M3oao  ,aa^  to  dismiss  (in  peace),  let  go. 
tssoo]Oi30  aa^  to  6^  hospitable. 

to  reign. 

^  3yaa>  (or  u>^3)  to  take  counsel  or  qive  advice. 

Jdxfio  aaL  to  intr. 


/ 


0  tm  It 


aaa<  to  wheedle,  coquet. 

isioJQ  aai>y  (=  ^9^  or  Al.)  to  circumcise. 

^  oX  30JQ>  aaiy  to  banish. 

^  ,  ,.  M 


212 


GKAMMAll  OF  VEllNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  travel. 

,m  il 

^  a>5kL  to  petition. 


S  2^2  agAa  to  prosecute ;  appeal  against  or  from. 

aai  to  engraft. 

a^aij  (or  K.)  ^0  prohibit. 

isixJd  a^aiL  backbite. 
isa^Ati  a^iiL  ^0  6^  zealous. 

t  •  f  •• 

ba  a^rxL  to  beat  off. 

«  /  !■  II  ^ 


Mfb  persuade. 

A  aa^  ^0  ^6!  merciful  to. 

^fCs  ^0  weep. 


Tkh.  a  hypocidte. 
a^  '^11,  to  perjure  oneself. 

}L  J^Iaa  ycnoiAi  ^s 

^xaja  uiOnos^^  eyes  shall  not  be  white  (a  curse). 
uCfjosj>^  avaricious. 
yiO?^^  generous. 

6^^  is^  he  saw  me ;  or  he  cast  the  evil  eye  on  me. 

m  arms. 

I  ■  ^ 

wSk^  on  my  eye  be  it  (said  by  a  servant  receiving  a  com¬ 
mand  :  he  puts  his  hand  over  his  eye). 

OT-V'^  2a.^o^  (or  . ,  Ja*isa)  he  is  at  table 

(dinner,  &c.). 


§75]  PHRASES.  21eS 

(see  responsible. 

*^oai  i\6u^:s 

^2  f  or  u^»baat  bear  what  I  have  to  say  (used  to 

call  attention  to  a  subject  about  to  be  introduced). 


h6]  j(2!^  to  remain  as  he  is. 

^ 

;44  /“ce  ^0  /ace. 

^i>t^  ua70^2^  /as  face  fell. 

yiC710JSOl^2^  he  is  fidcjeting. 

the  edge  of  the  swoi'd  (Gk.  aroga  yaa^j^a/pa?). 
a  goodbye  (said  by  a  person  leaving,  see  Icr^l), 

sA“  to  be  acquitted. 

a  ;.^ao;i  (or  'P^)  to  go  to  meet  one  arriving. 

2aoj3^  to  be  brought  to  light. 

^G]0^o6i  ^  mind. 

(or  to  become  bankrupt. 

;^a3  he  made  himself  angry. 
a  2^au2  wb^  §  71,  to  have  done  with  (a  person)- 
Sh  ^  to  tell  a  fortune. 

If 

vOiodS  oA  /ic  -zcorc  /as  heart  on  his  sleeve. 

*  •  t»  ‘jT  t  • 

(=  descend  to  your  heart ! 


214 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  75 


to  oj^pose. 

1^1  at  hand  (of  place). 

nea7'  to  death. 

Ashes  on  mij  head!  (said  by  a  man  on  hearing  bad 

news). 

^OX  to  settle  or  ai^ange  a  inatter. 


j^ois»3yJa  or  'Jb  good  morning. 

oji.  ;^bati  there  is  a  plague  of  locusts. 

3  2^^  lyJb  to  appeal  to  (a  higher  court) — not  colloquial. 
uOlOiiti  (pronounce  b  =  he  is  dead. 
lifsiJk  (or  o;iL  'h)  I  have  caught  cold. 


^O^bO  Jali  (or  uiOjA)  there  ivas  great  bloodshed. 

uOlo^  ^  ui«770^bi  or  u070^2)  I  have  found  out  about 

it  (a  plot),  /  see  it  noiu  (a  difficult  problem). 

it  smells  bad  (meat,  etc.). 

>  *  •'  f 

Um  ,^oxso5  good  night,  good  evening  (said  by  one  leaving). 

wJkuby  JE3  =  uAoby 

»  •  ,«  t  •  • 

^oS  }^2  uiAbw  Jti  or  Z^KZ  JEb  or  or  'ciSi  Z. 

f/  I  f  •  •  ,*  ,  t  m  ji  ^  t  \ 

or  }^2  ^^oaOmZs  Z.  Welcome! 

^  g  0  ^  g 

Jib  the  fi  rst  day  of  the  month. 

'  *  f 

he  understands  the  business. 

lo^  il/ay  //ear/  be  healed !  (condolence  after 

a  death). 

iix^XJb  btHai  say  goodbye  to  one  remaining  behind. 


75,  76] 


DERIVATION— NOUNS  OF  ACTION. 


215 


Peace  to  you!  {—  lioiu  do  you  do?,  good  morning,  etc. 
The  answer  is  ;Li.3  q.  V.) 

a  bbs  K.  a  very  little  [e.g.  a  very  little  water  Jbbl 

?  ^  to  h'eak  the  heart  of. 

crj^  I  am  sleepy. 

wdS  hluff,  outspoken, 
a  ;»X,  Xoi  to  annoy  greatly. 

to  goodbye  (used  of  one  departing). 

\jtASt  to  take  heart,  he  encouraged. 

S  copy  from  a  hook. 

^  hypocrite  [so  Al.  a  hypocrite, 

or  id.;  }i.2^0  /ijr^jocm'i/,  see  §  16], 

\tix  to  s?7ieZ^  tr. 

^  J  I# 


w£3uS^  (or  '^)  he  ivas  dazed,  he  lost  his  head,  he 
lost  the  thread  of  the  subject. 

SjSxis  he  died. 

For  particular  meanings  of  verbs  see  the  author’s  Vocabulary  of 
Verbs  of  V^ernacular  Syriac  with  English  translations. 


DERIVATION. 

§  76.  Vernacular  Syriac  lends  itself  very  much  to  the  regular 
formation  of  derivatives.  From  all  verbs  nouns  may  be  formed 
denoting  an  action  or  an  agent. 

Nouns  of  action.  (1)  First  Conjugation  verbs  form  a  noun 
of  action  as  noted  above  in  the  sections  on  verbs,  31 — 44  inch 


216 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


The  second  and  third  radicals  take  Zqapa,  and  is  added.  Thus  we 
have  the  act  of  finishing,  from  to  finish.  Nouns  thus 

formed  (which  are  all  masculines)  are  used  also  as  pure  substantives, 
and  not  only  in  the  formation  of  tenses,  but  the  plural  is  rare  in  most 
of  them.  For  variations  due  to  weak  letters  in  the  root  see  §§  38 — 44 
inch  This  is  a  common  O.S.  formation. 


These  nouns  are  often  used  to  denote  the  thing  done  rather  than 
the  action ;  thus  a  deed,  (a  noun  not  much  used  in  U.),  from 

to  do;  a  fight,  from  to  fight  (the  form  for 

which  see  below,  is  not  much  used  in  this  verb);  from 


to  he  empty,  in  Al.  =  a  dish  or  yar  (=  }i2^0  U.  O.S.  ji^2  K.)  ; 

^  / 

from  to  spread,  in  K.  =  a  tablecloth  (=  U.  Tkh.). 


(2)  Second  Conjugation  verbs  form  a  noun  of  action  by  giving 
the  first  radical  the  same  vowel  that  it  has  in  the  present  participle, 
and  by  giving  the  second,  or  in  quadriliterals  the  third,  either  Rwasa 
or  Rwakha : — Rwasa  if  the  first  has  Pthakha,  and  Rwakha  if  the 


first  has  Zqapa;  the  termination  being  Thus  loving, 

.*  t  *  ' 

from  SmSsO  to  love ;  l^oJcX^itsO  coniniandinq ,  from  to  command; 

causing  to  he  killed,  from  to  cause  to  he  killed. 

For  variations  see  as  above. 


(3)  More  commonly  used,  apart  from  the  formation  of  tenses, 
are  the  nouns  of  action  in  jis-,  except  in  the  Alqosh  dialect,  where 
in  the  case  of  first  conjugation  verbs  the  first  formation  is  more 
common ;  e.g.  ^*007  is  more  usual  in  Al.  than  ^OO]  birth,  being. 


These  nouns  are  thus  formed.  First  Conjugation  verbs  give  the 
second  radical  Zqapa,  and  add  the  termination;  but  second  conjuga¬ 
tion  verbs  give  the  first  radical  the  same  vowel  as  the  present 
participle,  and  the  second  radical,  or  in  quadriliterals  the  third. 


Pthakha.  Thus  we  have  the  act  of  going  out,  from 


to  go  out  (first  conjugation);  but 


M  the  act  of  putting  out, 


217 


NOUNS  OF  ACTION. 


from  to  put  out  (second  conjugation) ;  so  the  act  of 

lovmg,  from  AtJsO  to  love.  These  nouns  are  feminine  and  take  the 

sixth  form  of  plural.  In  Sal.  etc.  those  derived  from  conj.  2  have 
Zlama  on  the  first  radical. 


The  Mim  preformative,  if  vowelless,  is  silent  in  IT.  Sal.  etc.,  and 
sometimes  in  K.,  usually  in  Al.  Z.  In  K.  and  Al.  there  is  sometimes 
a  difference  in  meaning  according  as  the  Mim  is  sounded  or  not  : 

thus  is  the  act  of  patching,  a  cloth  K. ;  is 

the  act  of  telling,  a  woi'd,  Al.  These  nouns  sometimes  denote 

rather  the  thing  done  than  the  action,  as  above;  thus  ^is'3i=a 

^  /  _ 

drink,  from  to  drink  (=  Al.,  O.S.).  They  are  often  used 

where  we  should  use  a  finite  verb ;  thus,  as  I  think  — 

We  may  notice  a  razor,  from  to  cause  to  he 

•  •  •  •  •  ^ 
shaved.  Note  also  that  in  Tiari  there  is  a  difference  between 

or  a  snack  in  the  early  morning,  from  to  taste,  and 

*  ^ 

breakfast,  which  is  also  the  common  word  in  U. ;  both  also 
denote  the  act  of  tasting.  halaiice  U.  (=  K.,  O.S.;  root 

is  not  of  this  class. 


Variations,  (a)  Verbs  or  when  they  interchange  the 
first  and  second  radicals  in  the  formation  of  the  tenses,  §  38,  inter¬ 
change  them  also  in  making  these  nouns  of  action  ;  e.g.  learn¬ 
ing,  from  to  learn.  So  ^2  to  hind,  makes  U.  Q.  Sal. 

Gaw.,  but  Ti.  MB.  Sh.  Al.  Ash. 

(6)  Verbs  change  2  into  as  remaining  or  remainder, 

from  to  remain ;  for  verbs  with  medial  see  §  40. 

(c)  Verbs  add  M  after  which  is  silent,  as  hear¬ 
ing,  from  to  hear.  It  is  then  customary  to  write  Zqapa  on  the 

28 


S.  GR. 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


218 


[§  ^6 


second  radical  of  second  conjugation  verbs  (the  third  in  quadri- 
literals). 

{d)  Verbs  ^  change  2  to  u,  as  iv,  revealing,  from 
to  reveal.  Here  also  it  is  usual  to  write  Zqapa  in  the  second  con¬ 
jugation,  as  delivering,  from  to  deliver. 

•* 

We  must  distinguish  clothing,  and  the  act  of 

clothing  ;  shame,  and  the  act  of  being  ashamed. 


(4)  Nouns  of  action  are  occasionally  formed  by  giving  the  first 
radical  Rwasa,  and  by  adding  as  in  O.S.  Words  marked  with 

an  asterisk  are  ecclesiastical  or  literary  only. 

Words  of  the  form 

JiSaob  O.S.*  a  saint's  day,  lit.  memorial  (Xip  to  remember,  O.S.) ; 
the  D  sound  remains  in  the  substantive. 

O.S.  blessed,  §  46). 

O.S.  learning  to  learn,  O.S.). 

W  fuel,  see  below  to  burn,  O.S.). 

O.S.,  Al.  illness  =  U.  K.  (ajy^  Al.  to  be  ill,  as 

O.S.  Ethp'el). 

O.S.*  need  [Lord’s  prayer  only],  (wdjM  to  need,  O.S.). 

(yix)  o.s.^  a  noun  of  action  (O.S.  to  act). 

O.S.*  help  (O.S.  to  help).  Certain  collects  at  the 
daily  services  are  so  called. 

^ApCTOi^  O.S.*  commemoration  (O.S.  p<^  to  remember). 

Ti.  see  below. 

O.S.  wo7'k  (rare),  see  below  (wJ^  to  7vork,  O.S.). 


§76] 


NOUNS  OF  ACTION. 


219 


O.S.  a  command;  in  U.  the  wti  often  becomes  ui,  in  Al. 
\  §§  fl9,  120  K.  to  command,  O.S.  =  U.). 

O.S.,  K.  a  reward  to  pay,  O.S.). 

0.8.  salvation  (O.S.  i.tj^  to  save  =  N.S.  wti^aa). 

Al.  J.  Baz,  see  below. 

;i:33ad  O.S.  an  offering,  Holy  Gommunion  (O.S.  to  offer 

=  N.S. 

•it  0  ' 


liJOcsoX  O.S.  forgiveness  (dOM  to  forgive,  O.S.). 

O.S.*  authority,  jurisdiction  (O.S.  to  rule). 

U^o^s  O.S.  Al.  hope,  confidence  Al.  to  trust,  O.S.). 

These  are  masculines  and  take  the  first  plural. 


With  these  compare:  O.S.  m.  destruction;  m. 

(O.S.  examination,'^  77;  O.S.  m.  fuel ;  Al.  m. 


affliction  =  atX^  f.  U.  p.  27;  Tkh.  O.S.  (  ^  Ti.)  fog  [O.S. 

dai'kness]  =  U. ;  jiaAti  Tkh.  ("5^  Al.  J.  Baz)  a  booth. 

Also  the  following  masculines  :  O.S.,  Ti.  destruction  [O.S. 

ease']  ;  Jms  O.S.  a  building ;  O.S.  revelation,  the  Transfigura¬ 

tion,  the  Apocalypse,  also  a  man’s  name  (especially  given  to  those 
born  on  August  6) ;  father-in-law,  —  O.S.  jixMk ;  O.S. 


number ;  a  sign  of  omission  in 


writing 


5^^  work  (O.S. 


O.S.  cattle  (lit.  a  possession) ;  O.S.*  a  lection, 

lesson  (in  the  Liturgy). 


(5)  Nouns  of  action  formed  by  giving  the  first  radical  Rwasa, 
and  the  last  two  Zqapa,  are  much  more  common.  This  is  a  favourite 
Pa‘el  formation  in  O.S.,  and  the  second  radical  in  triliterals,  with  one 


220 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


exception,  is  hard.  These  nouns  are  masculine  and  take  the  first 
plural.  They  do  not  take  a  preformative  Mim. 

Nouns  of  the  forms  etc. 

Those  marked  with  an  asterisk  are  ecclesiastical  or  literary 
only. 

O.S.  babbling,  confusion,  (\5\l3b0  to  babble,  O.S.). 

O.S.  pleasure  (TiJMiao  to  please,  O.S.  Pa.). 

^  t  ■  ^ 

;?aoa  O.S.*  marriage,  7narriage  service-book  (jj^ysJSO  to  bless, 
marry  tr.  O.S.  Pa.). 

O.S.  a  cooked  dish  (\sL3SO  to  cook,  O.S.  Pa.). 
temptation  (  to  tempt,  Arab.). 

lakSOd  O.S.*  deed  (aaSbO  to  rule,  O.S.  Pa.). 

/  •  ''/Ip  ’  ' 

}i6oiO^  K.  see  §  108. 

5:1^00,  O.S.  a  spell'iixg -book  J^also  in  O.S.  medi/talxoii^  to 

spell,  and  to  meditate,  both  as  O.S.  Pa.). 

^S.^097  O.S.*  a  division  of  the  Psalter  (O.S.  to  praise). 

O.S.*  joining  together,  ^namdage  (^O|b0  =  O.S.  Pa. 
to  jom,  marry). 

O.S.^'  a  hymn,  a  church  pxvcession  (O.S.  to  make  a 
*  *  § 

procession). 

O.S.*  a  Gradual  to  sing,  O.S.  P‘al  and  Pa.). 

O.S.*  rexiewal,  esp.  of  the  Holy  Leaven  to  renew, 

O.S.  Pa.). 

(^X^)  hurt,  injury  (\^  DfL^bO  to  injure,  §  83  A.  7^*). 

JaOOua  O.S.*  absolution  (IjSx^'SO  K.  A1.  to  absolve,  O.S.  Pa.). 

O.S.  thought,  also  think,  O.S.). 


76] 


NOUNS  OF  ACTION. 


221 


O.S.*  (^s  also  in  O.S)  the  Benediction,  in  church 
to  give  the  blessing,  O.S.). 

spoiling  of  a  child  to  spoil  tr.). 

Jlibaoj)  K.,  O.S.  green  =  U.  §  45  h), 

O.S.^  crolun,  crowning ,  a  marriage  ceremony  (O.S. 


to  crown). 

a  hem  (js^AbO  to  hem,  §  83  A.  12). 

O.S.  shroud  to  shroud,  O.S.  P‘al,  Pa.  Aph.). 

O.S.  a  large  sheet  of  paper 'io\(\Qdi  into  several  pages 


(O.S.  to  shut). 

O.S.*  name  of  some  of  the  long  prayers  in  the  Liturgy 
(O.S.  Axa:s2  to  beseech), 

O.S.*  a  lexicon,  esp.  K.  (O.S.  lo  collect). 

O.S.  humiliation  (^^IsO  to  be  meek,  §  81). 
lS6l^  O.S.'^  commentary  (D^ip  to  comment,  O.S.). 
sifted  four  to  stft). 

O.S.  resurrection  (pt^bO  to  raise,  O.S.  Pa.). 

O.S.*  libation,  the  mixed  chalice  (iJCXi  to  make  a  libation, 

O.S.  Pa.). 

2^guQ>  O.S.*  Advent,  the  season  (O.S.  bilO  to  expect  [=  b>^0 
N.S.],  to  announce). 

^tfJO  O.S.  the  Ascension  (O.S.  wb^iCd  to  ascend  =  t.bJfd2  N.S.). 

Also  called  in  U.  because  little  girls  on  that  day  make 

a  procession  dressed  as  brides. 

O.S.'^  conjugation  to  conjugate,  O.S. ; 

to  bud). 


lit. 


222 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


luonder  =  Al.  to  wondei',  Arab.). 

O.S.*  burial  (O.S.  to  shroud,  hence  to  bury). 

;L^Soby  O.S.  delay  (Sjbyj^so  to  delay ;  O.S.  to  supplant). 
fo7piveness  to  forgive). 

O.S.*  division,  doubt,  §  98  §  42). 

(for  ^o3)  ruin-  to  ruin,  Chald.  Pa.). 

I  T  ,  /  ^  t$  ' 

2kBod  O.S.*  coinmayid  3udA.bO  to  command,  O.S.  P'al 

»■  I  '•im  n  7  !■  ,1 

and  Pa.). 

Uxio^  O.S.  translation,  meaning  (J3bsa60  to  translate,  O.S.  Pa.). 
O.S.*  consecration.  Liturgy  (js^a^bo  to  saiictify,  O.S.  Pa.). 
O.S.*  the  interjections  of  the  deacon  in  the  Liturgy  (O.S. 
to  praise). 


<5  ^  ^ 

}*bOLti  O.S.*  hardening,  7ion-aspiration  (JXtJ  to  be  hard ;  O.S.  Pa. 
to  harden),  §  3. 

O.S.^  softening,  aspiration  (^^3  to  be  soft,  §  81),  §  3. 

O.S.  pride  (D^aibO  Ti.  to  be  proud,  O.S.  =  hajjaisXtiO 

U.  §  30). 

O.S.  change  (^^ktAAblbO  to  chaiige,  O.S.). 

t 

O.S.*  end  (O.S.  to  end  tr.). 

O.S.^  confirmation  of  a  bishop’s  consecration  by  the 
Catholicos  (O.S.  ^bai  to  confirm). 

unfaitlfidness  (ai^bO  K.  to  forsake ;  O.S.  Pa.  to  dismiss). 

J.30bi  0  .S.  begiiming ;  also  (*)  a  short  psalm  in  the  daily  ser¬ 


vices  to  begin,  O.S.  Pa.). 

iya^o^s  O.S.  education,  discipline  (O.S.  to  teach). 


%  76,  77] 


AGENTS. 


228 


O.S.*  commentary  interpret,  O.S.). 

translation  (^^iisbO  interpret,  Arab.). 

O.S.  provision  (Uo^lsie  to  provide,  O.S.). 

O.S.  mending  to  mend,  O.S.  Pa. ;  also  N.S.). 

Several  nouns,  chiefly  foreign,  are  of  this  form  but  are  not  verbal 
nouns ;  as  O.S.^  m.  stole,  dpdpiov,  orarium ;  iSiof  O.S.^  m. 

girdle,  ^oyvdpcop ;  IJxSom,  K.  Al.  Z.  m.  male  ser-vaiit,  cf.  {sjeAw 

§1146;  m.  floiver,  Turk. :  m.  magpie ;  'ock- 

coat ;  advantage;  2^^  poor;  2b6o^  m.  for  a  cap ; 

and  others. 


§  77.  Nouns  denoting  the  agent  are  formed  from  verbs  as 
follows : 

(1)  The  first  radical  has  Zqapa  in  the  first  conjugation,  Pthakha 
in  the  second,  and  is  added  ;  as  a  fighter,  from 

to  fight ;  a  translator,  from  to  translate  (not 

as  St.).  These  nouns  are  masculine  and  take  the  first  plural.  But 
they  may  also  be  used  adjectivally:  thus  may  mean  fighting 

(as  an  epithet).  A  feminine  in  with  the  sixth  plural  may 

also  be  formed,  as  a  fighting  woman;  but  the  fern,  plural  is 

uncommon.  If  used  adjectivally  the  first  plural  will  be  used  in  the 
feminine,  not  the  sixth  ;  see  under  Adjectives,  §  22.  In  Q.  Sal.  Gaw. 
the  first  syllable  takes  Zlama  for  Zqapa  or  Pthakha  in  second  con¬ 
jugation  verbs. 

These  agents  from  the  first  conjugation  are  not  used  in  O.S.,  Al. 
Ash. ;  those  of  the  form  being  substituted  ;  see  below  (3). 

We  must  distinguish  from  these  nouns  words  of  the  form  ^^32, 

;AautjL,  ;LbaL  (§  70)  which  are  not  agents. 


,  'f  'i. 


224 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  77  (1) 


Note  that  rain,  from  2^  to  rain,  is  an  inanimate  agent. 

We  must  also  distinguish  between  examination,  and  the 

agent  examiner;  between  jKilatahle  (from 

a  taste)  and  a  taster ;  between  hearer  (pron.  'i  in  U.) 

an  d  ;i4iw  made  of  wax.  means  both  brittle  and  one  luho 

breaks.  Some  Alqosh  agents  are  noticeable  :  liJOjQtsO  the  East  (lit. 

causing  to  ascend)',  the  West  (lit.  causing  to  set) ; 

descent  of  a  hill  (lit.  causing  to  descend :  =  U.  Note  also 

U.  K.  a  cullender  (lit.  a  strainer),  and  (no  Mim) 

tradition,  from  to  deliver. 

Variations,  (a)  In  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation,  second  and 
third  divisions,  Zlama  under  the  second  (third)  radical  is  retained  in 

U.  Sal.  &c.,  as  U.  lover,  from  to  love; 

U.  speaker,  from  to  speak;  but  not  in  K.  Al.  except  in 

quadriliterals  where  there  would  be  a  difficulty  of  pronunciation,  in 
which  case  an  euphonic  vowel  is  retained,  as  K.  Al. 

one  who  causes  to  be  killed,  ;i..3Ob0  Al.  one  luho  confesses. 

(b)  In  verbs  or  ^  the  2  is  changed  into  yi,  as  from 

to  remain ;  from  to  reveal. 

(c)  In  ^  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation,  second  and  third 

divisions,  the  y  takes  Khwasa  in  U. ;  thus  from 

to  understand.  But  in  K.  we  have 

{d)  Generally,  in  verbs  y  is  added  in  K.,  not  in*  U., 

K.,  U.  from  to  hear. 


as 


(e)  In  verbs  medial 


is  sometimes  added  after  Jk*,  some- 


§  77  (2)] 


AGENTS. 


225 


times  not.  In  the  former  case  At  is  silent.  Thus  from  to  hear, 

carry,  we  have  or  . 

(/)  For  variations  in  irregular  verbs  see  §§  46,  47.  Those  which 
have  in  U.  Pthakha  for  the  present  participle  retain  it  for  the  agent. 

In  U.  the  agents  of  are 

(2)  An  habitual  agent  is  denoted  in  a  limited  number  of  words 
by  giving  the  first  radical  Zqapa,  the  second  Rwakha,  and  by  adding 

These  nouns  are  masculine  and  take  the  first  plural;  they 

are  derived  from  the  first  conjugation  (P'al).  Note  that 

=  one  who  at  the  monient  is  fighting ;  =  one  who  is  in  the  habit 

of  fighting.  A  few  verbs  also  form  a  feminine  in  with  the  sixth 

plural.  Verbs  ^  often  change  2  into  o,  verbs  often  add  o. 

Some  of  these  words  denote  inanimate  agents,  or  have  acquired  a 
secondary  meaning ;  those  marked  with  an  asterisk  are  ecclesiastical 
or  literary  only. 


Words  of  the  forms 
^0^2  a  glutton  to  eat,  O.S.). 

ant,  §  100  f  (No  first  conj.  verb,  but  to  creep.) 

lioopiy  f.  Al.  bright  K-  Al.  to  illumine,  O.S.,  cf.  230^ 


light). 


O.S.  and  UxoJi  a  wooden  spoon  K.,  O.S.  to  stir 

U.). 


m  0 

o  > 


(for  a  crying  child  (JM  to  weep,  O.S.). 

rarely  [which  in  O.S.=  a  swallower]  and  1^0^^ 

throat  to  swallow,  O.S.).  Hence  a  glutton. 

f.  U.  dry,  also  metaph.  stubborn  (f  3^  to  dry,  intr.). 

O.S.  creator  (2^  to  create,  O.S.). 
s.  GR.  29 


226  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  *77  (2) 


yaoia  a  sore  on  the  neck,  =  O.S.  to  flash  as  light¬ 


ning,  as  O.S.,  hence  also  metaph.  to  have  a  sudden  pain). 

K.  a  beggar  to  beg,  in  O.S.  to  collect).  In  U. 

(hard  Kap)  a  gull,  also  a  dimple  to  laugh,  §  95  e); 

O.S.  ;aoa.  a  laugher. 

a  spy  K.  to  spy,  Arab.  =  K.  U.). 

pumice  stone  [O.S.  a  locust]  (  to  scrape,  O.S.). 

an  axle  [O.S.  rolling-pin]  K.  to  roll  dough,  also 

to  be  silent,  in  O.S.  to  cut  off). 

a  hand-mill  to  grind  in  a  hand-mill,  as  O.S. 

Pa.,  cf.  UQ^b>^!50  K.  to  grind  coarse,  coarse  split  peas).  See 

in  the  next  list. 

wooden  shovel  for  taking  ashes  out  of  earth-ovens  [O.S. 
one  ivho  sweeps  away],  to  shovel,  in  O.S.  to  sweep  away). 


the  bank  of  a  hill  to  slide), 

shaft  of  a  cart  (  to  draw,  O.S.). 
f.  dripping,  leaky  as  a  roof  to  leak,  O.S.). 

VaoJb?  O.S.  a  stone  pestle  (wtiZS,  root  kifalba,  to  grind  to  powder, 

O.S.,  cf  wbaJbijkbo). 

fioih  O.S.  disputer  (jsSa  to  dispute,  O.S.). 

laobf  O.S.  (also  in  O.S.)  a  howl  (no  verb). 

;Lo3'9  K.  or  U.  a  coward  to  fear,  §  83  D.  c). 

Hence  cowardly. 


§  77  (2)] 


AGENTS. 


227 


an  opp7'essor  U.  K.,  Arab.  AL,  O.S.  to 

oppi'ess.  Of.  O.S.  to  distort). 

2aox:  O.S.  a  vagabo7id  (iixi  to  wander  about,  O.S.). 

;:6f^  K.,  O.S.  or  ;oo^  U.  a  sharp-sighted  person  to  see, 

O.S.). 

O.S.  a  pounder  to  pound,  O.S.). 

a  currycomb  to  curry,  §  95  e,  O.S.  ^),  [both  hard 

Kap  in  N.S.]. 

O.S.  a  thinker  to  think,  O.S.). 

^OlXm  a  pestle  [in  O.S.  a  goldsmitJi]  and  a  mortar 

to  poimd  =  Chald. ;  in  O.S.  fuse  metal). 

O.S.*  passive  in  grammar  (O.S.  to  suffer). 

a  suitor,  also  a  beggar  to  ask,  Arab.).  Hence 

perhaps  (for  spousals. 

;Lo?:  K.,  O.S.,  or  U.  (pron.  p  =  ^),  and  an 

acquamtance  to  know,  O.S.).  Of.  in  the  next  list. 

O.S.  a  learner  to  learn,  O.S.).  Cf.  in  the 

next  list. 

iSoJjU,  f-  O.S.  heavy  K.,  O.S.  to  make  heavy). 

IbouA  a  sulky  ma7i  (i2a  to  be  angry,  §  113  d). 

a  seizer  to  seize,  Arab.). 

2^X€^  a  broo7n  to  siveep,  O.S.). 

a  p7'U7iing  knife,  a  chisel  to  prime,  O.S.). 

O.S.,  and  apostate,  infidel  (a>.^a  to  de7i7j,  O.S.). 


228 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  11  (2) 


jbboA  choleric  to  he  angry,  Arab.). 

JlfbsA  O.S.*  preacher  (very  rare),  cf.  §  45  g.  But 

a  litany  or  a  sermon,  is  commonly  used. 

sad  (lib  K.  Al.  to  he  sad,  O.S.). 

♦* 

f.  /Jio-,  O.S.  fitting  to  suit,  O.S.). 

or  Jxbbo^  jaw  (uo^  to  chew,  O.S.). 

^  0  ^  ^ 

JXoubo  O.S.  a  mortal  to  die,  O.S.). 

(for  jbibbi),  f.  ?,  sickly  (J^i-bb  to  he  ill,  O.S.). 

f.  harking  (y^AA  to  hark,  O.S.). 

laoaLA,  f.  shying  (add  to  shy,  in  O.S.  to  leap). 

Ti.  a  hiter  (f^  Ti-  to  hite). 

(or  'i)  a  drop  to  drip,  O.S.). 

^hoOA,  f.  m.,  soft  Kap,  shy,  modest  (^5od  to  he  shy,  O.S.)  =  O.S. 
Pthakha  form,  hard  Kap. 

f.  2^^  hitmg,  stinging,  for  abd  to  hite,  sting,  Chald. 
r???  to  perforate). 

a  cotton  heater  [a  forked  stick]  to  heat,  shake,  O.S.). 

;sojal.  O.S.  a  semantro7i,  a  wooden  board  and  mallet  beaten  to¬ 
gether  to  call  people  to  church  (xtd  Tkh.  AL,  O.S.  [Shin  silent  U.], 
to  hit,  strike). 

laofsA  K.  [;L^d  is  usually  added],  a  sty  in  the  eye  (>A/6  K. 

to  shut,  fill  up,  §  95). 

/  0  ^ 

Ibob^  a  sacristan,  churchwarden  [in  O.S.  an  overseer,  esp.  a 

chorepiscopus,  because  his  duty  was  to  visit],  (b^^  K.,  O.S.  to  visit). 
Colloquial  in  U. 


77  (2)] 


AGENTS. 


229 


f.  O.S.'*'  active,  in  grammar  to  do,  O.S.). 

$m  •  f  ^  ^  O  I#  '  / 

^  ^  ^  m  ^ 

laoav,  f.  O.S.  transitory  to  pass,  O.S.). 

}!30y^  Al.  a  torturer  Al.  to  torture,  ^  95  e). 

2So>L,  f.  Al.  straight  Al.  to  he  straight,  Arab.). 

a  street  [in  O.S.  one  who  enter s\  and  lane, 

a  passage  in  a  house  or  outside  (O.S.  to  enter). 

iSohOkiy  O.S.  an  inhabitant  (ylso^  to  inhabit,  O.S.). 

}jboa^,  f.  -Jiti-,  K.  swift  K.  Al.  to  run,  in  U.,  O.S.  to  run 

away). 

;^<M  Oj  c(ilc6  oj^  d'f^sd  io  bo  ^cit^  .A.rcib.^, 

f.  4L.,  K.  cool,  §  21  (10)  to  be  cool,  O.S.). 

a  fighter  to  fight,  §  97). 

K.  or  /^s^k^oXd^  U-  a  step)  to  step,  O.S. ;  whence 

also  the  derived  verb  pron.  'hm). 

O.S.^  a  p)aragraph  K.  to  cut,  abbreviate,  O.S.). 

O.S.*  the  imperative  mood  (,5k.d3  to  command,  O.S. ; 
usually  U.). 

a  skin  eruption  to  chafe,  O.S.). 

f.  sharp  to  cut,  O.S.). 

Ihoi^  O.S.  a  Saviour,  also  (in  N.S.)  the  tail  of  a  final  letter 
(wb^  to  finish  intr.,  in  O.S.  to  save,  as  N.S.  Jd^bo). 

JJno'y^  book  marker  [in  O.S.  separater],  and  tablet, 

table  of  the  laiu  to  separate,  O.S.). 


230 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  77  (2) 


hand’s  breadth  (O.S.  [?]  to  measure  with  the  hand). 

f.  tepid  pron.  ^  in  U.,  to  he  tepid). 

O.S.  a  murderer  to  kill,  O.S.). 

;Soiwb,  f.  O.S.  light  (not  heavy),  in  K.  quick  (O.S.  to 

he  light,  whence  N.S.  §  83  A.  2). 

a  hiter  to  bite,  p.  115).  [Distinguish 

or  IcsoyJb  cartilage,  tendon.] 


Jioyh  O.S.*  a  reader,  and  a  cock  {i)a  to  crow,  call 

read,  O.S.). 

^^bbB  a  tuooden  rake  (^^  to  sweep,  p.  116). 

K.  or  U.  a  valley,  in  Ti.  a  torrent  (=  O.S. 

a  torrent)  and  K.  or  U.  id.,  root-meaning 

to  go  ( ?)  to  explore,  as  Heb.  Pi. 

f.  quick  (^2^3  to  run,  O.S. 

O.S.  and  a  paramour  (^saUja  K.  to  love,  O.S.). 

?^a3L3S  O.vS.*  a  pteriod  of  seven  weeks  (no  verb). 

l^o^tXX,  f.  fi'agile  (^^  to  break,  O.S.),  cf.  p.  224. 

^atlX  a  pair  of  tongs,  or  a  large  bone  (>\.^  to  take,  O.S.). 

a  button  (wtiD^^  to  button). 

We  may  add  U.  K.)  victory,  for  from 

('dM  K.)  to  conquer,  though  ?abS^  is  not  found.  Cf. 


above. 

Several  other  words  (mostly  foreign)  of  this  form  are  found,  which 
are  not  derived  from  verbs ;  as  O.S.*  (West  Syr.  con- 

^  <r 

test,  of  the  martyrs,  =  dycov,  dywvia  ;  l\osal  O.S.  the  j)rodigal  son, 


§  77  (2)] 


AGENTS. 


231 


=  acrcf)T09  ; 


O.S.  Golgotha;  and  4^0 milking 

vessel ;  dysentery,  lis^eSh  doorway,  looS^  U.  maternal 

uncle  K.,  O.S.) ;  tuft  of  hair  on  the  top  of  the  head 

(for  ,  root  to  crown  ?) ;  a  slap ;  a  loose 

shoe,  and  ikmoik  a  sandal ;  O.S.  the  law  (of  Moses)  =  vopo<^ ; 

looJai^  U.  paternal  uncle  (=  fsnL,  K.) ;  a  small  cake; 

a  beetle;  lioisk  O.S.,  Tkh.  table  or  tablecloth;  ^oih  O.S. 

rule,  canon  =  Kaixov,  or  sinew,  tendon  (see  above), 

and  some  others.  Compare  also  the  following  list. 


Pthakha  forms  ;S'o«4, 

The  following  words  are  added  here  to  distinguish  them  from 
those  in  the  above  list ;  they  are  not  agents,  and  many  of  them 

belong  to  the  O.S.  Pa‘el  formation  of  which  a  son,  lit.  one 

begotten,  is  an  example,  (distinguish  O.S.  2po^  a  father,  lit.  one  who 

begets).  In  U.  most  of  these  are  usually  pronounced  with  Zqapa  on 
the  first ;  but  the  Pthakha  usually  remains  in  K.  Al.  In  Q.  Sal.  J. 
Gaw.  they  often  have  Zlama,  with  the  second  sound.  In  some  cases 
there  is  room  for  hesitation  in  placing  them  in  this  class. 

,  %  0  *5 

^0^2  O.^.^  furnace,  root  cf  N.S.  K.  to  be  smoked. 

O.S.  oak. 

230^,  f.  ^is^^less,  inferior,  O.S.  2au^. 

JXOM  K.  Sh.  sunny  side  of  a  hill  (=  jloMXbp  or  cuoaLbO  U.). 

f.  large,  perh.  from  to  grind  coarse  [hence 

is  formed  to  grow  =  U.],  see  above. 

;iS'odu,  f.  cold  (of  persons),  cf.  to  be  cold,  p.  120. 

Jbodu  O.S.  apple. 


232 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  77  (2) 


f.  J^O-,  Al.  sweet  —  U.  K. 

f.  O.S.  sour;  also  in  Al.  a  sour  dish 

dressed  with  vinegar,  etc. 

K.  and  U.  (Pthakha  sound),  f.  ?,  clever  = 

;LobJ;  O.S.  Cf.  ^6yl  above. 

^  /  !■ 

K.,  O.S.  a  hoy,  a  child. 


;hc^,  f.  O.S.  clever ;  usually  in  O.S. 

orphan  =  O.S. 

O.S.*  cummin. 

as  O.S.  or  jLodi  K.  or  T].  fountain.  The  first 

form  is  for  but  in  U.  is  pron.  (as  most  of  the  others  in  this  list) 

with  Zqapa. 

f.  :!U.  salt,  adj.  In  O.S.  subst.,  and  so  N.S.  in  fern, 
f.  deep=  O.S.  JdUboiy. 

f.  dense  (as  trees).  In  O.S.  2autoiy  =(1)  inhabited, 
(2)  green  gi^ass. 

(O.S.  1^)  mushroom. 

O.S.  fig  (rare). 

f.  easy  =  O.  s. 


laoais  O.S.  oven  (in  the  ground),  §  92. 

[Akin  to  these  are  several  with  Zlama  or  Khwasa,  cf.  §  85  (5) ;  as 
m.  a  scratch,  from  (or  to  scratch ;  m.  O.S. 

.and  f  O.S.  horsefiy ;  230^9  m.  swelling,  from  b2f  U.  to 

swell ;  iR-  cl  stitch  =  O.S.  ;  2aM3A  U.  m.  or  230^  K. 

m.  a  bond,  fetter  =  23kj^2  Al.  =  2boA>2  O.S. ;  2>^oua  m.  measure  = 

O.S.  ;  1^0^  m.  a  prick,  from  5^  to  prick ;  and  some  others.] 


AGENTS. 


233 


§  77  (3)] 

We  may  notice  here  a  very  common  rule  with  regard  to  Rwasa 

and  R-wakha  when  they  fall  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  which  has  been 

usually  followed  in  printed  books.  If  the  first  radical  has  Zqapa,  the 

second  has  Rwakha ;  if  the  first  has  Pthakha,  the  second  has  Rwasa. 

But  this  rule  is  quite  arbitrary  and  does  not  appear  to  be  desirable ; 

^  ^  0 

it  does  not  apply  to  abstracts  in  or  to  diminutives  in  Uo., 

which  have  Rwasa  and  Rwakha  respectively. 

(3)  An  habitual  agent  is  also  denoted  by  giving  the  first  radical 
Pthakha,  and  the  second  and  third  Zqapa,  adding  Alap.  These  are 
masculines  and  take  the  first  plural ;  they  are  almost  all  derived 
from  first  conjugation  verbs.  In  Al.  Ash.  where  agents  of  the  first 
form  (p.  223)  are  not  used,  all  first  conjugation  verbs  thus  form 
agents;  elsewhere  only  a  few  do  so,  as  in  the  list  given  below.  In 
U.  Pthakha  has  the  sound  of  Zqapa  in  these  words ;  in  Sal.  Q.  Gaw. 
J.  of  second  Zlama. 


Words  of  the  form 

iSxal  O.S.*  [West  Syr.  'J5i2]  conjunction  (butdl  to  hind,  O.S.). 

Cl  cook  U.  K.,  a  builder  Ah,  O.S.  to  build,  as  O.S. ;  also 

to  cook). 

Jsiaib  bee  (JO?  K.  to  stick,  §  95  c^). 


O.S.  a  liar  to  lie,  O.S.  Pa. ;  no  first  couj.  verb). 

O.S.  (deydna)  a  judge  (vJ?  to  judge,  O.S.). 


2b*f  {zeydrd)  proud  U.  to  swell,  to  be  proud). 

i 

2^f  O.S.  a  singer  to  sing,  O.S.). 

/ 

O.S.  fornicator  (Jj&f  to  commit  fornication,  O.S.). 

t  i 

2ibf  O.S.  weaver,  knitter  (9^f  to  weave,  knit,  O.S.). 
O.S.  a  seer  to  see,  O.S.). 

O.S.  a  sinner  (JV^  to  sin,  O.S.). 


S.  GR. 


30 


234 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  77  (3) 


O.S.  (klieydta?)  a  tailor  to  sew,  O.S.). 

digger  (3^1^  to  dig,  O.S.). 

29^  a  reaper  to  reap,  O.S.). 

a  turner,  joiner  to  turn,  scoop  out,  O.S.).  Also 

Jaliagi  O.S.  a  luizard  (^EX^bO  to  bewitch,  as  O.S.  Ethpa.  No  first 
conj.  verb). 

2L^  O.S.  a  miller  to  grind,  O.S.). 

a  sweeper  to  sweep,  collect,  O.S.). 

O.S.  a  primer  to  prune,  O.S.). 

an  enshrouder  to  shroud,  O.S.  P‘al  and  Aph.). 

O.S.  a  scribe  to  write,  O.S.). 

Ihis^  testy;  knotty,  as  trees  U.  =  'ib  K.  to  tie  in  a  knot, 


O.S.  y^), 

O.S.  a  swimmer  iUo  to  swim,  O.S.). 

*  •* 

O.S.  (Zqapa  before  Wau)  a  transgressor  (O.S.  to 

transgress). 

O.S.  a  worker,  labotirer  (wAA  to  work,  serve,  O.S.). 
a  fighter  to  fight,  §  97). 


[in  O.S.  a  prodigal]  bird=  O.S.,  N.S.  (y^X^  to  fly, 

O.S.). 

2^^  O.S.  huntsman,  fisherman  to  hunt,  fish,  O.S.).  Cf. 


2xm^a3  Bethsaida. 

•  S.  •  •* 


^  tether  K.  Al.  to  tie  to  a  post,  and  as  O.S.  to  crucify). 


77  (8)] 


AGENTS. 


235 


one  tuho  prays  to  pray,  O.S.  No  first  conj.  verb). 

^  0  0  A  ^ 

plucker  of  grapes  to  pluck, 

a  sweeper;  also  obstinate,  quarrelsome  to  he  angry, 

to  sweep ;  and  in  K.  to  squeeze,  as  Arab.,  pp.  116,  230). 

jiba  O.S.  (Zqapa  before  Wan)  a  dmmkard  (tea  to  he  drunk,  O.S.). 

I* 

=  O.S.  a  runner  to  run,  O.S.  ^cna). 

J^a  7'ider  (^^a  to  ride,  O.S.,  §  46). 

2^a  a  da^icer  (a±Ja  to  dance,  O.S.). 

tm  0  ^im  00  ' 

jlabi  a  cotton  cleaner  (IXS  Tkh.  =  2af  Ti.  to  clean  cotton). 

O.S.  a  deacon  (jEbaXbO  to  serve  as  a  deacon,  O.S.  Pa. ;  no 
first  conj.  verb). 

All  the  above  form  feminines  in  te  with  the  sixth  plural. 

Several  are  of  similar  form,  but  are  not  agents;  as  Jji^2  O.S.  trough; 
)o^2  O.S.  God;  goddess  (p.  37);  O.S.  inner  (Zqapa 

before  Wau);  O.S.  (^geyasa)  ^J/l^c  penxtent^  thtef ,  ^aboaoi  O.S. 

member,  limb ;  jilab  paper,  Arab. ;  }Jbaf  K.  Al.  alms,  pron.  f  = 
(=Uoa2  U.);  ^  only  begotten;  f.  green  fruit;  thm, 

lean ;  Al.  supper,  Arab. ;  Al.  neck  U.  K.),  cf. 

O.S.  2a^  joints  of  the  body ;  ^a^b  ea^dhen  pot ;  backbone ; 

O.S.  Caiaphas ;  Jla^S  f.  a  net,  Al.  K.  (=  2aa^  U.),  also  in  K. 

a  window  (=  U.)  Arab.;  a  bowl;  f  a  piece  of  boat'd 

in  a  spinning-wheel ;  jUis  Ti.  Sh.  a  joke  (conn,  with  ajl,  §  46  ?). 

Somewhat  similar  are  U.  Q.  Sh.  a  beggar  =  K.; 

2^^  or  2^^^  potsherd,  §  88  ;  2^^  thief  So  plough  —  O.S. 

%  85. 


236 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


§  78.  (1)  Abstract  Nouns  are  formed,  generally  from  sub¬ 
stantives  and  adjectives,  by  changing  the  termination  to  or  in 

Sal.  Q.  etc.  to  loo^,  (^O-  Az.  ?) ;  if  there  is  no  termination,  these 
endings  are  added  on.  Thus  }^o2sfi>akJQ>  truth,  from  ifktQ'ixa  true ; 

^  m  0  0  *  /  / 

the  cOjll'iixQ  0^  ct  scvxlor ,  from  settlor,  ^  82  j, 

cf.  a  ship  (Turk.).  These  abstracts  are  feminine  and  take  the 

sixth  and  ninth  plurals,  §  18. 

Words  ending  in  §  67,  p.  168,  drop  the  point  under  the 
second  Yudh  in  forming  abstracts,  and  the  Yudh  becomes  consonantal ; 
as  good,  goodness. 

A  few  of  these  abstracts  are  formed  from  particles  ;  as 
quality,  from  hoiu  ?  (not  very  common),  cf  how  ?  §  67  J 

opposition,  horn  against  (see  also  p.  237);  and 

the  irregular  U.  proxiniity,  from  near,  §  21  (7). 

For  other  instances  see  below.  These  abstracts  are  often  formed 
from  compounds,  as  }^ottLM23  carelessness,  from  careless 

(^□bi  care). 


Some  nouns  of  this  form  are  not  abstracts  in  sense,  as 

■  I 

looiriKO.S.  a  shop,  mn);  f  urniture,  from  a  house,  O.S.  ; 

}^OmS2  banquet,  from  guest,  O.S.,  also  2  U. ;  lisoH  Ti.  Al. 

dinner,  noon  (lit.  breakfast),  §  28  (13) ;  book  of  the  deacons 


part  in  the  Liturgy  (also  diaconate),  from  deacon,  O.S. 

Note  that  prayer  (2^^^  to  pray),  and  plague 

to  strike),  are  not  of  this  form,  and  have  Rwakha,  §  18  (9). 

•* 

In  some  cases  the  abstract  has  the  same  meaning  as  the  original ; 
as  doubt  (hard  Kap) ;  error  ; 

=  )*i030f  increase,  interest. 


§78] 


ABSTRACT  NOUNS. 


237 


From  girl  (p.  48),  we  have  gwlhood. 

Several  of  these  abstracts  are  formed  in  as : — 

whereabouts,  from  where  t 

i^OuLii  O.S.*  case  (in  grammar),  from  O.S.  jLi=  N.S.  ^2  who  ^ 


fatherhood,  from  jiai  father, 
friendship,  from  fidendly,  cf.  uiSA>3  friend, 

opposite  situation,  from  \3<xd3A  opposite.  Also 
regular.  So  opposition. 

(U.  JR)  enmity,  from  enemy,  regular  in  K. 

memhei'ship,  from  member,  O.S. 

O.S.  unity,  from  O.S.  o?ie  =  N.S. 

^^OubOfM  relationship,  from  a  relation. 

badness,  from  6a(7,  §  21  (7).  Also  regular. 

largeness,  from  §  21  (7). 


l^Ousibu  motherhood,  from  2^  mother.  Also  regular. 

2^0u3OMaA  K.  richness. 

•  •  ■  I  ■  # 

2^0u^2^  O.S.  quantity,  from  /m^(;  much'?  O.S. 
}^^f3ub0  clerks] dp,  from  a  cZer^•.  Also  regular. 

obstinacy,  from  2330ib  obstinate, 
distance,  from  jLfiUd  /ar,  §  21  (7). 


}^OuOiCdb  shame,  from  }aiQ>3  ashamed. 

Note  also  ^^OuXOlS  K.  f.  or  ioouiod  Q.  Sal.  and  also  U.  m. 

m  $  t  *9 

multitude,  excess,  from  excessive. 


238 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  78 


•  •  /I 

We  also  have,  like  the  above,  the  irregular  (also 

hemg,  essence,  from  ^.a2  there  is,  O.S. ;  and 
co77ipanionship  (also  regular  in  K.  as  O.S.),  from  2aAM  companion, 

O.S.  And  almost  all  adjectives  in  *•  form  abstracts  in 

which  in  their  case  is  the  regular  termination.  In  U.  this  termina¬ 
tion  is  often  in  quick  speech  shortened  to  eiHa. 

Several  abstracts  have  no  original,  as  2^0uif  O.S.  fornication; 

Tkh.  Al.  a  luritmg,  =  U.  K. ;  J^oa2*  K.  Sh.  joke, 

cf.  §  46;  U.  joke,  cf.  joker;  l^o^yJoS  Tkh. 

joke,  cf.  U.  or  U.  id.,  Turk.;  J.  joke; 

lisO^ysSo  O.S.  education,  §  21  (5);  eai'nesUiess,  cf. 

to  be  diligent;  O.S.  faith;  O.S.  a  Rogation; 

§  18(9);  O.S.  )^0^2  O.S.  letter  of  the  alphabet,  cf.  O.S. 

a  sign;  care;  mocking. 

(2)  The  abstract  of  a  noun  denoting  an  agent  (§  77.  1)  will 

generally  be  the  noun  of  action  (§  76).  Thus  speaker, 

It  • 

3^^i!SOdj!sO  speech;  but  both  forms  are  sometimes  used,  as 
and  envy,  from  \MabO  to  envy,  (O.S.  ^m) 

pride,  is  used  in  preference  to  is  used  for 

tradition,  for  the  act  of  handing  down. 

(3)  A  very  few  abstracts  are  formed  by  giving  Rwasa  to  the  second 
radical  of  a  verb  and  adding  as  jLo-iCuiuX  heat,  from  to  be 

warin,  O.S.;  O.S.  disturba^ice,  from  to  disturb,  O.S. ; 

O.S.  apostasy,  from  to  deny,  O.S. ;  O.S.  an 

assembly,  from  to  sweep,  collect,  O.S. ;  cf.  K.  light,  from 

2b^  K.  to  dawn,  Arab. 


§§  78,  79] 


DIMINUTIVES. 


289 


We  may  notice  that  abstracts  are  more  used  by  the  Syrians  than 
by  Europeans.  Thus  they  will  often  say  human  nature, 

where  we  should  use  the  concrete  men.  For  the  plural  of  nouns  they 
say  and  so  on. 

§  79.  (1)  Diminutives  are  formed  by  substituting  jLio.  m.  (with 

first  pi.)  or  f.  (sixth  pi.)  for  the  termination  of  the  original ;  or 

by  adding  on  these  if  there  is  no  termination.  Thus  a  little 

hoy,  from  23k!!L  a  hoy;  a  little  wife,  from  -JsM  a  wife, 

woman  [root  O.S.  lo  spin,  weave,  cf  O.S.  a  hired 

spinster^',  a  little  sister,  from  a  sister.  According  to 

Bar  Zu‘bi  all  these  nouns  have  Rwakha. 

These  nouns  are  also  used  to  denote  endearment.  Thus  a  family 
name  for  father  is  (The  original  is  not  used.)  So 

a  son  (from  O.S.  2^  id.),  a  brother  (from  O.S.  id.), 

U.  a  grandfather  (from  an  old  man,  as  O.S. ;  in  K.  a  grand¬ 
father),  a  grandmother,  U.  (from  a  mother  or  grand¬ 
mother,  =  K.)  have  now  no  diminutive  force.  So 

paternal  uncle,  from  JiSslso  K.  id.,  maternal  uncle,  from  O.S. 

K.  id.  p.  38. 

Diminutives  rarely  denote  contempt ;  as  ^ioXJb  priestling,  ^oxi2 
mannikin. 

This  termination  is  in  some  words  shortened  to  6-  for  vocatives 


* »  -i 


/  « 


and  titles  prefixed  to  names.  Thus  03^  or  dtlQ  father ;  dbsdb  lit. 
uncle,  a  term  of  respect  used  in  addressing  bishops  and  old  men, 
especially  in  U.,  and  also  when  speaking  of  bishops.  It  is  also  pre¬ 
fixed  to  the  names  of  old  men,  as  obod)  lit.  Uncle  James. 


240 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRTAC. 


The  corresponding  feminine  is  ots^  (lit.  maternal  aunt,  from  O.S. 

and  N.S.  which  may  be  used  vocatively  as  a  term  of  respect, 

or  prefixed  to  a  name  as  lit.  Aunt  Mary.  When  pre¬ 

fixed  to  names  these  may  be  used  either  vocatively  or  in  speaking  of 
the  persons  designated.  Other  instances  of  these  nouns  used  voca¬ 
tively  are  0u3  K.  mother,  dim.  of  jlp  U.  or  K.  mother ;  oaxb 

grandfather;  OCU  'K.  father  (in  U.  only  as  a  proper  name);  Oli 

grandmother;  or  paternal  aunt ;  maternal  aunt. 


Of  the  same  form  are  oSkd  bride,  from  id. ;  also  U. 

bladder,  oS^  leech,  and  U.  platform,  §  19.  So  f  cat,  from 
m.  tom  cat  (but  kitten),  OmX^  U.  sunny  side  of  a 

hill  =  (from  to  warm)  p.  231. 

We  may  notice  the  curious  diminutives  U.  K.  Sp.  a  very 

little,  and  Sal.,  from  2^^  a  little,  which  is  itself  a  diminu- 

tive,  see  §  82  (13),  [in  this  word  there  is  usually  a  very  strong  accent 
on  the  penultimate],  K.  a  very  little,  from  any  one,  (cf. 


very  little,  from  IfioXf  little,  U.  very  small,  from 

small) ;  very  gently,  from  gently ;  which 

in  Sal.  =  only  just  (a  variant  is  »^a(\»»2)  from  yA^2  only,  in  K.  =  so 
many,  from  ^^02  §  67  ;  Ti.  a  very  little,  from  a 

1 4  4f 

little,  see  §  28  (9) ;  Ti.  (or  MB.  etc.)  morning  twilight, 

from  §  67 ;  ^^2  Tkh.  here,  from  )a2  K.  Q,  id. 


(2)  Diminutives  are  also  formed  by  using  a  feminine  form ;  as 
%  a  tooth,  a  little  tooth  (of  a  cog-wheel).  In  Tiari  these 

feminines  are  very  common  and  often  have  no  diminutive  force. 
Thus  Tiari  men  will  say  where  other  Syrians  say 


79—81] 


NEGATIVE  NOUNS. 


241 


a  hridgCy  for  a  stone,  (with  for 

side  {'Sy. 


§  80.  Negatives  are  formed  by  prefixing  ^  both  to  Syriac 
words  and  also  to  most  imported  words.  But  Persian  words  often 
prefer  the  Persian  equivalent  to  ^  {7iot)  :  as  impossible. 

The  is  written  as  a  separate  word,  but  it  really  forms  one 
word  with  that  which  follows  it  and  which  it  negatives ;  thus, 
^  is<^  about  your  not  coming. 


^  can  also  be  prefixed  to  adjectives  and  adverbs.  This  gives  a 
more  emphatic  negative  than  if  ^  or  ^  were  put  with  the  verb. 
Thus  ^  not-good  (bad)  is  stronger  than  ^ 

it  was  not  good. 

^  is  also  used  similarly  with  the  infinitive,  as  J  to 

refrain  from  working,  1  Cor.  ix.  6. 


§  81.  (1)  Adjectives  are  freely  formed  from  substantives  by 

changing  their  termination  to,  or  by  adding  on  (o)  Ji-l!.;  (b) 

(c)  ?:L  ;  (d)  a-.  The  last  three  especially  denote  dwellers  in  a 

particular  place.  These  Syriac  terminations  are  very  frequently 
added  to  foreign  words. 

_  ^  **  / 

Examples,  {a)  watery,  from  water  (O.S.,  Al.  psei), 

(h)  a  Tiari  man,  from  Tiari  (lit.  the  sheep-folds), 

one  of  the  Ashiret  districts  of  Kurdistan. 


^  Several  in  Al.  which  end  in  ;io.  are  not  diminutives;  as  iconder, 

miracle  (  =  U.  E.),  contention  (  =  U.  K.),  ^03^3 

remembrance  (  =  23>I^D  U.  K.). 


S.  GR. 


31 


242 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


(c)  ^'so<Xm>6s  cl  Tkhuma  man,  from  Tkhuma  (another 

Ashiret  district),  K.  Al.  a  hunter,  or  jishe^'man,  from  2^^ 

game.  (In  TJ.  23^*^  is  used,  p.  234.) 

{d)  bodily  (rarely  jia^),  from  a  body ; 

a  man  of  Ghumba,  from  Ghumba  (a  village  of  Tiari). 

Notice  timely,  from  time ;  citizen,  from 

city ;  llLittSL ,  both  eternal  (the  latter  more  col¬ 

loquial),  from  old  plural  forms  in  but  the  latter  is  not  O.S. ;  see 
§  16.  i.  e. 

Words  in  J*,  u,  may  form  adjectives  in  :  as 
astrologer,  from  astrology. 

The  local  adjectives  are  much  more  common  in  Kurdistan  than 
in  the  Urmi  plain,  where  the  same  idea  is  usually  expressed  by  yi^ 
son  of  (a  plural  noun  used  as  singular,  §  16.  ii.  c)  or  sons  of,  as 
ub03o2  yia  an  inhabitant  of  Urmi. 

Several  of  the  local  adjectives  are  irregular.  Thus  from  ub03o2 
Urmi,  or  baao:  Ti.  (in  Ashitha  ^^302  and 

J*.L*b03o2  respectively);  from  Jilu,  ;  from  or 

fuD  Diz  (or  Bizin)  ;  from  Biza,  p ;  from  9^^  India 

(an  earlier  form  of  which  is  034^),  jlb34^  (in  Indian,  a  pro¬ 
duct  of  India;  from  Waltu,  or  ;Ioo\^o  ;  from 

^a&*bp  uiio  ilfar  Bishu,  jliaubp  ;  from  Amadia, 

?l43*giL ;  from  Sidon,  jAiXg  =  O.S.  from 

Qudshanis  {Kochanis),  or  ;  from  b^  Tu,  0,66s 

or  066s. 


§81] 


DERIVATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


243 


The  termination  (see  above)  often  denotes  the  same  as  the 
English  adjectival  termination  -ish,  as  blackish,  from 

black;  reddish,  from  ^.bpJOJO  red;  so  oblong, 

from  long.  But  =  grayish,  from  gray. 


O.S.  singular  (in  grammar),  from  O.S.  one,  is  irregular. 
The  word  for  plural  is  O.S.,  from  O.S.  many. 

From  death,  we  have  deadly,  but  this  is  also  a 

masc.  substantive  =  a  plague.  So  arm,  for 

a  bully,  from  face.  Note  also  =  universal,  as  O.S., 

from  O.S.  the  whole. 


(2)  Adjectives  are  very  much  more  common  in  Syriac  than  in 
Hebrew ;  but  they  are  much  less  common  than  in  European  lan¬ 
guages.  The  word  23b^  lord  of,  §  16.  ii.f  can  be  prefixed  to  almost 

any  substantive  to  make  an  adjective.  Adjectives  thus  formed  are 
of  either  gender  or  number. 


(3)  Adjectives  may  be  rarely  formed  by  prefixing  D  of,  to  the 

corresponding  substantive,  cf.  ^03  Spirit  of  holiness 

=  Holy  Ghost.  So  /JiKD?  a  rose  of  the  plain  (i.e.  the  fields) 

=  a  wild  rose. 

(4)  For  the  English  terminations  -able,  -ible,  the  O.S.  passive 

verbal  noun  in  is  sometimes  used,  but  not  colloquially.  Thus 

measurable,  from  But  see  §  34  for  a  common  method 

of  paraphrasing  these  expressions. 

(5)  Adjectives  are  also  formed  directly  from  verbal  roots.  For 

those  of  the  forms  (2)-  M^ore  common  are  those 

of  the  old  participial  form  which  we  must  distinguish  from 


244 


GllAMMAIl  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


the  newer  participial  form  .  Some  of  these  have  become 

substantives.  The  Pthakha  is  usually  sounded  like  Zqapa  in  U., 
not  in  K.  Al.  Z.  In  Q.  Sal.  etc.  these  usually  have  long  Zlama  on 
the  first  radical. 


,  Words  of  the  form 

(a)  Adjectives. 

O.S.  lean  to  he  lean,  O.S.  Ethp‘el). 

envious  to  envy,  Arab.). 

O.S.  idle,  unemployed  io  cease,  O.S.). 

0.^.  pleasant  (pLto3  to  he  pleased,  §  76.  5). 

K.,  O.S.  thmiied  out  (as  trees)  =  A.;?  U.,  p.  247 
to  thin  out,  as  O.S.  Aph.). 


O.S.,  K.  minute,  adj.  =  JJ^b  XJ.  (wbib  to  make  fine,  O.S.), 
see  below,  h,  and  p.  247. 

righteous  {0.^.  bbSf  to  he  just). 

Sal.  =  O.S.  clever  (Chald.  to  cut). 


O.S.,  Al.  wise  =  saAoL  U.  =  AisL  Tkh.  K.  to  be 

'  0  4  *  ■  If  If  If 


perfect,  in  O.S.  to  he  wise). 

O.S.,  K.  worm  =  XJ.,  p.  247  (>Bj^  to  he  warm,  O.S.). 
O.S.  sharp  to  he  sharp,  O.S.). 

2bkJjU  O.S.,  K.  honourable  =  XJ.  K.  Al.  to  make 

If  /  ^  I# 

heavy,  O.S.). 


O.S.  gentle,  humhle,  p.  247  (5^^  io  he  gentle,  O.S.  5^)* 
:a.a!»  O.S.,  K.  hitter  =  U.,  p.  247  (axa  K.,  Axi  U.  to  be 

0  0  ^  0  *  L  ^99  ^99 

hitter,  O.S.  Sbp). 


§81] 


DERIVATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


245 


Al.  clea7i  =  ^^is  U.  =  «fts  Ti.  (AVi  Al.  to  cleanse, 
Arab. ;  to  drip,  U.  as  O.S.  Pa.). 

Tkh.  thin  —  ihJtiA  Ti.  =  U.  (^3^3^  to  be  thin). 

Al.  intelligent  Al.  to  understand,  §  39). 

O.S.*  departed  (O.S.  to  depart,  die),  see  below,  b. 

JjLisL  O.S.  ancmit  (Jd^^  K.  to  be  old,  O.S.). 

^  *  •  •  • 

0  .S.,  Al.  rich ;  used  everywhere  for  Dives  in  the  parable 

(O.S.  bis^  to  be  rich). 

AA  ^  sober,  p.  247  (%S^g.30  to  become  sober ;  also  in  K.  of  water, 
to  become  clear ;  O.S.  Pa.  to  strain  out). 

^3^  O.S.  holy  (^,3^  to  be  holy,  O.S.),  see  below,  b. 

2X3^  O.S.,  K.  cold  =  lijd  U.,  p.  247  (bib  to  be  cold,  O.S.). 

far  (wb^D  to  be  far,  as  O.S.  Ethpa.). 

^b^b'  O.S.  soft  (5^3  to  be  soft,  O.S.  j^b). 

;flL^b'  O.S.  fine  (O.S.  wbbS  to  make  thin ;  cf.  N.S.  bb3J33d3  to 

hammer  out  metal),  p.  247. 

JIamS  O.S.  warm  to  be  warm,  O.S.). 

;Lpi  O.S.fat  (O.S.  ^  to  be  fat  or  ripe). 

23u^  O.S.  beautiful  (b^  to  please,  O.S.). 

2bA3d(  O.S.  true,  p.  247  (bw  K.  to  be  strong,  O.S.  bx ;  also  in  O.S. 
to  be  true). 

AAis  O.S.,  K.  wet  =  )^*is  U.  (O.S.  to  be  wet). 

■4 

All  these  form  feminities  in 


246 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


(6)  Substantives. 

f.  musk  melon,  so  called  because  it  ripens  by  being  buried 
in  the  sand  while  still  growing.  to  ripen,  be  cooked,  O.S.) 

m.  (O.S.  stack  (  to  stack,  U.  K. ;  in  Al.  to  happen, 
both  as  O.S.). 

f.  ajiw  to  fine,  Arab.), 

m.  a  minute  (of  time),  see  above,  a. 

O.S.  m.  vein  (no  verb). 

m  0  0  ^  ' 

O.S.  f.  axe  (no  verb :  connected  with  O.S.  to  split  ?). 
O.S.  f.  right  hand ;  a  cubit  (no  verb).  In  the  former  sense 

also  Jiaa*. 

O.S.  m.  a  light  [sun,  moon,  etc.]  (O.S.  to  shine). 

ISywJL  (O.S.  'aaai)  m.  nose  (O.S.  to  snore :  XmI  K.  Al.  to  kill ; 
U.  to  saw). 

f.  trumpet  (O.S.  to  snort). 
m.  large  sieve,  for  earth  (3X6  to  sift,  as  Chald.).  * 

23^  O.S.  m.  book  of  the  burial  service  for  laymen,  see  above,  a. 
O.S.  m.  unleavened  cake  (O.S.  to  be  unleavened). 

O.S.  m.  a  saint,  see  above,  a. 

O.S.  m.  godfather,  lit.  a  neighbour;  and  O.S.  f. 

godmother  (^^  K.  to  be  near,  O.S.). 

JULti  O.S.  m.  priest,  usually  in  N.S.  (O.S.  JLb  to  be  old). 

O.S.  f.  incense  boat  (no  verb). 

O-S.  m-  a  man’s  name,  lit.  a  rider  (O.S.  to  rule). 


'i  81-  82] 


DERIVATION.  FOREIGN  ENDINGS. 


247 


m.,  2^-  f.,  partaker  to  partake,  hard  Kap,  Arab.). 
O.S.  m.  dragon  (no  verb). 

Of  the  same  form  are  the  foreign  words  slack,  ^  f- 

treasure,  Turk,  (also  f.  flute,  f.  peach, 

m.  snare.  So  f.  knife  =  O.S. 

Note  that  words  like  come  from  roots,  as  of 

~  0  ••  ^  •  y 

which  the  P'al  pres.  part,  is  Hence  in  N.S.  the  verbs  appear 

with  a  medial  Alap,  while  the  adjectives  have  the  doubled  consonant. 
Yet  under  influence  of  the  adjectives  we  get  in  N.S.  33^ 

K.  or  U.,  Aal  aii  K.  So  Ti.  to  bathe  =  U.  Tkh. 

§  39,  and  perhaps  to  burn,  in  cooking,  from  O.S.  smell  of 
meat,  etc.  The  O.S.  Pa‘el  of  these  verbs  has  the  double  consonant, 
and  therefore  in  N.S.  we  have  as  second  conjugation  triliterals 

K.  to  thin  out  trees,  \SgbO  to  become  sober,  »\^kibO  K.  to  make  light ; 

perhaps  also  to  be  quiet  (akin  to  id.),  and  to  tame 

(akin  to  O.S.  ^  id.). 


§  82.  Foreign  terminations. 

A  large  number  of  nouns  and  some  verbs  are  taken  from  foreign 

languages,  especially  Persian,  Turkish,  Kurdish  and  Arabic.  The 

''  '' 

nouns  take  the  terminations  (esp.  K.),  very  freely. 

The  verbs  are  conjugated  exactly  like  those  which  are  from  Syriac 
roots  and  regularly  form  verbal  nouns,  etc. 

Most  of  the  words  imported  into  O.S.  from  the  Greek  are  now 
obsolete ;  though  scientific  terms  have  in  many  cases  been  lately 
imported  into  the  language  from  the  Greek,  sometimes  through 

English,  as  for  geography. 


248 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  82 


The  commonest  of  the  foreign  terminations  are  as  follows : 

from  the  Turkish,  meaning  one  who  performs  the  busi¬ 
ness  indicated  by  the  word  (all  masc.),  as  a  caravan  driver, 

a  caravan,  f  When  ••  is  added  on  to  a  foreign  word 


from 


(as  above)  it  is  usually  dropped  before  this  termination  is  added,  as 
a  driver,  irom  a  waggon,  cart,  f.  This  termination 


is  sometimes  added  on  to  Syriac  words,  as  a  traveller,  from 

a  road,  f.,  doorkeeper,  from  a  door,  m., 

§77  (3),  miller.  All  these  words  take  the  first  plural  (J^a-) 
and  make  abstract  nouns  in  These  nouns  are  very  common. 

petitioner,  from  f  petition,  f.  is  irregular. 

(2)  aa  Pers.  Kurd,  (masculines),  e.g.  tenant  (of  land), 

K.  orator  (Kurd.),  aVaal  husbandman  (O.S.  2'^:),  ajA^aa 
ivounded,  aa^obaioV^  journeyman,  aaaoa  pitchfork,  aadJy.a  debtor, 
aajbb^c^  capable  of  speech,  aalfiM  treasurer,  aabab  caravan  driver, 
aaaoab  merciful,  aaba^  sorcerer,  aa^JA^y  wise,  aaa^  promise, 
apX^a  sorcerer,  grateful,  aaLaX  Al.  lawyer,  apu^a^  his¬ 

torian,  aaJl*a^  superstitious,  and  many  others. 

(3)  aa  Pers.  (masculines),  as  aa^A>o2  artificer  (=  a|sAo2  §  19), 

guilty,  abfacn  meddler,  aaisba^  attendant, 
avaricious,  aauta^  coppersmith,  aais^  grateful,  aax<^  painter, 
aaNilO  carpenter,  aaaaiix  pious,  aais^g  artisan,  litigious, 

aafiS^aa  lawyer,  aado^  repentant,  and  some  others. 

(4)  a\  or  aJ^  Pers.  (masc.),  as  a^Iioa  worldly  (2jAOa  the 
world,  f.),  a^ibi>a  litigious  (♦.^^a  judgement),  a^^a^bO  inheritor. 


82] 


DERIVATION.  FOREIGN  ENDINGS. 


249 


(is^  an  unclaimed  inheritance),  merchant  (lacxjCd  trade), 

glassblower  glass,  m.). 

(5)  fjcd  Pers.  (masc.),  as  calico  maker  calico,  m.), 

flint  and  steel  maker  (wdiotia  flint  and  steel,  m.), 
cotton  dresser  coloured  cotton  cloth,  m.),  fjtdisXCD  watchmaker 

(^4^  ^  watch),  saddler  m.  a  saddletree). 

(6)  *.^3  Pers.,  as  'pencase,  f.  (JhbSB  pen,  f.),  JuA 

kettle,  f,  (yA  tea,  m.),  travelling  hag,  f-  vagabond,  m., 

candlestick,  m.  wax,  f.). 

(7)  Turk.,  properly  an  abstract  termination,  middle,  f., 

see  p.  158,  hood,  f.,  a  snug  corner,  f.  (Ip^b  a  pro¬ 
tection,  f.),  4^^  expenditure,  f.  (also  first 

tidings  (or  present  for  tidings),  f.,  first  fruits,  f., 

feast,  f.  (this  word  has  become  concrete  exactly  like  the  O.S.  equiva¬ 
lent  cf.  §  78),  noise. 

(8)  Turk.,  usually  denoting  of  or  belonging  to  a 

place;  as  a  native,  m.,  or  >  Avi  an  Osmanli, 

eSil  a  native,  m.,  oSa  U.  a  bush,  f.  The  names  of  many  villages 
in  the  Urmi  plain  have  this  termination. 

(9)  Turk.,  as  a  button,  a  stuffed  eatable,  f., 

an  ice  (the  sweetmeat)  f.,  )bbbeuQ»  bar,  bolt,  m., 

poison,  m.,  ^.^Sx^Ois  K.  kind,  sort,  m.  (=  boy^  U.  m.),  cast 


iron. 


(10)  bja  Pers.  (used  by  itself  =  a  band,  f.),  bjtiaofis  amulet,  f. 

(Turk,  bazu,  a  calf),  bjjsbaoo}  skilful  (b-400l  skill,  f.),  bjtJ3L!b.y.i 

32 


S.  GR. 


250 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


farrier,  m.  a  horse  shoe,  m.),  story  teller,  m. 

story,  f.),  besieged  castle,  f.),  dovetailed 

(tSuAti  padloch). 

(11)  Pers.  and  Turk.,  denoting  a  place:  Afghani- 

Stan,  Hindustan,  Kurdistan  (with  Kap,  §  119), 

Germany,  Europe,  and  many  others. 

(12)  ui  Turk.,  denoting  of  or  belonging  to  a  person  (K.  only),  as 


uAua*  I'xlLB  the  pen  of  Jonah  (^Oa). 


(13)  ^  Turk.,  a  diminutive,  5l¥  garden,  f.  (Turk,  bagh,  id. ; 

so  N.S.  ♦s^o^  gardener,  m.),  handkerchief,  XJ.  bucket,  f. 

(^oS  K.  large  bucket : — so  O.S. ;  Pers.  dol),  (or  3)  cup- 

board,  f.  (Turk,  and  Mod.  Gk.  dulapi),  cb  little,  dim.  of  ^ 

§§  28  (9),  79,  jar ,  f.,  also  a  snfiall  wooden  tray ,  from 

a  large  tray,  m.,  small  carpet,  f.  §  120,  fiddle,  f., 

0  ^  0^0  ^ 

saucepan,  f.  (♦^ib  cauldron,  recess  in  a  wall,  or  seat 

at  a  door,  f.  (but  loss  f  is  the  usual  word),  kettle,  f.  (^^  id.). 

(14)  ^  a  house,  Pers.  (all  fern.),  printing  ojfice  (liSxCXf 

printing  press),  li.^tJSSO'IS  {sic)  prison,  ivom  prisoner,  m.  (which 

is  also  uawM^oa),  judgement  hall  or  sitting  room,  from 

judgement,  f.,  }L^oap[A  ante-room  (because  coffee  [l,ocpO  m.]  is  made 
there),  and  many  others. 

(15)  fa  Pers.  as  fa^a^  litigious,  fai^aL  conjurer,  m. 

s 

gambler,  m.,  mummer,  m.,  9iLie\  a  dome,  f., 

soldier,  m.,  foso^fiaos  rope  dancer,  m. 

(16)  ^  as  M  cook  (male)  U.  (in  K.  uMl) ;  tea-pot. 


*0  0  0 


0  • 

^  m  0 


82,  83] 


DERIVATION.  FOREIGN  ENDINGS. 


251 


(17)  2pf  Pers.  (masc.)  meaning  son  of,  as  prince  (lit.  son 

of  the  Shah),  which  makes  fern.  a^Ji  princess,  nobleman 

(son  of  a  Bey). 

(18)  or  jua,  as  or  zealous  (issu^^  zeal, 

f.),  labourer  (forced),  (iSg^n^  forced  labour),  a  pre¬ 

sent,  f. 

(19)  ts_L  a  common  abstract  ending  in  Arabic  words,  as 

grace.  Also  used  for  concrete  nouns,  as  et  dwelling.  These 

are  feminine. 

(20)  We  also  have  f03  in  a  pack-saddle  maker,  from 

a  pack-saddle,  m. ;  aobp  in  rich  (cf.  ^9?  wealth) ; 

6  in  doorkeeper,  Al.,  from  a  door,  and  gar- 


dener,  cf.  (13);  JJb  and  2^  in  =  2^0^  m.  tube,  U. 

sign,  m.  =  Al.  m.,  Z.  =  K.  =  U.  f. 

water  pipe.  We  may  here  add  the  Persian  prefix  m  =  bad ;  as  jatiba 
infamous,  gluttonous,  faded,  bo.!Sk^^  sensual, 

«  f 

scoundrel. 


§  83.  Derivation  of  Verbs. 

The  great  majority  of  N.S.  triliterals  are  found  in  O.S. ;  some 
which  are  not  found  in  O.S.  are  found  in  Chaldee.  Others  are  taken 
from  the  Arabic,  and  a  few  from  other  languages.  In  several  cases 
where  the  form  of  the  verbs  is  the  same  as  in  O.S.,  the  meaning  is 
different;  sometimes  it  has  altered  under  influence  of  the  Arabic. 
But  in  many  such  cases  the  O.S.  meaning  is  found  in  some  one  of 

the  dialects  though  it  is  not  in  general  use ;  thus  is  to  seek 

usually  in  N.S.,  in  O.S.  and  Al.  to  err  (b^a  to  wander  after  a 
person,  so  to  seek  him) . 


252 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


For  introduced  into  N.S.  verbs  to  replace  other  letters 

in  corresponding  O.S.  verbs,  see  §§  100,  113. 

The  manner  in  which  N.S.  conjugations  are  derived  from  the  old 
forms  has  been  explained  in  §§  30  sqq.  Verbs  derived  from  foreign 
languages  follow  the  Syriac  model  in  the  formation  of  their  tenses. 


(A)  Quadriliterals. 

Quadriliterals  in  N.S.  shew  a  great  developement ;  the  following 
are  the  principal  classes  of  themh 

(1)  Causatives,  corresponding  to  O.S.  Aph‘el,  §  45. 

(2)  Palpel  verbs,  derived  from  roots  (usually  O.S.);  but 
some  are  formed  from  other  roots  on  the  same  analogy.  Such  are  : — 


•  ^ 


00 

m  m  m  0 

10  0 


00  0 


to  creep,  cf.  ant,  §  77  (2). 

Sp.  (pron.  ^3  =  lA)  to  sqidi't  milk  from  the  cow,  cf. 
breast,  O.S.,  N.S.  §  18  (5). 

>^3^^330  O.S.  to  babble,  (cf,  O.S.  to  confuse).  Also  to  grow, 
blossom,  K.  =  (5). 

to  twinkle,  be  beautiful,  for  Arab. 

to  be  confused  or  untidy,  for 
(pronounced  thin)  to  speak  idly  in  K. ;  to  bleat,  for 

see  (3). 

O.S.  to  make  round ;  O.S.  to  revolve. 
below  (10),  Kurd. 

to  thin  out  trees  =  K.  S  81  (p.  247). 

I),  )■  u  )■  O  \i  / 

O.S.  to  bleed.  Cf.  O.S.  =  N.S.  Jibs  blood.  Also 
U.  see  (15).  » 


1  Many  of  those  to  which  intransitive  meanings  are  here  attached  are  also  transi¬ 
tive  or  causative ;  and  vice  versa. 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRILITERAL  VERBS. 


253 


83  a] 


I 


to  turn  over  as  cattle,  Arab. 


O.S.  to  make  small  —  N.S.,  O.S.  (ytib). 

to  incite,  mortify  (flesh).  In  O.S.  to  remove,  from 

thither,  but  Apli.  to  mock,  from  root 

to  crash,  hurst  into  laughter.  In  O.S.  Palpel  to  injure, 
fight ;  but  P‘al  to  yelp. 

to  prod,  K.  or  to  he  pale,  the  latter  from  Arab. ;  cf.  Chald. 
*!]T  to  he  clean,  so  Heb. 

to  ring  as  a  hollow  vessel,  O.S.  and  TJf  ;  also  bf^ 

#•  «  /  »»  » 

in  N.S.,  see  (5)  below. 

to  sound  as  wine  in  a  skin,  K.,  to  he  shaken  up,  U.,  to 

I*  I 

hurst  into  laughter.  In  Chald.  P‘al  to  hind.  Cf.  O.S.  a  wine 

*  (t 

skin.  Perhaps  onomatopoetic. 

bfb^  to  hray.  Cf.  O.S.  23f  clamour. 

U  <  / 

^my^kSO  to  search,  pick  out  with  a  knife,  pick  the  teeth ;  O.S. 
to  dig,  §  113  or  ^  to  scratch,  ruh. 

O.S.  to  wash  away  as  a  flood,  from  to  wash,  as 

O.S. 

K.  to  snuff  about  as  a  dog  (no  second  Mim),  O.S.  to 

smell. 


O.S.  to  have  fever;  or  in  K.  to  get  warm,  from 
(O.S.  to  he  hot. 

to  feel  faint,  Arab. 
to  rustle,  rattle,  Arab. 


to  crush.  O.S.  to  disi 
or  perh.  from  K.  to  crush,  as  O.S.  ? 


254 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  83  A 


to  adorn  oneself,  perh.  O.S.  to  cover,  see 

below  (4). 

to  flicker  (as  O.S.),  wink,  flutter  K.,  clap  K. 
or  to  sputter  (the  former  in  K.  to  whine),  cf. 

•49kb0  K.  or  oisbo  to  sputter. 

'  »(v 

to  shiver  in  pieces,  crash,  for  §  113 

to  blacken,  char,  smoke  (for  preserving),  parboil;  also 

passive  of  these,  N.S.  to  be  black ;  see  also  below  (15)  and  §  92. 

to  clap,  to  beat  water  with  the  hand  as  children  at  play, 

to  roll  in  a  ball,  as  ants,  perh.  for  O.S.  to  be  curved, 

O.S.  palm  of  the  hand. 


/  •  * 

kaaa 

«»  9 


to  deafen;  N.S.  2>a  deaf,  Arab.  See  also  below  (15). 
to  sob,  U.  or  be  dry,  crack  as  a  dry  kettle. 
tn  from  N  S.  splendour,  Kurd,  rozh  ? 

U.  to  pant  (sound  oj),  cf.  O.S.  panting ;  Heb.  and 

Chald.  root,  to  be  tired,  O.S.  to  wonder. 

fSfSbS  U.  to  annoy,  disturb ;  O.S.  to  injure. 

to  snuff  about  as  dogs,  perh.  =  OjSojS». 

to  prod,  from  Arab.  ^  to  beat. 

O.S.  to  m.umhlp,  =  K.  O  ;  root 

wd^iJlSbO  to  make  loose,  immble,  Arab. ;  or  to  glitter  — 
see  (5). 

to  tread  down,  Arab.  So  K. 

to  sob,  whine  as  a  child,  root  ^ ;  cf.  N.S.  a  spoilt 

child,  Pers. 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRILITERAL  VERBS. 


255 


83  A] 


1C.  to  pant,  Arab. 

*  •  t  * 

<  V\i*iO  to  groan  =  O.S.  JAllisl  ? 

to  tear,  worry  an  animal  =  K.,cO.S. 
to  he  damp,  Pers.  cf.  jiixxi  N.S.  damp, 
to  stammer,  soh,  hesitate,  from  Arab,  root  to  croak. 

1C.  to  he  loosed,  O.S.  to  he  weak,  or  languid, 

see  (3). 

to  beseech,  for  \d\ddo  =  Heb.  , 

it  4  it  4  ..-*••• 

*  / 

^  dissolve,  mortify  (as  flesh),  O.S.  XXod^l,  see  also  (15). 

to  tear,  pull  (wool);  cf.  O.S.  to  make  small ; 

see  (15). 

to  he  hushed,  Arab.  ;  no  Mim  prefixed. 

to  chirp,  cf.  O.S.  and  N.S.  d  cricket. 

9±i9JlbO  to  cut  into  logs,  O.S.  aJd,  cf.  N.S.  ikti  a  log. 

^  a  m  4  U  '  %m  t  1  m  4  ^ 

AiQjjibO  to  lighten,  U.,  hasten,  Al.,  get  less,  K.,  fight,  K. ;  O.S.  Ati. 

'AfiAOao  to  cluck,  O.S.  Cf  N.S.  ll^Jb  f  clucking  hen. 

or  uOilCxfibo  to  break  in  pieces,  N.S.  to  break,  cut, 
cf  Chald.  and  Heb.  and  Heb.  DDip  to  cut. 

to  tremble,  shiver,  also  in  K.  N.S. 

(Arab.). 

K.,  or  to  desire,  O.S. 

to  crawl,  O.S. 


5jyS>axbO  K.  (hard  final  Kap)  to  boil  food,  O.S.  5^5  to  soften, 
p.  247. 

to  growl,  purr:  in  K.  to  be  angry  (in  O.S.  make  angry)',  no 
second  Mim. 


256 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  he  or  make  stiff,  as  mud  =  Arab.  ^j. 
to  jflap  the  wings,  brood,  heat  hard  as  the  heart,  pity, 

dangle,  O.S. 

to  shiver  intr.  K.,  bruise ;  have  an  abscess,  K. ;  O.S. 

bb^adO  to  hammer  out  (O.S.  Pa.  to  make  thin),  also  in  K.  to 
shiver,  p.  245  and  above. 

isais'^  to  tremble,  shiver,  O.S.  ^sa: 

to  feel  faint,  O.S.  yMS.  Also  in  N.S.  to  crush,  =  O.S. 

JOuiX, 

0 

bo  to  shake,  U.,  as  Arab.  Also  in  K.  to  weave  loosely ; 
^  is  perhaps  the  same  word  (both  hard  final 

Kap). 

to  grope.  No  Mim  prefixed.  Chald. 

,*aagbayba  to  feel  faint ;  to  throw  down,  K.  Heb.  Qal,  and  Chald. 
Ethp'el  to  be  or  make  desolate. 

\,tiabO  to  dangle,  drawl,  be  languid  =  Chald.  to  let  down. 

to  glide,  O.S.  So  N.S.  glidingly. 

wftXlH^aa  to  clatter,  rattle,  O.S.  wdijbil  to  break, 
to  smoke,  cense,  O.S. 

See  also  the  onomatopoetic  verbs  below  (15)  which  are  of  the 
same  form. 

(3)  A  few  correspond  to  O.S.  verbs,  as : 
asa^X^  to  tread  down,  O.S.  asa.  but  Chald.  also 

to  breathe  hard,  O.S.  to  blow,  see  also  (2). 
to  fall  or  spout  as  water,  perhaps  O.S.  aM  to  leap.  Cf. 
N.S.  2att^  a  waterfall,  a^Sx  noise  of  falling  water. 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRILITERAL  VERBS. 


257 


83  a] 


The  verbs  (all  pronounced  broad)  to  roar  as  an  animal,  or 

a  fire,  =  O.S.  aia  (see  2),  to  chew,  in  K.  to  gnash  the  teeth, 

from  to  chew,  N.S.,  O.S.,  and  to  loiu  as  buffaloes  or 

camels,  from  O.S.  3^  id.,  are  similar. 

(4)  Some  of  these  reduplicated  verbs  correspond  to  verbs  ^  or 
Those  which  have  are  pronounced  very  broad;  thus 
and  ^3d03kb0  are  quite  distinct  in  sound. 

!!■  '  II*  !■  ^ 


ham. 


a.  to  foam  =  'N.B.  id.,  cf.  N.S.  f./o 

to  j^lease  =  }iat  N.S.,  O.S. 

U.  to  spoil  a  child,  perhaps  connected  with 
a  hoy  (see  2)  [or  from  §  47], 

to  soh,  whine,  HTJ  Chald.  to  chide,  low  (oxen),  bleat. 

K.  to  hang,  perh.  for  =  O.S.  Another 

form  is  =  O.S.  id. 


b.  to  make  a  hole  =  N.S.,  O.S. 

to  weep,  =  O.S.  K. 

II*  !•  -*•  ^  I*  ’  «l  ■ 

to  tear  clothes  (also  in  K.  to  weep),  perh.  for  ^>59,  from 
to  split  (Arab.).  Also 

K.  to  lap  =  N.S.  Arab. 

to  crack,  =  N.S.,  O.S. 

or  ^AxdbO  or  to  cut  up,  .94^,  N.S.,  O.S. 

to  knock  =  Chald. 


S.  GR. 


33 


258 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


(5)  Many  quadriliterals  are  formed  by  repeating  one  or  more 
letters  of  the  root ;  as — to  grow,  see  also  (2),  and 

id.  (the  latter  also  to  hang  in  K.),  =  JaS  Ah,  O.S. 

to  dig,  to  luear  out,  N.S.,  O.S. 

to  scatter  =  ChoXdi.  by  metath.  Cf.  below. 

0  “*  I  00  0 

to  abhor,  also  K.  (which  in  Arab,  is  to 

deride)  =  O.S. 

UQ^ak^bO  to  grind  coarse,  K.  =  N.S.,  as  O.S.  Pa.  In  U. 

to  grow,  from  large,  §  77  (2). 

to  drag,  to  draw^  N.S.,  O.S. 
aa^adO  to  scatter,  squander  =  Chald.  . 
acaa^^bo  to  pine  away,  O.S.  ataa  to  rub,  wear. 

also  to  stare  =  wdSf  N.S.  id. 

^V^^bo^  U.  to  fill  =  N.S. 

to  dazzle,  Chald.  pSl  to  shine,  as  O.S.  Aph.  In  N.S. 

wd^t  =  to  stare. 

00  ' 


to  be  moved  by  news,  to  start  with  fear,  O.S. 

to  break  out  as  sores  or  leaves,  O.S.  k^af  to  burst  forth 
as  the  sun  (Castell).  In  Heb.  also  of  leprosy,  Qal. 

a^  or  a^  to  scratch  =  N.S.  ^af  or  ^af,  O.S.  ^a'f. 

?5fai.bo  to  fall  from  a  height,  as  water,  root  ^af  ;  in  Heb. 

00  0  '  “T 

to  inmidate.  See  also  (2). 

to  undermine  by  water,  O.S.  ^a^M  to  burrow,  cf.  :  (6). 

to  gnaw,  from  to  scrape,  as  O.S.,  p.  234. 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRILITERAL  VERBS. 


259 


83  a] 


to  gnash  the  teeth,  O.S. 

to  delay,  O.S.  \V^4is2  to  hesitate. 

to  move,  from  to  heat  up  (eggs),  to  strike,  as 

O.S.  Also  in  K.  to  wink=  See  (2). 

to  knock  about,  shake,  hence  to  bestir  oneself :  root 
as  Chald.  Hiph. 

to  drag,  jup  to  sweep,  collect,  ^«.S.,  O.S. 

U.  to  stuell=  O.S.  to  blow,  N.S.,  O.S. ;  in 

K.  metaph.  to  tell  a  lie). 

/  /  ^ 

5^^dubO  to  crumble,  for  =  O.S.  and  ;  see 

p.  269. 

or  to  stagger,  to  fall,  N.S.,  O.S. 

to  wear  out,  tear  tr.  =  N.S.  O.S.  \^isl  to  be 

torn. 

to  scatter,  take  to  pieces,  =  N.S.,  O.S.  (but  cf  O.S. 

to  scatter).  In  K.  perhaps  from  N.S.,  O.S. 

to  separate. 

to  have  spasms,  perhaps  to  chop,  K.,  O.S. 

J^M^bO  to  examine,  perh.  to  see,  N.S.,  O.S. 
to  floiu,  O.S.  to  ooze,  §  45  g. 

i^MiwLbO  to  smart,  O.S.  AS  M  to  beat,  whence  also  aSa  ^bO  or 

Si.  ST  "  S.  "ST 

to  sob,  beseech,  perh.  from  beating  the  breast. 

JLtibJlbO  to  shake,  mix  up),  K.  (in  U.  to  pick  raisins,  to  crack 

walnuts),  from  Arab,  chj-5  to  collect.  Hence  also  perhaps  ftiSitbO 
to  pack,  gather  up,  economise,  in  K.  to  peel  walnuts. 

ptJiso  to  become  weak,  in  K.  to  fear,  =  O.S.  iZx. 


260 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


wfiiikljuiao  to  burn,  he  scalded^  jine  heavily,  =  wd^  N.S.,  O.S. 

K.  to  eat  the  inside  (of  an  egg,  etc.).  So  N.S.  ud^. 

to  he  languid,  droop,  2^  to  loose,  N.S.,  O.S. 

}  '  { 

id.  =  N.S.  Both  also  mean  to  look  downwards : 

the  latter  also  to  slip  out  of  place ;  and  in  K.  to  fall  from  the  hand, 
and  to  put  out  the  eyes  (origin  ?). 

4  • 

K.  to  make  neatly,  O.S. 


(6)  Many  are  formed  by  the  addition  of  an  extraneous  letter : 
as  2,  e.g.  K.  or  U.  to  he  numhed  with  cold  or  pain, 

perh.  from  O.S.  to  feel,  cf.  N.S.  to  he  numh,  for  §  100. 

^^k^b2b0  to  fall  over,  die,  as  a  dying  bird,  perh.  for  from 

to  fall,  [or  for  ?  cf.  N.S.  f  thick  darkness,  O.S. 

to  become  dark\ 


to  remove  ruins,  clear  out,  root  (Chald. 

to  he  stripped  off). 

;oi^  to  starve  =  o=^  N.S. 

to  he  late,  N.S.  ‘V??  late,  Persian  (quinqueliteral). 
23^m^  to  dig  as  a  mole  =  O.S.  Cf.  (5)  and  23ulkM 

,<■  /  ^  *  !■  I»  /  ^  ^  mi, 

N.S.  m.  a  mole. 

to  surround,  by  metath.  from  bjxi  N.S.  to  go  round, 

as  O.S. 


(rare)  to  carry  =  N.S.  ?,  §  46. 

to  beseech  (in  K.  also  to  mew).  Same  root  as  N.S.  . 

'  ~i  mV  u 

mediator,  Kurd.  ? 

(no  Mini  prefixed)  to  prosper,  tr.  to  thank,  N.S.  f.  thanks, 

i' 

Arab,  benefit. 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRI LITERAL  VERBS. 


261 


83  a] 


0 

to  cut  to  pieces,  ci^umble  =  Arab,  jj^,  cf.  N.S.  Al. 

a  crumb. 

to  understand,  from  N.S.,  O.S.  to  cut,  cf.  \^u]oyoai 

§  75,  p.  200. 

to  hotel,  yelp,  whine,  and  metaph.  to  beseech,  O.S.  Pa. 

to  chatter  as  birds,  Chald.  to  cry. 

^(0 

laojoso  to  howl,  m  K.  to  coo;  cf  Chald.  p^lp  pelican,  ^Iplp 
croaking. 

Ti.  or  to  roll  over,  cf  to  turn,  turn  aside  ? 

t  It  ’ 

or  K.  to  bring  ewes  to  be  7nilked,  O.S. 

to  call  ?  or  cf  O.S.  a  shepherd's  crook,  a  rod. 

U.  to  run  mad  (also  to  starve),  perh.  Chald.  to  make 

%  * 

an  onslaught  (or  O.S.  to  be  foolish). 

(7)  O,  as  to  drink  too  much,  or  in  U.  to  drink  quickly, 

perh.  O.S.  to  purge. 

to  chew  =  N.S.,  O.S. 

II  #  II 

K.  to  nail,  ^  110  c,  Chald. 

U.  to  tear  (clothes)  =  above  (4). 

II  I 


(7“)  as  to  injure,  perhaps  from  O.S.  (pron. 

lyp^)  shame,  injury  ? 

(7^)  01,  as  j5aD<^50  K.  to  feel  slightly  ill,  O.S.  to  feel  ? 

(8)  o,  as  K.  to  glean,  =  N.S.  as  O.S.  P‘al,  Pa. 

to  hiccough,  eructate,  O.S.  to  be  in  pain,  Aph.  to 

vomit. 

Q.  to  roll  dough  =  U.,  cf  N.S.  m.  a  roller. 


262  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  83  A 

(pron.  f  to  make  small,  see  §  46  ;  cf.  §  110. 

U.,  §  47,  to  seek  =  V^,  I  46. 

Al.  to  whisper  =  K.,  perh.  to  hide,  N.S., 

O.S.  Cf.  N.S.  suspicion. 

If  If 

U.  to  gape  =  N.S.,  as  O.S.  P‘al. 

U.,  §  47,  to  revile  =  N.S.,  as  O.S.  Pa. 

(8^*)  u,  as  K.  Al.  as  O.S.  to  he  jmtient,  cf.  O.S.  ai&A  to 

expect. 

(9)  vS,  as  to  sew  cbai'sely,  perb.  O.S.  wdab  to  join. 

K.  to  intertwine,  from  N.S.  bCs.a  U.  to  tie  a  knot  (by 

II  '  II  \ 

metatbesis)  =  O.S.  K.  Same  as'  fsao,  see  (10). 

(10)  to  be  lame. 

to  grope,  from  N.S.  AL,  wbicb  also  appears  in 

see  (14). 

Il'w'  I  ' 

=  N.S.  sXsa^  to  step,  as  O.S. 
to  tangle,  see  above. 

to  heat  =  O.S.  Also  wl^^bsao  in  N.S.,  see  (12). 

see  above  (6). 

I 

w!iaauAisao  AL,  see  ^atx^isao  (10). 

jQ>a9y^isao  U.  to  have  a  sore  eye  =  N.S.  K.  or  jObaa  K. 

To  these  we  may  add  from  tbe  first  conjugation :  Aso?:  to  give 
=  O.S.  and  for  to  snatch  —  O.S.  Jcisi  5  and  perhaps 

§  46. 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRILITERAL  VERBS. 


263 


83  A] 


(9“)  'p.  to  wallow  —  N.S.  (cf.  O.S.) 

§114,  and  above  (2). 

to  roll  uj[>  =  ^^  N.S.,  O.S. 


(10)  These  are  very  numerous,  especially  in  Urmi. 

U.  =  K.  Al.  to  shine,  O.S. 

■  /  ^  # 

to  fatten,  cf.  well  fed,  N.S.  Arab. 

to  print,  cf.  N.S.  f  a  printing  press;  also 

p.  205. 

to  hud,  cf  N.S.  a  flower. 

K.  (=  U.)  to  be  dizzy  =  >X^^ao  (2). 

=  N.S.  (ai)  to  fall  in  as  a  roof,  Kurd. 

to  rust,  cf  N.S.  U.  or  K.  m.  rust,  Kurd. 

O.S.  to  have  leprosy. 

N.  K.  to  he  discoloured,  from  N.S.  to  he  dirty  ? 

to  solidify  —  O  S- 

OufkbO  to  he  mad,  cf  O.S.  and  N.S.  26u3  m.  a  devil. 

to  protect,  cf  N.S.  f  a  protection,  shield,  §  82  (7). 

to  weep  =  ».^akiO  K.,  as  O.S.  P'al,  Pa.,  see  (4)  h. 
to  wound,  cf  N.S.  f.  a  wound,  U.  (Arab.). 

to  he  late,  see  (6)  above. 

U.  to  subdue,  cf  N.S.  V?  subject. 

to  litter,  also  to  dung  a  garden  (f  =  05>  Tkh.)  =  K. 

as  O.S.  Pa. 


264 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


U.  =  K.  to  put  milk  or  butter  in  food  during  a 

fast,  §§  39,  108  c  (O.S.  to  defile,  as  Chald.). 

f 

U.  to  make  brave  (rare).  Cf.  N.S.  ^9Lm9  to  be  bold,  K.  Al., 

and  bold,  or  in  Al.  =  difficult. 

/ 

to  cast  the  evil  eye,  and  in  K.  to  wonder,  perb.  O.S. 
to  watch  carefidly. 

U.  (f  =  oQj)  to  lessen.  See  (8). 

K.  to  put  meat  in  food  during  a  fast,  cf.  O.S.  to 
be  ford,  to  smell  bad  as  meat. 

to  be  strong,  from  N.S.  m.  strength  (Turk.). 
to  be  yellow,  have  jaundice,  from  N.S.  yellow. 

U.  to  be  cold  =  N.S.  U.  But  in  Al. 

\  <»  /  >•  t>  * 

=  to  spoil  tr.,  as  O.S. 

U.  to  become  dark  =  N.S.  (Chald.  to  be  hid),  by  meta- 
thesis.  Cf  O.S.  and  N.S.  m.  darkness. 

to  bewitch  =  ^y^iso  N.S.,  as  O.S.  Pa. 

to  reckon  —  as  O.S.  For  the  ^  cf  O.S. 

\<i  .  •  tt  ^  I 

account. 

to  be  dirty  as  the  eyes  =  K.  as  O.S.  P'al. 

to  be  leafy,  cf  O.S.  and  N.S.  m.  a  leaf 

♦^DjjUiO  U.  to  be  or  make  heavy  =  K.  Al.  as  O.S. 

yyoJso  U.  to  veil,  cf  N.S.  laaua  m.  a  Mussulman  woman's 

\  <»  ■  (fg  ■  tiv 

overall,  also  a  tent,  Turk. 

to  jingle,  clank,  cf  N.S.  m.  a  cymbal. 

to  defile,  cf.  N.S.  unclean,  Turk. 


§  83  a]  derivation  of  quadriliteral  verbs.  265 

or  to  make  a  hedge,  cf.  N.S.  aA^  a  hedge,  Kurd, 

also  to  he  leafy,  to  he  crowded,  for 

to  pity,  cf.  N.S.  pitiful. 

to  tangle,  N.S.  a^  to  tie,  see  above  (9). 

tn  hp.  lam.p^  Pprs.^  of  Tkh.  lame,  maimed. 

a^a^ibo  to  he  a  stranger  =  O.S.  ua^.  Cf.  O.S.  and  N.S. 
a  stranger. 

U.  to  saddle  =  \3u(^  N.S.  Cf.  O.S.  and  N.S.  iXiJi 

a  saddle. 


to  cloud  over,  cf  O.S.  and  N.S.  a  cloud. 

U.  to  he  or  make  wise,  cf  N.S.  Vny  K.  =  ^%Vh  y  u. 

\  t$  f  ^  II  *11 


wise,  Pers. 

to  he  old  =  K.  as  O.S. 

to  go  had  as  gum,  perh.  O.S.  to  he  doubtful,  tepid. 

U.  =  K.  to  make  a  floor,  N.S.  asaA  d  floor,  Arab. 

U.  to  grieve,  tr.,  pUp  N.S.  to  he  sorry,  Turk. 
to  clear  up,  from  N.S.  flne  weather,  Arab. 


K.  to  chop  =  4s  K.,  as  O.S. 


% 


to  he  hunchbacked,  and  in  U.  to  arch,  —  N.S. 


to  arch,  (cf  N.S.  an  arch,  hunchbacked,  p.  58),  O.S. 

to  tie  in  a  knot. 


a^jJlbO  to  tie  K.  =  N.S.  aXb  K.,  =  O.S.  \\lh  as  above.  In  U.  to 

O  *  II  '  #> 

•  * 

bend,  stretch  oneself,  to  push  hack,  perhaps  O.S.  aXJb  to  delay. 

^yJdUO  U.  to  approach  =  N.S.  as  O.S.,  cf  ^aab  near. 

84 


S.  GR. 


266 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


0  ■  ^ 

to  sting  (nettles),  shrink  back,  perh.  N.S.  to  he 

angry. 

aDki  to  make  hold  (no  Mim  prefixed),  cf.  N.S.  hold,  Pers. 

U.  to  colour,  tr.,  cf.  N.S.  colour,  Turk. 

U.  to  entice  =  ^yx'so  N.S.  as  O.S.  Pa. 

\ '» ■  *  II" 

to  blacken  =  O.S. 


I*  $ 


to  make  dirty,  blight,  also  in  U.  metaph.  to  reject  food, 
cf.  N.S.  blight,  dirty,  O.S.  to  rust,  rare  in  P‘al. 

\j>X  bo  K.  to  madden,  cf.  O.S.  and  N.S.  2a2s  a  devil.  In  U. 

»  •  } 


to  blacken  with  smoke  =  K.,  cf.  O.S.  smoke. 

••  I* 

to  be  beautifid,  cf.  O.S.  and  N.S.  beautiful. 

(»S-  Al.)  to  consider,  O.S.  to  define. 

m  ‘  ^  '  * 

U.  to  smear  with  fat,  O.S.  and  N.S.  fat. 

f 

^a^bO  to  be  pale  or  lean  from  illness  =  Chald. 

(11)  jca,  A  few  verbs  forming  what  may  be  called  the  Saph'el 
conjugation. 

adu^Sba  U.  to  visit,  O.S.  to  associate  with. 

5^^^XDubO  to  wander  about,  searxh  for  food,  scent,  Arab. 
to  wander. 

^iobO  to  shiver,  totter  =  a^a  N.S.  from  Arab.  Also  to  make 
a  kalendar,  K.,  from  O.S.  and  N.S.  2^aoiQ>  a  kalendar. 

^oiajCb^o  Al.  to  hasten,  as  O.S. 

Av^atobO  to  conjugate,  decline  (nouns),  as  O.S.,  lit.  to  bra.nch  out. 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRILITERAL  VERBS. 


267 


83  a] 


(12)  D. — to  stir  =  N.S.  K.,  cf.  a  spoon  O.S. 

and  N.S. 

to  take  in  the  hand,  crunch  —  N.S.  (Chald.  to  bend, 

curve). 

aoSbkbO  to  rock,  O.S.  Pa‘el  to  shake. 

•  II  !■  '  *  II  ■ 

m  m  ^  ^  mm 

J0a^6^.tO  U.  for  below. 

K.  to  throw  down  =  Chald.  ^iq  as  Heb.  Qal. 
bti33(^.b0  to  joke,  play  boisterously,  beat  up  eggs:  root  btiDO), 


in  Arab,  to  break. 

also  K.  and  K.  to  ring,  clink,  tick,  cf.  O.S. 

•A  (  (•  I  •>\  #▼ 


ringing,  bell. 

K.  to  swell,  perh.  from  N.S.  to  fill  full. 

to  clasp,  button  =  N.S.  (in  which  pron.  o  as  ^) 

to  hug,  Chald.  Heb.,  cf.  O.S.  a  hug. 

■ "  • 

m  m  ^ 

U.  to  search,  see  below  ;  also  to  mix  up  (cf. 

N.S.  jai  to  enclose,  include,  as  O.S.). 


to  push,  or  by  metathesis  cf.  N.S.  to  be 

overturned  as  a  house,  perh.  O.S.  to  invert. 

U.  to  hug  =  nearly.  See  also  (16). 

K.  to  search  carelessly  (in  U.  xi).  [Qy.  Heb.  to 

search,  ^  =  x  ?  In  Chald.  to  dig.]  Also  X^b^bO  K. 

M^XX^bO  to  knock  down,  die,  fall  suddenly,  O.S.  to  kill, 

wound,  bruise. 

fvlj^iiXbo  =  ^!i^3>Xba  (10).  See  also  (16). 

x.box^  to  wither  &bai  =  xiia  O.S. 

II  9  I 


268 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACUT.AR  SYRIAC. 


to  gather  up,  carry  off  (as  floods).  So  (which 

is  also  to  hem).  [In  K.  first  conj.,  is  used  of  stray  cattle,  to  re¬ 
turn  of  their  ow7i  accord.]  Qy.  Heb.  to  overthrow,  immerse, 

or  O.S.  (so  N.S.  to  thrust  in,  comp)ress  ?  In  K. 

ijcifibo  §  119. 

K.  to  crack  =  N.S.  as  O.S. 

•  t  0  «# 

to  twist,  wind  =  N.S.  as  O.S.  Pa. 

K.,  see  v3C^!S^bO  above  (9). 

K.  to  make  a  clatter,  O.S.  noise  of  flint  and  steel 

st7'uck  together.  Also  in  K.  to  he  old,  (perhaps  O.S.  to  make 

bald) ;  in  U.  to  he  an  orphan,  and  to  tra7nple. 

to  roll  up,  perhaps  O.S.  to  go  roimd. 

I 

wM^ajibO  to  S77iash,  crumple,  cf.  N.S.  w»bgUa  to  C7msh,  O.S.  and 
N.S.  flour. 


to  have  colic  (to  have  a7i  inte7'nal  stram),  and 
or  ptaajjbo  or  ^tyab<l*aO  to  wr%7ikle,  C7mmple,  O.S.  to  he 

wrmkled  or  stramed.  So  N.S.,  O.S.  V??"  to  squeeze,  twist,  stram 
(O.S.  Ethp^el  to  he  wrmkled),  to  pmch. 

to  crouch.  So  N.S.  or  or  §  120. 


?^a^iAao  Tkh.  to  gather  up,  gather  (a  dress),  O.S.  to  he 

gathered. 

wNA^aJ^  to  buffet,  O.S. 

^^badbO  to  heat,  O.S.  Also  in  N.S.,  see  (9). 

;aai»  or  jLtiaAbO  to  crack,  perhaps  O.S.  w£l^  to  break. 

^Oiiso  K.  or  U.  to  break,  O.S. 

,  ••  0  0 


§  83  a]  derivation  of  quadriliteral  verbs.  269 

U.  to  he  crowded;  cf.  N.S.  crowded,  adj. 

to  trim  a  candle ;  perhaps  O.S.  UQX^^  to  repress, 
to  stumble,  O.S.  \disisZ. 

*9  0  '  ^  #1 

(13)  sX.  The  old  Shaph‘el  conjugation. 

Ti.  or  Ti.  or  U.  to  he  proud,  from 

Shaph‘el  and  Eshtaph'al;  root  O.S.  Sopdi;  and 

O.S.  to  change;  root  Also  by  metathesis 

xauxbo. 

••  t 

XXXXM  to  op2)7'ess,  strike ;  O.S.  to  subdue,  root 

to  sprawl,  root  (Chald.  n'lp  to  he  tired ;  Arab,  to 

piwsti'ate). 

^»isx^  Al.  to  he  f  ulfilled.  So  O.S. ;  root 

We  may  perhaps  add  JtgAXbO  K.  to  plane,  from  N.S. 
a  plane,  §  75,  p.  207. 

(14)  «s,  isenksi  or  to  pant,  see  OjSoj^  above  (2). 

to  crumble,  so  Az.  O.S.  to  rub,  N.S. 

a  C7'umh  (also  and  in  Al.  mi  see  p.  259.  In  O.S. 

is  to  doubt,  to  he  anxious. 

Also  what  may  be  called  the  Taph'el  conjugation. 

for  xfiaistaO  to  gover7i,  or  provide  for  (esp.  with  food), 
O.S.  ixij.  Cf.  N.S.  or  auxbis  f.  counsel,  guidance. 

to  he  U7iclea7i,  root  Arab. 

!Xb|xbisbO  O.S.  to  make  disciples;  in  K.  to  torment.  O.S. 
to  teach. 


270  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  83  A 


to  shake  the  head,  U.,  tug  at,  K. ;  N.S.  to  take  by 

^  m  *  m  *  * 

force,  shake  the  head,  fall  as  leaves.  So  O.S. 


K.  to  snatch,  gnaw  =  N.S.,  O.S. 

to  educate,  punish,  Arab. ;  O.S.  has  to  he  a  young 

man,  grow  up,  §  37. 

Al.  to  think  =  N.S.  a^oAbo.  The  N.S.  K.  Al.  to 
stop,  hinder,  is  O.S.  a^^  to  constrain. 

OC^S^isbO  to  search,  Arab.,  =  N.S.  Al.  id.  So  , 

sX6si^, 

n  / 

^a^bO  or  ^^isbO  U.  to  pant ;  perh.  l-nb  Heb.  to  compress. 

wiA^aisbO  K.  to  he  boiled  to  rags,  he  angry.  O.S.  w^isa  to  boil 
(often  metaphorically,  with  love,  anger,  etc.). 

aCsaisbO  to  tear,  for  a^is-bo,  from  N.S.  a^  to  snatch. 

II  #  II  #  ’  II 


(15)  Many  verbs  are  onomatopoetic  :  as — 

bdaitlabo  O.S.  to  bubble. 

II  I 

^VLyVao  or  AAy..yao  to  crawl, 
to  hum,  moan. 

to  growl,  roar,  thunder,  and  in  K.  to  coo,  see 
to  rattle,  creak  ;  in  K.  to  C7'ackle,  g7'oivl. 
to  t7Wt,  cf.  N.S.  AA,?  t7wtting. 


aaaakba  or  ^aaaabo  K.  to  stutter ;  the  latter  in  U.  to  bleed  (2). 
to  buzz. 

y^^ObO  to  wail,  cf  O.S.  a  howling. 

OiOdO  to  luhiz  as  an  arrow,  rattle. 

XII/  ^ 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRI LITERAL  VERBS. 


271 


83  a] 


to  squeak  a  mouse. 

MOfeiiObO  to  luhine. 

wbcxtiobo  to  whine. 

a  $ 

Soaobo  to  whirr. 

••  I 

to  whip,  heat,  in  U.  to  swell. 

«i  « 

Ug>MiQaj^bO  to  breathe  hard.  So  N.S.  one  who  breathes  hard. 

»$  0  n  $$ 

to  snore,  gargle,  purl,  flow  as  tears,  Arab. 
to  twang,  buzz,  hum,  croon. 

JlAOXbO  to  chirp,  squeak. 

to  tick,  click,  creak. 

to  call  as  a  goat  to  its  kids.  See  (2)  above. 

^l^bO  to  tingle. 

K.  to  squeak  as  a  mouse. 
to  hiss,  breathe  hard,  rare  in  U. 

0 

or  A.£i^^dbbO  to  chirp.  See  also  (2). 

Itt\  IM  ~ 

to  knock  stones  together,  crackle,  K.,  chatter  (teeth)  U., 
flicker,  Al.,  to  quack,  quarrel,  talk  idly, 
to  tickle. 

to  giggle,  to  purl.  See  also  (2). 

to  chirp,  cry  out,  creak,  scream;  also  to  clean  cotton,  cf. 

iiN  i(v  ± 

N.S.  r^a^  f.  cotton  cleaner. 

niv 

^  0 

AXt%bO  (so  O.S.  Gen.  xv.  11)  to  cry  '  kish’  (to  scare  away 
birds  or  set  dogs  on  to  fight). 

to  munch,  mumble,  cf.  N.S.  m.  a  mumbler. 

O  t  '  t 


272 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  hiss,  scream. 

ti  * 

or  to  bleat,  71100. 

A  U.  or  ^  A.>v^vi  or  or  to  whisper; 

V  '  »•  /V  /  It  t  n  t 

cf.  whispering.  See  also  (2). 

0 

^0  hiss  U.,  snore  U.,  7vhistle  K. 

(pron.  thin)  to  spin  a  top,  hi'andish,  bleat ;  (pron.  full) 

to  snort. 

to  cackle ;  and  in  U.  to  shake  in  singing. 
pLbxttbO  to  thunder,  and  ^attA-boJAbO  K.  to  rumble,  crash  (the 
latter  in  U.  to  be  downhearted),  cf. 

to  caw,  croak,  bubble  as  a  water  pipe ;  in  K.  to  crack, 

quarrel. 

to  pelt  as  rain ;  in  U.  to  hihble.  Cf.  raining 

heavily. 

to  speak  through  the  nose ;  cf.  speaking  nasally. 

$ 

JCD^^bO  to  spit,  as  rain. 

to  stamp,  patter,  beat. 

(pron.  thin)  to  tick,  click.  See  (4)  b. 
to  be  hoarse.  See  (14). 


(16)  Some  verbs  are  taken  direct  from  foreign  languages  or  from 
some  other  N.S.  word  of  foreign  origin,  and  cannot  be  classified  as 
above,  as : — 


y.y\2t30  to  be  shy,  N.S.  denial  (Turk.). 

K.  to  be  dazzled,  N.S.  m.  spark, 

to  be  dazzled,  to  break  as  clouds.) 


(Also 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRILITERAL  VERBS. 


273 


83  a] 


to  crown,  N.S. 

it  t  '  it 


m.  a  crown. 


to  he  holdy  not  to  stand  on  ceremony,  N.S.  familiar, 

i 

friendly. 

to  he  douhle-minded,  in  U. ;  hence  metaph.  to  he  much 

patched,  Pers. 

aboabo  to  peck,  N.S.  m.  a  heak. 

to  apply  medicines,  to  poison,  N.S.  m.  medicine, 

Pers.  (also  borrowed  in  O.S.). 

to  speak,  rare  in  K.,  N.S.  f.  word  [Kurd,  ham 

(together),  zeman  (tongue),  Nold.  App.  i.]. 

( 

K.  to  trouble,  N.S.  trouble,  Turk. 

xA.\f  bo  to  he  sulky,  swagger,  Arab.  J^j.  Hence  also  perh. 

*v^v^*y)  to  boast. 

to  arm,  Kurd.,  cf.  N.S.  2^  m.  armour. 

\n  iiv  ’ 

also  to  heat,  birch,  have  weals,  N.S. 

f.  a  weal. 

ao^boa^bo  to  have  a  had  smell,  N.S.  aoa^baa  f.  stench.  So  perhaps 
l'\baa>bO  to  soil,  otherwise  2a\a>b0  and  2a 

^  IN  ,*N  IN  ’  ,«N  IN 

U.  to  he  curved,  bent,  N.S.  m.  fork,  fish-hook,  Turk. 

to  tear  with  the  claws,  N.S.  2a!i^  m.  rag,  Kurd.  Hence 
also  perh.  aajaao.  and  to  tear.  See  also  (12). 

to  swing,  N.S.  f.  a  swing. 

oas^fvbo  U.  to  veil,  N.S.  caiaa  m.  a  veil,  Kurd,  [or  'ao?a]. 

to  rake  (no  Mim  prefixed),  N.S.  m.  a  rake. 


S.  GR. 


35 


274 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  reconcile,  he  reconciled,  N.S.  and 

reconciled. 

\jQ3i3j6ibO  to  descend  from  father  to  son,  N.S.  m.  «  de- 

i$  *  i  • 

scendant. 


to  stun,  N.S.  and  }S0LiJQ>a>j6  stunned,  Turk. 

4$  ^  ^  0 

4 

K.  to  fast,  Kurd. 


(hard  Kap)  to  stamyner,  N.S.  stammering,  adj., 

Turk.  Perhaps  (hard  Kap)  to  shrink  hack,  to  slip  from  the 

hand,  is  connected  with  it. 

U.,  K.  with  Pthakha  sound,  to  dam,  N.S. 

f.  a  dam,  Turk. 

/  0  0 

U.,  ^aa  aAbO  K.,  or  by  metath.  ^a^diao  K.  to  wedge  in, 

N.S.  ^3^  ^  '^edge. 


to  make  to  stand  up,  to  stand  firm,  to  hang  the  head, 
N.S.  J  m.  a  chair,  rare  ;  Turk. 


■  aI  0 

aayXflbO  (or  j;  U.)  to  dare,  Kurd. 

II*  #  V  /  '' 


bpay^,  no  Mim  prefixed,  to  defile,  to  die  a  natural  death  as  cattle, 
N.S.  Saaoao  unclean,  Turk. 

isoCT^aLbO  to  covet  (=;ovxb9  Al.)  Pers.  Kurd.  Arab. 

♦soiLibo  K.  Pthakha  sound,  to  acquaint,  know,  N.S.  K. 

acquainted,  Kurd. 

0  ^  ^ 

Tkh.  to  he  a  sojourner,  N.S.  ^  m.  a  sojourner, 

Arab. 

U.  to  he  lazy,  N.S.  lazy,  Turk. 

to  interpret,  cf.  N.S.  m.  dragoman,  Arab. 


DERIVATION  OF  QUADRILITERAL  VERBS. 


275 


83  a] 


(17)  The  following  from  O.S.  and  Chald.  words  or  roots  cannot 
be  classified  with  the  above  list : 

■  '  ■  ^  mm* 

to  he  cheap,  N.S.  cheap,  O.S.  cheapness  of 


N.. 

corn. 

O.S.  to  he  or  make  a  widow  or  widower. 

##  / 

to  COO,  prattle,  crow,  O.S.  prattling. 

(pron.  A^=  Chald.  to  roll ;  also  in  K.  to  tilt  up. 

Cf.  O.S.  hall 

K.  to  oppose  =  0.^.  N.S.  ^.aoubab  against 

(hybrid  word  ?),  see  §  69. 

O.S.  to  believe,  §  88  d.  a. 

to  disturb,  annoy,  O.S.  to  shorten ;  cf.  O.S. 

disturbance. 

U.  to  eat  quickly,  possibly  from  supper,  §  16, 

ii.  g.  See  also  (12). 

O.S.  to  murmur. 

O.S.,  no  Mim  prefixed,  to  he  poor,  to  impoveynsh,  cf. 
O.S.,  N.S.  poor.  [Also  cans,  of  and  =  to  hush.] 

to  delay,  O.S.  to  involve,  twist ;  cf.  O.S.,  N.S.  ;L^bbo.X 

delay,  §  76. 

0 

O.S.  to  rinse. 

II  / 

K.  to  butt,  to  he  old;  both  perh.  from  skull, 

O.S.,  N.S. 

to  have  worms,  see  ^  47. 

O.S.=  _a;^s^9  (16). 

a  • 

O.S.  to  supply. 

(18)  The  following  are  of  uncertain  derivation  :  to  hang 


276 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  83  A,  B,  C 


(see  5) ;  to  torment,  cf.  j  to  die,  of 

dogs  and  bad  men ;  to  hesitate ;  to  neigh; 

(Sp.  'iso)  to  he  muddy  or  broken;  to  he  damp;  to 

fionnggpr  tn  raiftp.  thp  fp.athp.rfi^  as  a,  bird  -  to  hn.fitp ;  ;^^aa 

to  beat  gently  (see  16) ;  K.  or  to  soh,  pant ; 

to  throw,  expel ;  to  hang,  tr. ;  wS^aASO  Al.  to  roar ;  ^ 

to  roar,  as  a  fire ;  laXa^SO  U.  to  deceive ;  to  toss  in  bed,  as  a 

sick  man ;  K.  to  grcift,  vaccinate ;  to  hit  out  right 

0 

and  left,  to  lay  waste;  to  smile,  K.,  to  he  crisp,  as  snow, 

U. ;  K.  to  clatter ;  ^mSoXSO  to  he  dirty  or  musty;  ^ 

to  gather  flowers ;  K.  to  roll;  f^iisSO  U.  to  soh; 

to  whine  ;  ^b^bO  to  tingle ;  <ip^a^bO  to  tack,  sew  loosely,  to  he  pitted 
with  smallpox. 

(B)  First  Conjugation  quadriliterals. 

A  few  verbs  of  the  first  Conjugation  are  quadriliteral ;  in  most 
cases  ^  or  o  has  been  inserted  owing  to  the  second  radical  being 

weak.  Such  are  LSa  to  wish,  to  bleat,  to  be  tired, 

.*  ^  I* 

v^ooia  to  cement,  \3<7k  to  give,  and  the  rest ;  see  §  46.  In  the  last 
case  the  is  perhaps  due  to  the  frequency  with  which  the  preposi¬ 
tion  to,  follows  this  verb. 

(C)  Quinqueliter'als. 

These  are  conjugated  like  the  second  conjugation  quadriliterals. 
Such  are  K.  or  2!lLibxbo  K.  to  he  late,  ^bttjbbbO  K.  to 

oppose,  U.  to  lessen  like  yjQ>  as  in  2aobt<f  little).  For 

2^boisx.bO,  see  ^80. 

*  f  •  0  f  '  T  0  ti  f  ^ 


§  83  D] 


DERIVATION  OF  TRILITERAL  VERBS. 


277 


(D)  Triliterals. 

Some  triliterals  are  formed  by  the  omission  or  addition  of  a  letter. 
Thus : 

a.  By  omitting  sdi  from  quadriliterals ;  as  U.  to  he  dizzy, 

to  interrupt,  from  K.  (Kurdish)  =  U.  to 

believe  Sal.),  from  K.,  O.S.  [root  ^.bpZ,  the  O.S. 

Aph.  being  irregularly  We  have  also  in  N.S.  to  be 

peaceful  or  tame  K.,  to  entrust  Al] ;  U.  to  madden,  from 

K.  [cf.  O.S.  and  N.S.  ihlX  a  devil] ;  to  tayne,  from 

'peace,  O.S.,  N.S.  Cf.  the  noun  U.  a  chimney  or  vent,  also 

or  U.  K.,  lit.  a  little  eye. 

b.  By  adding  as  to  be  numb,  perhaps  for  ,  from 

O.S.  to  feel,  cf  U.  or  K.  to  be  numb;  and 

several  in  the  second  conjugation  as  (above),  U.  to 

air  before  the  fire  =  K.,  cf  N.S.  steam,  vapour  ^ 

to  strengthen,  O.S.  cf.  N.S.  and  O.S.  i  %  i-  strength ; 

to  encourage  =  O.S.  cf  N.S.  and  O.S.  heart; 

to  stain,  blot,  Chald.  cf  N.S.  a  stain  (Turk.).  For 
see  above  A  (9). 

c.  From  O.S.  passives  by  taking  in  is  or  d  of  the  passive  prefix. 

We  thus  perhaps  have  to  fear,  O.S.  root  to  be  moved  or 

agitated  {s,o  M.  ^Af);  to  be  numb,  qy.  from  ^^liSZ  formed  from 

'  '  m  '' 

a  stone;  to  come  to  oneself  (after  a  faint),  to  awake  — 

•  •• 


278 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Hence  also  perhaps  the  reason  why  3  of  aap  is  pronounced 

the  influence  of  O.S.  being  felt.  [Nold.  §  96.] 

d.  Several  causatives  are  triliteral,  owing  to  one  of  the  letters  of 
the  root  being  weak  and  having  dropped  out.  See  §  45  6,  c. 


VOWELS  AND  CONSONANTS. 

§  84.  Rules  for  Aspiration  in  Syriac  words. 

These  are  taken  from  Bar  Zu‘bi’s  grammar ;  but  those  only  are 
given  which  affect  N.S.  and  they  do  not  apply  to  foreign  words. 

1.  At  the  beginning  of  a  word  the  letters  are  hard. 

2.  Standing  second  after  a  vowelless  letter,  soft,  as  2-^  marry¬ 
ing.  Except  the  first  radical,  in  N.S.,  of  2.  conj.  verbs  preceded  by 

:aubo. 

8.  After  a  silent  or  fallen  letter,  hard,  as  {is)  city ; 

vine,  for  O.S.  ;  6^1  thou. 

4.  A  final  letter  is  soft,  except  as  above  and  unless  it  follows 
a  vowelless  consonant.  [Thus  most  words  which  transgress  this  rule 
are  foreign.  For  numerous  exceptions  see  §  95.] 

5.  Nouns.  If  the  first  has  Pthakha,  the  second  Khwasa,  Rvvasa 

or  Zqapa,  the  second  is  hard,  as  iSbl  husbandman,  ancient. 

But  if  the  second  is  vowelless,  it  is  soft,  as  husband. 

6.  After  Khwasa  these  letters  are  soft,  as  creation. 

m  9 

7.  If  the  first  radical  has  a  vowel,  and  the  second  none,  the  third 
radical  is  hard ;  as  Ibopsa  m.  witness.  But  there  are  many  excep- 


84] 


RULES  FOR  ASPIRATION  IN  SYRIAC  WORDS. 


279 


tions,  both  in  O.S.  and  N.S.,  as  m.  gold,  a  dish,  O.S. 

(jrLva^),  Jjk\L  m.  milk  U.,  curdled  milk  K.  [In  K.  sweet  milk  is 
lit.  sweef] 

$$ 

8.  After  Rwasa  a  vowelless  letter  is  soft,  as  glory.  But 

if  it  has  a  vowel,  it  is  hard ;  as  anthem. 


9.  If  all  the  letters  have  vowels,  the  third  is  soft,  as  JiSam  m. 
debtor,  m.  joining,  IpbsLiw  active,  m.  sponsor  (in  O.S. 

also  a  neighbour). 


10.  Verbal  nouns  of  all  sorts  follow  the  verb  in  the  matter  of 


aspiration,  as  m.  writer,  m.  book  ;  Jilbfbo  seller, 


buyer.  So  in  nouns  from  N.S.  causatives,  which  differ  from  O.S. 
(§  94),  as  (o)  one  who  gives  in  marriage.  But  in  O.S. 

words  like  (6)  writeable,  have  the  third  radical  hard. 

These  are  occasionally  used  in  N.S.  by  the  learned,  §  81,  4. 


•  •  ^ 

11.  Feminines  in  ;fts-  have  ^  hard  in  the  case  of  agents  of  the 

form  and  past  participles  like  the  preceding 

vowelless  letter  remaining  soft  (p). 


12.  But  other  nouns  vary,  as  (^s)  garden;  but  (is) 

a  fort. 


13.  Plurals  in  (K.  Al.)  have  ^  soft. 

14.  Nouns  ending  in  have  ^  hard  in  O.S.,  but  soft  in  N.S. 
(K.  Ah).  ^  in  the  termination  is  soft. 


15.  Verbs.  The  second  radical  of  the  first  conjugation  is  soft; 
of  second  conjugation  triliterals  hard. 

Quadriliterals  in  O.S.  have  the  second  and  fourth  radicals  soft,  the 
third  hard.  For  exceptions  in  N.S.  to  these  rules  see  §§  94,  95. 


280 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


16.  In  the  present  participle  the  last  radical  is  soft,  as  above, 
rule  4.  In  N.S.  it  remains  soft  throughout,  in  feminine  and  plural. 
In  O.S.  it  is  hardened.  Thus : 


O.S.  f. 

N.S.  f. 


^  PI. 


to  steal. 


§  85.  Vowels  and  Consonants.  Relation  of  vernacular 
Syriac  words  to  those  of  classical  Syriac,  and  of  the  dia¬ 
lects  TO  ONE  another. 


Vowels. 

Words  in  H'.S.  which  have  a  vowel  less  than  in  O.S. 
lyXl  m.,  O.S.  a  roof,  ( but  Ti.  = 


' 


(also  'MS)  O.S.  a  lunatic. 


Xk2  U.,  also  K.,  as  O.S.  m.  May. 

they  =  O.S.  So  several  pronouns  §§  10 — 12. 


m.,  O.S.  '2,  pillar,  rarely  with  ^  in  N.S.  =  ariiXo^. 


2aM»£kXd2  f.,  O.S.  omelette  =  acjialpa. 

^4^2  K.,  Al.  =  O.S.  ikil  f.  fever,  =  U. 

230m,  O.S.  white. 

'  4$ 

K.  -  O.S.  shadow  U.  etc.). 

✓  ✓  ✓ 

O.S.  }:^o2  black. 

also  as  O.S.  Lazarus. 

•  •  I  ' 

U.  (Ti.  »)  =  O.S.  to  be  proud, 

iaiki  m.,  O.S.  an  ostrich. 

f.,  O.S.  A  knife.  So  id. 

>2^0idjCt>,  O.S.  threshold,  5  119. 

•  I  ^  I  #1  ^  O 


85,  86] 


CHANGE  OF  VOWELS. 


281 


f.,  O.S.  and  Al.  [m.  in  O.S.]  time,  (b) 

m.,  O.S.  lyJOSd  root. 

ft  ^  ft 

f.  (a  like  is),  O.S.  ^  'plough,  §§  97,  104. 

O.S.  sign  of  past  tense. 

l^oJci  m.,  O.S.  ^iAdcvti  large  basket 
O.S.  i^OXis  bed. 

•  t  '  m  0  it 

O.S.  (I  quarter  of  a  garlic. 

m.,  0.  S.  or  ^iiois  smoke. 

iiSoOft.,  O.S.  'itoo  weight. 

Note  also  M.  fountain  =  K.,  p.  232. 

§  86.  Words  in  N.8.  which  have  a  vowel  more  than  in  O.S. 

a.  All  which  have  2  prosthetic  in  N.S.,  but  not  in  O.S.  See 
below,  §  96. 

b.  Many  feminines  formed  from  masculines  ;  a  half  vowel  in  O.S. 

corresponding  to  a  whole  vowel  in  N.S.,  as  queen,  also  more 

rarely  as  in  O.S.,  from  king ;  tear,  O.S. 

(masc.  sing,  not  used).  Hence  in  reading  O.S.  the  Syrians  often  con¬ 
vert  a  half  vowel  into  a  whole  one  and  even  accent  it;  they  pro¬ 
nounce  he  was  made,  as  if  ithiwidh,  with  the  accent 

an  Sd",  so  they  read  have  pity  on  us  (usually  written  as 

one  word  in  the  service  books),  as  if  had  Zqapa,  ithrakhamdUn, 
with  the  accent  on  the  penult. 

c.  In  U.  verbal  nouns  of  second  conjugation  Pthakha  triliterals, 
all  quadriliterals  (unless  one  letter  is  virtually  silent  as  in  p!^k^isiO 

to  punish,  pron.  ^al^lislso),  and  all  second  conjugation  verbs;  as 


S.  GR. 


36 


282 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


U.  teacher  =  K.,  O.S.:  U.  one  who 

'  m  4$  0  ^  fm  ^  ^  ^  0  Jj, 

prays  =  K.,  o.s. 


<.  ..  < 


''  > 


d.  Plurals  of  nouns  in  in  U.,  as  U.  beams  = 

K,  O.S. 

e.  O.S.  m2  [Sal.  'm2,  first  Zlama.] 

i' 

O.S.  \  stach,  Chald.  p.  246. 

O.S.  \  coal. 

\Jbi(sAp  f,  also  as  Eastern  O.S.  *3  Testament  (Old,  New). 

*  i  * 

Stabs  m.,  O.S.  ^s  Wood 

;ja'io  m.,  O.S.  'so  paper  (also  Arabic). 

sjcdAxSm.  O.s.  sjsSmSm  eleven. 

t  lim  ,  7  ,  tm 

(in  U.  pron.  '6o-m),  O.S.  .^OOlm  serpent,  f.  So  Ipu^ 
(or  Joom)  m.  for  Jom  (O.S.  JIom)  ;  pi.  2'^obM  ('oOm),  O.S.  2^bbM. 

o.s.  ^i^OMtaO  sieve  (root  6kMJi). 
m.,  O.S.  \  nose,  proiyiont07'y. 
in  O.S.  and  Al.  also  'j5>  the  left 
>^OS^  Al.  =  U.  K.,  O.S.  Friday. 
bxbi^  K.  ten  (f.),  O.S. 

*40  \  /  ^  , 

or  O.S.  [f.  o.s.  'd]  so  and  so. 

Hi^oh  Al.  =  U.  =  O.S.  stature. 

00  0 

IsyX  m.,  O.S.  'x  name. 

’  00 

m.,  O.S.  'as  skirt  of  a  garment,  front  flap  of  a  coat  tail. 
Also  N.S. 


CHANGE  OF  VOWELS. 


283 


§§  86.  87] 

;^o6s  U.  =  O.S  ,  K.  worm,  §  88  g. 

K.  Q.  three,  f.,  O.S. 

K.  yesterday,  O.S.  (also  O.S. 


§  87.  Pthakha  and  Zqapa.  There  is  a  very  common  tendency 
in  N.S.,  especially  in  Urmi,  to  turn  Pthakha  into  Zqapa.  This  is 
perhaps  partly  for  compensation^  and  is  due  to  the  dislike  of  the 
Syrians  to  the  doubling  of  a  consonant,  unless  it  is  written  double, 
when  they  pronounce  both  consonants  distinctly,  see  §  4  (7). 

a.  Before  o  where  the  Western  Syrians  write  Pthakha,  the 
Eastern  Syrians  write  Zqapa  (§  7).  In  N.S.  (esp.  U.)  there  are  a  few 
exceptions,  like  to  answer  (in  K. 

h.  In  accordance  with  the  rule  in  §  6  (1)  all  Pthakhas  before  a 
silent  letter  and  01  are  pronounced  Zqapa,  except  in  a  few  verbs,  as 
to  oppress,  strike,  Ti.  Al.  to  vomit,  (lit.  to  overturn), 

U.  (=^a)^  K.)  to  put  milk  or  butter  in  food  during  a  fast, 
K.  to  dam,  K.  to  acquamt,  knoiv ;  in  some  com¬ 

pounds  of  §  28  (9),  but  ^  itself  is  pronounced  usually  with 
Zqapa  (see  §  91);  and  in  the  numerals  18  to  19  in  K.,  §  26. 


c.  Many  second  conjugation  triliteral  verbs  have  Zqapa  for 
Pthakha  on  the  first  radical,  perhaps  to  compensate  for  not  doubling 
the  second  radical.  A  few  differ  according  to  district : — 


answer. 


U.  K.  to 

U.  K.  to  assemble,  ix. 


iijCfi'SO  U.  K.  to  join,  tr. 

U.  to  be  cold  (of  persons),  A),  to  spoil  tr.,  p.  120. 


1  So  in  Al.,  in  cases  where  is  omitted,  short  i  sound  often  becomes  e; 


■  ^ 

I  said  is  meri  or  mtri ;  he  remembers  me  is  takheri. 

t  <*  ■ 


284 


GllAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§87 


U.  K.  to  sink,  tr. 

U.  to  annoy,  K.  to  be  tired  of. 

U.  K.  Al.  to  divide. 

U.  K.  to  refine  metals. 

vSaAbO  U.  vSofibO  K.  to  promise. 

^oAbO  U.  ^0^3150  K.  to  happen. 

U.  K.  to  throw. 

'  V 

or  to  partake. 

dio^bo  U.  K.  to  repent,  also  K.  Al.  Al. 

Traditionally  the  O.S.  he  will  bless,  is  read  as  if  with  Zqapa, 

and  so  all  Panels  with  b. 


d.  For  those  causatives  of  verbs  JA,  uSi  which  vary 

between  Pthakha  and  Zqapa,  see  §  45  b,  c. 

e.  Several  first  conjugation  verbs  in  U.  Ash.  have  Pthakha  on 
the  first  radicaP.  These  in  K.  as  in  O.S.  have  Zqapa ;  see  §  46. 

/.  Many  words  which  etymologically,  or  on  the  analogy  of  O.S. 
would  have  Pthakha,  are  in  many  districts,  especially  in  Urmi, 
pronounced  with  Zqapa.  In  other  districts,  especially  in  K.  AL,  they 
vary  between  Zqapa  and  Pthakha.  It  seems  better  to  write  these  with 
Pthakha  on  the  O.S.  analogy  or  according  to  the  etymology.  Such 

are  the  feminines  of  the  form  queen,  from  §  86  b. 

g.  So  also  words  of  the  form  §  77  (2),  p.  231. 

h.  And  those  of  the  form  §77  (3),  p.  233. 

i.  And  those  of  the  form  §  81  (6),  p.  244. 


•1.  “i 

'  I  k)ioic,  in  Al.  is  yudin  or  yedin ;  is  kidin  or  kedin. 


87] 


CHANGE  OF  VOWELS. 


285 


j.  In  Ti.  AL  MB.  the  names  of  the  first  four  days  of  the  week  are 

pronounced  with  a  Zqapa  on  as  =  O.S.  Sunday, 

p.  287.  [But  in  Al.  also  with  second  Zlama,  as  tlosheha.^ 

k.  Also  the  following  sometimes  have  Zqapa,  esp.  in  U. 

^  0  0 

Uoa:  m.  bishop,  Arab.;  lit.  our  father,  cf  O.S. 

m.  =  0.S.  JmI  brother, 

0  0 
as,  O.S. ;  usually  pron.  dkh  (p.  1C9).  So 

etc.,  §  16  (2)  h. 

Tkh.  =  U.  m.  labour,  trouble. 

(p.  160)  in  Al.  has  Pthakha,  but  always  Zqapa. 

^  0  ^  0 

Wm  u.  =  ;ei«n  K.  m.  reward,  pay  (=  Ah). 

O.S.  =  Ti.  =  U.  Ti.  bell,  m.,  p.  288. 

py<  O-S. 

^9iS  Al.  also  hut,  p.  188. 

angel,  m.  O.S.  (both  with  Zqapa  sound), 
m.  (O.S.  tabernacle,  goats'  hair  tent. 

U.  or  K.j  O.S.  (for  'li)  balance. 

(g»  Ti.)  m.  poison  (=  Tkh.).  In  O.S.  medicine. 

O.S.  =  Ti.  =  ^  U.  a  male  lamb. 

'  .* 

Jib,  O.S.  b  priest  [for  JX^Xb,  p.  246]. 

JbS  Raca  O.S. 

l.  Some  words  with  Pthakha  in  O.S.  have  Zqapa  almost  if  not 
quite  universally  in  N.S.  and  are  therefore  so  written. 

vinegar,  m.,  O.S.  'm. 

f-  U.  =  f.  Ti.  =  O.S.  m.  a  needle. 


286 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§§  87,  88 


m.  back,  girdle,  loins,  O.S.  for 

'  <  f  ^ 

f.  metal  howl,  O.S.  usually  in  N.S. 

2^*  m.  hoy,  O.S. 

■  mi 

f.  sea,  O.S.  m.,  Heb.  D\  Chald.  XS'. 

/  t"  T 

^  ^  i 

uAM  'R;Ao=O.S.  ^  (^^)*  The  Azerbaijan  Jews  have  Pthakha 


here. 

m.  basket,  O.S. 

Jdb  very,  so  Az.  (in  K.  Al.  Jaa  is  used  as  an  adjective  =  great). 

m.  teacher,  §  20  (14),  O.S.  5. 

^is  (in  Ti.  Pthakha)  there  =  O.S.  ^is,  p.  167. 

m.  Zqapa  is  pronounced  Pthakha  in  ojiJLva  he  killed  me  (f.), 
and  so  the  other  persons,  §  50. 


§  88.  Zlama  for  Pthakha  or  Zqapa. 

There  is  a  great  tendency  to  use  Zlama  in  N.S.  for  O.S.  Pthakha 
or  more  rarely  for  Zqapa.  This  is  especially  the  case  in  Salamas, 
Qudshanis,  etc.  Also  in  foreign  words  Zlama  in  one  district  corre¬ 
sponds  to  Pthakha  or  Zqapa  in  another.  We  thus  have  : — 

a.  The  present,  the  imperative  etc.  in  second  conjugation  verbs 
in  Sal.  Q.  etc.  See  §§  35  sqq.  and  91. 

h.  Also  in  the  same  districts  many  words  of  the  form  iSijixk 
deacon  (pronounced  ji.SOX),  etc.,  §  77  and  see  below  §  91. 

I* 

c.  Universally  in  verbs  etc.  where  under  the  influence  of  the 
letters  SSmiC]  O.S.  writes  Pthakha,  N.S.  writes  Zlama ;  as  N.S. 

=  *vv>V  O.S.  he  dwells. 

i 

d.  So  the  2nd  pers.  singular  masculine  of  the  first  present  of 
verbs,  and  of  the  preterite  where  the  object  is  expressed  synthetically 


88] 


CHANGE  OF  VOWELS, 


287 


(§  50),  as  u  N.s.  =  isSv^^  (isii 

fe>\_»y,  H  N.S.  =  (tsil  O.S.  he  hilled  thee 

(m.),  and  so  if  the  subject  is  of  the  first  person  sing.  masc. 

e.  The  first  five  days  of  the  week  in  most  districts,  §  28  (5)  and 
p.  285 ;  as  ?a3>.35kj^  m.  =  O.S.  Sunday. 

f  The  past  participle  of  verbs  first  conjugation,  as 
for  O.S.  revealed. 


g.  Also  the  following  : — 

(ega7^)  Al.  =  if,  p.  185. 

A?:  m.,  O.S.  '1  or  '1  moth,  hook¬ 
worm,  §  89. 

or  Al.  = 

«i  It'  II  I 

O.S.  below. 

K.  =  »^aiai  O.S. /oiir,  f 
U.  m.  or  '2  U.  K.,  O.S.  guest. 
U.  f.  or  '2  K.  mill,  ^  96. 

^  I  ##  i  '  ^ 

I 

O.S.  "boai,  widoiu. 


SMl  Tkh.,  a  Ti.  =  O.S. 

it  ti  '  t  t 

seven,  f.  (a),  p.  64. 


Al.,  'a  U.  K.  light,  m.  But 
in  K.  they  generally  say 


u^oa  Ti.  Sh.,  U.,  uSu^a 
Tkh.  or  uiSOUAbO  MB.  stove,  f., 
[usually  (i)  in  K.]. 


Zs^ata.  cf 


Zj63  (hesa)  Al.,  a  U.  K.  enough. 

2*^a,  O.S.  'a  herd,  m. 

it  y  ¥ 

also 'a  as  O.S.  son  of  man. 

or  'a  as  O.S.  lightnmg. 

U.  Q.  Sal.  m.  (a),  or 

K.  f.  =  O.S.  ^  (for  U>40 
side,  p.  225. 

U.  beggar  =  O.S.  {col¬ 
lector),  p.  235. 

Ash.,  U.  K.,  O.S. 

man  (in  U.  husband).  So  in 
U.  husbands,  p.  50. 

=  O.S.  kid,  m. 

JbcT^^  Tkh.  =  Al.  labo7ir, 
trouble. 

=  \  O.S.,  Al.  thief  m. 

Tkh.  =  Ti.,  O.S.  gai'den. 


288 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


U.  =  O.S.  lejwosy,  f. 

{gereh)  Al.  =  U.  mmt 

bridge,  see  p.  42. 

Al.  (second  Zlama)  =  'a  O.S., 
U.  gold,  m. 

w = 3J*,?  U.  rain-watered  land. 

li*  a  Sal.  =  'a  U.  debt,  Pers.  m. 

-{^a  Tkh.  resin,  siveat,  p.  42. 

JiSa  =  O.S.  'b  side,  f. 

«!■  •• 

2xda  =  O.S.  and  Al.  'a  bea7'd,  m. 

^  «!■  '• 

-ibia  U.  K.  =  'a  Al.  Z.  plain. 

jso)  K.  =  liai  O.S.  noio. 

(U.  first,  Ti.  second  Zlama) 
=  O.S.  'f  bell,  m.  Also  Ti. 

t 

(i^ :  cf.  N.S.  cliff,  m.). 
=  O.S.  '•  reed,  m. 

2'^  K.  Al.  =  O.S,  U.  com- 

•  ##  0 

panion,  m. 

Sal.  =  'rfiU.  K.jO.S.  strength, 

•*  * 

host,  m. 

Sal.  =  'rfi  U.  a  present, 

0  tt  0 

Tkh.,  eighth  pk). 

Sal.,  U.,  sometimes  K.  = 

'*  00  0 

K.,  O.S.  suffering,  m. 

2iisM  =  O.S.  bridegroom,  m. 

^  ^  00  •  0  ^ 


2.^.^  rare  =  O.S.  ^  unclean 
(usually 

230J1!>*  =  O.S. 'J,  §112,  m. 

;3a  U.  K.  =  a  Ti.  =  'a  Az.  =  O.S. 

A  tooth,  m.  So  iiaa  U.  K.  = 
'  %  •' 

A  Ti.  a  tooth  of  a  cogwheel. 

=  O.S.  'a  famine,  hunger,  m. 
fum'ow,  O.S.  'aa,  p.  206. 

•* 

Jjcaaa,  see  5  121. 

MB.  =  'S  O.S.,  U.  K.  bread, 
'00  0  '  ' 

m. 

Sal.  (first  Zlama)  =  'S  U.  K. 
f.  §  18  (2). 

(i.e. ;:»)  u.  K.  =:  o.s., 

Al.  Z.  water. 

uibo  Sal.  =  'i  U.  K.  who,  ^13. 

maxim,  from  2^'^sab  O.S. 
00  00  ^  ^ 

and  N.S.  parable. 
liapL  (Sal.  first,  Z.  second  Zlama) 
=  'i  U.,  O.S.  7nver,  m. 

U.  =  'i  K.,  O.S.  naphtha, 
paraffin,  m. 

lacrpca  Tkh.  Ash.  =  'ji  U.  Ti.,  O.S. 

moon,  m. 

^aoA>  and  ^aojtd  Al.  Syinac. 

0  00  t  *00 

2duA/a  =  'ii  O.S.  swimming. 

JtOJQ)  Q.  =  'ii  U.  K.,  O.S.,  p.  285. 


289 


88] 


CHANGE  OF  VOWELS. 


=  O.S.  XQ  winter,  m. 

•  *9  0  ' 


=  O.S.  thigh,  f. 

K.  =  U.,  O.S.  signet. 

litliy  or  lynii  U.  a  barren  wo- 
man  =  K.  Sal.  The 

II 

O.S.  has  m.  J^aJ^  f. 

l.xis^y  'Si^s  etc.,  see  p.  64. 

^  99  y  t  it  '  Jr 

m9  *  ^ 

=  O.S.  'a  potsherd,  m.  Also 
§  77  (3). 

A1.='4  Tkh.(U.  ;4)  wave. 
O.S.  also  ^  blossom,  m. 

99  y  /  ^ 


hoopoe  (otherwise  laobbe^ 

Tkh.  m.  ^aaobbar  m.  Ti., 
;b5a5cr  Ti.,  uis^ 

•  It  \  f  I  t 

Ti.,  K.  m.). 

IIjOJA  or  =  O.S.  ?vhA 

crack,  also  in  N.S.  blossom,  m. 
TT.  =  O.S.  =  'h  K.  lamb,  m. 

U.  =  '^  ^.,0.'^.Paradise,i. 
O.S.  '34  iron,  m.,  p.  293. 

^gx4  U.  f.  =  Al.  op¬ 

portunity.  (In  K. 

J-boisb.^  m.  =  O.S.  er 

ltsoish&  crumb,  cf. 


§  83  (14)  and  ;aa^  m.  §  18  (5). 
Also  ^oisb^. 

•  0  II 

Sal.  =  U.  soap,  m. 

=  O.S.  fine  weather. 

is^^OJb  or  b  (also  is)  Al.  Kurdish. 
=  O.S.  'h  partridge. 

=  O.S.  'h  basket.  So  N.S. 
Lu  a  smaller  basket. 

II 

rarely  as  O.S.  >^^ibbib 

skull. 

;^?Q-  Sal.  =  'b  U.  K.  many,  very, 

•* 

(O.S.  Jss  great),  §  25  (7). 

going,  §  46,  =  O.S.  5  an  in¬ 
sect,  or  creeping. 

^\x0X  =  O.S.  or  'ix  chain. 

i9  9  it  9  99 

^  (i  U.,’e  Al.)  =  O.S.  'X  year. 

i  * 

(^)  Al.  or 's  as  O.S.  hour. 

} 

llSois  U.  =  O.S.,  K. 

II  II 

worm,  f.  (Also  N.S. 
or  &.^b^S  Tkh.) 

or  Ti.  =  O.S. 

0  99  0  99  it 

bj^jbb^  eighteen. 

fObO^  part  of  U.,  elsewhere 
as  O.S.  July,  m. 

see  ^  121  and  p.  64. 

37 


S.  GR 


290  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  |'§§  88,  89 


h.  On  the  other  hand  we  have  N;S.  Pthakha  or  Zqapa  for  O.S. 
Zlama  in  the  following  : — 


also  as  O.S.  scabbard,  f. 

m  0  ^  0f 

/ 

in  O.S.  also  enti^ail,  m. 

U.,  also  as  O.S.  = 

K.  (a)  =  ^390^  (a)  Diz  sheep 
(rarely  singular,  m.). 


in  O.S.  also'^  mushroom. 

=  O.S.  and  Al.  half,  in. 

U.  Ti.  =  'X  Tkh.  (cf.  O.S. 
2  pi-)  almond,  m.  [unless 
it  should  be  =0.S.  iSbs], 


So  also  N.S.  and  Az.  I  =  O.S.  }i2. 


We  have  Zlama  for  Pthakha  as  an  euphonic  vowel  in  forms 
like  U.  Ti.=  iJijSoAijO  Tkh.  =  O.S.  Also  in  A). 

II  /  /  I  •  t 

before  a  vowelless  consonant  with  D,  and  (^Sp).  In  Pk 

these  in  speaking  take,  when  necessary,  a  half  Zlama ;  in  O.S. 
Pthakha.  But  in  forms  like  a  whole  Zlama  in  N.S 

'  tl  7  ^  I,  . 

§  89.  (1)  Ewasa  in  N.S.,  not  in  O.S. 

a.  The  past  participles  of  all  second  conjugation  verbs,  and 

hence  the  preterites,  N.S.  =  JdDlibO  O.S. 

b.  Also  the  following : — 

;S.aoo\,  O.S.  k  camel,  m. 

jSoAV.,  O.S.  round. 

1^0^  Sal.  Sp.  =  U.  K.,  O.S. 

t  ^  70  ' 

dream,  m. 

Al.  =  O.S.,  U.  X^  dark- 

•  I# 

ness,  m. 

=  O.S.  IsufM  pig,  m. 
jJkAv=o.s.  deiu,  m. 

=  O.S.  rhubai'b. 


lijtieM  =  O.S.  laflUbO  reverend. 

I  0 

Al.  =  'tiA  O.S.,  U.  K.  hole, 
m.,  p.  304. 

;^;aoo^  or  as  O.S.  'boiy  fog,  m., 
§  ^6. 

or  as  O.S.  earth,  m. 
IfyoiSH  Diz,  sheep,  §  88,  h. 

Al.  =  U.  Tkh.  f.  = 
O.S.  finger,  §  95,  g. 


291 


§89] 


CHANGE  OF  VOWELS. 


4s-Moua  u.  K.  =  :^j»oja  Al.  = 

«  it 

O.S.  stature, 
elbow  (also  of  a  stove) 
=  O.S.  heel,  ankle. 

^^03  =  O.S.  or  hill. 


shoulder,  m.  The  O.S. 

'-J  i 

is  a  tvinnowing  shovel 


=  N.S.  .i^xdoE),  which  also  is 

^  0 

an  oar  and  a  shoulder  blade. 

a^oaSt  =  (?)  O.S.  and  N.S.  jidi 

I*  I 

ears  of  corn. 

trice  =  O.S.  UJ)- 

right  (whence  N.S. 

fat).  Of.  O.S.  iZiaM 

orthodox. 


Similarly  we  have  IboS  U.  =  2dS  K.,  O.S.  an  age,  m. ;  ;i«ou  u. 
Sal.  Q.  Gaw.  Tkh.  J.  =  'a*  Ti.  Al.,  O.S.  day,  m.  For  4*30^  see  §  13. 


(2)  Rwasa  in  O.S.,  not  in  N.S, 
O.S.  'aa,  examination,  m. 

JaikS,  O.S.  ^Doa,  knee,  f. 

O.S.  laughter,  m. 

jLkD,  O.S.  'oa,  millet. 

O.S.  'op,  thread,  weft,  m. 
jisSib,  O.S.  'op,  sweat,  f.,  §  105. 

O.S.  mole. 

Za^M  bad,  O.S.  'oua  or  'L  desolate. 

~  n  *  f  ' 

with  affixes,  §  25  (5). 

O.S.  eye-paint. 


O.S.  bridle,  m. 

4sl~»  =  o.s.  (O.S.  pi. 

2^oLao),  a  sieve,  p.  282. 

O.S.  work,  m. 

Ti.  =  J.io-^  U.  Tkh.,  O.S. 

mouth,  edge  (of  a  sword),  m. 

2.Li-isa^,  O.S.  'ol3  (^  like  ^ 
usually),  m. 

JAmD,  O.S.  'oa,  far,  (}jb6^i  AL). 
iixXJX,  O.S.  'ox,  sesame,  f. 

^  ttf  t  f  ' 


Similarly  we  have  (or  'a  Al.)  often  for  Jjuoa  [or  ^dLaga 

O.S.]  a  6to*,  m. ;  2a^2  Ti.  for  2a^o2' O.S.  storeroom;  Ti.  =  '^ 
U.  low;  or  m.  error  ;  ^.iXhoM  or  a..ti  (also 


292 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


f-)  corner ;  or  'o\  handful.  Also  in  Al.  some  feminines 

in  are  often  pronounced  with  u,  as  tluhta. 

§  90.  Rwasa  in  part  of  the  Urmi  plain  is  generally  followed  by 
a  Yudh  sound  in  speaking.  Thus  bazaar  (so  O.S.)  becomes 

or  even  sometimes.  In  Sal,  Sp.  etc.  an  aspirated 

\  often  follows  Ewasa ;  as  for  hh  money.  And  also  either 

•*  I*  * 

A.  or  follow  similar  sounds,  such  as  SL _  or  au.  Thus 

•  • 

having  sat  (f.),  u  I  was  worth;  and  even  in  words  like 

stealing 

§  91.  In  Gaw.  J.  and  to  a  somewhat  smaller  extent  in  Q.  Sal./ 
Pthakha  and  Zqapa  very  often  have  the  second  long-Zlama  sound ; 
as  ^  one,  pron.  khe ;  first,  pron.  qemdya ;  he  heals, 

pron.  hesim,  §  35;  (O.S.  vinegar,  m.,  pron.  khela ;  iJb  for, 

in  Sal.  pron.  qe ;  soid,  f.,  pron.  gena ;  Joa  recess  in  a  luall,  f.,  in 

Sal.  pron.  kewi ;  f  urnace,  m.,  etuna.  So  some  Al.  words,  §  88. 

I  92.  Metathesis  is  very  common  in  N.S. 
a.  Vowels. 

U.  =  K.  =  O.S.  widoiver. 

echo,  £,  and  similar  words,  §  16, «,  for 
O.S.  daughter. 

o-s-  ^  W  vine,  f. 

U.  =  O.S.,  K.  companion,  f.,  §  17. 

2^^  U.,  {is)  K.  =  O.S.  {is)  new,  f  (root 

;16Sx^  ('^  K.)  =  o.s.  account,  recko7iing,  m. 


92] 


METATHESIS. 


293 


(p.  73)  f.  =  O.S.  m.  midday  meal,  noon. 

K.  =  O.S.  or  shield,  f. 

I'SVb,  O.S.  barley,  pi.  So  =  O.S.  barley¬ 

corn,  cf.  §  45,  d,  e. 

O.S.  scorpion,  f. 

(for  ;Lik*34)  =  0-S-  iron,  m.,  §  88,  g. 

lis^oX  or  I^OmX  (O.S.  2aox»^)  blackbird,  from  x^Ji  to  be 
black. 

(u<3k2k)  =  O.S.  October,  November,  m.,  ^  28  (12). 


b.  Go7isonants. 

Numerals  like  K.,  U.,  §  28  (1). 

Most  verbs  3  and  in  forming  the  verbal  noun,  etc.,  §  38. 
So  also  in  Sp.  in  the  present  of  some  verbs  as 

they  are  baptized,  s^^bwf  =  they  weave,  and  sometimes  in  Al. 

Also  the  following  : — 

2^1  MB.  or  U.  or  as  O.S.  to  swear. 

T-y  T-7  ry- 

Z.  Az.  or  Ti.  =  ;i2i  U.,  O.S.  a  vessel,  dish,  m. 

u^&2  Al.  (anhe  or  anhi ;  fern.  only)=  ^*0  they,  §  10. 

32  as  O.S.  or  U.  K.  or  U.  to  bake. 

••  .* 

JCtll  or  jE2tl  to  be  cold,  p.  120. 

$9  99  ^  I 

^  / 

Jb32  or  Jb2f>  (as  O.S.)  to  spit. 

JXb  K.  (as  O.S.),  U.,  Tkh.  to  wish.  So  Az.  imperative 

I  1'  " 

yJ32  wish. 

'  I* 

for  O.S.  ice,  m. 

(rare) =  U-.  Tkh.  cause,  subject. 


294 


GRAMMAU  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§92 


U.  or  IT.  or  Ti.  fist,  m.,  perh.  from 

}JusOo\^  handful,  which  is  also  sometimes  inverted  to  fcoxpV..  In 
N.S.  to  hold  in  the  hand,  §  118,  ni. 


^v.  f.  also  as  O.S.  or  eyebrow. 

=  O.S.  Tkh.  =  Ti.  coal. 

some  parts  of,  |  46. 

K.  to  tumble  or  'push  down,  perh.  =  K.  to  invert  =  O.S. 

tt  *' 

$ 

or  as  Arab,  or  K.  (piilt.  111. 

•* 

or  Ti.  f.  O.S.  111.  7ieedle. 

see  above. 

••  7, 


3k  MM  as 

'■  Sm 


O.S.  or  in  Baz,  to  reap. 


or  to  he  worth,  p.  124. 

to  fold  =  O.S.  (Pa‘el). 

a  variant  in  U.  for  to  taste. 

U.  K.  =  x^*  AL,  O.S.  to  hear,  lay  (eggs).  So  JlSk^bk-iab 

m  t$  '  u  \  ty  K/  /  t$  m  * 

U.  K.  Az. 

or  to  hasten,  p.  107. 

(as  O.S.)  and  to  learn. 

230A>a  U.  230ujQ>  K.  a  bond,  see  012,  and  p.  288. 

or  <^25  (the  O.S.  to  he  long. 

wbX  AL,  O.S.  or  wti23  Tkh.  to  he  green  (in  O.S.  to  he  pale). 

=  O.S.  ;aix»  or  ^i2  to  he  black. 

532a  or  5aa2  to  shut,  118,  e. 

'  Mrs»  '  iTfv  ^ 


§921 


METATHESIS. 


295 


jsZa  in  K.  =  IT.  to  subside,  as  a  swelling:,  Heb. 

Sal.  =  U.  or  U.  a  kokha  (village  officer). 

O.S.  or  wmsA  to  lick. 

or  \bb^kbO  full  to  the  brim. 
as  Arab,  or  curse,  f. 

/  /  9  f 

to  lap,  for  §  46,  p.  118. 

t 

2'^  or  or  iSi  all  K.  a  ivood,  m. 


^.^bO  K.  to  crawl. 
for  O.S.  to  freeze,  see  above. 

U.  =  N.S.  to  become  dark,  §  83  A.  (10). 
or  UQ>fl^bO  to  push.  See  ^pL  above. 

u  *  "  /  ,, 

IxxJm  from  O.S.  to  qo  round. 

l*‘  /  tm  ^ 

in  the  K.  sense  to  ivink,  perhaps  for 
§  83  A.  (2). 


0 

or  to  clap,  chirp.  The  latter  also  to  whisper. 

/IN  IN  rst  9  A  '  ±  ± 

See  below,  §  113,  e. 

or  to  make  a  hedge,  p.  265  and  §  113,  e. 

^^bibbO  K.  from  N.S.  b^b,  ^  119,  to  intertwine,  p.  262, 

O.S.  to  mumble,  perh.  conn,  with  p.  254. 

4i  9  ^  40  9  1 

I  4 

JjQXXO-bO  to  tohine=  or  ^o^obO,  p.  271. 

I^b^bO  («JQ>  often  as  f)  or  Z^a^Xd  as  O.S.  fine  fiour,  m. 

^3Dbd^  K.  or  K.  or  ^a^^kbO  U.  to  wedge  in,  p.  274. 

^/IN  9  '  II  (V  /  '  L 

0 

some  parts  of,  §  46. 

^^ajbbO  or  ^ajaaJlbO  or  x:^bxbb0  to  widnkle,  crumple,  p.  268. 


296 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  tangle,  from  N.S.  K.  (O.S.  to  tie  in  a 

knot,  §  119,  and  p.  262. 

U.  to  throb,  twitch,  =  O.S.  to  ivink,  fla]o  the  wings  (not 

*  ^ 

the  same  word  as  K.  or  U.  to  throw). 

or  to  change,  p.  269. 

to  spraivl,  Chald.  p.  269. 

K.  or  bfi^^XbO  U.  to  break,  O.S.  AtlX,  p.  268. 

K.  A1.  (as  O.S.)  or  K.  Al.  to  descend. 

Xbl  U.  =  xdi  Al.,  O.S.  =  wtili  K.  to  attack,  hit. 

41  44  '  •• 


JXKd  or  o2jCd  to  be  old,  5  46. 

^  »  •  ##  ^ 

or  or  Sal.  (with  ^  sound)  =  iSyjSS)-^ 

m  4  •  »■  •  •  '*1* 

O.S.  pillow. 

^abA>  or  =  O.S.  threshold. 

I^ObL  or  2^axL=  O.S.  (whence  y  in  N.S.)  rat, 

mouse,  m. 

ihL  U.  K.  or  U.  to  ram,  snow.  The  former  also  is  to  curdle 

✓ 

(but  pron.  2d2),  and  in  Al.  to  hold,  hold  together,  as  O.S.  Perhaps 
the  sense  of  rain  or  snow  is  that  of  drops  of  water  holding  together. 

O’.  Tkh.  Sal.  =  Ti.  =  Al.,  O.S.  nine,  m. 

Jxis-X  Tkh.  =  ^fis2  Sh.  =  ^jxisl  Ti.=  Al.  =  O.S. 

“  #1  *i  0  t$  0  tt  0 

nine,  f. 

U.  =  ctjAS  K.  (O.S.  ojAS)  to  lose  taste,  also  in  K.  to  be 

disliked. 

u.  or  ;:b4  K.  =  ;hoL  O.S.  branch,  m.  (in  Al.  Jijdoy). 

U.  K.  =  Tkh.y?0'M;er,  m.,  p.  289. 


92] 


METATHESIS. 


297 


1^2^  K.  =  U.  to  he  strained  (liquids),  Chald.  to  he  pressed, 
[the  first  also  to  leak,  to  dry  up,  the  second  to  he  pure  or  clear\ 

Tergawar,  to  crouch,  die,  used  of  dogs 

and  non-Christians. 

Tkh.  raven,  for  p.  289  ? 

U.  K.  =  23uS^  O.S.  Al.  Bo.  =  KXecSa,  key,  f.  [Greek 

words  are  constantly  taken  into  Syriac  from  the  accusative,  as  now 
in  Greece  the  accusative  remains  in  common  speech  to  the  exclusion 
of  the  nominative.]  In  Kurd.  qlil. 

or  ijQa  a  Qudshanis  man. 

Al.  =  yJAi,  p.  107.  Distinguish  x±)  to  he  cold,  p.  109. 
ixXh  as  O.S.  m.  f.  =  Arab.  a1.o.s  louse. 
fib  U.  Tkh.  or  or  K:  to  gather  (clothes). 

Sp.  to  he  tired,  p.  1 1 8. 

K.,  also  K.  (O.S.  J^)  to  think,  p.  303. 

often  in  U.  for  I  ride,  p.  130. 

or  permission,  f.,  Arab. 

or  wtJiXa  K.  to  find  out  about  (so  N.S.  p.  98),  receive 

news.  O.S. 

wtilS  U.  as  Arab.  =  bdxL  Al.  also  as  Arab,  to  he  in  love,  p.  109. 

4t  II 

to  run  about  or  away,  also  in  K.  to  wrench,  for  Cf. 

•* 

O.S.  .ttoi  to  break,  Heb.  to  rim  about.  Cf.  O.S.  and  N.S.  Vaax 
a  bazaar,  street. 

iiSok  or  a  lizard,  p.  34. 

UoaX  usually  laoiis  as  O.S.,  an  oven  in  the  ground,  p.  232. 

^  I  '  •'  11 

IT 

S.  GR.  38 


J 


298 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Consonants. 


§  93.  A  noun  is  often  repeated  for  emphasis,  or  to  express  a 
collective  substantive,  or  for  some  such  reason,  and  the  first  letter  is 
then  changed  to  Mim.  The  second  time  the  noun  is  sometimes 


shortened. 
of  man; 


Thus  JfOf  all  sorts  of  money ;  a  hind 

•'  i' 

or  some  sort  of  a  hook; 


passengers  luggage  (clothes  and  things  of  a  similar  nature) 

etc.  This  is  only  colloquial,  and  we  may  compare  the  English 
nursery  language,  ‘  Georgey-porgey  ’  and  the  like.  The  same  sense 


is  rarely  obtained  by  adding  §  25  (3). 


§  94.  Irregular  aspiration  in  N.S. 

In  the  following  cases  letters  are  aspirated  in  N.S.,  where  accord¬ 
ing  to  the  analogy  of  O.S.  they  should  be  hard. 

a.  When  the  ground  form  has  an  aspirate,  or  the  reverse,  all  the 
inflections  and  almost  always  all  the  derivatives  have  the  same  in 

N.S. ;  thus  we  have  for  the  present  of  the  verb  to  steal 

not  (i)  as  in  O.S.  §  84 ;  so  causatives  follow  the  primitives 

and  not  the  rule  in  O.S.  that  ‘  the  radical  following  the  Aph‘el  pre- 
formative  is  soft,  the  next  hard,  the  next  soft  Thus  (a)  not 

(a)  as  O.S.  to  give  in  marriage ;  and  so  several  causatives  or 

virtual  causatives  which  have  no  primitive,  as  OQjaii,  not  oQjajip, 
to  rebuke,  scold;  so  also  verbs  derived  from  nouns,  or  other  verbs,  as 
to  have  leprosy,  from  O.S.  and  N.S.  A  U.)  leprosy,  m. 

f. ;  U.  to  become  dark,  same  as  (both  a);  to  cloud 

over,  from  O.S.  and  N.S.  cloud,  p.  45,  from  which  we  must 

distinguish  {^)  shame,  pronounced  respectively  4wa,  oiba. 

^  m  '  ^  m 

But  we  have  ;^<iauo  old  age,  and  grace,  as  O.S.  (the 


§94] 


ASPIRATION. 


299 


latter  not  colloquial)  from  viaZj®,  We  have  u.  K. 

Ah,  O.S.  repentance,  against  6o^bO:  but  K.  Ah  We  find 

uJSLaS  U.  (foreign)  and  U.  hoi\i  =  rider  (the  former  in  Ah 

is  a  nobleman)  \  (foreign)  library,  f.,  against  write, 

book,  m. ;  female ;  and  so  some  others. 

b.  The  in  the  pronominal  affixes  of  the  second  person  is 

soft,  as  against  the  forms  which  probably  correspond  to  them  in  O.S. 
See  §  11. 

c.  In  Tkhuma,  Tiari,  Alqosh  and  neighbouring  districts  the 

terminations  have  ^  soft,  as  against  O.S.  Thus 

a  Syrian  woman  (O.S.  is);  l^oiao  death  (O.S.  is)-  So 
^  /  % 

house  (O.S.  is).  This  of  course  only  applies  to  the  dis¬ 
tricts  where  iS  and  d  are  at  any  time  aspirated.  In  Upper  Tiari 

the  endings  are  always  pronounced  esha,  see  below,  §  124. 

d.  In  Tkhuma  the  ^  in  the  second  person  personal  pronouns 

and  endings  of  verbs  is  soft.  Thus  thou,  m. ;  you  are,  ph 

$  %  ^ 

But  you,  has  ^  hard. 

e.  The  first  radical  of  verbs  in  either  conjugation  should  by  the 
usual  N.S.  rule  be  hard,  but  there  are  the  following  exceptions : — 

(A)  Al.  Bo.  Z.  to  understand. 

remember. 


Al.  to  be  sorry. 

U.  to  conquer.  In  K.  m. 
isaa  Al.  to  subdue. 


or  Al.  to  dine. 

,«■  ,«■ 


Also  in  Al.  Bo.  Z.  a  few  other  foreign  verbs  beginning  with  Pe. 

f  The  following  are  exceptions  to  the  rule  that  the  second 
radical  of  second  conjugation  triliterals  should  be  hard  : 

to  clean,  prune,  in  K.  to  cauterize  (under  influence  of  Jap 
to  be  clean). 


800 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


^3^  to  infovTYi,  in  Ashitha,  ©Isowhor©  with  hard  Dalath. 

The  verb  or  is  sometimes  spelt  with  medial  3 , 

but  this  seems  to  be  inaccurate,  see  §  47. 

g.  The  names  of  the  first  five  days  in  the  week  in  N.S.  univer¬ 
sally  have  3  for  O.S.  3,  as  ^3L5L3^  for  In  N.S.  the  3 

makes  a  diphthong  with  the  Pthakha :  as  kho-shiba. 


h.  Also  the  following  : 
llsl :  oisl  MB.  Sh.  come  (Imp.), 

Tkh.  id.  =  O.S. 

:  Ois  §  46. 

U.  =  O.S.  (3)  beg¬ 

gar,  §  88,  g. 

;330U  =  O.S.  ^302  length,  m. 


in  K.  lath  or  Uth,  Al.  Uth,  U. 

* 

lit,  there  is  not,  O.S.  fis.  But 

uS  in  Al.  is  Idti. 

0  / 

see  p.  291. 

J.  K.  =  ;3'i^  u.,  O.S.  = 

J33^  Biz  shee'p,  §  88,  h. 


I  95.  Irregular  hardening  in  N.S. 

In  the  following  cases  the  O.S.  rule  is  not  followed. 

a.  ^  and  p  are  always  hard  in  U.  J.  Sal.  Q.  Gawar,  etc.  Also 
see  below,  p.  803. 

b.  In  the  second  conjugation  the  preformative  does  not 

soften  the  following  letter,  whether  the  )aL^  have  a  vowel  or  not, 

e.g.  (b)  =  O.S.  (d)  to  thin  out ;  ywAadb  =  O.S.  wm33^ 

^  I#  !■  •  I#  f  »  !■  / 

(3)  to  cause  to  be  sacrificed.  And  so  with  virtual  causatives  such  as 
to  preach,  O.S.  ;  likJCSoi  to  be  lazy,  Arab. ;  K. 

to  give  or  take  interest,  cf.  O.S.  money ;  to  justify, 

§  119. 

c.  The  prepositions  p,  and  the  conjunction  o  do  not 

aspirate  the  following  consonant  as  in  O.S.,  nor  do  they  take  a  vowel. 


95] 


HARDENING. 


801 


unless  perhaps  a  half  Zlaina  (see  page  290) ;  thus  N.S.  = 

^  ^  / 

iatsoap  (3)  O.S.  which  is  in  the  hook. 

d.  Contrary  to  O.S.  analogy  the  second  radical  in  the  first  con¬ 
jugation  is  hard  in  N.S.  in  the  following  verbs,  mostly  of  foreign 
origin : 

to  foam,  cf.  N.S.  or  foam,  f. 

^5^  Al.  to  grieve,  p.  299. 

K.  to  cut  up  (sheep,  etc.),  cf.  N.S.  as  O.S.  to  sacrifice. 
Al.  =  K.,  §  123,  to  subdue. 

Dip  K.  to  eat  one's  fill. 

K.  to  he  sticky,  cf.  N.S.  and  O.S.  }up  honey,  m. 

D^p  to  strike  with  the  hand  or  fist.  Distinguish  iap  to  remember, 
to  fear,  §  88,  D,  c. 

for  bfiii3LjN>  to  hug,  cf.  O.S.  an  emhi  ace,  Chald. 

to  hug ;  so  Heb. 

to  find  out,  cf.  N.S.  IdOU  word,  news,  m.,  Arab. 

K.  to  grow  perfect,  cf.  §  81  (5),  Arab. 

to  sink,  U.  K.  print,  Al.  from  Arab.)  O.S.  cf. 

O.S.  and  N.S.  a  die,  m.,  and  Al.  to  sink  into  sleep. 

(is)  U.  K.,  '2  Ah,  to  sit,  O.S.  (^). 

to  beckon. 

'  #1 

wmD^  to  lick,  p.  295,  (hardening  so  as  to  distinguish  Kap  and 
Kh6ith). 

to  be  gentle,  O.S.  cf.  O.S.  and  N.S.  participial  adjective 
gentle,  whence  is  derived  i  in  the  N.S.  verb. 


302 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


^  > 
A 

I# 


Ti.  to  bite,  §  120,  c. 

iSjii  to  trust,  venture,  talk,  not  to  he  homesick;  and  with  a  ^ 
sound  to  expect,  cf.  O.S.  yhxa  to  hope,  think,  to  expect,  announce, 
and  O.S.  hope,  N.S.  contentment  (sense  from  Arab.). 

to  he  hushed,  Arab. 

Tkh.  (a  J.)  to  dam  up,  fill  —  O.S.  aisjKD  to  shut,  §  77  (2). 
wbCsL  K.  to  he  old ;  O.S.  N.S.  is  under  influence  of 

II  '  •  r  ^0^0 

ancient,  §  81  (5). 

K. ;  O.S.  C?-^,  §  92,  h,  p.  296. 

g  4^ 

K.  (3  U.,  O.S.)  to  collect  as  water  in  a  reservoir,  also  (K.) 

I 

^  ^  ‘J 

to  he  angry;  is  to  hail  water.  Cf.  O.S.  or  a  reservoir  ; 
N.S.  a  mug,  m. 

K.  A1.  to  receive  =  O.S.  and  U.  ;  hence  3. 

II  11/7  I#  ^ 

is  to  complain :  also  in  K.  to  prosecute,  as  O.S. 
to  he  tired,  pp.  118,  297. 

0133,  in  U.  Z.  Al.  to  ride,  p.  130,  O.S.  oii  or  033,  cf.  N.S. 

•  <»'  •/  •«*> 

and  O.S.  rider  (whence  a  in  the  N.S.  verb). 

5^3  to  be  soft,  cf.  O.S.  <^3  and  5^3  to  make  soft,  and  cf.  O.S., 
N.S.  }3^3  soft  (whence  3  in  the  N.S.  verb). 

K.  to  he  like,  Arabic,  cf.  Al.  =  O.S.  to  liken. 

^  K.  to  he  innocent,  guileless. 

A-l.  to  accuse,  A.rab. 

to  adhere  to,  to  he  a  follower  of,  Arabic,  cf  O.S.  3^js  to 
follow  for  vengeance. 


95] 


HARDENING. 


303 


to  remain  firm,  K.  to  stay,  A].,  Arab. 
yj^bkis  K.  to  thrust,  prod,  O.S.  See  ^  104. 

it  '  i  '  0  If  ■  1/ 

e.  In  the  following  verbs  the  last  letter  is  hard. 

All  verbs  ending  in  ^  and  3  make  those  letters  hard  in  the  pre¬ 
terite  except  in  A].,  e.g.  I  did,  ^3^2  Ti.  I  said  (= 


First  Conjugation — 
to  he  busy. 

to  kneel,  O.S.  and  The  hard  ^  from  N.S. 

(O.S.  'oo)  a  knee. 

(but  5^^  Ti.)  to  laugh,  O.S.  or  5^^^.  The  hard 

^  from  N.S.  (O.S.  laughter. 

U.  or  K.  to  conquer,  Arab.  O.S.  >3^Vi,  p.  299. 

^2?  to  fill  up  (^23  K.  is  to  trample,  strnke  =  Chald.  ‘^‘7.'?*^ 
tread). 

to  sweat,  O.S.  ;s,  cf.  (O.S.  'od)  sweat. 

K.  to  beat  down  (earth),  O.S.  hard  ^  from  O.S. 
a  footstep  ? 


K.  or  iijolb  K.  to  think,  see  §  92,  perh.  from  O.S. 

meditation. 

to  put  out  (the  eyes). 
to  he  sullen,  Arab. 

to  curry  (horses),  O.S.  and  Arab,  and  Chald. 

root  the  hard  ^  in  N.S.  from  Arab. 

to  be  dark,  O.S.  cf.  }Xxm  daj'kness,  m.,  p.  290. 


304 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


to  ash  for,  Arab. 

U.  to  pluck,  O.S.  4s- 
Saji.  Al.  to  rob,  take  captive,  Arab. 

SJtiS  K.  (df  from  Arab.)  to  make  a  hole,  make  hollow,  O.S. 
cf.  O.S.  and  N.S.  eye  of  a  needle,  m.  (d  N.S.,  ^  O.S.)  and 

jiUli  female,  f.,  which  has  ^  in  both  languages.  Cf.  p.  47. 

dliiCd  to  rob,  take  captive,  Arab. 

K.  Al.  to  be  pleased,  will  (usually  impersonally),  cf 
Al.  will,  Arab. 

Al.  to  torment,  Arab. 

II*  ' 

f  ^  ^ 

U.  for  which  see  above  {d). 

to  stab,  burst  (so  Chald.  Pa'el,  but  ^).  The  hard  ^  to  dis¬ 
tinguish  it  from  as  O.S.  to  chafe,  and  as  O.S.  to  fly. 

j4ja  to  turn  aside,  Arab. 

\23,  see  above  {d). 

K.  to  finish,  be  ready. 

or  wbXa  Tkh.,  see  §  92. 

U.  (or  K.)  to  subside  as  a  swelling,  or  escape  as  wind 
from  a  bladder,  §  92,  (root  in  Heb.  to  subside,  whence  hard  ^). 

to  pluck,  O.S.  *  (also  in  Al.  Ti.  is  to  pluck,  in 
O.S.  to  extract). 

to  partake,  as  Arab.  So  N.S.  partaker,  m.  Dis¬ 
tinguish  O.S.  and  N.S.  remainder,  O.S.  to  remain. 

■i 

to  fasten  the  eyes  K.,  be  dirty  K.,  get  a  bad  name  K.,  plant  U. 

to  give  up  (a  bad  habit)  Kurd.,  Arab. 


§  95]  HARDENING.  305 

Second  Conjugation  triliterals: 

U.  or  K.  to  answer,  Arab.  etc.  =  O.S. 

to  tempt,  try,  Arab. 

\OOJ.!S8  K.  to  air  before  the  fire,  cf.  N.S.  steam,  m. 

U.  ^o'i'SO  K.  to  join,  marry,  O.S.  4^9?  Pa^el.  For  ^ 
cf.  N.S.  and  O.S.  a  pair,  m.,  ^6vyo<;. 

JSUdo  to  love,  O.S.  and  For  df  cf.  O.S.  and  N.S. 

n  •  •  /  •  II  * 

love,  m. 

istiJS^  to  be  or  lyiahe  lame,  Kurd.  So  N.S.  or 

lame. 

to  saddle,  O.S.  Pa‘el.  For  cf.  O.S.  and  N.S. 

a  saddle,  m. 

to  wonder.  See  above. 

iir^h 

3yiM  K.  Al.  to  torment.  See  above. 

Iim  II* 

or  Same  as  above  (all  hard  Kap). 

do^bo  U.  to  repent,  Arabic.  In  K.  Al.  <a2Cs,  also  Al.  ^Z^bO, 
O.S. 

asais'so  K.  (or  df^bo)  to  uphold. 

'*  >1 

U.  Same  as  above. 

f.  In  the  following  qiiadriliterals  the  second  or  fourth  radical 
is  hard  : 

("nr  in  fanm.^  Rr.n.m,.  Spp  above  {d). 

^^yL^bO  or  K.  to  crawl. 

to  be  doubleminded,  U.,  to  be  much  patched ,  K. 


s.  GR. 


.39 


306 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


^0  t  ot)  j  or 
to  peck. 

(in  Tkh.  ^  is  like  JJ>)  to  litter,  dung  =  \js%'so  K.  as 
O.S.  Pa.  See  below  (g). 

U.  =  is3^  Al.  See  §  123. 

to  he  pale.  In  K.  to  prod,  prick,  §  83  (2). 

U.  to  he  or  take  cold  =  U.  In  Al.  =  to 

\n  t  M  tt  , 

spoil,  tr.,  as  O.S. 

to  injure. 

^560^  to  arm  oneself,  Kurdish. 

to  he  dry  or  thirsty,  crackle  as  a  dry  kettle.  In  U.  to  soh. 
to  pant,  §  45,  g. 

to  prod,  §  83  (2). 
to  groan,  perh.  O.S.  wdii^Z. 
to  wander  about 
to  stammer. 

to  shrink,  slip  from  the  hand. 

to  pull  wool,  tear.  In  K.  to  whisper,  §§  113,  e,  123. 

K.  to  hoil  food,  under  influence  of  O.S.  ^^5  to  soften. 
isSis’^  to  tremble,  shiver,  0.  S.  i}.5  =  g35^  K.  and  K. 

to  sew  loosely,  tack, 
to  weave  loosely,  K.,  shake,  U. 
to  guide,  govern.  See  §  83  (14). 


3^’:k 

II  / 

^#1  $ 
A/  I 


95] 


HARDENING. 


307 


to  tack,  stitch,  he  pitted  with  small  pox. 

g.  Also  the  following  have  irregularly  hard  letters : 

^2  there  is,  before  as  /  have. 

•  0  '00 

isXl  six  (f.),  K.,  O.S.  6sX, 

bu3  hy  means  of,  O.S. 

a  gull,  m.,  O.S.  one  who  laughs,  cf.  above  (e). 

lie,  m.  Should  by  rule  be  §  84  (8)  and  so  it  is  in 
Al.  and  O.S.  For  ^  cf.  ^  to  lie. 

litter,  dung,  m.,  O.S.  See  above  (/).  <i$ 

u  ’  tt  \  t  '' 

under  Arabic  influence. 

3UCD^3^  eleven,  O.S.  ^  (a). 

JlaouuM  a  currycomb,  m.,  as  the  verb  to  curry.  See  above  (e). 
f.  and  js3><>ajQ»  knife,  in  spite  of  §  84  (2)  because  of  O.S. 
id.,  which  has  hard  Kap  in  accordance  with  §  84  (5). 
time,  i,  O.S.  (hence  a). 

heel,  f.,  O.S. 

plough,  f.,  in  spite  of  §  84  (2),  because  of  O.S. 

like  finger,  f.,  O.S.  So  Al.  §  89,  h 

through  Arabic). 

yesterday,  O.S.  commonly  J^)a06sl,  but  uX-boCs  is  also 

found,  §  86. 

^9?  f.  and  >^03  place,  have  a  against  §  84  (8),  and  so  in  O.S. 

h.  Generally  when  words  have  their  last  letter  hard,  especially 
if  other  than  verbs,  they  may  be  presumed  to  be  foreign  words :  such 

as  ansiuer,  m.,  steep,  indeed,  jjQjCP  because. 


308 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§  96 


Interchange  of  the  Consonants,  etc. 

§  96.  2  prosthetic  is  very  common  in  N.S.  as  also  in  O.S. 

We  thus  have  many  Greek  words  beginning  with  ar  CiyO),  (tx 

('a^A>),  etc.,  as  a  scholar  school,  is  rare, 

being  used  instead],  Stephen,  elements 

(^aroix^la).  So : — 

or  or  we,  O.S.  (^old  form 

Sal.  or  Sal,  =  O.S.,  U.  K.  Al.  siri. 

ih^i  dung,  for  2^,  =  O.S. 

{  *  • 

below,  O.S.  Al.  §  67. 

Al.  =  JiSAA  how  much  ?  §  67. 

^2:^2  hundred,  O.S.  J2M  (also  N.S.,  §  26). 

Ab?  f.  foot,  peril,  for  J^ai=0.s. 

2aaS2  U.  'l  K.  a  mill,  f.,  for  :  O.S.  ^a. 

or  'L  or  4^^b  K.  or  J-iO-bob  Ti.  m.,  =  O.S.  Jx^oh 

pomegranate. 

sXMl  Tkh.  Q.  (3  Ti.  Ash.  Sh.  Al.)  seven,  f.,  O.S.  yShx. 

30bAX2  K.  seventeen,  O.S.  asOboa  etc. 

*  §  $$  '  *9 

(a)  February,  m.,  or  in  K.  as  O.S. 
m.  six,  m.  (so  also  O.S.  sometimes),  and  so  all  derivatives. 
J^^2  nine,  K.,  and  so  derivatives,  see  §§  26 — 28. 

So  sometimes  in  Al.  with  a ;  e.g.  pron.  elbethi.  On 

the  other  hand  =  O.S.  m.  quince;  and  see 

p.  280. 


§97] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


309 


§  97.  o  has  the  sound  of  ^  in  in  the  midst. 

So  Sal.  pillow,  §  92. 

2*^  to  wish,  in  MB.  and  so  in  Tkh.,  5  46. 

V  ^ 

to  hug,  §  95,  d. 

Sp.  to  squirt  milk  from  an  udder, 
to  foam,  §  95,/ 

in  U.,  but  O  in  K.,  to  say  grace,  O.S.  %^oso— grace 
after  meat,  also  compline,  because  said  in  the  monasteries  after  the 
only  full  meal  of  the  day  to  he  satisfied,  O.S. 

K.  (sometimes)  to  look  closely  Ti.,  make  firm,  Tkh. 

punish,  Tkh. 

to  expect,  §  95,  d 

finger,  f.,  O.S.  . 

^  has  the  sound  of  3  in  jdSi  Alaps:  pi.  of  ASlf.  (not  in  sing.). 

So  to  incite,  he  industrious,  O.S. 

to  search,  (but  ^  sound  in  K.),  §  83  (12).  There  is  also 

to  mix  up:  O.S.  to  enclose,  include. 

a  plough,  f.,  in  the  district  of  Narwa,  where  3  retains  its 
sound,  §§  85,  104. 

(in  Baz)  to  he  warm  or  thirsty,  to  fear  greatly.  Elsewhere 
Be.  In  U. 

(in  Tkh.)  to  he  crooked,  §  113,y.  Elsewhere  Pe. 

So  bastard  =  Turk,  brass  =  Turk.  ^Ji  i  perh. 

cheese  =  O.S.  (root  For  see  §  107. 


310 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


Probably  also  uQ>.aXy-bO  =  lAfaulbO,  both  to  push;  and 
=  both  to  change.  See  above,  §  92. 

plate,  has  ^  sound  in  sing.,  ^  sound  in  pi. 

^  is  silent  after,  or  coalesces  with  Rwasa,  as  against. 

O  is  silent  in  give  (imperative)  =  O.S.  and  its  plural. 

So  in  Tkh.  the  act  of  giving,  §  46.  Perhaps  a  flame, 

$  ^ 

m.  =  Chald.  and  Heb.,  cf.  O.S.  .aojii  to  flame.  ^  is  often 

silent  in  the  imp.  of  verbs  see  §  41,  as  wboox  leave  alone,  pro¬ 

nounced  shuq  or  shwuq. 


§  98.  is  silent  in  many  words,  chiefly  in  those  which  have 
in  O.S.  The  transition  from  to  ^  is  a  very  natural  one. 
So  K.  (rare  in  U.)  or  U.  Al.  or  K.  to  divide, 

in  Al.  sometimes  =  O.S.  to  divide  into  two  parts, 

to  divide  into  several  parts,  also  to  doubt.  Cf.  m 


p.  103.  The  \  remains  in  half,  m.  (O.S.  and  in  the 

O.S.  phrase  retained  still  and  always  now  prefixed  to  the  Nicene 
Creed :  jS?  iA  in  truth  and  without  doubt.  So : — 


to  look  intently,  O.S.  p.  98. 

U.,  K.  Z.=  Z.  also,  p.  161. 

a  bridle,  bit,  m.,  O.S.  §  89  ;  in  K.  Sh.  a  yaw. 

Al.  to  hire,  O.S.  Hence  Al.  a  hired  servant. 

K.  a  shield,  f.,  O.S. 

^  A  ^ 

or  O.S.  to  mix  liquids :  esp.  hot  and  cold  water. 

K.  to  dawn,  O.S.  o^. 


98—100] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


811 


K.  the  daw7iy  m.,  O.S.  or 

small  axe,  chopper,  m.,  O.S.  Ail.  Pronounced  in  N.S. 
nar'a,  as  if  with  ^  for 

K.  to  make  a  hedge,  O.S.  4^. 

Al.  avenue  (=  U.),  O.S.  a  hedge  or  loose  wall. 

AiA:i  m.  and  see  p.  230. 

to  feel,  to  wake,  O.S.  A?- 
almond,  m.,  §  88,  h, 
to  kindle,  O.S.  3^. 

to  shake,  O.S.  (we  have  also  N.S.  to  disturb). 

iHox  ra.  husmess,  affair  =  Kmd.,  Turk,  shughul. 

and  a  7iative  lamp,  f.  =  O.S.  m. 

The  falls  in  all  parts  of  these  verbs,  and  in  their  causatives. 

§  99.  and  ^  are  frequently  interchanged,  the  former  being 
more  used  in  U.,  the  latter  in  Tiari,  as  or  Ak  soul,  self ; 
-aiV  ^  or  ^  instead  of  me. 

For  A  see  below,  §  113,  m. 

§  100.  There  is  no  A^  comes  in  various  ways. 

a.  It  represents  ^  or  ^  in  words  from  Arabic,  Persian,  Turkish, 
etc.,  as  U.  7iice,  sum  total. 

h.  In  some  cases  it  corresponds  with  A^  of  O.S.  as  to  split 

open  (a  vessel  or  skin),  to  he  talkative,  perh.  O.S.  to  uncover, 

to  scrape,  =  N.S.,  O.S.  :  also  in  N.S.  to  strip  leaves  (as  in 


312 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  100 


Arab.),  in  K.  to  rake  rnud,  as  O.S.  also  to  slide  (Jamal 

from  Arab.),  to  stone  (a  person),  as  O.S.  (Jama]  from 

Arab.),  K.  to  look  on  at  a  show,  perb.  O.S.  to  amuse 

oneself,  also,  as  O.S.  to  interpret  (Jamal  from 

Arab.).  For  cf  h,  below. 

c.  Perhaps  in  to  he  numb,  for  from  O.S. 

4.=  to  feel,  see  or  below  (/i). 

d.  ^  =  f  in  to  move,  intr.,  probably  =  Chald.  id. ; 

U.=  o^A  K.  to  rebuke;  K.  =  U.  to  shoot  with  a  gun,  peck. 


perhaps  connected  with  O.S.  and  N.S.  a  dot,  m.  and  Ti. 

to  bite,  §  120,  c. 

e.  \  =  »  in  or  an  Urmi  man,  §  81  (1). 

/.  ^  in  to  crawl,  creep  —  O.S.  xii.  Perhaps 

this  is  connected  with  insect,  m.  (O.S.  ji^S)  and 

to  creep,  ant,  m.  in  J^obO  m.  ca^=  O.S. 

(fioaxos). 


g.  =  wti  in  XJ.  also  to  sprout  (also  K.) — 

same  root  as  N.S.  to  be  green,  O.S.  green. 

K.  to  snatch,  for  §  95 ;  cf. 

to  strip  off  (bark,  or  the  skin)  =  svVi!K  to 
strip,  O.S.  U.  to  rust,  from  N.S.  44  U.  or  44  K. 

rust,  m.,  Kurd. ;  U.  also  K.  to  be  numb,  perhaps 

from  O.S.  to  feel.  Cf.  above,  c. 

i.  d^  and  are  sometimes  interchanged,  as  in  to  be 

tired,  in  Ti.  (elsewhere  or  is  to  be  smooth) ; 


* 


§§  100—103] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


313 


K.  =  U.  to  sprout  (see  above,  g),  K.  =  U.  = 

Baz  to  he  \oarm  or  thirsty,  to  fear  greatly ;  or  f.  lane, 

quarter  of  a  city ;  and  so  some  other  foreign  words  where  N.S. 

f.  luallet  =Tark.  f.  sac/r  =  Turk. 


§  101.  in  many  parts  of  Kurdistan,  especially  in  MB.  and  Ti., 

has  often  the  sound  of  wm  as  body,  pronounced  ;  this  is 

very  common. 

In  other  districts  also  we  have  >1^  and  ^  interchanged,  as 
u.  =  K.  to  cosigner;  or  2^MbO  Al.  to  dine  (at  midday), 

K.  or  U.  K.  to  covet,  long  for.  =  «»•  in 

Al.  =  U.  care,  trouble,  f. 

For  the  interchange  of  and  and  hb  see  below,  113,  120. 


§  102.  and  f  are  interchanged  in  or  to  scratch 

(=  ‘VH,  N.S.  and  O.S.) ;  also  to  be  squeezed  out,  as  juice.  So  N.S. 
a  scratch.  =  a^iao  K.  to  ring  as  metals,  clink,  also 

K.  See  §  110,  e. 

\  stands  for  p  in  ;boA^J  Tkh.  today,  §  67. 


§  103.  9  often  falls  in  N.S.,  as  in  the  following  words  : 


Sisfool  (  OO]  K.  MB.)  master  tvorkman ;  cf.  23^A>o2  §  19,  where 
the  D  reappears. 

^  one  (O.S.  x^),  and  in  any  compounds,  but  not  in  2^  §111- 
Q.  eleven,  see  ^  26. 

new  (m.)  §  21  (9)  =  or  Q.  [The  Q.  fern,  is 
kheta,  but  also  as  U.] 


S.  GK. 


40 


314 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


0^ 

several  parts  of,  in  Gaw.  Sal.  §  46. 

Sal.  =  knowledge. 

2^*  hoy.  O.S.  ihSl, 
girl,  for 

J.  mide.  In  U.  pronounce  a  §  17,  p.  88. 

iJblso  or  ^2i0  Al.  =  2aaib  hoio  much,  p.  168,  cf.  233±)  obi 

so  much. 

how  can  I  tell?  =  ^DOdO  §  78. 

O.S.  Ir  N.S.  sign  of  the  past  tense. 

before.  O.S.  ^3^. 

O.S. 

Al.,  final  Nun  for  a  ?  See  §  67  s.  v.  5-i^^. 

Perhaps  also  ^  (JSs-aOlI  Q.  Sal.)  ear  is  for  from  O.S. 

^ a2  or  for  the  pi.  ;  and  o^a  for  Cjaua  §  70  (3). 


5  104.  a  has  the  sound  of  in  several  words. 

^  • 

a.  At  the  end  of  many  foreign  words,  such  as  (^)  besides, 

aA?kbb  mosque,  indeed,  ysjA  trick,  w  fi  'ee,  etc.  But  the  a 

sound  is  also  used,  and  reappears  if  a  termination  is  added ;  e.g. 
}b«oaf2  freedom. 

b.  Also  the  following  : 

U.  to-night,  §  67. 

by  means  of,  §  68. 

UCDiMia  to  thrust,  in  U. ;  in  K.  the  sound  is  between  a  and  fis. 

Chald.  Dri“l. 

a^3a  to  re^nember,  under  influence  of  O.S.  abais2  id.  (Az.  ^). 


§§  104,  105] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


315 


A1.  renienihrance,  in. 

A1.  =  ^  Ti.  to  sink, 
thus,  §  67. 

(SskiisbO  =  K.  to  hang,  p.  257. 

It*  »  It  t  1/  i 

bjp  K.  =  Al.  to  pass  (Arab,  with  Te). 
plough,  §§  85,  97. 

?  VO  in  order  that  {qdt:  also  qd-d). 
lyl^eJb  O.S.  an  owl,  f.  (pi.  l6f^oJb). 

V 

But  ^  has  the  sound  of  D  in  to  boil,  ferment,  (in  U.,  but  in 

*  •  •  • 

K.  the  ^  sound  remains,  as  in  O.S.  Of.  N.S.  K.  to 

0  O  9 

he  boiled  to  rags). 

*m*l  ^ 

In  Al.  the  pi.  of  Church,  is  pronounced  etdtha. 

Compare  also  U*  opportunity,  p.  289. 

a  =  ^  in  Sh.  (see  §§  103,  105). 

§  105.  a  has  the  sound  of  in  the  following  words  : 

a2a  to  return,  be  converted,  in  MB.  only  (elsewhere  the  a  sound) 
§46. 

(also  with  a)  to  extinguish.  So  O.S.  Pa‘el. 

^^a  to  prick,  indent,  O.S. 

^^a  to  sweat,  O.S.  (..^^  in  U.  but  a  in  K.). 

ICsS^a  sweat,  O.S.  'oa.  But  a  in  K.,  and  also  in  U.  in  the 
sense  of  resin,  sap. 

to  know  (in  present  only),  in  U.  In  other  places  the  a 
sound,  but  see  §§  103,  104.  So 

The  Jews  of  Azerbaijan  pronounce  ^aa  with  a  sound. 
See  5  104. 


316 


(JUAMMAK  OF  VEllNACULAR  SYrIiAO.  [§§  106,  107 


§  106.  ?  =  *>3  0^  f . 

a.  D  apparently  =  ^  in  ^^1^2  a  husbcmd’s  hy'othei'  and 
a  liiishand's  sister  =  O.S.  2^031^, 

So  jsadbo  Al.  =  again,  5  67. 

.in  I  ■  #»  ’  O 


h.  3  and  ^  are  interchanged  in  foreign  words,  especially  in  the 
Alqosh  dialect  which  is  most  influenced  by  the  Arabic.  Thus 

Al.  to  subdue,  tU.  Vf  subject.  So  compare 

isi0^  K.  service  (U.  with  K.  Al.  to  serve  (§  114), 

Al.  a  male  servant,  is-iOX^  K.  or  Sh.  maid  se^'vant, 

’  ■  •••  !• 

and  ifol  U.  Tkh.  with  ipof  Al.  ready.  In  Zakhu  this  change  is 
frequent  in  Syriac  words,  §  124. 

some,  is  in  Al.  sometimes  pronounced  khddma. 


§107.  <7)  is  much  interchanged  with  especially  in  words  from 

the  Arabic.  As  in  the  N.S.  dialects,  except  only  that  of  the  Plain  of 
Mosul  (Alqosh),  where  the  people  hear  Arabic  spoken  on  all  sides  of 

them  and  so  have  learnt  its  sounds,  there  are  only  the  two  sounds  CTj 
and  ^  (or  to  represent  the  Arabic  o,  ^  and  there  is  much 
confusion.  In  the  Alqosh  vernacular  MSS.  referred  to  in  the  Intro¬ 
duction  we  And  ^  (even  at  the  beginning  of  a  word),  ^  =  wm, 

0  =  0].  But  this  assumes  a  difference  between  wm  and  which 

does  not  exist  in  the  other  N.S.  dialects ;  and  to  represent  words 
with  an  aspirated  initial  letter  is  against  all  Syriac  usage,  see  §  94,  e. 

When  Arabic  words  are  taken  into  Syriac  0  almost  always  be¬ 
comes  a] ;  ^  becomes  wm  ;  and  the  intermediate  ^  becomes  either 

O]  or  usually  the  former,  especially  in  U.,  but  bold  (in  Al. 

difficult)  is  always  pronounced  with  and  so  its  derivatives 

t  ,  , 

K.  Al.  to  be  brave,  U.  (5aMf»  K.)  to  embolden:  cf.  tSMonf 

trouble  (f.),  in  K.  difficult.  .ffisMkOa  slander,  f.  =  Arab. 


i  107,  108] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


317 


O  and  WM  are  interchanged  in  N.S.  in  the  following  words : — 

U.  K.  =  lOmS  A1.  report,  f.,  Turk.  woir-J. 

U.,  Ah  K.  foal  of  an  ass,  rn.  (in  Tkh. 

U.  Ah,  K.  power,  m. 

5a<A<7f  U.,  M  K.,  governor,  m.,  but  doctor,  always  has  a\, 

1^6]  K.  or  JJt)Sai  K.  =  jSDdUi  Ah  prison,  f.  (in  U.  h)- 

Jdai  U.,  wfiL  Ah  Tkh.  right,  just,  true;  a\^o  justice.  Cf.  p.  285. 
U.,  ^  K.,  to  govern  (but  51^^,  have  wm  only, 

§  45,  h). 

;?oj»  or  Ah  to  say,  Arab.,  conn,  with  Jjbapo  to  tell,  §  119? 

or  '23  Tkh.  Sh.  = '«»  Ti.  carpet  (=  U.). 

S^apo  U.,  '^io  Al.  (not  used  in  K.),  to  beget,  bear.  So  So^apt 
U.  Tkh.  =  A-5O!  U.  f.  =  So^'sp  K\.  produce,  fruit  [=  Tkh.  = 

;I^2  Tkh.  =  .iiAs  Al.  =  U.  Tkh.  =  232^  Al.  =  33  Al.]. 

JOSha^  U.,  K.,  to  clasp,  p.  267,  cf.  §  95,  d. 

to  sniijf  about  as  a  dog  =  U.  to  pant  (sound  oj). 

U.  counsel,  cf.  K.  to  take  counsel,  in  Ah  to  recon¬ 

cile  (from  Arab.) ;  also  to  chop,  K.  =  O.S.  4s 

K.,  O.S.,  Ah  to  remember,  understand,  in  O.S.  Pa.  to 

compare.  Often  ^  in  Ah  Bo.,  §  94,  e.  The  07  is  from  Arab.  See  p.  98. 

to  run,  O.S.  and  Ah 
§  108.  o)  is  frequently  silent. 

a.  Always  at  the  end  of  a  word  (except  U.  to  pant, 

§  107),  though  not  marked  with  talqana. 

b.  In  many  parts  of  verbs  of  the  form  1^0)^  and  their  causatives, 
5  46. 


318 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§108 


c.  In  the  following  words ; — 


th{s  =  lj^a1  §  12,  and  many  derived  adverbs, 
God,  in  the  adverbs  on  p.  159. 

OcriifsXl  appetite,  f.,  Arab.  Turk. 

U.  K.  repo7't,  f.,  §  107. 


67. 


usually  §  16,  wifei>  brother, 

time,  has  oj  frequently :  and  the  plural  is  often  pron.  gd~i. 
Sal.,  or  fault,  f.  (so  Sal.  our  fault). 

^  ooia  to  cemeiit,  see  below. 

K.  =  ll6aia  U.  =  jl0oa  O.f:  X  cement,  §  76  (5). 

007,  u07  and  several  other  pronouns,  §§  10 — 12. 

Jbo7,  obo)  was,  were;  and  various  parts  of  JooT  to  he,  §  46. 

to  please,  some  parts  of,  §  46. 

♦^a)f  f.  intellect,  Arab.  Turk. 

JSOOlOf  a  simimer  pasture  (the  encampment),  see  p.  98. 
to  give,  some  parts  of,  §  46. 


also  'OQ^  as  O.S.,  a  Jeiv,  also  Yudh  silent. 

07-bob  to  go  out  (as  a  candle),  to  die,  all  parts  of,  O.S.  o^b^  to  be 
dai'kened. 

K.  to  pour  in  oil  or  grease,  O.S.  ♦^^^0  to  be  greasy,  §  39. 
Ti.  Al.  to  vomit,  §§  45,  g  ;  87,  b. 

K.  =  ^07^^  U.  to  defile.  See  p.  98. 
to  disturb,  cf.  O.S.  disturbance,  p.  275. 

Tkh.  to  light  a  candle,  §  45,  g. 

^  0 

K.  to  fast,  from  Kurd.  Turk.  a  fast. 


319 


108,  109] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


K.  to  acquaint,  to  know,  §  87,  h. 
to  daivn,  several  parts  of,  §  46. 

K.  to  hear  luitness,  sometimes  in  all  tenses. 

Al.  Bo.  (sA),  §  107,  has  often  aj. 

^  ^  • 
dried  manure  (for  stable  litter). 

U.,  all  tenses,  §  92. 

d5  free,  rid,  contracted  from  isoiS  ease,  Arab.,  Nold.  p.  59  ? 
Rome,  and  its  adjective. 

shd-i,  a  halfpenny,  s.  and  pi.  (lit.  SliaJis  money). 


d.  Also  the  following  words  are  found  both  with  and  with¬ 
out  07 : — SisMoai  K.  MB.  =  U.  master  workman,  Arab., 

•  t  *  f 

pp.  49,  313 ;  or  Si  of  course,  p.  161 ;  ^  U.  =  uijj6 

K.  Al.  easy ;  jQj^acfl  or  (as  Turk.)  shameless ;  3^^  U.  K. 

=  iiac  Al.  cautious,  prudent  (Arab.) ;  Sal.  =  U.  K.  clear, 

evident  (Arab.).  So  MSsoi  in  mm  =  Arab,  ;  ^o&l  air,  tune,  f. 

=  Pers.  jljl;  (rare)  help,  f.  =  Turk.  ;  90^  lantern,  f. 

=  Arab. 

§  109.  Insertion  of  o,  and  interchange  of  O  and  m. 

a.  Wail  is  inserted  in  all  verbal  nouns  of  the  second  conjugation 
of  verbs  ^  and  yS  in  U.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.,  §§  42,  44. 

h.  In  the  verbs  of  §  83  (8). 

c.  Also  in  the  following  : — 

Al.  ('i^  Tkli.)  labottr  (=  U.  p.  285). 

.^OOIS  and  K.,  §  108,  c. 


320 


GRAMMAK  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[|109 


A1.  as  Arab.  =  O.S.  only  begotten  (=  U.  Tkh.). 

;i^o  ewe,  f.,  cf.  O.S.  sheep  (Chald.  often  inserts  X). 
cowardly,  §  77  (2). 

Jl&Ouf  tares  =  O.S.  Jiifuf  =  t^il^dvia,  Pers.  word.  The  Wan  is  from 
Arab. 

around,  from  (S)  §  69  (2). 
rision,  in.,  as  O.S.,  from 
loo^  keen-sighted,  §  77  (2). 

}6o\m  maternal  uncle,  p.  231. 

=  O.S.  or  secret. 

U.  an  acquaintance,  §  77  (2). 
as  O.S.  curse,  f.,  from  to  curse. 

as  Arab.^jJ  blame,  m.  from  to  blame, 
jaw,  §  77  (2). 
sickly,  ib. 

Jlbbb^L  U.  paternal  uncle,  ib. 

U.  branch,  §  92. 

Jb^bx^  ib. 

loo]^  =  O.S.,  Al.  JaOI^  ;  O.S.  has  both  Jiiojg  and 
for  thirsty. 

looiJO  cock,  §  77  (2). 

^ooaJEi  U.  =  K.  guard,  m.  Turk. 

valley,  §  77  (2). 

grap>e  (hung  on  a  string  for  winter  use,  from  to 

hang). 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


821 


%  109,  110] 

d.  ISkM  seven,  in  U.  etc.  (not  Ti.)  is  pron.  sho-tva.  So  its 
derivatives,  §§  26,  28. 

e.  For  Rwasa  inserted,  see  §  89  ;  see  also  the  demonstrative  pro¬ 
nouns  of  §  12. 

f.  Some  foreign  words  are  pronounced  either  with  Rwasa  or 

Zlama,  as  or  attack,  f. ;  or  ♦^O^SO^S  tobacco,  f. 

§  110.  The  sounds  ^  are  interchanged  in  some  words. 

a.  f  is  often  like  0Q3  or  ^  in  the  following  words  : 


fOO<^  j)Ool,  m.,  Arab. 

Ti.  do  not  fear,  §  46. 

O.S.  little  (usually  pron.  sura,  in  Ti.  sura  or  shira.  In 
Al.  Z.  zura).  So  the  derivatives  to  grow  small,  or 

to  make  small,  pp.  262,  264. 

ObOk^f  go,  §  46  (often). 

i' 

JSibf  O.S.  Zqapa,  m.  (but  f  is  also  common). 

O.S.  cross,  m.  (sometimes). 

O.S.  to  weave  (sometimes). 

and  to  scratch,  are  parallel  forms  both  in  O.S. 

and  N.S. 

to  litter,  dung,  has  f  in  Tkh.,  p.  263. 

store,  also  Qu-  =  wttSf  to  stare  ?,  p.  258. 

hair,  O.S.  (so  the  K.  Al.  pi. ;  in  U.  pi.  The 

Al.  sing,  is  with  a  f  sound. 

'  { 

dif^bo  or  jiuQ3jSbO  K.  to  uphold. 

«•  #1  * 

U.  or  K.  a  ring  (sometimes),  but  not  in  Al. 


S.  GR. 


41 


322  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§§  110,  111 


b.  ^  has  the  sound  of  f  in  to  reap,  and  harvest, 

usually,  but  not  in  the  Baz  form 
So  U.  a  lizard,  §  16. 

(in  U.,  ^  in  K.)  to  suckle  or  suck  up.  In  the  primitive 
to  suck,  ^  remains. 

to  hurst  forth,  Hebr.  and  (in  Ti. ;  elsewhere 

creeping  thing,  as  O.S.  Cf.  N.S.  m.,  young  of  locust. 

Also  K.  ivory,  mother  of  j)earl,  m.  (p.  81)  =  Turk, 

and  sling,  f  =  Turk. 


c.  JSo  has  the  sound  of  f  in  the  following  words : — 

K.  a  nail,  or  the  pole  star,  m.,  Chald.  [= 

U.  nail\  So  K.  to  nail,  ^  83,  7. 

UQ3A  Z.  to  (sometimes). 

isdjQM  U.  or  K.  to  prove,  but  not  in  proof  or 

id.  (Turk. 

K.  a  mosque,  §  113, 

or  IXJQM  fine  flour,  §  92,  h.  (sometimes). 


d.  •  =  JS  in  2Df  Ti.  =  lyi  Tkh.  to  throw,  cause  to  rebound,  clean 
cotton  (O.S.  2|^  to  throw). 

e.  »  =  \,  in  K.  to  ring  or  clink  as  metals. 

The  latter  also  to  tick  as  a  clock,  §  102. 

/.  f  U.  =  U.  to  tear.  The  former  in  K. 

''  M  <  **  # 

is  to  weep  loud. 

5  111.  wNd  is  often  silent  iu  K.  in  the  word  23u«  one,  f.,  and 


§§  111,  112] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


828 


sometimes  in  J.  For  wm  =  C71  or  07  see  pp.  316,  817 ;  for  \  or  \ 
see  p.  313. 

in  K.  (in  U.  xai^)  =  to  search,  see 

p.  267. 

§112.  Interchange  of  u  and  2.  This  is  very  common  both  in 
O.S.  and  N.S. 

a.  Regularly  in  verbs  ,  A,  i  38,  39,  42. 

h.  Also  in  the  following  words  : — 
ml  U.  =  Ml  K.  Sh.  course. 


f  •• 


.*  •• 


^902  O.S.  length,  m. 

U.  Sal.,  =  O.S.  to  wail,  §  46. 

U.  K.,  O.S.  or  MB.  Sh.  or  2*^  U.  to  swear,  §  46. 

Sxd*  or  3Jd2  as  O.S.  to  hind. 

it  n 

f  ^  ^  ^ 

laoiOdA  U.  a  bond,  m.  =  Al.  2btXdA2  =  laouA)  K.;  O.S.  I^ojqI  or 

t  it  t  I  0  '  90 

U.  K.  or  ;al  mb.,  O.S.  or  lA  U.  to  bake,  S  46. 

ry-  T,  ry  O 

to  he  long,  O.S. 

U.  K.  or  ^^2  MB.  to  sit,  O.S.  (^\  p.  301. 

•  if  *11  ^ 

u.  =  ?42<a»  K.,  O.S. = Ti.  a  balance,  p.  217. 

c.  Insertion  of  Yudh.  In  the  present  of  verbs  of  the  form 
or  §  46.  Also  in  ^^2  m.,  u.^a2  f,  Al.  sometimes  for  ^i2. 

thou  (p.  16);  Al.  or  as  U.  K.  soul,  f  ;  U.  Tkh. 

^  *0  •  4  • 

a  yard  (the  measure),  m.  =  O.S.  (in  Al.  lit.  a7i  arrow,  m.) : 

in  K.  also  is  an  arm  =  U.  m.  =  O.S.,  Al.  and 


324 


GRAMxMAK  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§§  112,  118 


sometimes  in  Ti.  [in  Sh.  ni.,  p.  291] ;  Al.  ring,  p.  321 ; 

m.  arable  land  =  Turk.  ;  or  = 

O.S.  m.  a  native  lamp. 

d.  Omission  of  Yudh.  In  some  Gawar  forms  in  ^  verbs, 
§  42 ;  in  Urmi  verbs  of  the  form  to  believe,  §  83  D  ; 

and  in  U.  a  chimney,  a  vent  of  an  earth  oven  =  K.  = 

Sh.  (feminine  of  an  eye) ;  also  in  a  water  pip)e 

{hubble-bubble)  U.  =  K.  In  K.  }lcSjb  f.  is  an  ordinary 

pipe  for  tobacco  (or  the  Urmi  f.  Also  in  several 

causatives,  §  45 ;  in  U.  feminines  of  the  form  ikyJd,  p.  59  ;  and  so 

^  ^ 

,  fern,  of  U.  K.  or  Al.  young  of  ari  animal  (root 

f  f  / 

p.  385  ?). 


§  113.  is  not  found  in  O.S.  In  N.S.  it  is  much  used  for 
in  Tiari  and  sometimes  elsewhere ;  as  lai  Ti.  =  2"^  U.  butter, 
m. ;  Ti.  =  laia  O.S.  =  Uoxx  U.  =  Al.  Z.  belly,  f. ;  ;ak 

Ti.  =  U.  =  Az.  =  O.S.  tooth,  m.,  and  the  like. 


The  sound  in  N.S.  seems  to  come  in  various  ways : — 
a.  It  represents  ^  in  foreign  words,  as  U.  a  flower,  m., 

Turk,  a  magpie,  m.,  Pers. 


b.  It  corresponds  to  O.S.  5^,  as  in  Tiari  words  above ;  also  in 

to  be  extinguished,  O.S.  m.  a  clap  of  the  hands 

(usually  pi.),  O.S.  the  palm  of  the  hand;  to  climb, 

peril.  O.S.  to  surround  [as  N.S.  (K.)  to  go  round,  and 

to  envelop  in  a  shroud'] ;  or  K.  to  rebuke,  peril .  from 

O.S.  00^2  id. 

it  0 


113] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


325 


c.  ^13  :  as  =  (in  the  manuscripts)  Qndshanis, 

the  village  of  Mar  Shimun,  the  Catholicos. 

d.  =  f  :  =  f sputter,  to  he  angry,  to  he 

alienated,  perhaps  =  Heb.  id. 


13  2  or  ^2a  to  shut,  Heb.  DbK  (so  Chald.). 

^3f  or  to  scratch  =  N.S.,  O.S.  see  p.  313.  Cf.  N.S. 

a  scratch,  p.  232. 

to  split  —  Chald.  (or  O.S.  to  break  ?). 

to  thrust,  prick  =  ^^3  in  which  3  is  pron.  §  105. 

as  above,  p.  258. 

to  search,  pick  the  teeth,  pick  out  with  a  knife,  O.S. 
to  dig,  or  Chald.  pH  id.,  p.  253. 

to  break  in  pieces,  crash  =  to  crush,  pp.  253,  254. 

or  to  cut,  perhaps  =  O.S.  to  cut,  p.  257. 

in  the  sense  to  he  leafy  or  crowded  —  of.  O.S. 

and  N.S.  a  leaf  m.,  pp.  264,  265. 

=  >\4V^  U.  =  -  K.  to  luhisper. 

or  or  ^aaa.t9bO  to  Wi'inkle,  C7'uinple= 

O.S  .,  see  p.  268  and  below. 

K.  to  wring  the  neck,  pluck  =  N.S.,  O.S.  to  cut  off, 

twist,  pluck  (grapes). 

to  pinch  =  N.S.  to  twist,  distoid,  squeeze.  See  above. 

Jlaoatt  or  tendon,  m.,  §  77  (2),  p.  231. 

f  ^a  =  OQ9  :  hruise,  crush. 


326 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§113 


g.  U.  =  K.  Q.  Sh.  =  2^4^^  ^• 

(§  110,  c)  =  Arab.  a  mosque.  The  root  is  to  worship, 

Heb.  Chald.  O.S.  Arab. 

h.  =  wd  (see  also  §  119):  ^3f!ap  U.  in  the  sense  to  glitter  (as 

snow)  =  K.,  see  §  45,  h.  Perhaps  also  see  above,  e. 


=  : 


•jt. 


or  J^2  f.  heel,  Turk. 
fist,  m.,  see  §  92,  6. 

K.  =  jloaXM  U.  =  O.S.  an  account,  reckoning,  m. 

Ala  U.  =  A2a  K.  to  toss  up;  also,  in  K.  to  get  7'eady  for  battle 
[but  K.  =  p.  328]. 

U.  =  jias  Al.  Tkh.  =  Turk.  0^3^  shepherd,  m.  (also 

;L^a  U.  Tkh.  as  O.S.). 

Laa  to  he  smooth,  and  so  a^oa^  smooth,  or  jlatoa,  O.S.  adil2 

^  <g  '  iiv^  ’  ifg’  t  t 

to  smooth. 

to  fade  slightly:  have  a  sore  eye:  collapse,  as  a  football. 
O.S.  to  fade,  O.S.  Js^aXjj  to  he  squeezed  dry.  Of.  also  IS'.S. 

to  fade,  p.  267. 

f  ^  =  f  M  =  f!^  to  piei'ce,  put  out  the  eyes ;  in  K.  to  fade  slightly. 

=  to  blister,  p^dck  up  the  eai's.  The  latter  also  is 

to  give  a  pledge,  food,  §  45,  g. 

Xaai  to  plaister,  O.S.  to  slip,  viscosity. 

jLtiaoao  =  iJbM'SO  to  crack,  snap,  p.  268. 

^a£bo  to  go  had,  as  gum ;  perh.  O.S.  5^^,  see  p.  265. 

to  whisper,  see  above,  e,  and  p.  272. 


%  113,  114] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


327 


0  ^  X 

j.  =  to  find,  is  pronounced  in  U. 

w»oa».X.bO  in  K.,  (also  rarely  1st  Conj.,  but  with  Mim). 

to  twist,  perhaps  O.S.  to  twist,  or  O.S.  id. 

-'ll  4$  *  ^  tt  * 

k  OQ>!Sk4  =  ^xoisok  K.  =  uQ3ibO^  K.  =  =  ^ba^isbO  U.  to  have 

##  rv»  #«  fs»  44  44  44  4 

a  sore  eye,  see  i,  above.  For  see  j,  above. 

l.  or  O.S.  October  or  November, 

m.  (in  pi.  autumn,  N.S.).  ,\ad  to  pluck,  cut  (K.),  perh.  [p.  262] 

=  O.S.  Jlisi  to  cut  or  root  out ;  or  possibly  Heb.  hm  to  extract  (so 
Avcih.),  shake  doiun  (fruit).  In  N.S.  ^6f^  =  to  gnaio,  snatch.  From 
this  root  probably  comes  to  tear  or  worry  as  an  animal,  p.  255. 

For  and  its  variants,  see  §§  26 — 28,  96. 

m.  We  have  and  interchanged  in  K.  =  AL, 

Arab.  =  Tkh.  a  cock,  [in  U.  }6o>.b  lit.  the  crower'\', 

to  take  in  the  hand  (cf.  p.  294),  cf.  O.S.  and  Chald. 

to  curve  (as  the  hand  ?) ;  ia.  to  roll,  see  p.  275.  For 

=  a  see  §  68.  Also  at  the  end  of  foreign  words  ^  and 

^  are  constantly  interchanged,  and  In  Al.  yk  to  laugh, 

sometimes  has  initial  Kap. 

n.  5^  is  silent  in  J.  in  the  affix  thy. 

I  114-  Interchange  of  liquids,  etc. 

a.  yS,  i  are  interchanged  in  the  following  words ; — 

as  O.S.,  but  usually  September,  m.,  p.  7*3. 

liaui  Al.  =  u&Ai  who,  §  13,  O.S. 

(O.S.  '1)  Gk.  a-T0\o9,  pillar,  m. 
m.  horse  doctor  =  Turk. 


828 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


114 


U.  or  U.  =  Q.  =  K.  = 

I  i  t  t  |l#  ’  41  t 

U.  Tkb.  (all  fis)  deserted ^  ownerless. 

II  «  ^ 

luhite  cherry  (p.  58)  =  Turk.  or  j 

k.b^M  to  he  ruined  hy  water,  to  he  sliipiui'ecked,  perh.  =  JAXm  as 
O.S.  to  choke,  droivn.  Also  in  K.  =  to  nick  with  a  hiife,  O.S. 

to  cut. 

0 

^  113,  k. 

<»  If  rJ  f 

5  113,  i. 

'll  rsi  '  II  #si  '  II  t)  ^ 

Ti.  to  play,  perh.  =  O.S.  aXa  to  he  prosperous,  happy. 

•SbSS  =  Sal  =  Smo  =  to  carry,  §§  45,  46. 

II  II  II  II  ^  ' 


to  fall  over,  die,  perh.  from  to  fall,  p.  260. 

K.  to  hahhle,  p.  252. 

II  I  II  I  -L 

also  =  jaaabo  to  groio  =  Ah,  O.S.  p.  258. 

to  roll,  roll  over,  stagger,  perhaps  =  »S>a!S>^bO  from 
to  he  round ;  or  from  to  fall.  So  p.  263. 

laaJdOdO,  also  as  O.S.  ^2a5jaai  Festival  of  the  Twelve  Apostles. 

f  •  *  *  *'  J- 

K.  =  K.  to  blossom,  §  45,  g,  and  p.  312. 

2a\abO  =  baabo  =  to  soil.  The  first  also  to  heat  gently 

’  IN  IN  IN  «7  i7 

=  la^aao  or  w^ti^>aao  p.  273. 

’’  I*  ((V  •*  t<v  *■ 

and  from  a^JO,  pp.  262,  265. 

and  73(^a^  f.  ointment —  Turk. 

0  *  « 

U.,  O.S.  =  K.  to  mumhle,  p.  254. 

to  lame  or  he  lame,  pp.  262,  265. 


#1  I 


§114] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


329 


;«baS  or  &  or  m.  the  pulse  (Turk,  ?). 

m.  felt,  Turk. 

German,  Turk.  or  ou«.oJ  Germany, 
to  leak,  O.S.  to  ooze,  p.  111. 

K.  to  grope,  pp.  262,  268. 
to  crumble,  p.  259. 

U.  =  K.  =  jzraOkdkbO  K.  to  wedge  in,  p.  274. 

to  beseech,  Heb.  p.  255. 

gito.tbO  to  rumble  or  crash,  K.  =  or  to 

thunder.  In  U.  ;a.Qto.ttoO  =  to  be  dmvuhearted,  perh.  for  JS^^baibO, 
O.S.  to  be  musty. 

>yiaO  U.  =  K.  to  be  bitter.  See  5  81  (5). 

for  > >0  to  alter,  §  92,  b. 

X.bO  to  switch,  beat. 

0 

Al.  =  U.  K.  to  consider,  p.  266. 

or  U.  to  pant,  p.  270. 

to  tear,  from  N.S.  to  snatch,  p.  270. 

\<JQ>1XD  m.  descendant,  Arab.  Turk.  p.  274. 

0  00  -*■ 

black  2^epper,  f ,  Tkh.  Sh.  =  O.S.  =  ireirepi  (in  U. 

is62A>2  f,  in  K.  or  in  Tkh.  So 

red  pepper  (=  Sh.  U.  3^4^  ^•)* 

U.  Sh.  =  Sh.  =  ;aoa^3^  Tkh.  = 

Ti.  (=  ^301^  Tkh.)  a  top. 

Sovb  m.  =  p.  231,  rtde,  canon. 

s.  GH.  42 


*0  0 

m  m  0 


00  0 


or  ^ 


830  GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC.  [§  114 

K-  =  K-  noise  [also  K.,  A  A'iS.H 

U.  Sh.  Tkh.  Tkh.]. 

iayi%oh  or  U.  newspaper,  m.  Pers.,  (in  K.  f-)- 

*  *  *1  * 

(^)  or  likaias  or  trousers  tied  at  the  ankle,  m. 

turnip  (p.  54),  Turk.^o^Xw. 

Q.  twelve,  ^  26. 

/  M  *  ii  ^  '  t) 


h.  Liquids  are  interchanged  with  other  letters  : — 

when  =  0.8.  (in  Ti.  ^*2), 

2X3  U.,  also  Jibb  as  O.S.  to  number. 

33^13 ,  also  abdb  to  rub. 

Ti.  Al.  =  L^2f  Tkh.  to  push. 

isbaJk-  U.  Ti.  Sh.  =  isi,*.  K.  service,  f.,  p.  316. 

0  00  0  00 

all,  sometimes  pron.  before  a  noun,  esp.  in  Al.  Z. 

u30u^  MB.  =  uaJ>oa  stove,  §  88,  g. 
f.  a  tvood,  Turk.  aA-o,  Kurd. 

ladder,  O.S.  Arab..^«L«». 

m  0  00  ^00  0  ^ 

earring,  O.S. 

Al.  skidl  =  i^bJb  U.  K.,  p.  289. 

Jl^^aXbO  K.  =  K.  to  brmg  ewes  to  be  milked,  p.  261. 

is  silent  in  some  parts  of  ySfl,  §  46,  and  in  jMaX^2  supper 
(lit.  evening  meal))  sometimes  in  all,  in  Al.  K.  and  in  the  preposi¬ 
tion  with  affixes,  §  32  (4)  etc. ;  in  the  preterite  of  verbs  ending  in 
y^,  D,  p.  85;  and  sometimes  in  that  of  verbs  in  Al. ; 


114—116] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


331 


thus  is  ill  Al.  often  pron.  jme'un  (as  if  ^).  So 

U.  the  left  hand  (also  as  O.S.  ;  in  Al. 


§  115.  ^X:0  falls  in  to-day,  §  67 ;  so  iou  Al.  daily. 

Also  U.  m  the  evenmg,  §  67. 

see  p.  30. 

'py'^  Ti.  =  py'^  O.S.  =  uDAlap  U.  thing. 

poJb  m.  f.  get  up  (imperative).  But  ^abO  often  remains 

in  Al. ;  and  everywhere  in  the  plural  ♦^oboaij. 

Also  as  a  preformative  in  all  second  conjugation  verbs  in  U.  Sal. 
Sup.  J.  Q.  Gaw.  etc.,  and  elsewhere  in  those  beginning  with  Mini,  §  35; 
also  usually  in  Al.  in  the  second  conjugation  infinitive. 


116. 


often  falls,  especially  at  the  end  of  a  word  : — 
a.  In  the  plural  of  the  present  participle  :  =  O.S. 

h.  In  the  past  participle  in  K.  =  O.S. 

he  killed  them  (they  were  killed  by  him). 


c.  In  K.  Al.  often  (in  Ti.  almost  always)  at  the  end  of  the  second 

•  *  ^  ■  t  ^ 

pers.  plural  of  verbs  and  pronouns,  e.g.  o^SmZ  =  you,  pi. 

d.  y^Z  or  ^Z,  O.S.  ^  we. 

Ji^ILaZ  etc.  §  121. 

*  *  _  *  ^ 

wbZ  or  uaZ  (Zlama  with  either  sound)  Al.  or  yyi^Z  =  O.S. 

they,  §§  10,  12. 

•  ^  ^  *  y'  * 

^SaZ  m.  uN&Z  f.  thou,  so  O.S. 

oisa  or  ..oisa  entire,  a  tuhole  number  b  Turk.  0>^- 

I*  N  I 


1  This  word  is  much  used  in  counting ;  where  we  should  say  five  a  Syrian  would 


I  •  ^ 

often  say 


332 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[i  116-118 


2-^  giant,  m.,  so  O.S. ;  not  colloquial  in  N.S. 
drop  =  p.  228. 

city,  so  O.S.  The  reappears  in  the  plural 
U.  =  K.  for  instance. 

^  from.  The  Nun  often  falls  before  a  noun  etc.,  esp.  in  K.  Al. 
a  sieve,  from  to  sift,  pp.  282,  291. 

U.  or  K.  =  O.S.  JKDD  ySO  agam,  p.  316. 

»  **  Jt  m  n  ,t  ■  \ 


UOM  balance,  root  JjQji,  pp.  217,  323. 

K.  =  U.  to  dam,  cf.  N.S.  pajS  a  dam,  p.  274. 

'  f  '  II*  f  u  • 


U.  =  K.  prohibited. 

(O.S.  'i)  a  year.  The  Nun  reappears  in  the  plural  JaLx. 

Nun  is  inserted  in  ;3u^Aaa  m.  cluster  of  grapes,  cf. 
to  pluck. 


or 


§  117.  final  in  Salamas  is  often  like  or  5fc?  ;  as 
save,  pi.  uS  heal  me.  See  §  90. 

before  »ii  or  is  pron.  like  jaUiO,  as  iiii  (^dmbar)  store-room. 


§  118.  which  gives  a  semi-guttural  sound  to  the  accompany¬ 
ing  vowel  in  U.  and  part  of  K.  (especially  Ti.)  has  usually  only  the 
force  of  2  in  Tkh.  Al.  Ash.  Hence  they  make  in  Tkhuma  a  causa¬ 
tive,  {me-qw)  to  take  root,  from  to  dig.  But  in  some 

words  even  in  these  districts  modifies  the  sound,  especially  at 
the  beginning  of  a  word. 

The  break  due  to  ^  [§  4]  is  especially  marked  in  Ti.  Thus 
they  will  say  b'eli  for  uS  2^3  I  wished.  In  most  districts,  even  where 


§§118,  119] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


3:18 


does  often  make  a  break,  this  would  be  heli  or  hili.  So 
act  of  desiring y  which  in  most  districts  cannot  be  distinguished  from 
a  house,  in  Tiari  has  a  marked  break. 

§  119.  Interchange  of  and  ^  {or  in  Baz). 

Ja  =  5^1^  Chald.  (ye)  =  Xp  or  'p  Mand.  (Nold.  §  20,  146). 

^OOa  (or  2^aa  ?)  hair,  m.  peril.  =  O.S.  lis^OJO  id. 

^Soa  Kurdistan,  but  2*a30,d  or  llobaoib  a  Kurd. 
a^  U.  =  K.  to  tie  a  knot,  pp.  262,  265. 
iaisa  U.  =  2a^a  K.  =  O.S.  a  knot,  m. 

jAOfaO  Al.  and  A1.  to  speak  =  iJdapso  U.  K.  to  tell  ? 

U.  or  Abo  K.  or  A^aJitSO  or  ^aabO  or  ^ilbO  K.  to 

I#  II  I  II  /  / 

gather  up,  carry  off,  esp.  as  floods,  p.  268. 

to  justify ;  cf.  Heb.  t3^'p  =  O.S.  truth,  and  N.S. 

upright,  and  Al.  2^  T  same  connexion  as  between 

and  l^oh6s  true;  both  of  which  mean  literally  well 

made,  §  128. 

^roan,  O.S.  p.  255. 

aautabO  Tergawar  =  §  92,  b,  p.  297. 

O.S.  Heb.  XJ^BpD  threshold,  p.  280. 

=  Sal.  =  pta  Al.  sign  of  the  past  tense,  p.  82. 

as  O.S.  =  Baz  flour,  m.  [See  further,  §  113,  /<.] 

s 

K.  to  hug  =  K.  to  wrap,  Chald.  ^^p. 
aM  O.S.  caper  berry  =  Arab.  j^. 


JA  is  silent  in  command,  in  part  of  U.  §  76  (4) ;  §  120,  c. 


884 


GRAMMAU  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[%  120,  121 


I  120.  Interchange  of  Jb  and  or  ma. 

a.  or  WM  in  many  foreign  words ;  ^  and  J  of  Pers.  Turk. 

etc.  often  become  bd  and  ^  or  ^  in  N.S.,  or  if  the  softer  sound 
is  taken  in  the  singular,  the  harder  is  used  in  the  plural,  §  18  (18); 
or  both  forms  are  found  in  N.S.,  as  or  in  arrears,  Arab. 

3  or  garden,  §  82  (13).  So  U.  small  fire¬ 
place  =li\\vk.  f  shield  =  m. 

mallet  =  Taxk.  f.  Aooc?  =  Turk.  ;  iSabOOd  f. 

honih  =  Turk.  dj.A.0^,  etc.  So  also  oil  ^^033  =  Jo/l  ddo^^  § 

b.  Jb—  see  §  100,  g. 


c.  bd  =  ^  in  a  few  words  : — 

^  K..  \  U.  certainly,  §  67,  Arab. 

;aLtibbt^  =  to  thunder,  cf  ^adboJAbO  §  114,  a. 

also  eye  of  a  needle,  p.  804. 

Ti.  to  bite=fJbi  to  peck See  p.  812. 

Jikd^  command,  m.,  in  Al.  has  Jk,  §  119. 

or  U.  Tkh.  =  K.  to  gather  (clothes),  to  crouch, 

p.  297. 

Ti.  to  bleat,  cry  out,  §  46. 

JOxi  Tkh.  =  .^3  p.  297. 


§121.  a  in  Ti.  is  often  pronounced  a,  as  ^^aubo2=  ub^bol  /  said. 
b  falls  in  some  words  : — 

etc.  other,  p.  57. 

Jbdi  to  be  cold,  from  O.S.  jckd,  p.  120  ? 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


335 


Al.  (sometimes)  son,  §  19. 

Al.  daughter,  §  19. 

u.  =  'a  Ti.  =  'a  Al.  Z.  =  ^joaa  O.S.  helly,  f. 

Al.  =  uiis^  U-  K.,  O.S.  lit.  My  Lady  (title  of  St  Mary). 
hier,  f. ;  O.S.  hed. 

horn,  f.  O.S.  'iti. 

some  parts  of ;  see  ^#2  §  46. 

<»  »  ^  », 

almond  (?),  §§  88,  h,  98. 

Al.  =  K.  Al.  =  yiisais  O.S.  two,  f.  §  26. 

•  r  • 

Noldeke  (§  24)  suggests  young  of  an  animal  =  lyt^^  from 

t  * 

to  he  small.  See  p.  324. 

§  122.  js  is  silent  in  a  few  words,  as  again;  in  U.  both 

JS  and  ^  silent,  in  K.  ^  silent,  §  116,  d.  U.  =  K.  = 

Al.  Tkh.  to  hit,  attach,  O.S.  jUAi ;  see  Jsadi  §  77  (2). 
ears  of  corn,  p.  291.  3>A3E  Al.  except  (p.  179),  often  has  S. 

Compare  also  K.  to  plane,  p.  269  (in  U.  liiS  }m!so). 

§  123.  Interchange  of  ^  and 
f-fear,  atve,  Turk. 
iLl  N.S.  O.S.  then  =  elra. 

or  with  pillar,  m.,  §  85,  Arab. 

omitJti,  or  with  appetite,  f.,  p.  818. 
obedience,  f.,  Arab.  C^U®t, 


836 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§128 


(p.  122)  in  Al.  becomes  before 
f.  leg  (of  mutton)  =  Turk. 
see  p.  828. 
see  p.  818. 

rarely  f.  sake,  Arab. 

or  storey,  m.,  Turk.  Arab.  aSIJ?. 
i^o!^  K.  =  ^o6s  bJ.  cannon,  f ,  Turk.  and 
eyelash,  m.  (O.S.  §  18  (5)- 

or  'fts,  the  latter  chiefly  in  U.  (O.S.  to  he  loxt  or 

destroyed,  to  lose  its  sound,  as  a  letter ;  in  Al.  to  throw,  as  Chald. 

Av  and  for  O.S.),  have  ^  usually  in  J.  Al.  Z. 

(O.S.  '^),  usually  pron.  ^  in  U.,  metal  howl,  f.,  §  87,  1. 

K.,  'i(s  U.,  to  stick  intr.,  he  lighted.  In  K.  also  to  wrestle, 
catch  up.  So  also  to  stick,  light,  tr.,  O.S.  to  shut,  join. 

or  to  stick  to ;  so  K.  to  incite,  stick. 

is  also  to  put  the  claws  into,  cope  with,  attack.  Cf.  p.  50. 

U.  K.,  Al.,  to  pe7'secute,  drive  out,  O.S.  [?3^  in  U. 

K.  is  to  cmiTnhle,  as  Arab.]. 

to  he  fat,  fat.  Same  root  as  to  he  onended, 

get  tvell  (O.S.  to  make  well) ;  ‘  fat  ’  =  ‘  well  made,’  cf 

Al.  §  119.  So  or  true. 

is*Ao^  f  tally,  nick-stick,  Pers. 

bfisa,  bXb,  derivatives,  §  119,  and  pp.  262,  265. 

vagabond,  m.,  Pers. 

Al.  =  U.  =  K.  =  Al.  ^0  subdue. 


§  1231 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


337 


or  with  contents,  design,  purpose,  f.,  Arab. 
or  ^  or  is'  to  tickle,  p.  271. 

Ti.  or  ^  U.  at  a  loss,  at  a  standstill.  Arab. 

[Also  lauCTJ  K.  Sb.] 

K.  =  U.  to  whisper,  §  118,  e. 

K.,  with  is  U.,  to  p)rove,  affirm,  §  110,  c. 
f.  dot,  point,  Turk.  aJs»^. 
pSQ,  rarely  with  is,  captain,  ra.,  Arab. 

or  with  U.  Tkh.  maimed,  lame,  Arab.  p.  805. 

true,  and  2isoisiQ>3kJQ>  truth,  often  with 

/  /  *  •  /  /  / 

or  with  grocer,  m.,  O.S.  Arab,  jllaft. 

2^is9^  f-  apron,  Arab.  Turk.  Pers.  <0^. 

a  flea,  usually  with  §  89  (2). 

is6p  scai'ce,  Turk.  ia.a^3. 

0 

^ifsOJb  f.  small  bow,  Turk,  Kurd. 

k*is.b  m.  mide,  Turk.  j-islS. 

0 

f.  condition,  covenant,  Arab. 
m.  mmner,  footman,  Turk. 

U.,  or  with  to  air  clothes  (O.S.  to  spread).  With 

^  also  in  N.S.  to  stretch  oneself,  spread  open, 
temper,  f.,  Arab. 

}bis  VL\.  fryingpan,  Turk.  and 
JUScyM^ois  m.  mallet,  see  p.  334. 

V^oifs  necklace,  m.,  Turk. 

^iso^  parrot,  m.,  Turk. 


S.  GR. 


43 


838 


aRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[§§  123—125 


or  three,  and  cognate  nunaerals,  §  26,  very  often 

have  ^  initial.  In  all  three  of  them,  both  Tans  often 

=  and  so  in  U.  In  Tan  nsnally  remains. 

’^ASiapisj  or  with  avaricious,  Pers. 

U.,  in  K.  with  tin  (in  sheets),  Tnrk. 
infant,  in.,  rarely  with  Arab. 

;»5^  f.  stra'p  (p.  46),  Tnrk.  a.o-^3  or 
wb^  layer,  Tnrk.  JU®. 

§  124.  Interchange  of  and  js. 

In  O.S.  a  is  frequently  corresponds  to  a  Hebrew  e.g. 

O.S.  Chald.  and  N.S.  snow  =  Heb.  So  also  in  N.S.  ^  and  JS 

V  V 

are  sometimes  interchanged.  Thus  N.S.  to  he  spilt  or  upset 

=  N.S.  to  overflow,  he  poured  out,  O.S.  to  pour  out,  cf. 

and  N.S.  both  to  pour  out  or  spill. 

In  Upper  Tiari  ^  very  frequently  has  the  sonnd  of  a.  Thus 

■J  /  ■&  4  ' 

house,  come,  M  I  came  (but  not  the  present 

participle  and  tense),  hen,  hrought,  f.,  are  pro¬ 

nounced  respectively  hesha,  shd,  sheli,  kshesha,  m/dshesha ;  and  so  all 
endings  in  and  many  others.  For  the  aspirate,  see  p.  299. 

In  Zakhu  aspirated  Tan  frequently  becomes  Simkath :  thus 

la*3,  iai,  ysa,  •sjoa,  ueiu2,  uoiA  (las);  but 

AM  etc.  The  same  words  also  are  used  with  ^  in  Z.,  though  less 
frequently.  So  ?  =  f,  as  for  laaiii  vApbti  etc. 

§  125.  ^  in  the  Qudshanis  dialect  often  has  a  sound  between 

07  and  as  dead,  pronounced  mikha  (nearly).  For  this 

sound  cf.  §  107.  So  many  parts  of  the  verb  to  come,  §  46. 


§126] 


CHANGE  OF  CONSONANTS. 


339 


§  126.  frequently  falls,  especially  in  U.  Sal.  Q.  Gaw.: — 

CL  In  plurals  in  U. :  horses,  frequently  pronounced 

■■'5  ^  ,  * 

susdwd-i,  villages,  frequently  mdwd-i,  p.  67. 

h.  In  Sal.,  Gaw.,  J.,  and  Q.  plurals.  The  disappears  (but  see 
p.  40),  and  the  accent  thus  comes  to  be  on  the  last  syllable  remaining. 

side,  and  sides,  are  only  distinguished  by 

0  # 

accent,  dlpna  and  dipnd.  So  oiir  sides. 


c.  In  Sal.  Gaw.  J.  Q.  the  fis  falls  in  singulars  in  as 
a  hat,  for  shade,  for  So  also 

=  village  =  p.  67  ;  ^  house  =2^, 


d.  In  the  same  districts  O  replaces  ^  in  the  abstract  termina- 

tion  ih?-  §  78,  as  ^ootjLpf  7'igJiteo2isness  =  ^isoJcLkPf.  So  even  in 
U.  m.  excess  =  K.  f. 

e.  In  all  districts  in  compound  nouns  of  the  form 

a  hicttei'fly  (sic) ;  and  the  fern.  pres.  part,  in  K.  as  on  p.  34. 

/.  In  aud  words  derived  from  them,  |  16  (2). 

a.  -3  4s.2  Ti.  Al.  I  can  =  ^3  ;  so  often  when  alone  in 

Q.,  and  elsewhere  also  when  =  }a  §  67  ;  so  often  Al.  le. 

^Cs!^2  helow  =  §  67. 

II  0  ^ 

1^2  to  come,  and  its  causative,  many  parts  of,  §§  46,  47. 

3^3  U.  =  bisa  K.,  O.S,  (X)  after. 

0  ■ 

U.  Tkh.  a  7iapkin,  handkerchief,  f.  (usually),  Pers. 

JU^.3  (also  U.  K.  AL). 

Q-  =  2^^^  new,  and  similar  forms,  §  21  (9)  and  p.  313. 

U.  three,  m.,  and  cognate  numerals,  p.  65. 


APPENDIX. 


I.  Vernacular  of  the  Jews  of  Azerbaijan. 

The  Jews  of  North-west  Persia  speak  a  dialect  which  bears  a 
close  resemblance  to  that  of  the  Urmi  Syrians.  The  following  speci¬ 
men,  to  which  a  literal  translation  in  Urmi  Syriac  is  added,  is  from  a 
leaf^'  printed  at  Odessa  by  an  Azerbaijan  Jew  as  an  example  of  a 
proposed  translation  of  the  Old  Testament  into  his  native  tongue. 
It  is  given  exactly  as  written,  except  that  Syriac  letters  are  used 
instead  of  Hebrew  to  shew  more  clearly  the  relation  to  the  vernacular 
Syriac.  The  Jewish  writer  has  not  inserted  Dagesh  forte. 

Psalm  ii. 


Azerbaijan  Jeius. 

^  (6) 

.a^ooa^yyaiJXy  (7) 
yso^yl  :  ^2^  z 


Urmi  Syrians. 

^  Jlio  (6) 

.^My  07303^*3  is;?  (7) 

:  isouA  uAOX3  :  a7X«.bo2 


*  **  .«  » 


1  C)  for  WM. — “  Cf.  O.S.  power.  Heb.  and  Chald.  bs  for 

— 3  The  adjective  comes  before  the  noun,  contrary  to  the  Syriac  usage. — ^  5S  for  . — 

0 

^  The  future  without  S'?  as  in  Tiari. — ®  Apparently  the  final  syllable  has  the  second 
long  Zlama  sound,  the  first  the  short  Zlama  sound  as  U.,  as  against  the  K.  sound, 
which  is  Khwasa. — ^  This  method  of  taking  affixes  is  unlike  O.S.  or  N.S.  The  2  cor¬ 
responds  to  the  first  m  in  ®  The  substantive  verb,  formed  on  the  same  prin- 


*  The  author  is  indebted  for  this  leaf  to  the  Rev.  Dr  Labaree  of  the  American 
Presbyterian  Mission  at  Urmi. 


APP.] 


VERNACULAR  OF  THE  AZERBAIJAN  JEWS. 


341 


(8)  3gib0  ^ 

^oaio^^  u&bo 
3uauM2  yNb.Oc^boo  :  ^o.bo  ^ 

•  .'  V  • 

(9)  ^  2a2 

ea  :  soasb  '* 


Jftslo  “  (10)  *  06w..^kA 


4  17 


aio2  ^1  ^oaoa^^ 


^  aus^o""'  ui2  «.o.ao^.i2 

•,•'••  ,«  X  <  •'  ,• 


''  21 


19 


20 


0100(7^^  ^2  aaooauAA^^  (11) 
^  ^ouAOiOx^o 

•*  \ '  '  •*"  i' 


J*2  :a«»*?2 
J'4^  ^3®  '^*?P  (8) 

isba^bbba  is3  (9)  ^}La2a  2^^^ 

4^.2  ;;V^ 

ifA^iAjso  is3  ^99^?  2^2.t0 
♦^oaoaa  jlalo  (10) 

♦^oaaa^  (11)  ^  ;La2a  ;^a 

<  ■  III 


ciple  as  the  3  sing,  of  N.S.,  and  3  pi.  in  K.  etc.  But  the  pronoun  is  not  in  the  affix 
form  as  we  should  expect.  The  forms  given  in  this  extract  are,  2  s.  m.  ^^2,  3  s.  f. 

^2  ,  3  pi.  0^2. — 9  The  same  metathesis  as  in  N.S.,  see  §  92,  h.  from  a^^k 

or  i^aJi, — 10  For  the  metathesis  cf.  Tkh.  =  2^^  §  46. — ^  For  the  form  of  the 

verb  cf.  K.,  yyi^bClji  Al. — ^  for  as  above.  So  sometimes  in  K. 

»  •  0  *  0  ##  » 

^  takes  the  place  of  ^  as  the  sign  of  the  direct  object. — The  preformative 
omitted  as  in  U.  The  Rwasa  (Kibbuts  under  n  in  the  original)  stands  for  . 

The  O  is  omitted  as  in  N.S. ;  the  ^  as  occasionally  in  N.S. ;  the  as  in  Tiari. — 
11  Turk.  — 10  Construct  state.  For  the  metathesis  cf.  ^Isoi  K.  =  ^llSO  O.S., 
U. — 10  The  writer  represents  the  sound  by  V. — i^  For  this  word  cf.  §  83  (14). — 
10  Heb.  nnP  — 10  The  a  of  aoa  has  a  sound,  as  it  has  a  ^  sound  in  N.S. ,  cf. 
§§  104,  105. — 00  por  the  ending  of  N.S.  — oi  pthakha  for  N.S.  Zqapa. — 


00  The  verb  to  serve,  is  used  in  K.,  Al. — os  xhis  word  seems  to  shew  a  verb 


342 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[APR. 


(12) 

/  <*  »  \  (  » 

d^aoaio  ^oisyiJOM  ^^ao  uo^ 

I  ,'  '  *  \  '  ,«  " 

a.!ajQ>^^  :  2o^ 
ac^  jcom  :  a^is  vi^a 

»  »  ,*  t  f  n  ,1  »  / 

^  Joa:3  aibo 


>  •  «? 


^  ^:sfisa^x^.a  ^q-mO^-5o 
(?)  ;=A?  ikofMis  (12) 

(?) ..  eis^tlS^  lZ,iol  lo^ 

juxa  :(?)  ixao^bo  uCipAac^o 
;.a  07A  ^.ax^a 

iai  ^aioSoaji  asouA  :  uoioaaa 

0  1*  I  * 

^  uAof  Jaofisbb  ocnbiia 


Psalm  iii. 


<  .*  '  .' 


aoa  a^aobof 

■  i<  ■  ■  ,  (  ; 

oaaa^^  ^oS^-ai  a^-silao^^ 

I  it  ti  '  t  «  II  I  I 

;33  c^.to  mooer^  u2  (1) 
0^2^  }aa  :  y^tLlso 
:uiX  a2Qa^^  ou2:3a  (2) 

4  \  m  !  t  ^  ^ 


*  -  -s 


^oio^S^ab^a  p^oaa  crj^abOf 

*  •' 

^o.^M2a  IA!^^  ^a.ia 
Ixis^  ^  (1)  ^  uCTjo&oaa 

2-33  :  ujA.A.a.bo  2-3^  23a 

^  II  ' 

y^c7^i.bo  la  a  (2)  ^  wiT-a^ai^a 

^  t  it  ”  0  i  0  !■ 


or  \^af  ,  cf.  N.S.  U.  Ti.,  Do  not  he  afraid,  see  §  46, 

under  JSk»ac. — The  verb  53Ui*a  to  love,  as  O.S.  is  used  in  K.— The  abstract  ter- 

ji*  ^  ,  •• 

.  ■i 

mination  seems  to  be  7-  =  J«^o.  — 26  This  second  conjugation  form,  unlike  anything 

in  O.S.,  is  common  to  this  language  and  N.S.  The  verb  (1st  Conj.)  is  used  in 

AL,  as  O.S.,  to  trust. — 27  ^  this  language  seems  to  have  no  other  force  than  N  and 

-  1 

to  make  no  break  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  unlike  N.S.  Thus  So  here 

is  changed  into  u.  Cf.  N.S.  verbs  ^  for  ^abO. — 29  The  pronoun  affix 

for  3  s.  m.  is  given  in  the  original  variously  -I—  and  -I—,  unlike  N.S.  Cf.  O.S.  forms 

like  yi970uis-^.^-,tj  thou  (f.)  didst  kill  him;  and  the  Heb.  3  s.  m.  affixes  •liT'— , 


•mV’ 


So  the  ^  is  often  omitted  in  N.S.  in  the  second  present  tense  before 


APP.] 


VERNACULAR  OF  THE  AZERBAIJAN  JEWS. 


343 


91000^  u2  (3)  ^ 
yxjioyjioo  ^y.foai  z 

■  ,<  '  t  •  ,1  »  • 

crbocT^*  A:  (4)  -fr  y^ly 
y^yJbtiS  ^  u\a9/  ubiboo 

II*  ,*  ,1  '*  '  l'  /  !•  <  ,' 

jii  (5)  zoyois^ 

z  J^Jbx 

•  '  '  .*  S*  '  .'  ,'  •  ,' 

(6) 

“c^ys*  4ii  2-^^- 

o\-.a3”  ;Aa2 

970007*  ^  ^soij  (7)  ^  o*&xbaj 

oi-buo  0x5^^  :  yiO^Al 

x-bo-te^^  x-bk-U  ^^ajy 

•  .'  •  .'  ,'  I'l'" 

^  t .'.  47  <-  ‘  ' 

xa^a 


■  /  *  39  “i  ' 

^  axM  ub^o  970097* 


ioT^i  uji^^  isoa  ;L 

^  97^iQ>  :  97.S  jsA  Jibao.^ 

,'  .■  '  ' 

z  v*3tM>^hb  ^o*  isi2  ?*abo  (3) 
^  ^yy  cLiJsoy^o  y*.bo£La 

*  f  *  ^  '  •  * 

v^b-a  ^xb  }a  ^*3^^  (4) 

®'?9V  r^»  ^00.^0 

5^*8?  Ui  (5)  cT^SiXa  : 

TDUb  :  u^*b JE  ^!^0  yA 

0  *  0  00  it  0 

iAO)\fiso^  ^la^a  aaita 
2a^  ^  ^3»  ;iS  (6)  « (?)  a»^ 

;:■>,?  ^,ai?  J4^2 

^ob  (7)  ^  ^a^oxoJb  ^ 

bEXcb  A  wba^  :  wiiA^  2* 

(?)4L^?  ^iSa  Ai 


a  labial. — See  ^Q-b  §  68. — In  U.  the  ^-bO  is  very  rarely  dropped  before  a 
vowel,  §  68. — Cf.  O.S.  lySOm  mercy. — The  verb  to  call,  is  used  in  K.,  not 

•  ^  4  m  ^ 

in  O.S.,  but  so  Hebrew  mV . — So  in  N.S.  they  say  bOO-V.  dXbO  to  ans^oer. — 
Cf.  97S  Z^i,  one  of  the  past  forms  of  Ji^S2  §  46. — 3  for  fiS  of  N.S.  in 

^  I#  ^  ^  •  I# 

O.S.  =  delirium. — Perhaps  =  to  be  strong,  K.  Also  O.S.  to  become  true. — 

?  O.S.  joij,  y=V. — A  for  ^  as  in  Tiari. — for  — ‘^2  ggg  §59^ — 

Apparently  =  y*07*-*33  U.  or  v*33  K.  See  §  50. — So  O.S.  P‘al.  In  N.S.  in 

K.  Cf.  Turk.  jjLj  side.—'^^  See  p.  334.— ‘‘7  Cf. 


43 


this  sense  it  is  2  Conj. — 


344 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[app. 


(8)  ^ 

•  /#  /  /  I  ^  • 

* 

^OiSMSi  4^Jipcn  :  y^l  07000^ 

'  •>  V  **  (»  »  / 


}3Uii3  :  uvbftaca 

007  :  (8)  ^ 

^oisMa  :  o^^ 

*  ojio  :  ,^oA^  soai, 


o.s.  Ji.^5  wiclxcd. — See  §  50. — This  seems  to  be  feminine,  unlike  the  Syriac 
equivalent  UJOie^.  — 50  Perhaps  =  N.S.  or  ^*2  fhh  (f. ). 


11.  Proverbs^ 


1.  ^  Of  his  spittle  he  is  making 

bread  and  hntter.  ‘  He  will  skin  a  flint  to  make  soup.’ 


2.  if 30  }L2  : 67;^  lodoolo 


U.  Pillaii  is  not  for  filling  the  mouth,  hut  oil  and  rice  are  necessary. 
Said  when  a  man  is  not  careful  in  his  eating,  and  does  not  know  the 
pleasures  of  the  table. 


3.  -ojJiAia  voojik  JCOm  Let  him  put  his 

reels  by  themselves.  Said  by  a  man  when  told  that  another  is  angry : 
Never  mind,  I  do  not  care ;  I  have  nothing  to  do  with  him. 


4.  ixSis  H  pitcher  of  water 

breaks  on  the  way  to  the  ivell,  cf.  Eccles.  xii.  6.  ‘A  sailor  dies  on 
the  sea.’ 


The  rope  was  short  and  did  not  reach  you. 


Aliter:  iXD 
Said  when  a 


man  comes  in  too  late  for  a  thing,  or  if  he  does  not  listen  to  the 
beginning  of  a  story  and  then  wishes  to  have  it  repeated.  ‘  A  day 
too  late  for  the  fair.’ 


6. 


23  3^0  : 07X^  I'^oJbL 


The  rat  coidd  not  get  in  at  the  hole,  and  now  he  has 

hung  a  turnip  on  to  its  tail.  Said  when  a  man  after  failing  to  do  a 
thing  tries  to  do  something  more  difficult. 


1  The  explanations  added  here  are  those  given  by  the  Syrians  from  whom  the 
proverbs  were  collected. 


S.  GR. 


44 


346 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[app. 


A  man  among  men_,  and  a  bird 
among  feathers.  A  man  cannot  stand  alone. 

8.  wSx  ?a  ^ 

6y  leg.  A  man  pays  the  penalty  for  his  own  misdeeds. 

9.  fi^aaaa^  (K.  io.»)  bdsJ^  ;  Js^al  ;5k  .^2  If  ymi  do  not 

know  look  at  your  neighbour.  Do  not  be  content  to  remain  ignorant. 

10.  ;u29  ;SA9a  2^0  :  ;^i9  2S  K.  A'o^  from  the 

affairs  of  God  and  not  from  the  ho  uses  of  men.  Do  not  pry. 

11.  MiOioxboSa  z  isi^  ^  «^2  If 

you  do  not  get  warm  at  sunrise  you  will  not  get  warm  when  it  sets. 
If  the  beginning  is  wrong,  the  end  cannot  be  right. 

12.  2^3  uSAbO  K.  That  which  does 

'  t*  ■  #  •  ^  '  •*  *  *  *  ^ 

not  resemble  its  master  is  spurious.  ‘  Like  father,  like  son.’ 

18.  is^  ^  K.  If  you  do  not  see 

Satan  you  need  not  make  the  sign  of  the  cross.  You  would  not  have 
gone  wrong  had  you  not  fallen  among  bad  companions. 

14.  9^  is3  ^isiaso  z  oi^la  obi  K. 

,1  /  '  i«  f  j|  n  ji  • 

If  a  man  will  not  listen  ivith  his  ear  they  will  make  him  listen  at  the 
back  of  his  neck,  i.e.  beat  him. 

15.  :  3wd3bo  y^^o  obi  K. 

The  man  who  marries  without  asking  (advice)  may  lose  his  wife  and 
no  one  will  take  any  notice  of  him.  No  one  should  act  without 
advice. 

16.  ^  isSi^o  y^97  cj^  ^  K.  You 

will  not  know  the  benefit  you  get  from  me  till  you  try  another.  No 
one  knows  when  he  is  well  off. 

17.  obio  23^  ^  z  ^'^2  obi  2^2  ^  «^2  U. 

If  the  last  floes  not  come  we  shall  not  knoiv  the  measure  of  the  first. 
[The  same.] 


PRO  VERBS. 


347 


Al’P.] 

18.  0^  is3  :  pyti  obj  K.  I/a 

man  sleeps  in  the  py'esence  of  his  enemy,  calamities  will  wake  him  up. 

Water  on  the  top  of 

a  gourd,  walnuts  on  the  top  of  a  dome.  One  can  get  nothing  into  a 
fool’s  head. 

20.  .3^,  OJX3  rojiJo  3o\  Jtoai  js*^*  ;Ss  ooi 

K.  ^1  gourd’s  head  is  better  than  a  man  who  will  not  obey  his 
superior.  A  fool  is  better  than  a  disobedient  man. 

21.  Uy^  ispoy^i  :  Isoo^ 

K.  If  an  old  woman  wants  to  fast,  Fridays  and  Wednesdays  are 
plenty.  Said  to  a  man  to  dissuade  him  from  doing  a  thing  he  is 
fond  of :  Do  not  do  it  now,  there  is  plenty  of  time  to  do  it  in. 


22.  ;L  i^y^  :isou  .2  U.  If  you  are  a  thief 

I*  *•  IN 

there  are  plenty  of  nights.  [The  same.] 

23.  ciAbia  lyyh  oA  ^3^  A  z  ^  K.  If 

(a  man)  does  not  tualk  on  his  head  he  will  not  knoiu  the  measure  of  his 
foot.  Great  men  ought  to  consider  their  inferiors. 

24.  0^2  A  ^2o  :  u)!S  y^  Jy!^oyy 

(aliter  Jyhlxy  07iS*13)  The  liars  {madmans)  house  was  burnt  and  no 

one  believed  him.  'He  cried  Wolf  so  often  that  no  one  believed  him 
when  tbe  wolf  came.’ 

25  %^y  2:330^ 

K.  Sour  milk  which  has  been  tried  is  better  than  imtiled  cur'ds.  ‘  A 

bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in  the  bush.’  In  K.  2rkAM  is  sour,  not 

•  / 

sweet,  milk. 

26.  ^^^^300  :  (sic)  yiOf-a  He  takes 

it  in  at  one  ear  and  lets  it  out  at  the  other. 


348 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[app. 


27.  \3crk  is'imif  ^  U.  A  mad  head 

gives  trouble  to  its  foot.  A  foolish  governor  is  the  bane  of  the 
people. 

28.  ^  locn  ^HLaa 

loo]  ^  K.  If  a  house  could  he  built  by  loud  talking,  an 
ass  could  build  two  castles  in  one  day.  '  Much  cry,  little  wool.’ 

29.  oh]  :^6a]y,fJso2  ly-ihu^  }jh 

07S  They  said  to  the  ass,  Shew  your  good  breed¬ 

ing,  and  he  lifted  up  his  tail.  Said  when  a  man  plays  the  fool,  when 
he  ought  to  be  serious. 

30.  2’io^Lb  ^  away 

a  dead  man  from  a  graveyard  t  Said  by  a  man  who  is  turned  out 


of  his  lodging  after  nightfall. 


31.  bfLk  Za  :  o^Sid  J.O  z  ^owl  has 

fallen :  either  (/  heai'd)  the  sound  of  its  {fall)  or  the  echo.  ‘  If  you 
throw  mud  some  is  sure  to  stick.’ 

32.  iMf  :  23^  2^2  The  ass  has  come  and 

stopped  the  singing.  Said  of  an  interruption. 

33.  2^  2^  looijh  ysyh  166'^  A  cock  croivs  in  the  presence 

of  another.  Said  when  an  accusation  is  made  secretly. — Confront 
the  parties. 

34.  070^^  2^2a  2^  hjoi^  Jad  Bo  not  {go)  far  behind, 

{put)  a  stone  on  it.  Restrain  yourself. 

35.  2^^  ua}oo2»3  oh]  U. 

Let  him  who  brings  it  by  night,  bring  it  by  day.  I  do  not  care 
whether  he  does  it  secretly  or  openly. 

36.  yXOMi  2^  o]2  z^LofJo  oh] 

f  V  r.  *  •  •  ^  • 

K.  Let  not  him  luho  brought  it  to  the  house  last  year  b7'ing 

**  ^ 

it  this  year.  Said  of  an  incorrigibly  idle  person. 


APP.] 


PUOVKKJW. 


349 


37.  ^  ^6x  U.  Her'eafter'  we  will  not  light 

the  lamp.  Said  sarcastically  of  an  ugly  bride  or  the  like.  [Cf. 
no.  125.] 

38.  He  is  an  unwashed  spoon.  Said 
of  one  who  interferes. 

39.  lorn  ja  aieuioA  U.  A  slender 

turnip  has  a  thick  root.  ‘  Quality  is  better  than  quantity.’ 

40.  zlo^  Isubol  -^cnoJl^a:  oo^«  ^ 

^\i^o  They  had  not  left  a  man  in  the  house, 

and  he  said,  Take  my  armour  to  the  chief  mans  house.  [Same  as 
no.  6.] 

41.  ^2.b  ^  grows  according  to  its 

7'oot.  ‘  Like  father,  like  son.’ 

42.  JiOb  ;il  ikil  No  man 

calls  his  own  dowi  sour  [dowi  is  a  drink  made  from  curdled  milk, 
water,  and  herbs].  ‘  Every  man  thinks  his  own  chickens  are  the  best.’ 

43.  A  good  name :  a  deserted  village. 
Said  of  a  famous  man  or  place  that  is  poor. 

(^4.  a{^  oal  :  }L,  oiqSjpq^ 

The  floods  have  swept  away  the  mill  and  he  is  asking  for  the  hopper's 
(loose  pieces  of  wood  used  to  bring  the  wheat  down  on  the  mill¬ 
stone).  Said  when  a  man  expects  to  find  something  valuable  in  a 
house  which  has  been  cleared  out  by  robbers.  Cf.  no.  127. 

45.  }oA  T^ols  :  yaL  lUiX 

■  /  *  ,  ,m  H  ^  . 

If  the  master  of  the  house  is  an  accomplice  with  the 

thieves,  they  can  take  the  hull  out  by  the  skylight.  ‘  A  man’s  foes  are 
they  of  his  own  household.’ 

46.  26^  lorn  2^  Ty^jsol 

a\S  ooo)  ui77oi  U.  [in  K.  substitute  &sO 

,  t  i'  r’  ' 


850 


GRAMMAU  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[APR. 


for  The  Mollah  Nasir  Din  said :  If  Nasir 

Din  had  not  been  dead  the  wolves  would  not  have  ca7'ried  off  his  ass. 
If  the  heads  of  the  nation  were  not  asleep,  no  one  could  injure  it. 

If  you  have  not  eaten  the  cooked  wheat,  why  have  ])ou  the  stomach  ache  ? 
If  you  have  nothing  to  do  with  the  matter,  why  do  you  interfere  ? 

48.  JaZp  :  2^2 p  ^£>07.3  At  the  report  about  the  wolf 
the  wolf  is  at  the  door.  '  Talk  of  the  Devil  and  he  is  sure  to  appear.’ 

49.  }iip  The  top  of  the  hat  is  a  hole.  Said 
of  a  man  who  cannot  keep  a  secret. 

50.  Aai  ;^aii  J-A-M  :  2^A.b03  ui9|X!3  A  dead  mail 

thinks  the  living  are  {always)  eatmg  sweetineats.  Said  of  a  man  who 
thinks  a  rich  man’s  lot  altogether  enviable.  Halwa  is  a  sort  of 
‘  Turkish  delight.’ 

51.  3^  ^  ucnoLboo^  zlk^ya  2^  23^  Let  7iot  the 

foot  traveller  mock  at  tlue  nider :  his  day  will  not  pass.  Said  if  a  poor 
man  rails  at  the  rich. 

52.  weeping  for  {the 
foie  of)  the  stone.  Cf.  ‘  Daughters  of  Jerusalem,  etc.’ 

53.  o7%a  l^aOAsM  3k!33ki6S  :o7.V*  2Xa.aa3  The  load  has 

gone  and  he  is  asking  for  the  box.  Same  as  no.  44.  When  a  horse’s 
load  has  fallen  down  it  is  unreasonable  to  expect  the  box  which  was 
placed  on  the  top  of  the  load  to  be  still  in  its  place. 


54.  2pOf  Hafta  for  hafta :  yet  it 


requires  inore  tnunching  [I  hafta  =  4  lbs.  avoirdupois].  The  Urmi 
people  tell  a  story  against  the  mountaineers  that  one  of  them  brought 
down  honey  to  sell  and  exchanged  it  for  carrots,  hafta  for  hafta.  He 
complained  that  the  carrots  were  harder  to  munch  than  the  honey, 
in  the  above  words. 


APP.] 


PROVERBS. 


851 


55.  :  uo^-iw^  ^ 

ojiL  One  of  them  spat  in  his  face,  and  he  said,  It  is 

spring  rain.  Said  if  a  man  pays  no  attention  to  reproof,  but  takes 
it  as  a  matter  of  course. 

56.  IcSai  z  Sadi  (your)  money  and  eat  the 

halwa  (see  no.  50).  ‘  Money  down.’ 

57.  la^L  2^  ^og  barks,  but  the- 

caravan  enters.  Said  when  a  man  pays  no  attention  to  an  insult. 

58.  if  v^oioootMkbM 

i'  *  • 

They  came  to  shoe  the  mule  and  the  frog  ]_mt  out  her  foot 

too  (to  be  shod).  If  one  man  gets  a  present  everyone  else  expects 
one  too. 

59.  loot  23^  lz3  :  2^2  I^Ldia  2^32  A  guest  who 

«  *  f 

comes  of  his  own  accord  (lit.  foot)  is  without  honour. 

60.  2®^  2a  2^? 5!^  2aiflu^  A  dead  donkey  becomes  a  nude. 

Said  when  a  man  exaggerates  his  losses. 

61.  2^9*  2^ 

Do  not  be  sorry,  my  donkey.  The  summer  is  coming  and  I  will  reap 
some  clover.  Said  in  order  to  put  off  an  importunate  beggar. 

62.  ^6l  2L2  : 230^  2^^  ^  ^2 

^  uC^lisobO  We  went  to  get  something  out  of  our  beards, 

but  we  had  to  add  our  moustaches  to  them.  Said  when  a  man  gives 
a  bribe  to  get  an  office,  and  he  not  only  fails  but  is  fleeced  further. 

68.  2a  ^oois^aa  :  2^  2:^^  When  a 

thief  meets  a  thief  he  hides  his  club.  ‘  Turk  fears  Turk.’ 

64.  22ati  oi^  uO>ba^  :  iL^is  y.C7^.»isau<lf  Their  pride  is 

out  of  doors  (lit.  in  the  door),  but  their  pounded  ivheat  is  in  a  gourd: 
i.e.  they  keep  up  appearances,  but  they  are  poor.  Gourds,  dried  and 


352 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[APP. 


hollow,  are  used  by  the  poor  as  jars.  This  is  said  of  a  man  who 
boasts  without  having  anything  to  boast  of. 

65.  ^4^  Under  jyretence  of  chickens  the 

hen  pecks.  Said  of  a  man  who  takes  more  than  his  share  under  some 
pretence. 

66.  XmS  U. 

I  luent  after  the  smell  of  the  chops,  hut  {they  tvere  only)  branding 
donkeys.  Said  when  a  man  is  disappointed. 

67.  2vb3  ^  loot  ^  ^  {If  you  take) 

a  hair  from  every  heard,  you  ivill  make  a  heard.  Said  when  asking 
subscriptions  for  a  charitable  object.  ‘  Every  little  makes  a  mickle.’ 

68.  ^sy^kSpisp  z  A  wolf  when  it 

gets  old  is  the  laughingstock  of  the  dogs.  A  rich  man  who  loves  his 
money  is  thought  nothing  of. 

69.  iiLi  ^oft  earth  drinks  in  water 

easily.  Said  in  praise  of  gentleness  (26^*3^  means  both  soft  and 
gentle). 

70.  07^  2^3  ^3  =6^  The  husband  (lit.  male) 

is  a  labourer,  the  wife  a  mason.  Said  when  a  wife  is  a  good  manager 
though  her  husband’s  earnings  are  small. 

71.  07^  2s^  2f^  ^  ^  2«33^  If  two 

chestnuts  become  one  they  {can)  crack  a  walnut.  ‘  Union  is  strength.’ 

72.  ir{i^  ob^  :uaaaa^  2^3  2^^  ^  U. 

'  •  rJ  IN  x  t  0  ni\  «iv  §'  >  *  ’  J**  \  ■ 

Instead  of  the  buffaloes  ci'ying  out,  the  cai't  cries  out.  Said  if  the 
man  who  inflicts  an  injury  complains  instead  of  the  injured  person. 

73.  ojA  ^  j^oaa  lAaw  ;♦©♦  Give  money 

and  bring  the  mollah  out  of  the  mosque.  Money  can  do  anything. 

74.  :d^  iba  ^o]o6^e^io6l  ^4?  2^00 

CTjaox  2a  While  the  wise  man  is  turning  it  over  in  his  mind  (lit. 


APP.] 


PROVERBS. 


353 


pouring  it  on  his  wisdom)  the  fool  jumps  over  the  hrooh.  ‘  Fools  rush 
in  where  angels  fear  to  tread.’ 

75.  jliio  Water  beneath  straw.  ‘Still  waters  run 
deep.’ 

76.  uO<^  A  gentle  horse 

kicks  hard.  [The  same.] 


77.  uiO<^  yiOObo!^  :  A  little  man  has 

big  dreams,  i.e.  talks  big. 

78.  zajxMl  oaj  ou  :  cj^kk-bol  yJ^ 

?  ^SA2  1^0X3  One  of  them  said  I  am  a  eunuch.  The 

other  asked  how  many  children  he  had.  Said  if  a  man  asks  an  un¬ 
necessary  question. 

79.  ^  u.a7Q33ax  ^  lyA3  If  the  meat  be 

cheap  the  soup  will  be  uneatable.  ‘  Cheap  and  nasty.’ 

80.  903  u01^3  oik.  X.'LfAJ^p  ^2  ;e^ 

y3^  Jjy  Though  a  snake  go  crooked,  yet  he  goes  straight  into  his  oivn 

hole.  However  wicked  a  man  is,  he  ought  not  to  injure  his  own 
family.  ‘  It  is  an  ill  bird  that  fouls  its  own  nest.’ 

81.  jiLui  2L2  :  ^  jiLai  2xm  l.i  M  Sg  B  ^  ?.:a.\.a 

-OlOiS.?  A  dog  steals  a  leg  (of  mutton) from  the  butchers 

shop,  but  he  cuts  off  his  own  leg ;  i.e.  they  will  not  let  him  go  there 
again.  Almost  ‘  A  burnt  child  dreads  the  fire.’ 

82.  07S  lom  Isdu  Jja  z 

*»  /•»  /  "  ^  ^  f  tt  *  f  m  11 

If  a  poor  mans  things  are  stolen  (lit.  go)  the  rich  man  is  warned  (to 
look  out).  Thieves  begin  with  small  things. 

83.  2^  yiOJ^a  His  head  is  not  his  own.  Said 

of  a  man  who  can  refuse  nothing  to  those  who  beg  of  him. 


H.  GR. 


45 


354 


GRAMMAll  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[app. 


84.  yisii  : ..  o.  uJsla  My 

0  t  $  t 

daughter,  I  am  talking  to  you;  my  daughter-in-laiv,  listen.  Said 
when  a  man  speaks  to  another  in  order  that  a  third  person  may  hear. 
It  is  not  the  custom  for  a  man  to  speak  to  his  daughter-in-law,  and 
therefore  when  he  wishes  to  scold  her,  he  scolds  his  own  daughter 
instead. 


85.  islh  Ja  X^^is  The  sly  fox  is 

caught  by  (lit.  knocks  against)  his  oivn  foot.  Said  when  a  guilty  man 
is  convicted  by  his  own  words. 


The  more 

you  scratch  a  cat  the  more  it  will  fly  (lit.  return)  in  your  face.  If 
you  injure  a  man  he  will  injure  you. 


87.  'pip  ;a  007  ^  uOooT^f  ^  loo^ 

uOloSrffa  A  snake  dislikes  mint,  hut  it  grows  at  his  door  (hole).  If 
you  do  not  like  a  thing  it  is  sure  to  be  always  meeting  you. 


Stretch  out  your 

foot  according  to  the  measure  of  your  carpet.  ‘  Cut  your  coat  accord¬ 
ing  to  your  cloth.’ 


89.  lis'i  }iy  If  you  rake  up 

a  dunghill,  it  will  smell.  Said  to  pacify  two  men,  generally  to  dis¬ 
suade  them  from  calling  one  another  names. 


90. 


;a  utnoxi  ;  ^  ^-2  :  }£La  2ii2 


When  a  small  man  enters  a  gateway  he  hoivs  his  head.  Said  if  a  man 
takes  unnecessary  precautions. 


91.  fisou  uO^oauao  lyxXMt  z  isOt^  x^^l  lo^ui  You  have  eaten 

the  halwa  (no.  50)  and  are  riding  the  donkey.  You  have  it  all  your 
own  way. 

92.  OT^  :  07.S  X^^  ^i^o.xa  He  has  got 

dotvn  from  the  horse  and  is  riding  the  ass.  He  has  had  a  fall, 


APP.] 


PROVERBS. 


ODD 


93.  ^^6^  .JsA\3  Your  por¬ 

tion  with  my  portion  (i.e.  we  are  eating  together),  what  are  you 
staring  at  ?  ‘  Share  and  share  alike.’ 

94.  lL.1  :  2*30^  The  ox  can 

.*  *  jt*  I*  '  I*  »  \  ■ 

luorh  with  the  buffalo,  hut  {then)  he  cannot  eat  (he  is  too  tired).  Said 
when  a  poor  man  tries  to  spend  like  a  rich  companion  and  becomes 
bankrupt. 

95.  2^5^^  lS!00uC3  Let  not  the  brave  horse 

<•  /rv  / 

t 

receive  the  whip.  ‘Do  not  beat  a  willing  horse.’ 

96.  2s;3  2^^  z^\h  ^ 

The  horse  and  the  mule  will  fight,  and  betiueen  them  the  ass  will  get 
killed.  Those  who  interfere  between  two  combatants  get  the  worst 
of  it. 

God  looks  at  the  high  mountains  and  gives  {them)  perpetual  snows. 
God  recompenses  each  man  as  is  right.  Said  especially  of  bad  men. 

98.  ^  x)^asc\  He  is  giving  the 

camel  to  drink  out  of  a  walnut  husk  (not  the  shell).  Said  when  a 
man  gives  a  ridiculously  small  gift  to  one  in  need. 

99.  X^  wftSbSi  .?*iOLd  oK  2^2^ 

^  o66i  The  fool  threw  a  stone  down  the  well,  but 

forty  ivise  men  could  not  get  it  out.  Aliter  (Socin)  }a  2^32x 
X^  2-uo(^  Ol^  2-^2.a 

•  i  ..  ^  ■ 


100.  2^  2^3  2^  2ifiSMO  o.^.a 

The  bi'ide  and  bridegroom  are  happy,  but  the  fools  of  the  village  kill 
themselves.  A  fool  gets  no  enjoyment  out  of  life. 

101.  ^  \;>2  2a  2^  The  buffalo  luorks ;  does 

the  buff'alo  eat  (sc.  alone)  ?  A  man  ought  to  share  with  his  family. 


.350 


OllAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[app. 


102.  :  07^1^2  .0^ 

o6ap>  The  fox  could  not  reach  the  hunch  of  grapes,  and  said, 

How  sour  they  were ! 

103.  lool  ^  A  wall  has  ears. 

104  2^0^  The  river  will  not  always 

bring  down  vine  stocks.  ‘  Lay  by  for  a  rainy  day.’ 

105.  u39r  ^^1  z  ui^2  ^  23^  If  Water 

r  •  •  I* 

comes  once  in  a  channel,  one  may  hope  it  will  come  again.  Said  when 
a  man  loses  his  money. 

106.  3.^  4  The  hid  will  not  always 

stay  under  the  basket.  Everyone  may  hope  to  get  rich. 

107.  UQ>.^30^30  The  rope  is 

cut,  and  the  burden  is  scattered.  Said,  e.g.,  when  a  wife  dies :  the 
relationship  made  by  her  marriage  is  weakened  by  her  death. 

108.  :c7Xfcbo2  :^o^3L*.'ao2  2:323  Ih 

said  to  the  wolf.  Go  and  tend  the  sheep;  he 

said.  My  feet  are  bare.  Said  if  a  man  is  bidden  to  do  something  for 
his  own  advantage  and  he  refuses. 

109.  Jsik  233  2am3  0073  33^tlL  loOt  2^  :  233  33m3  007 

He  luho  travels  much  is  luiser  than  he  who  lives  to  a  great  age.  Said 
of  a  traveller. 

110k  -2-^31!^  bb03  &.tj03  2Xmi 

2f3:33  Spit  on  the  ground ;  I  will  come  back  soon  before  it  dries. 

111.  2^23^  2^i^  23  A  sharp  word  cuts  a 

stone.  The  opposite  of  ‘  Hard  words  break  no  bones.’  The  Syrians 
consider  an  insult  worse  than  a  blow. 


^  These  to  no.  128  inclusive  are  from  Socin. 


PROVERBS. 


357 


AI’P.] 

112.  2a  :  2ao3  uXi.4  JaS  2^3  2-^^ 

^  I*  ’/•i»  /  ^  #•' 

remains  long  in  one  place  it  stinks.  '  Familiarity  breeds  con¬ 
tempt  ’  ? 

113.  A  short  iwoverh  is  siveet.  ‘  Short  and 

•  /  •  /  II  »*  -*• 

sweet.’ 

114.  2*103  Imi  :<iOA*23  qS  istiah^ 

•  *»  ji  /  •  f/tf*  II  •  ■  ■ 

;iSfl  6.3  ojiL  f03  However  you  may  hold  it  in  your  hand,  this  woidd 
will  pass  away ;  ceidainly  it  will  go. 

115.  2'i*aL^  2*iti  :  2au.ti3  Doors  locked,  misfortunes 

}  t  ’  '  I* '  *  *  '  I*  ' 

past.  ‘  Ignorance  is  bliss.’ 

116.  ;a  2?^  ^  The  more 

a  hare  sleeps  the  more  she  runs.  Said  by  a  lazy  man  to  excuse  him¬ 
self. 

117.  tLoa)  Whence  did  you  buy  this  luisdom  ? 

Said  ironically  to  a  foolish  person. 

^  2^  lil  :2io^  looT^  2^p^  \^oi 


118. 


JlSOis  lou]  When  God  was  dividing  intellect,  I  ^vas  not  there. 


119.  2301  2^^I^  2301  3m  A  man  is  one  fii’e,  a 

woman  nine.  (Said  of  love.) 


120.  ^3  :^Ol^  ^3  .^2  If  I  forget  you 

I  will  forget  my  right  hand.  Cf  Ps.  cxxxvii.  5. 

121.  23*f30  Ou  o;c\*32  T  have  eaten 

the  sack  and  the  little  hag  I'emains.  Said  by  an  old  man. 

122.  2a033  230ijU  2-^23  A  heavy  stone  remains  in 
its  place.  Qy.,  the  converse  of  ‘  A  rolling  stone  gathers  no  moss  ’  ? 

123.  vA  2*f*«  Ui.*3  23^2  :  A  23.a3.m3  2-^103  Q^A 

0  ^  ^00  m  0  0  0  *  •  0  0  0  ,m  m  ,  0  r- 

Though  I  have  travelled  over  the  tvhole  world,  I  found  my  oiun 
country  the  sweetest.  ‘  There  is  no  place  like  home.’ 


358 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


[app. 


124.  2^  :  wMOft  ucno-MAo-X^  2yJsXM>  We 

have  stripped  the  ass,  his  tail  remains.  We  have  broken  the  neck  of 
the  task. 


125.  jjbaX  K.  The  sun  has  risen.  [Same  as  no.  37.] 

126.  Jlip  IpOtSbA  The  heat  is  burning  the 

bald  mens  heads.  Said  sarcastically  of  a  very  cold  place. 


127.  IJOoJOa  liiao  ^oat  2-^  2-^^^  2^32  U.  A  deserted 

“  J  /V  «(W  •  I  T-  I  'T-  T  ^  7 

•  ♦  •  •  I 

mill  has  two  hoppers  [see  no.  44].  Said  of  a  poor  room  which  yet 
has  some  one  good  thing  in  it. 


128.  uOIOXI^  His  pocket  has  a  hole  in  it.  Said  of 

a  spendthrift. 


129.  o{!^  2o6>dp  cock’s  world  is  the  dung¬ 

hill.  Said  of  a  narrow-minded  person. 


130.  2^  .  2^0  ^  2^2  ^ 

■  •  <  *  «  II  .» » •  ■  •  . 

r  •  ' 

23^.  ;i:ao  ^  6^'^  iieost  2mo  2.L»  .^iaZ  i.iJao 

,•  ,1  It*  \  ■  I  ~  ,1  «  7  "  • 

crpjja  cp  Par  K.  A  man  mai'i'ied  two  wives,  Khana  and 

,>  It*  \r  •  ‘  0  ’ 


Mana.  Khana  was  old  and  Mana  young.  Khana  plucked  the  black 
bail's  out  of  his  beard,  and  Alana  the  white  hairs,  till  his  beard  tuas 
finished.  Said  of  a  man  who  tries  to  please  everybody  and  pleases 
none. 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 


P.  6,  1.  2,  add  (also 

1.  21,  22,  for  make,  read  makes;  for  Jamel,  Jamal, 
p.  7,  1.  7,  after  sounded,  add  unless  final. 

p.  10,  par.  (7),  add  There  are  no  half  vowels  for  Shva ;  thus  is  hm  not  bene. 


The  conjunction  O  and  is  sometimes  pronounced  ive  in  Al. 

1.  23,  for  §  37  6,  read  §  87  b. 

W 

p.  16,  sub  fine,  add  In  writing  O.S.  the  Eastern  Syrians  use  the  following  : — OOJ  or  oaf, 
both  pronounced  how,  used  before  a  relative  and  when  =  ille ;  OOf  or  007, 

•  ft  ^ 

both  pronounced  u,  used  as  a  copula,  the  Of  being  often  omitted,  as 

for  OCJI  ^  or  001  he  is  [food;  007,  pronounced  hn,  =iste.  Also 


0u007 ,  pronounced  huyu,  =.  he  is.  The  feminine  usage  is  similar. 


eternity,  used 


p.  27,  1.  8,  add  A4  m.  f.  night  =  0.  S.  m.  (for 

both  as  abs.  and  constr.  state;  perhaps  also  yXyOS  f.  ease,  relief,  lit.  wide¬ 
ness,  and  7y  suddenly,  Ti.  again,  pp.  165,  166,  for 

see  p.  308.  See  also  Proverb  20  (p.  347). 

p.  31,  1.  9,  after  genders,  add  and  numbers ;  rarely  a  superfluous  Dalath  follows. 

1.  22,  add  Al.  the  ivest ;  so  Al.  the  east. 

1.  24,  for  read 

p.  32,  1.  6,  for  read 

p.  34,  1.  1,  add  also  U. ;  after  head,  add  and  temples. 

1.  6,  for  (a  bird),  read  a  lizard. 

sub  fine,  add  to  masculines  calico,  braid,  -^jiCObO  fist. 


360 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


-4  ' 


pp.  35,  36,  add  iSs  is  sometimes  fern,  in  N.S.  Add  also  country,  m.,  rarely  f. 

N. S.:  m.  O.S.;  metal  hoivl,  f.  N.S.  =  ^  m.  0.  S.;  laOD  kiln,  m. 

O. S.,  f.  N.S. ;  seat,  f.  N.S.  =  O.S.  ilsoioA  m. ;  rain,  f. 

U.K.,  m.  Q.,  O.S. ;  lanii),  is  m.  in  Baz,  f.  in  Q.  The  following  are 

m.  in  Q. 

p.  37,  1.  15,  %  is  m.  and  f.  in  Q. 

1.  18,  is  also  found.  Add  to  fern.  ■A  from  kid. 

p.  38,  add  f.  frog,  tadimle ;  f.  and  or 

all  =  corner ;  the  fern,  of  is  also 

*  $ 

p.  41,  1.  18,  add  also  ;  cf.  p.  334. 

pp.  41,  sqq.,  add  to  regular  plurals  : — 

(1)  m.  braid;  %  m.  calico;  O.S.,  also  ^  K.,  a  herb  found 

*  ^  ^  ^  •• 

in  K.,  Numb.  xi.  5 ;  loins.  ;:so«s  mulberry,  makes  ill  Q. 

(2)  i??  Al.  breast;  Al.  m.  master  (also  3,  see  §  19) ;  U.  Tkh. 

breast ;  3ad  m.  basket  (with  handle),  in  Al. :  elsewhere  1. 

is  rarely  1,  and  in  Al.  3 ;  is  also  1  in  Q.  etc.]  ^-!X3  head, 

"  **  * 

mouth,  in  Al.  take  2.  is  also  1]. 

(2*)  JXiOSkdiJ  m.  (U.  form)  evening,  sometimes;  K.  m.  also  takes  3. 

(3)  f-  watch  of  the  night,  also  1 ;  ^isboS  K.  O.S.,  or  K.  owl  f. ; 

f.  time,  in  Tkh.  Al.  p.  70;  i.  fruit  stone,  also  1;  f. 

kneading  tray;  2303  f.  pearl ;  f.  marsh ;  f.  treasure,  also  1 

^  *  It  * 

[also  f- 1] ;  (a  large  bird) ;  23 OA  f  .fiour  bin;  f.  loooden 

disc  used  in  the  game  of  ‘  touch,’  also  the  holder  of  the  disc ;  f. 

garden  bed;  m.  f.  sledge,  also  1 ;  f,  leather  bag,  also  1; 

2>V5P  m.  f.  rain  ;  [^JJ>  y  f.  grindstone,  also  takes  1] ;  (N.S.  >3, 

O.S.  ^)  heel,  also  1;  2mO^  m.  candle,  in  Ti.,  elsewhere  1;  235m 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 


361 


m.  table  cloth,  table  set  for  meals,  in  Al.,  elsewhere  1;  f.  arch; 

Al.  shij)  {=  U.). 

(4)  Q.  husband  {=  U-)  takes  1] ;  m.  loalnut  tree  (with  1, 

walnut) ;  (p.  44)  in  Q.,  in  the  sense  stacked  hay ;  Al.  Ti.  m. 

arm  ( =  p.  46)  ;  so  Q.  but  with  pi.  as  U. ;  iaoa]p^  m.  K.  simmer 

IKisturage  (the  camp),  also  1;  m.  kinsman,  also  1;  m. 

loedding  feast,  also  1 ;  ISaMm  m.  leaven,  also  1 ;  [25aV  m.  mountain, 
O.S.,  also  takes  1] ;  m.  herb,  also  1;  23X0^  f.  noon,  midday  meal, 

also  1;  m.  •pocket  hole ;  ni.  U.  buffalo  bull,  also  1  (= 

K.);  m.  cotton  plant,  O.S. ;  m.  dough,  also  1;  2Lofi>  f.  edge 

of  a  roof ;  ;do6  nostril,  in  Al.  (also  5) ;  2*^  m.  hamstring ;  395  K.  m. 
porch ;  W  m.  summer,  O.S.,  also  1 ;  f.  nest,  O.S.,  also  3 ;  [«? 

also  takes  4  in  the  sense  of  head] ;  m.  door  post,  in  U. ;  also  1  in  Q. ; 

(p.  46)  in  Q.  makes  5  m.  he  goat,  also  1,  Turk. 

f 

{=  O.S.  J^iS). 

(5)  (or  ^W^)  K.  shadoiv,  =  O.S.  %  m.  curtain,  usually 

1;  wisp  of  hair  (with  1,  head  of  grain)',  [?^ 

2:^  OS  Al.  also  take  1]. 

(8)  Tkh.  f.  present §  45  f.;  [<^30^^  also  takes  6];  -icaLJQj 
^  *  *  * 

f.  grandmother,  in  Al. 

(9)  2^^^^  f*  shrub,  also  sleeve  ;  2^fX^  f.  ewe  lamb  (one  year  old) ; 

y.  0  y,  *0  '0 

f.  Al.  female  companion,  §  17 ;  K.  f .  midioife  ( =  2^  ^  U.) ; 

2^3^^  Al.  f.  round  cake  (  =  2ll33k^  U.) ;  [in  Q.  the  sing,  of  2ls3303 
is  also  and  2^303^]. 

0 

S.  GR.  46 


362 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


p.  42,  1.  2,  for  8  lbs.,  read  4  lbs. 

p.  45,  Uo.  also  f. ;  for  ^  f-  thigh,  read  L  rump  (half)  ;  so  p.  47 ;  for 

read  230^3^  (singular  rare) ;  is  fem. 

p.  46,  in  Q.  is  an  axle;  for  read  (p.  338);  for  230 D, 

2a333  is  used  in  Q.  ;  2^^  is  fem. 

■  x.  )  1  j,,  I 

p.  50,  add  f.  knife,  pi.  (Turk.) ;  for  in  Q.  they  say 

f  * 

(first  Zlama). 

p.  51,  in  Q.  makes  also 

t' 

p.  52,  1.  1,  add  Singular  in  Q.  also  kernel. 

m  K.  i.  fever,  and  f.  end,  have  no  pi. ;  the  latter  borrows  that  of 

2^0a3um2  . 

•  f 

p.  53,  add  In  Q.  K.  the  masculine  forms  f  (also 

looaSsS,  ;s.»,  are  also  used ;  in  Q. 

fpO  3^3  is  a  hazel  nut. 

Ill  4t 

1.  7,  for  >^3^3  read  -5^3A3. 

suh  fine,  add  pea,  pi.  and  6. 

p.  54,  1. 10,  iixiasoois  is  used  in  Q.  for  a  little  girVs  trousers. 

.  ' 

p.  55,  1.  20,  for  (O.S.  u)  read  (O.S.  u3  ). 

p.  56,  par.  (12),  for  Bas,  read  Baz  ;  add  is  also  used. 

p.  58,  par.  (5),  add  high  spirited  (as  a  horse),  VoSa  speckled,  Al. 

lame,  make  fem.  in  2-;-  . 

par.  (7),  in  Al.  makes  fem. 

par.  (8),  add  heathen,  and  23&^  unclean,  do  not  take  the  euphonic  vowel 

in  the  feminine. 

suh  fine,  for  absolute,  read  limited, 
p.  59,  1.  8,  for  2^a4,  read  ;A6A, 


ADDITIONS  AND  CORRECTIONS. 


368 


p.  64,  In  Al.  the  K.  feminines  are  used,  except  for  nine.  But  Sud  is  used  before 

•  /^  _ _  "  *  ^ 

p.  69,  add  Al.  or  Al. 

p.  70,  1.  13,  add  to  the  list  Tkh.  f.  time,  Tkh.  f.  id. 

p.  74,  Sachau  gives  for  Al.  m.,  yiCT^Ai^  f.  (ilei) ;  m.  ♦s^OfiSOOCT)  f. 

p.*  75,  sub  fine,  add  But  in  Al.  is  kmele. 

I 

p.  79,  L  9,  for  read  ^ 

p.  83,  Also  «s^OO]l^  wfiLSk!!^  Al.  (paradigm  form). 

p.  96,  iMl  is  used  alone  for  the  infin.  in  AL,  but  also  . 


p.  99,  3CXIm.  Imperat.  also  inAl.  asO.S. 

p.  100,  Sachau  gives  for  Al.  (/ale  for  3  sing.,  but  gdlitiin  2  pi.,  gdli  3  m.  pL,  gdlei  3  f. 
pi. ;  glele  for  3  sing.  pret. 

p.  104,  In  Al.  verbs  in  first  present  and  pret.  are  often  treated  as  if  ;  as  for 

slimele.  The  pi.  imperat.  is  also  Al. 

p.  112,  1.  1,  2,  for  ^  read  throughout  (cf.  p.  322). 

p.  119,  2-  In  AL,  imperative  also  uSf  , 

«•  #1 

p.  120,  f ^S2 ,  Past  part.  AL 

i 

p.  126,  .  In  AL  pret.  also  ojAjo)..  (first  Zlama) ;  with  fern,  object 

'  I* 

;  the  verbal  noun  jAaoi  is  much  used  by  itself  as  a  noun  of 

action. 

p.  131,  also  used  in  AL  The  verbal  noun  in  AL  is  ^o^lsp. 

,  second  Zlama 


p.  134,  In  AL  for  I  sheiv  her,  we  have  also 

(p.  81,  note). 

p,  137,  So  in  AL  uS  wfiUJJt  is  he  left  me  as  well  as  I  left. 

p.  156,  1.  5,  for  read  •  -^dd  to  Alqosh  adverbs :  (both  3)  to¬ 
gether,  apart,  immediately,  perhaps  (p.  203, 

1. 4),  XLai^  and  2a^  very,  (lekun)  and  OOkOi^  perhaps. 


364 


GRAMMAR  OF  VERNACULAR  SYRIAC. 


uiOIS  thereafter,  early  (p.  290),  uiCXti  IV  hy, 

or  someiohat,  near. 

p.  193,  1.  7,  for  ?7w,  read  tyih. 

iiK  •  '  i  '  ''  - 

p.  201,  1.  16,  for  read  or  (Arab.), 

p.  209,  1.  4,  for  2^0g  read 

1.  12,  for  7'ead  ♦^OaOI. 

^  ^  ^  ^  * 
p.  225,  1.  5,  The  U.  agent  of  ^0  6e  extinguished,  to  die  (p.  103),  is  f  . 

p.  232,  add  ;dofu  green,  Al. 


p.  235,  1.  16,  for  ;b??  read 

p.  249,  subfile,  for  a  calf,  read  an  arm;  for  amulet,  read  armlet, 
p.  250,  1.  22,  for  read 

p.  258, 1.  6,  for  voad  (Arab. 


CAMBRIDGE:  PRINTED  BY  J.  &  C.  F.  CLAY,  AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS. 


Date  Due 


